GBSS Feature Activation Guide ( (V900R013C00 - 13) (PDF) - en

GBSS
V900R013C00
Feature Activation Guide
Issue 13
Date 2012-09-17
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 13 (2012-09-17) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Purpose
This document provides guidelines for enabling or disabling a feature after initial configuration.
Based on the activation, verification, and deactivation of a feature in the feature list, the
guidelines aim to ensure that the feature is available on the network.
This document describes how to activate a license and configure a feature in GBSS.
NOTE
The BSC6900 is used as an example to describe the network controller in this document.
Product Version
The following table lists the product version related to this document.
Product Name Product Version
BSC6900 V900R013C00
BTS3900/BTS3900A/DBS3900 BTS3900V100R013C00 and later versions
BTS3012/BTS3012AE/BTS3012II/
BTS3006C/BTS3002E
BTS3000V200R0013C00 and later versions
BTS3900B/BTS3900E BTS3000V600R0013C00 and later versions
BTS30/BTS312/BTS3012A V302R007 and later versions

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Technical support engineers
l Maintenance engineers
l Field engineers
l Network optimization engineers
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide About This Document
ii
Organization
1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide
This chapter describes the changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide.
2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
GBSSFeatures are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not license-
controlled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Some optional features are
license-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. If the Configuration
Method column for a basic feature in the RAN basic feature list is None, enabling this feature
does not involve any configurations. If the Configuration Method column for an optional feature
in the RAN optional feature list is None, this feature is enabled once it is activated.
3 Activating the GSM License
This describes how to activate the GSM license.
4 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-114401
Multi-band Sharing One BSC.
5 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)
Emergency Call Service (TS12).
6 Configuring IMSI Detach
IMSI Detach.
7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover
HUAWEI I Handover.
8 Configuring Directed Retry
Directed Retry.
9 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment
Assignment and Immediate Assignment.
10 Configuring Call Reestablishment
Call Reestablishment.
11 Configuring TCH Re-assignment
TCH Re-assignment.
12 Configuring Radio Link Management
GBSS
iii
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the link error indication procedure
of the basic feature GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management. Other procedures of the feature do
not need to be configured.
13 Configuring BTS Software Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the integrity check function
introduced in the basic feature MRFD-210402 BTS Software Management. Other functions
involved in the feature do not need to be configured.
14 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic features GBFD-111501
BTS Combined Cabinet and GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group.
15 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP
Connection Inter BSC over IP.
16 Configuring Link aggregation
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210103
Link aggregation.
17 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure
Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure.
18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control
Call-Based Flow Control.
19 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report
Pre-Processing of Measurement Report.
20 Configuring System Information Sending
System Information Sending.
21 Configuring Daylight Saving Time
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature Daylight Saving
Time (DST).
22 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment
SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment.
23 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan
Cell Frequency Scan.
24 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)
GBSS
iv
Signaling Transport Point (STP).
25 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code
14-Digit Signaling Point Code.
26 Configuring Discontinuous Reception (DRX)
Discontinuous Reception (DRX).
27 Configuring BTS Power Management
BTS Power Management.
28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm
Enhanced Power Control Algorithm.
29 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message Filter
DTMF Downlink Message Filter.
30 Configuring High Speed Signaling
High Speed Signaling.
31 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call
Guaranteed Emergency Call.
32 Configuring License Control for Urgency
License Control for Urgency.
33 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface
Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface.
34 Configuring Connection with TMA
Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier).
35 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt
Remote Electrical Tilt.
36 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity
2-Antenna Receive Diversity.
GBSS
v
37 Configuring BTS Clock
BTS Clock.
38 Configuring Voice Fault Detection
Voice Fault Detection.
39 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS)
Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS).
40 Configuring PBT
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115901
Power Boost Technology (PBT).
41 Configuring Transmit Diversity
Transmit Diversity (TD).
42 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity
4-Way Receiver Diversity. The 4-way receive diversity combines 4-way receive signals to
optimize the quality of uplink signals.
43 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity
Dynamic Transmit Diversity.
44 Configuring Dynamic PBT
Dynamic PBT.
45 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage
Enhanced EDGE Coverage.
46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing
Dynamic Power Sharing.
47 Configuring Extended Cell
Extended Cell.
48 Configuring Concentric Cell
Concentric Cell.
49 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell
GBSS
vi
Co-BCCH Cell.
50 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network
Enhanced Dual-Band Network.
51 Configuring Flex MAIO
Flex Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO).
52 Configuring ICC
ICC.
53 Configuring EICC
EICC.
54 Configuring VAMOS
VAMOS.
55 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification
Mute SAIC MS Identification.
56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution
VAMOS Call Drop Solution.
57 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping)
This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-113701 Frequency
Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping).
58 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping
BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping.
59 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping
Antenna Frequency Hopping.
60 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing
BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing.
61 Configuring IBCA
Interference Based Channel Allocation (IBCA).
GBSS
vii
62 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network
Soft-Synchronized Network.
63 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization
This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-510401 BTS GPS
Synchronization.
64 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet
Synchronous Ethernet.
65 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm
HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.
66 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink
Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink.
67 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink
Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink.
68 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown
TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown.
69 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level
TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level.
70 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass
Intelligent Combiner Bypass.
71 Configuring Active Backup Power Control
Active Backup Power Control.
72 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.
73 Configuring PSU Smart Control
PSU Smart Control.
74 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization
GBSS
viii
Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization.
75 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off
Dynamic Cell Power Off.
76 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
TRX Working Voltage Adjustment.
77 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment
This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier
Intelligent Voltage Adjustment.
78 Configuring Flex Abis
Flex Abis.
79 Configuring BTS Local Switch
BTS Local Switch.
80 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization
Abis Transmission Optimization.
81 Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution
Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution.
82 Configuring Flex Ater
Flex Ater.
83 Configuring BSC Local Switch
BSC Local Switch.
84 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission
Ater Compression Transmission.
85 Configuring Ring Topology
Ring Topology.
86 Configuring TRX Cooperation
TRX Cooperation.
GBSS
ix
87 Configuring MSC Pool
MSC Pool.
88 Configuring the SGSN Pool
SGSN Pool.
89 Configuring Abis Bypass
Abis Bypass.
90 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling
Robust Air Interface Signalling.
91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup
Abis Transmission Backup.
92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy
BSC Node Redundancy.
93 Configuring TC Pool
TC Pool. The A interface boards of the BSC that supports the TC Pool feature can use only TDM
transmission. The Ater interface boards can use TDM transmission or IP transmission.
94 Configuring OML Backup
OML Backup. When the operation and maintenance link (OML) backup function of the BTS is
enabled, the BTS automatically switches to anther port to set up an OML if the established OML
is disconnected, thereby reducing service interruption duration.
95 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking
Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking.
96 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)
Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC).
97 Configuring Fast Move Handover
Fast Move Handover.
98 Configuring Chain Cell Handover
Chain Cell Handover.
GBSS
x
99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell
Multi-Site Cell.
100 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface
Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface.
101 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface
Satellite Transmission over A Interface.
102 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface
Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface.
103 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface
Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.
104 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points
Local Multiple Signaling Points.
105 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection
Semi-Permanent Connection.
106 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing
End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.
107 Configuring Active Power Control
Active Power Control.
108 Configuring Ciphering
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-113501
A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm and GBFD-113503 A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm.
109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization
This section describes how to activate, verify, deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113521
A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization.
110 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113301
Enhanced Full Rate (EFR).
111 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)
GBSS
xi
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113401 Half
Rate Speech (HR).
112 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR
Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR.
113 Configuring the Cell Broadcast
Through the cell broadcast service, the mobile operator can broadcast specified short messages
in the cells controlled by one or more BTSs in the mobile network. All the MSs in the cells can
receive the short messages.
114 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)
Automatic Level Control (ALC).
115 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)
Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC).
116 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)
Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR).
117 Configuring TFO
TFO.
118 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)
Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC).
119 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC)
Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).
120 Configuring EVAD
EVAD, namely enhanced voice activity detection.
121 Configuring Voice Quality Index (VQI)
Voice Quality Index (VQI).
122 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report
Enhanced Measurement Report.
123 Configuring BTS power lift for handover
BTS power lift for handover.
GBSS
xii
124 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation
Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation.
125 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing
Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing.
126 Configuring AMR
AMR FR and GBFD-115502 AMR HR.
127 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment
AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.
128 Configuring WB AMR
WB AMR.
129 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)
Streaming QoS(GBR).
130 Configuring QoS ARP&THP
QoS ARP&THP.
131 Configuring PS Active Package Management
PS Active Package Management.
132 Configuring PoC QoS
PoC QoS.
133 Configuring NC2
This section describes how to configure, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
GBFD-116201 Network Control Mode 2 (NC2).
134 Configuring Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)
Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) and GBFD-119801 Packet SI Status(PSI).
135 Configuring GPRS
GPRS.
136 Configuring Network Operation Mode I
GBSS
xiii
Network Operation Mode I.
137 Configuring CS-3/CS-4
CS-3/CS-4.
138 Configuring EGPRS
EGPRS.
139 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access
11-Bit EGPRS Access, GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF and the basic feature
GBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS.
140 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding
Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding.
141 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching
Packet Channel Dispatching.
142 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination
BSS Paging Coordination.
143 Configuring PS Handover
PS Handover.
144 Configuring Early TBF Establishment
Early TBF Establishment.
145 Configuring PS Power Control
PS Power Control.
146 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds
PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds.
147 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User
Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User.
148 Configuring EDA
Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA).
GBSS
xiv
149 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes
MS High Multislot Classes.
150 Configuring DTM
DTM.
151 Configuring Class11 DTM
Class11 DTM.
152 Configuring HMC DTM
HMC DTM.
153 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data
This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature 14.4 kbit/s
Circuit Switched Data.
154 Configuring High Speed Circuit Switched Data
High Speed Circuit Switched Data.
155 Configuring Resource Reservation
Resource Reservation.
156 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP)
Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP).
157 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority
Flow Control Based on Cell Priority.
158 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority
Flow Control Based on User Priority.
159 Configuring PS Service in Priority
PS Service in Priority.
160 Configuring Network Support SAIC
Network Support SAIC.
161 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)
GBSS
xv
NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).
162 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)
BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).
163 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)
Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA).
164 Configuring Lb Interface
Lb Interface.
165 Configuring Abis over IP
Abis over IP.
166 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1
Abis IP over E1/T1.
167 Configuring Abis MUX
Abis MUX.
168 Configuring Abis IPHC
Abis IPHC.
169 Configuring A over IP
A over IP.
170 Configuring A IP over E1/T1
A IP over E1/T1.
171 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission
UDP MUX for A Transmission.
172 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface
TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface.
173 Configuring Gb over IP
Gb over IP.
GBSS
xvi
174 Configuring IP Performance Monitor
IP Performance Monitor.
175 Configuring Ethernet OAM
Ethernet OAM.
176 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning
PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning and GBFD-510701 Compact BTS Automatic
Configuration and Planning.
177 Configuring PICO Synchronization
PICO Synchronization.
178 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planning
PICO Dual-band Auto-planning.
179 Configuring PICO USB Encryption
PICO USB Encryption.
180 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode
PICO Sleeping Mode.
181 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization
PICO Automatic Optimization.
182 Configuring PICO Transceiver Redundancy
PICO Transceiver Redundancy.
183 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning
Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning.
184 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization
Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization.
185 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off
Compact BTS Timing Power Off.
186 Configuring Local User Management
GBSS
xvii
Local User Management.
187 Configuring VGCS and VBS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate Voice Group Call Service (VGCS)
and Voice Broadcast Service (VBS).
188 Configuring GSM-T Relay
GSM-T Relay.
189 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover
HUAWEI II Handover.
190 Configuring Handover Re-establishment
Handover Re-establishment.
191 Configuring BSS Sharing
BSS Sharing.
192 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell
MOCN Shared Cell.
193 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover
IMSI-Based Handover.
194 Configuring Abis Independent Transmission
Abis Independent Transmission.
195 Configuring MSRD
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD 510801
Mobile Station Receive Diversity (MSRD).
196 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink
Dual Carriers in Downlink (DLDC).
197 Configuring the EGPRS2-A
Uplink EGPRS2-A and GBFD-510804 Downlink EGPRS2-A.
198 Configuring Latency Reduction
Latency Reduction.
GBSS
xviii
199 Configuring Access Control Class
Access Control Class (ACC).
200 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability
GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.
201 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover
Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover.
202 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover
GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover.
203 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State
2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State.
204 Configuring the Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
Fast WCDMA Cell Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.
205 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g
Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g.
206 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based
on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA
NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA.
207 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g
GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.
208 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g
GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.
209 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE
Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE.
210 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage
PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage.
211 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality
GBSS
xix
PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality.
212 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load
PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load.
213 Configuring GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover
GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover.
214 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE
eNC2 Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNC2 is short for Network Control Mode 2.
215 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE
eNACC Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNACC is short for External Network Assisted Cell
Change.
216 Configuring SRVCC
Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC).
217 Configuring Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover
Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover.
218 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.
219 Configuring CSFB
CSFB.
220 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability
GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability.
221 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA
Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA.
222 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based
on Iur-g
Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g.
223 Configuring Extended BCCH
GBSS
xx
Extended BCCH.
224 Configuring Multiple CCCHs
Multiple CCCHs.
225 Configuring Layered Paging
Layered Paging.
226 Configuring 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching
2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching.
227 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation
Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation.
228 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211801
Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM).
229 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)
GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM). This feature enables the spectrum
resources to be dynamically shared between the GSM and UMTS networks based on their traffic
load, improving frequency utilization.
230 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS)
IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS).
231 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side
(GBTS)
TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side(GBTS).
232 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS)
Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS).
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
GBSS
xxi
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in
boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
GBSS
xxii
{ x | y | ... }
*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles
are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format Description
Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving
the pointer.
Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and
quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.
GBSS
xxiii
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide.....................................................................1
2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide.....................................................................................7
3 Activating the GSM License......................................................................................................40
4 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC...........................................................................41
5 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)..........................................................................43
6 Configuring IMSI Detach..........................................................................................................45
7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover..........................................................................................47
8 Configuring Directed Retry.......................................................................................................56
9 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment........................................................58
10 Configuring Call Reestablishment........................................................................................60
11 Configuring TCH Re-assignment..........................................................................................64
12 Configuring Radio Link Management..................................................................................66
13 Configuring BTS Software Management.............................................................................68
14 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs.....................................70
15 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP.........................................................................75
16 Configuring Link aggregation................................................................................................78
17 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure......................................81
18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control...................................................................................83
19 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report........................................................85
20 Configuring System Information Sending...........................................................................87
21 Configuring Daylight Saving Time.......................................................................................89
22 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment........................................................................91
23 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan..........................................................................................93
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide Contents
xxiv
24 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP).....................................................................95
25 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code......................................................................100
26 Configuring Discontinuous Reception (DRX)...................................................................102
27 Configuring BTS Power Management................................................................................104
28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm............................................................106
29 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message Filter..................................................................111
30 Configuring High Speed Signaling ....................................................................................113
31 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call..........................................................................116
32 Configuring License Control for Urgency..........................................................................119
33 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface............................................121
34 Configuring Connection with TMA....................................................................................123
35 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt......................................................................................126
36 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity.........................................................................129
37 Configuring BTS Clock..........................................................................................................131
38 Configuring Voice Fault Detection......................................................................................133
39 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS).....................................137
40 Configuring PBT......................................................................................................................139
41 Configuring Transmit Diversity...........................................................................................142
42 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity...............................................................................144
43 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity.........................................................................146
44 Configuring Dynamic PBT....................................................................................................149
45 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage.............................................................................151
46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing.................................................................................154
47 Configuring Extended Cell....................................................................................................157
48 Configuring Concentric Cell.................................................................................................159
49 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell...................................................................................................162
50 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network.....................................................................166
51 Configuring Flex MAIO.........................................................................................................170
52 Configuring ICC......................................................................................................................172
53 Configuring EICC....................................................................................................................174
GBSS
xxv
54 Configuring VAMOS.............................................................................................................176
55 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification.......................................................................186
56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution..........................................................................189
57 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping)...........................193
58 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping..............................................................196
59 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping........................................................................199
60 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing........................................................201
61 Configuring IBCA...................................................................................................................203
62 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network..........................................................................207
63 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization.............................................................................211
64 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet.....................................................................................213
65 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.......................................................215
66 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink........................................220
67 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink..............................................222
68 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown.............................................224
69 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level...........228
70 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass.........................................................................230
71 Configuring Active Backup Power Control.......................................................................232
72 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type............................................235
73 Configuring PSU Smart Control...........................................................................................238
74 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization..............................240
75 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off................................................................................243
76 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment..............................................................246
77 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment..........................................248
78 Configuring Flex Abis............................................................................................................250
79 Configuring BTS Local Switch.............................................................................................258
80 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization.................................................................262
81 Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution.................................................265
82 Configuring Flex Ater.............................................................................................................268
83 Configuring BSC Local Switch.............................................................................................270
GBSS
xxvi
84 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission..................................................................273
85 Configuring Ring Topology..................................................................................................277
86 Configuring TRX Cooperation..............................................................................................280
87 Configuring MSC Pool...........................................................................................................283
88 Configuring the SGSN Pool..................................................................................................286
88.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP)..........................................................................................................287
88.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR).........................................................................................................288
89 Configuring Abis Bypass.......................................................................................................291
90 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling....................................................................296
91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup............................................................................298
91.1 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Ring Topology)..........................................................................299
91.2 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Dual-Logical BTS).....................................................................301
92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy..................................................................................306
93 Configuring TC Pool...............................................................................................................315
93.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM).......................................................................................................316
93.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP).............................................................................................................320
94 Configuring OML Backup.....................................................................................................327
95 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking........................................................330
96 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)......................................................333
97 Configuring Fast Move Handover.......................................................................................335
98 Configuring Chain Cell Handover.......................................................................................337
99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell..................................................................................................339
100 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface...............................................342
101 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface....................................................345
102 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface...............................................348
103 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.................................................350
104 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points.................................................................352
105 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection.......................................................................355
106 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.............................................................358
107 Configuring Active Power Control....................................................................................360
108 Configuring Ciphering.........................................................................................................362
109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization..........................................................364
GBSS
xxvii
110 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR).............................................................................367
111 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)..................................................................................369
112 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR..............................................371
113 Configuring the Cell Broadcast..........................................................................................374
113.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)......................................................................375
113.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast......................................................................................................377
114 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)..................................................................379
115 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)..............................................................382
116 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)..............................................................384
117 Configuring TFO...................................................................................................................386
118 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)....................................................389
119 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).....................................391
120 Configuring EVAD...............................................................................................................393
121 Configuring Voice Quality Index (VQI)...........................................................................395
122 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report..................................................................398
123 Configuring BTS power lift for handover........................................................................400
124 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation........................................................................402
125 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing......................................................405
126 Configuring AMR.................................................................................................................407
127 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.............................410
128 Configuring WB AMR..........................................................................................................413
129 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)....................................................................................415
130 Configuring QoS ARP&THP..............................................................................................418
131 Configuring PS Active Package Management.................................................................421
132 Configuring PoC QoS...........................................................................................................423
133 Configuring NC2...................................................................................................................425
134 Configuring Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)...................................................427
135 Configuring GPRS................................................................................................................430
136 Configuring Network Operation Mode I.........................................................................433
137 Configuring CS-3/CS-4.........................................................................................................435
138 Configuring EGPRS..............................................................................................................437
GBSS
xxviii
139 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access.....................................................................................440
140 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding...................................444
141 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching.......................................................................446
141.1 Configuring EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service.................................................448
141.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred Channel.....................................................................................................449
141.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G Up Scenario...........................................................450
142 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination.............................................................................452
143 Configuring PS Handover...................................................................................................454
144 Configuring Early TBF Establishment..............................................................................458
145 Configuring PS Power Control...........................................................................................460
146 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds...............................462
147 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User........................465
148 Configuring EDA...................................................................................................................467
149 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes..........................................................................470
150 Configuring DTM.................................................................................................................472
151 Configuring Class11 DTM...................................................................................................474
152 Configuring HMC DTM......................................................................................................476
153 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data................................................................478
154 Configuring High Speed Circuit Switched Data............................................................480
155 Configuring Resource Reservation....................................................................................483
156 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP)..............485
157 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority..........................................................488
158 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority.........................................................490
159 Configuring PS Service in Priority....................................................................................492
160 Configuring Network Support SAIC................................................................................494
161 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)....................................................................496
162 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).....................................................................498
163 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)...............................................................500
164 Configuring Lb Interface.....................................................................................................502
165 Configuring Abis over IP.....................................................................................................509
166 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1.........................................................................................512
GBSS
xxix
167 Configuring Abis MUX........................................................................................................515
168 Configuring Abis IPHC........................................................................................................517
169 Configuring A over IP..........................................................................................................520
170 Configuring A IP over E1/T1...............................................................................................523
171 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission...................................................................526
172 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface..........................................528
173 Configuring Gb over IP........................................................................................................532
174 Configuring IP Performance Monitor...............................................................................535
175 Configuring Ethernet OAM................................................................................................537
176 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning..............542
177 Configuring PICO Synchronization..................................................................................545
178 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planning................................................................547
179 Configuring PICO USB Encryption...................................................................................550
180 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode....................................................................................552
181 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization...................................................................554
182 Configuring PICO Transceiver Redundancy...................................................................556
183 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning............................................560
184 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization
..........................................................................................................................................................562
185 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off................................................................565
186 Configuring Local User Management...............................................................................567
187 Configuring VGCS and VBS...............................................................................................569
188 Configuring GSM-T Relay..................................................................................................572
189 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover...................................................................................575
190 Configuring Handover Re-establishment........................................................................584
191 Configuring BSS Sharing....................................................................................................586
192 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell.......................................................................................590
193 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover..................................................................................594
194 Configuring Abis Independent Transmission................................................................597
195 Configuring MSRD...............................................................................................................601
196 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink..........................................................................603
GBSS
xxx
197 Configuring the EGPRS2-A.................................................................................................605
198 Configuring Latency Reduction.........................................................................................607
199 Configuring Access Control Class.....................................................................................609
200 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.................................................................611
201 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover..................................................614
202 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover......................................................616
203 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State..............................................618
204 Configuring the Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call Release............................620
205 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g..........................................622
206 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based
on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA......................................................................................626
207 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g..............................629
208 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g..............................633
209 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE..................................................636
210 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage....................639
211 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality.......................643
212 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load...................647
213 Configuring GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover......................................................650
214 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE.....................................................................653
215 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE.................................................................655
216 Configuring SRVCC.............................................................................................................657
217 Configuring Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover..............................659
218 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.............................................662
219 Configuring CSFB.................................................................................................................664
220 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability...........................................................666
221 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA......................................669
222 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based
on Iur-g...........................................................................................................................................672
223 Configuring Extended BCCH..............................................................................................674
224 Configuring Multiple CCCHs............................................................................................676
225 Configuring Layered Paging...............................................................................................678
GBSS
xxxi
226 Configuring 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching...........................................680
227 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation................................682
228 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM)..........................................687
229 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)............................690
230 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS).................694
230.1 Configuring IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side......................................695
230.2 Configuring IP-Based GSM and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.........................................701
231 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side
(GBTS)............................................................................................................................................706
232 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS)...............................712
232.1 Configuring GSM and UMTS Common Reference Clock........................................................................713
232.2 Configuring GSM and LTE Common Reference Clock............................................................................720
GBSS
xxxii
1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation
Guide
This chapter describes the changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide.
13 (2012-09-17)
This is the thirteenth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 12 (2012-06-25), this issue includes the following new topics:
l 123 Configuring BTS power lift for handover
Compared with issue 12 (2012-06-25), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content Description
193 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover The example is changed.
117 Configuring TFO The background information is changed.
175 Configuring Ethernet OAM The activation procedure is changed.
201 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service
Based Handover
The prerequisite is changed.

Compared with issue 12 (2012-06-25), this issue does not exclude any topics.
12 (2012-06-25)
This is the twelfth commercial release of V900R013C00.
l 28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide
1
Content Description
80 Configuring Abis Transmission
Optimization
The example is changed.
43 Configuring Dynamic Transmit
Diversity
The feature deactivation procedure is added.
The verification procedure is changed.
134 Configuring Network Assisted Cell
Change (NACC)
The descriptions about the operations that
affect services are added.
87 Configuring MSC Pool The activation procedure is changed.
109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow
Optimization
The activation procedure is changed.
The description that this feature and VAMOS
are mutually exclusive is added.
169 Configuring A over IP The dependencies on other features is
changed.
91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup The descriptions about the dual-logical BTS
solution are added.
62 Configuring Soft-Synchronized
Network
The descriptions about IP over E1 are
changed.
61 Configuring IBCA The dependencies on hardware is changed.
91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup The activation procedure is changed.
48 Configuring Concentric Cell The activation procedure is changed.
89 Configuring Abis Bypass The background information is changed.
168 Configuring Abis IPHC The constraints for the sequence of deploying
IPHC on the routers and BTSs are added.
133 Configuring NC2 The dependencies on other features is
changed.
48 Configuring Concentric Cell The verification procedure is changed.
196 Configuring Dual Carriers in
Downlink
The verification procedure is changed.
91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup The dependencies on other features is
changed.
175 Configuring Ethernet OAM The dependencies on hardware is changed.
46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing The dependencies on hardware is changed.
51 Configuring Flex MAIO The dependencies on other features is
changed.
99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell The dependencies on hardware is changed.

GBSS
2
11 (2012-03-30)
This is the eleventh commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 10 (2012-02-27), this issue does not include any new topics.
Content Description
159 Configuring PS Service in Priority The verification procedure is changed.

10 (2012-02-27)
This is the tenth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Content Description
54 Configuring VAMOS The dependencies on other features is
changed.

08 (2012-01-05)
This is the eighth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Content Description
89 Configuring Abis Bypass The description that feature cannot be used
together with the feature GBFD-118611 Abis
IP over E1/T1 is deleted.

07 (2011-11-30)
This is the seventh commercial release of V900R013C00.
GBSS
3
Content Description
227 Configuring Radio Measurement Data
Interface for Navigation
The activation procedure is changed.

06 (2011-10-10)
This is the sixth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Content Description
92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy The context and the activation procedure are
optimized.

05 (2011-08-31)
This is the fifth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Content Description
153 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit
Switched Data
The dependencies on other features is
changed.
87 Configuring MSC Pool The context is updated.
92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy The context and the activation procedure are
optimized.
227 Configuring Radio Measurement Data
Interface for Navigation
The activation procedure is updated. A note
is added when the VNP is the huawei device.

GBSS
4
04 (2011-07-11)
This is the fourth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Content Description
104 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling
Points
The activation procedure is updated.

03 (2011-05-30)
This is the third commercial release of V900R013C00.
l 144 Configuring Early TBF Establishment
Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-25), this issue does not incorporate any changes.
02 (2011-04-25)
This is the second commercial release of V900R013C00.
l 168 Configuring Abis IPHC
Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), this issue does not incorporate any changes.
Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), this issue excludes the following topics.
l Configuring IM Service Channel Compression
01 (2011-03-30)
This is the first commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-21), editorial changes are applied.
Draft B (2011-03-21)
This is the Draft B release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue includes the following new topics:
l Configuring IM Service Channel Compression
Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue does not incorporate any changes.
Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue excludes the following topics.
GBSS
5
l Configuring PS handover between GSM and WCDMA
l Configuring NC2 between GSM and WCDMA
l Configuring PS Handover between GSM and TD-SCDMA
l Configuring NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMA
l Configuring GSM and TD-SCDMA Service Based Handover
l Configuring GSM and TD-SCDMA Load Based Handover
Draft A (2011-01-31)
This is the Draft A release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 06 (2010-11-30) of V900R012C01, this issue includes the following new
topics:
l 18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control
l 46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing
l 54 Configuring VAMOS
l 55 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification
l 56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution
l 95 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking
l 120 Configuring EVAD
l 125 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing
l 147 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User
l 158 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority
l 182 Configuring PICO Transceiver Redundancy
l 194 Configuring Abis Independent Transmission
l Configuring PS handover between GSM and WCDMA
l Configuring NC2 between GSM and WCDMA
l 217 Configuring Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover
l 218 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
l 219 Configuring CSFB
l 223 Configuring Extended BCCH
l Configuring PS Handover between GSM and TD-SCDMA
l Configuring NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMA
l Configuring GSM and TD-SCDMA Service Based Handover
l Configuring GSM and TD-SCDMA Load Based Handover
l 225 Configuring Layered Paging
l 227 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation
l 229 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)
Compared with issue 06 (2010-11-30) of V900R012C01, this issue does not incorporate any
changes.
Compared with issue 06 (2010-11-30) of V900R012C01, this issue does not exclude any topics.
GBSS
6
2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
GBSSFeatures are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not license-
controlled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Some optional features are
license-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. If the Configuration
Method column for a basic feature in the RAN basic feature list is None, enabling this feature
does not involve any configurations. If the Configuration Method column for an optional feature
in the RAN optional feature list is None, this feature is enabled once it is activated.
Table 2-1 lists the GBSS basic features. Table 2-2 lists the GBSS optional features.
Table 2-1 GBSS Basic Feature List
Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method
GBFD-110000 GBSS9.0 System
Improvement
None
Improvement
None
GBFD-110030 3GPP Protocol Compliance None
Improvement
None
GBFD-110101 Frequency Band None
GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One
BSC
4 Configuring Multi-band
Sharing One BSC
GBFD-114901 Support for E-GSM and R-
GSM Frequency Band
None
GBFD-110201 Telephone Service (TS11) None
GBFD-110202 Emergency Call Service
(TS12)
5 Configuring Emergency
Call Service (TS12)
GBFD-110203 Point To Point Short
Message Service (TS21,
TS22)
None
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide
7
GBFD-110204 G3 Fax (TS61, TS62) None
GBFD-110205 Bearer Service None
GBFD-110301 Location Updating None
GBFD-110302 IMSI Detach 6 Configuring IMSI Detach
GBFD-110303 CS Paging None
GBFD-110304 Authentication None
GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover 7 Configuring HUAWEI I
Handover
GBFD-110607 Direct Retry 8 Configuring Directed
Retry
GBFD-110608 SDCCH Handover None
GBFD-110401 Basic Cell Selection None
GBFD-110402 Basic Cell Re-selection None
GBFD-110501 Call Control None
GBFD-110502 Assignment and Immediate
Assignment
9 Configuring Assignment
and Immediate Assignment
GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment 10 Configuring Call
Reestablishment
GBFD-112501 TCH Re-assignment 11 Configuring TCH Re-
assignment
GBFD-111001 TRX Management None
GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management 12 Configuring Radio Link
Management
GBFD-111003 Radio Common Channel
Management
None
GBFD-111004 Radio Dedicated Channel
Management
None
GBFD-111005 Enhanced Channel
Assignment Algorithm
None
MRFD-210301 Configuration Management None
MRFD-210302 Performance Management None
MRFD-210303 Inventory Management None
MRFD-210304 Faulty Management None
MRFD-210305 Security Management None
GBSS
8
MRFD-210309 DBS Topology Maintenance None
MRFD-210310 BTS/NodeB Software USB
Download
None
GBFD-111202 O&M of BTS None
GBFD-111203 O&M of BSC None
GBFD-111207 BTS Test Function None
GBFD-111210 Integrated Network
Management Interface
None
GBFD-116501 Man Machine Language
(MML)
None
GBFD-116402 Maintenance Mode Alarm None
GBFD-113523 NAT Beside OM None
MRFD-210401 BSC/RNC Software
Management
None
MRFD-210402 BTS/NodeB Software
Management
13 Configuring BTS
Software Management
GBFD-111213 Remote Upgrade of the
BSC&BTS Software
None
MRFD-210403 License Management None
GBFD-114601 Multi-Cell Function None
GBFD-111501 BTS Combined Cabinet 14 Configuring Combined
Cabinets and Cabinet
Groups of BTSs
GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group 14 Configuring Combined
Cabinets and Cabinet
Groups of BTSs
GBFD-118801 BSC Cabinet/Subrack
Sharing
None
MRFD-210204 Star Topology None
MRFD-210205 Chain Topology None
MRFD-210206 Tree Topology None
GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over
IP
15 Configuring Connection
Inter BSC over IP
GBFD-111701 Board Switchover None
GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control None
GBSS
9
GBFD-112301 Remote EAC Maintenance None
GBFD-111214 Operation & Maintenance
System One-Key Recovery
None
GBFD-111211 Reporting the Temperature
List of the BTS Equipment
Room
None
MRFD-210101 System Redundancy None
MRFD-210102 Operate System Security
Management
None
MRFD-210103 Link aggregation 16 Configuring Link
aggregation
MRFD-210104 BSC/RNC Resource Sharing None
GBFD-117804 Intelligent Shutdown of TRX
Due to PSU Failure
17 Configuring Intelligent
Shutdown of TRX Due to
PSU Failure
GBFD-511003 Call-Based Flow Control 18 Configuring Call-Based
Flow Control
GBFD-110901 Adjustment of Adaptive
Timing Advance
None
GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement
Report
None
GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of
Measurement Report
19 Configuring Pre-
Processing of Measurement
Report
GBFD-111101 System Information Sending 20 Configuring System
Information Sending
GBFD-111102 Forced System Information
Sending by OMC
None
GBFD-111901 Supporting Three-Digit
MNC
None
GBFD-116101 Support of Daylight Saving
Time
21 Configuring Daylight
Saving Time
GBFD-113001 SDCCH Dynamic
Adjustment
22 Configuring SDCCH
Dynamic Adjustment
GBFD-112401 Cell Frequency Scan 23 Configuring Cell
Frequency Scan
GBFD-111806 STP (Signaling Transport
Point)
24 Configuring Signaling
Transport Point (STP)
GBSS
10
GBFD-111802 14-Digit Signaling Point
Code
25 Configuring 14-Digit
Signaling Point Code
MRFD-210801 Interface Message Tracing None
MRFD-210802 User Signaling Tracing None
GBFD-112203 Cell Tracing None
GBFD-111301 LAPD Multiplexing at Abis
Interface
GBFD-114802 Discontinuous Reception
(DRX)
26 Configuring
Discontinuous Reception
(DRX)
GBFD-111601 BTS Power Management 27 Configuring BTS Power
Management
GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control
Algorithm
28 Configuring Enhanced
Power Control Algorithm
GBFD-113525 DTMF Downlink Message
Filter
29 Configuring DTMF
Downlink Message Filter
GBFD-115201 High Speed Signaling 30 Configuring High Speed
Signaling
GBFD-110521 Guaranteed Emergency Call 31 Configuring
Guaranteed Emergency
Call
GBFD-511001 License Control for Urgency 32 Configuring License
Control for Urgency
GBFD-111801 Ater Interface 4:1
Multiplexing
None
GBFD-119001 Gb Interface Function None
GBFD-111803 A Interface Circuit
Management
None
GBFD-111804 A Interface Protocol Process None
GBFD-111805 A Interface Occupation Rate
Monitoring
None
GBFD-113904 Satellite Transmission over
Pb Interface
33 Configuring the satellite
transmission on the Pb
interface
GBFD-119101 Packet Channel Combination
Type
None
GBFD-119102 Packet System Information None
GBSS
11
GBFD-119103 MS Types None
GBFD-119104 MAC Mode None
GBFD-119105 RLC Mode None
GBFD-119106 Coding Scheme None
GBFD-119107 Networking Control Mode None
GBFD-119108 Network Operation Mode
Support
None
GBFD-119109 QoS(Best Effort) None
GBFD-119110 Access None
GBFD-119111 Assignment None
GBFD-119112 PS Paging None
GBFD-119113 Timing Advance Update None
GBFD-119115 Power Control None
GBFD-119116 Packet Uplink Flow Control None
GBFD-119117 Flow Control on Gb Interface None
MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA
(Tower Mounted Amplifier)
34 Configuring Connection
with TMA
MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt 35 Configuring Remote
Electrical Tilt
MRFD-210604 2-Antenna Receive Diversity 36 Configuring 2-Antenna
Receive Diversity
MRFD-210501 BTS/NodeB Clock 37 Configuring BTS Clock
MRFD-210502 BSC/RNC Clock None
GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis 38 Configuring Voice Fault
Detection
GBFD-119306 Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis None
GBFD-119307 Spectrum Scan None
GBFD-119308 Intermodulation Testing None
MRFD-210701 Documentation None
MRFD-210001 Multi-mode BS Common
CPRI Interface(GBTS)
39 Configuring Multi-
mode BS Common CPRI
Interface (GBTS)
GBSS
12
MRFD-210002 Multi-mode BS RRU/RFU
star-connection with separate
CPRI interface(GBTS)
None

Table 2-2 GBSS Optional Feature List
Feature ID Feature Name License
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-115901 PBT(Power
Boost
Technology)
Multi-
transceivers
supporting PBT
transmit
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 40 Configuring
PBT
GBFD-115902 Transmit
Diversity
Multi-
transceivers
supporting
diversity
transmit
Resource (per
TRX)
Transmit
Diversity
GBFD-115903 4-Way Receiver
Diversity
Multi-
transceivers
supporting 4-
way receive
diversity
Resource (per
TRX)
4-Way
Receiver
Diversity
GBFD-118101 Dynamic
Transmit
Diversity
Dynamic PBT
Resource (per
TRX)
Dynamic
Transmit
Diversity
GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT
(Power Boost
Technology)
Dynamic PBT
Resource (per
TRX)
Dynamic PBT
GBFD-118104 Enhanced
EDGE
Coverage
Enhanced
EDGE
Coverage(per
TRX)
Enhanced
EDGE
Coverage
GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power
Sharing
Dynamic Power
Sharing (per
TRX)
Dynamic
Power Sharing
GBSS
13
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-114001 Extended Cell Extended cell
Resource (per
Cell)
Extended Cell
GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell Concentric Cell
Function (per
TRX)
Concentric
Cell
GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell Co-BCCH Cell
Function (per
TRX)
Co-BCCH Cell
GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-
Band Network
Enhanced Dual-
Band Network
Function (per
TRX)
Enhanced
Dual-Band
Network
GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO Flex MAIO
Function (per
TRX)
Flex MAIO
GBFD-115801 ICC ICC(Inference
Counteract
Combine)
Function (per
TRX)
ICC
GBFD-115821 EICC the EICC
Function (per
TRX)
EICC
GBFD-115830 VAMOS VAMOS (per
TRX)
VAMOS
GBFD-115831 Mute SAIC MS
Identification
Mute SAIC MS
Identification
(per TRX)
Mute SAIC MS
Identification
GBFD-115832 VAMOS Call
Drop Solution
VAMOS Call
Drop Solution
(per TRX)
VAMOS Call
Drop Solution
GBFD-113701 Frequency
Hopping (RF
hopping,
baseband
hopping)
Frequency
Hopping
Function (per
TRX)
Frequency
Hopping (RF
hopping,
baseband
hopping)
GBSS
14
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-113702 BCCH Carrier
Frequency
Hopping
BCCH Carrier
Frequency
Hopping
Function (per
TRX)
BCCH Carrier
Frequency
Hopping
GBFD-113703 Antenna
Frequency
Hopping
Antenna
Frequency
Hopping
Function (per
TRX)
Antenna
Frequency
Hopping
GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense
Frequency
Multiplexing
BCCH Dense
Frequency
Multiplexing
Function (per
TRX)
BCCH Dense
Frequency
Multiplexing
GBFD-117002 IBCA
(Interference
Based Channel
Allocation)
IBCA Function
(per TRX)
IBCA
GBFD-118201 Soft-
Synchronized
Network
Soft
Synchronizatio
n Function (per
TRX)
Soft-
Synchronized
Network
GBFD-510401 BTS GPS
Synchronizatio
n
BTS GPS
Synchronizatio
n Function (per
TRX)
BTS GPS
Synchronizatio
n
GBFD-118606 Clock over IP Clock over IP
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-118620 Clock over IP
support 1588v2
Clock over IP
support 1588V2
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-118202 Synchronous
Ethernet
Synchronous
Ethernet(per
TRX)
Synchronous
Ethernet
GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III
Power Control
Algorithm
Huawei III
Power Control
Algorithm(per
TRX)
HUAWEI III
Power Control
Algorithm
GBSS
15
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-114801 Discontinuous
Transmission
(DTX)-
Downlink
Discontinuous
Transmission
(DTX)
Downlink
Function (per
TRX)
Discontinuous
Transmission
(DTX)-
Downlink
GBFD-114803 Discontinuous
Transmission
(DTX)-Uplink
Discontinuous
Transmission
(DTX) Uplink
Function (per
TRX)
Discontinuous
Transmission
(DTX)-Uplink
GBFD-111602 TRX Power
Amplifier
Intelligent
Shutdown
Dynamic
Shutdown Trx
PA Function
(per TRX)
TRX Power
Amplifier
Intelligent
Shutdown
GBFD-111603 TRX Power
Amplifier
Intelligent
Shutdown on
Timeslot Level
Time slot
Intelligent
Power
Optimization
Function (per
TRX)
TRX Power
Amplifier
Intelligent
Shutdown on
Timeslot Level
GBFD-111604 Intelligent
Combiner
Bypass
Intelligent
Combiner
Bypass
Function (per
TRX)
Intelligent
Combiner
Bypass
GBFD-111605 Active Backup
Power Control
Active Backup
Power Control
Function (per
TRX)
Active Backup
Power Control
GBFD-111606 Power
Optimization
Based on
Channel Type
Power
Optimization
Based on
Channel Type
Function (per
TRX)
Power
Optimization
Based on
Channel Type
GBFD-111608 PSU Smart
Control
PSU Smart
Control
Function (per
TRX)
PSU Smart
Control
GBSS
16
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
BCCH Power
Consumption
Optimization
Enhanced
BCCH Power
Consumption
Optimization
Function (per
TRX)
Enhanced
BCCH Power
Consumption
Optimization
GBFD-111610 Dynamic Cell
Power Off
Dynamic Cell
Power Off
Function (per
TRX)
Dynamic Cell
Power Off
GBFD-111611 TRX Working
Voltage
Adjustment
TRX Working
Voltage
Adjustment
Function(per
TRX)
TRX Working
Voltage
Adjustment
GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier
Intelligent
Voltage
Regulation
Multi-Carrier
Intelligent
Voltage
Function (per
TRX)
Multi-Carrier
Intelligent
Voltage
Adjustment
GBFD-111613 Weather
Adaptive Power
Management
Weather
Adaptive Power
Management
(per TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and
OML on A-bis
Interface
16K LAPD
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-117301 Flex Abis Flex Abis
Resource (per
TRX)
Flex Abis
GBFD-117702 BTS Local
Switch
BTS local
switching
Resource (per
TRX)
BTS Local
Switch
GBFD-118401 Abis
Transmission
Optimization
Transmission
optimization on
the Abis
interface
Resource (per
TRX)
Abis
Transmission
Optimization
GBSS
17
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-112013 Abis
Congestion
Trigger HR
Distribution
Abis
Congestion
Trigger HR
Distribution
Function (per
TRX)
Abis
Congestion
Trigger HR
Distribution
GBFD-116901 Flex Ater Flex Ater
Function (per
TRX)
Flex Ater
GBFD-117701 BSC Local
Switch
BSC Local
Switching
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC Local
Switch
GBFD-116902 Ater
Compression
Transmission
Ater
Compression
Transmission
Function (per
TRX)
Ater
Compression
Transmission
GBFD-115702 TrFO TrFO Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-117801 Ring Topology Ring topology
Function (per
TRX)
Ring Topology
GBFD-113801 TRX
Cooperation
TRX
Cooperation
Function (per
TRX)
TRX
Cooperation
GBFD-117401 MSC Pool MSC POOL
Function (per
TRX)
MSC Pool
GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool Gb Flex
Function (per
64Kbps)
the SGSN Pool
GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass Abis Bypass
Function (per
TRX)
Abis Bypass
GBFD-113721 Robust Air
Interface
Signalling
Robust Air
Interface
Signalling
Function (per
TRX)
Robust Air
Interface
Signalling
GBSS
18
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-117803 Abis
Transmission
Backup
Abis
Transmission
Backup
Function (per
TRX)
Abis
Transmission
Backup
GBFD-113725 BSC Node
Redundancy
BSC Node
Redundancy
Function (per
TRX)
BSC Node
Redundancy
GBFD-113726 TC Pool TC Pool
Function (per
TRX)
TC Pool
GBFD-113728 OML Backup OML Backup
Function (per
TRX)
OML Backup
GBFD-113729 Adaptive
Transmission
Link Blocking
Adaptive
Transmission
Link Blocking
(per TRX)
Adaptive
Transmission
Link Blocking
GBFD-510101 Automatic
Frequency
Correction
(AFC)
AFC Function
(per TRX)
Automatic
Frequency
Correction
(AFC)
GBFD-510102 Fast Move
Handover
High Speed
PBGT Switch
Fast Move
Handover
GBFD-510103 Chain Cell
Handover
Chain Cell
Handover
Function (per
TRX)
Chain Cell
Handover
GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell Multi-site Cell
Function (per
TRX)
Multi-Site Cell
GBFD-113901 Satellite
Transmission
over Abis
Interface
Site Supporting
Satellite
Transmission
Resource (per
Site)
BSC6900 100
Configuring
Satellite
Transmission
over Abis
Interface
GBSS
19
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
Transmission
over A Interface
Satellite
Transmission
over A Interface
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 101
Configuring
Satellite
Transmission
over A
Interface
Transmission
over Ater
Interface
Satellite
Transmission
over Ater
Interface
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 102
Configuring
Satellite
Transmission
over Ater
Interface
Transmission
over Gb
Interface
Satellite
Transmission
over Gb
Interface
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 103
Configuring
Satellite
Transmission
over Gb
Interface
GBFD-115301 Local Multiple
Signaling Points
Local Multiple
Signaling Points
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 104
Configuring
Local Multiple
Signaling
Points
GBFD-114701 Semi-
Permanent
Connection
Semipermanent
Connection
Resource (per
LINK)
BSC6900 105
Configuring
Semi-
Permanent
Connection
GBFD-116401 End-to-End MS
Signaling
Tracing
End-to-End MS
Signaling
Tracing
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 106
Configuring
End-to-End
MS Signaling
Tracing
GBFD-117602 Active Power
Control
Active Power
Control
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 107
Configuring
Active Power
Control
GBFD-113501 A5/1 and A5/2
Ciphering
Algorithm
Encryption
(A5/1,A5/2)
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 108
Configuring
Ciphering
GBSS
20
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-113503 A5/3 Ciphering
Algorithm
Encryption
(A5/3) Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 108
Configuring
Ciphering
GBFD-113521 A5/1
Encryption
Flow
Optimization
Enhanced
Encryption
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 109
Configuring
A5/1
Encryption
Flow
Optimization
GBFD-113522 Encrypted
Network
Management
Encrypted
Network
Management
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-113301 Enhanced Full
Rate
Enhanced Full
Rate Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 110
Configuring
Enhanced Full
Rate (EFR)
GBFD-113401 Half Rate
Speech
Half Rate
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 111
Configuring
Half Rate
Speech (HR)
GBFD-113402 Dynamic
Adjustment
Between FR and
HR
Dynamic
Adjustment
Between FR and
HR Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 112
Configuring
Dynamic
Adjustment
Between FR
and HR
GBFD-113601 Short Message
Service Cell
Broadcast
(TS23)
Short Message
Service Cell
Broadcast
(TS23)
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 113.1
Configuring
Short Message
Service Cell
Broadcast
(TS23)
GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell
Broadcast
Simplified Cell
Broadcast
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 113.2
Configuring
Simplified Cell
Broadcast
Level Control
(ALC)
Automatic
Level Control
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 114
Configuring
Automatic
Level Control
(ALC)
GBSS
21
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo
Cancellation
(AEC)
Acoustic Echo
Cancellation
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 115
Configuring
Acoustic Echo
Cancellation
(AEC)
Noise Restraint
(ANR)
Automatic
Noise Restraint
(ANR) Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 116
Configuring
Automatic
Noise Restraint
(ANR)
GBFD-115701 TFO TFO Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 117
Configuring
TFO
Noise
Compensation
(ANC)
Automatic
Noise
Compensation
(ANC) Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 118
Configuring
Automatic
Noise
Compensation
(ANC)
GBFD-115704 Enhancement
Packet Loss
Concealment
(EPLC)
Enhancement
Packet Loss
Concealment
(EPLC)
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 119
Configuring
Enhancement
Packet Loss
Concealment
(EPLC)
GBFD-115711 EVAD EVAD (per
TRX)
BSC6900 120
Configuring
EVAD
GBFD-116801 Voice Quality
Index (VQI)
Voice Quality
Index (VQI)
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 121
Configuring
Voice Quality
Index (VQI)
Measurement
Report(EMR)
Enhanced
Measurement
Report(EMR)
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 122
Configuring
Enhanced
Measurement
Report
GBFD-117101 BTS power lift
for handover
BTS power lift
for handover
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 123
Configuring
BTS power lift
for handover
GBSS
22
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-115522 Dynamic HR/
FR Adaptation
Dynamic HR/
FR Adaptation
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 124
Configuring
Dynamic HR/
FR Adaptation
GBFD-115708 Um Interface
Speech Frame
Repairing
Um Interface
Speech Frame
Repairing (per
TRX)
BSC6900 125
Configuring
Um Interface
Speech Frame
Repairing
GBFD-115501 AMR FR AMR Resource
(per TRX)
BSC6900 126
Configuring
AMR
GBFD-115502 AMR HR AMR HR
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 126
Configuring
AMR
GBFD-115503 AMR Power
Control
AMR Power
Control
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 126
Configuring
AMR
GBFD-115504 AMR FR/HR
Dynamic
Adjustment
AMR FR/HR
Dynamic
Adjustment
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 189
Configuring
HUAWEI II
Handover
GBFD-115505 AMR Radio
Link Timer
AMR Wireless
Link Timer
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 126
Configuring
AMR
GBFD-115506 AMR Coding
Rate Threshold
Adaptive
Adjustment
AMR Coding
Rate Threshold
Adaptive
Adjustment
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 127
Configuring
AMR Coding
Rate
Threshold
Adaptive
Adjustment
GBFD-115507 WB AMR WB AMR
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 128
Configuring
WB AMR
GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS
(GBR)
GBR Qos
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 129
Configuring
Streaming QoS
(GBR)
GBSS
23
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-119902 QoS
ARP&THP
QoS Function
(per 64Kbps)
BSC6900 130
Configuring
QoS
ARP&THP
GBFD-119904 PS Active
Package
Management
PS Active
Queue
Management
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 131
Configuring
PS Active
Package
Management
GBFD-119905 PoC QoS PoC QoS
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 132
Configuring
PoC QoS
GBFD-119906 Conversational
QoS
Conversational
Qos Function
(per 64Kbps)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-116201 Network-
Controlled Cell
Reselection
(NC2)
NC2 Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 133
Configuring
NC2
GBFD-116301 Network
Assisted Cell
Change
(NACC)
NACC Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 134
Configuring
Network
Assisted Cell
Change
(NACC)
GBFD-119801 Packet SI Status
(PSI)
Packet SI Status
(PSI) Function
(per 64Kbps)
BSC6900 134
Configuring
Network
Assisted Cell
Change
(NACC)
GBFD-114101 GPRS GPRS Software
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 135
Configuring
GPRS
GBFD-510001 Network
Operation Mode
I
Network
operation mode
I Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 136
Configuring
Network
Operation
Mode I
GBFD-118901 CS-3/CS-4 CS3/CS4
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 137
Configuring
CS-3/CS-4
GBSS
24
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-114201 EGPRS EDGE
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 138
Configuring
EGPRS
GBFD-113101 PDCH Dynamic
Adjustment
Dynamic
Allocation of
PDCH Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-510002 Gb Over FR GB Over FR
Resource (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-119201 11-Bit EGPRS
Access
11-Bit EGPRS
Access
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 139
Configuring
11-Bit EGPRS
Access
GBFD-119202 Packet
Assignment
Taken Over by
the BTS
Packet
Assignment
Taken Over by
the BTS
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 139
Configuring
11-Bit EGPRS
Access
GBFD-119203 Extended
Uplink TBF
Extended
Uplink TBF
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 139
Configuring
11-Bit EGPRS
Access
GBFD-119204 Dynamically
Adjusting the
Uplink MCS
Coding
Dynamically
Adjusting the
Uplink MCS
Coding
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 140
Configuring
Dynamically
Adjusting the
Uplink MCS
Coding
GBFD-119205 Dynamically
Adjusting the
RRBP
Frequency
Dynamically
Adjusting the
RRBP
Frequency
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-119302 Packet Channel
Dispatching
Packet Channel
Dispatching
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 141
Configuring
Packet
Channel
Dispatching
GBSS
25
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-119303 Load Sharing Load Sharing
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-119501 Adaptive
Adjustment of
Uplink and
Downlink
Channels
Adaptive
Adjustment of
Uplink and
Downlink
Channels
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-119305 BSS Paging
Coordination
BSS Paging
Coordination
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 142
Configuring
BSS Paging
Coordination
GBFD-119502 PS Handover PS Handover
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 143
Configuring
PS Handover
GBFD-119503 Early TBF
Establishment
Early TBF
Establishment
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 144
Configuring
Early TBF
Establishment
GBFD-119504 PS Power
Control
PS Power
Control (Per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 145
Configuring
PS Power
Control
GBFD-119505 PDCH Dynamic
Adjustment
with Two
Thresholds
Two Thresholds
PDCH Dynamic
Adjustment (Per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 146
Configuring
PDCH
Dynamic
Adjustment
with Two
Thresholds
GBFD-119506 GPRS/EGPRS
Time slot
multiplexing
priority
GPRS/EGPRS
Time slot
multiplexing
priority (per
TRX)
BSC6900 147
Configuring
Timeslot
Multiplexing
Priority for
GPRS/EGPRS
User
Dynamic
Allocation
(EDA)
EDA Function
(per 64Kbps)
BSC6900 148
Configuring
EDA
GBSS
26
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-119402 MS High
Multislot
Classes
Terminal
multislot classes
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 149
Configuring
MS High
Multislot
Classes
GBFD-114151 DTM DTM Function
(per 64Kbps)
BSC6900 150
Configuring
DTM
GBFD-119403 Class11 DTM DTM High
Multi-slot class
11 Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 151
Configuring
Class11 DTM
GBFD-119404 HMC DTM HMC DTM
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 152
Configuring
HMC DTM
GBFD-119405 14.4kbit/s
Circuit
Switched Data
14.4Kbps
Circuit
Switched Data
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 153
Configuring
14.4 kbit/s
Circuit
Switched Data
GBFD-119406 High Speed
Circuit
Switched Data
High Speed
Circuit
Switched Data
(per TRX)
BSC6900 154
Configuring
High Speed
Circuit
Switched Data
GBFD-116001 Resource
Reservation
Channel
Reserved
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 155
Configuring
Resource
Reservation
GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi
Level
Precedence and
Preemption
(EMLPP)
eMLPP
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 156
Configuring
Enhanced
Multi Level
Precedence
and
Preemption
(eMLPP)
GBFD-115002 Flow Control
Based on Cell
Priority
Flow Control
Based on Cell
Priority
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 157
Configuring
Flow Control
Based on Cell
Priority
GBSS
27
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-115003 Flow control
based on User
priority
Flow control
based on User
priority (per
TRX)
BSC6900 158
Configuring
Flow Control
Based on User
Priority
GBFD-119907 PS Service in
Priority
PS Service in
Priority (Per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 159
Configuring
PS Service in
Priority
GBFD-118103 Network
Support SAIC
SAIC Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 160
Configuring
Network
Support SAIC
GBFD-115401 NSS-Based
LCS (Cell ID +
TA)
NSS-based LCS
(Cell ID + TA)
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 161
Configuring
NSS-based
LCS (cell ID +
TA)
GBFD-115402 BSS-Based
LCS (Cell ID +
TA)
LCS(CELL ID
+TA) Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 162
Configuring
BSS-based
LCS (cell ID +
TA)
GBFD-115403 Simple Mode
LCS(Cell ID +
TA)
Simple Mode
LCS (Cell ID +
TA) Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 163
Configuring
Simple Mode
LCS (Cell ID +
TA)
GBFD-115404 Lb Interface Lb Interface BSC6900 164
Configuring
Lb Interface
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP Abis Over IP
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 165
Configuring
Abis over IP
GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/
T1
Abis IP Over
E1/T1 Resource
(per TRX)
BSC6900 166
Configuring
Abis IP over
E1/T1
GBFD-118604 Abis MUX Abis MUX
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 167
Configuring
Abis MUX
GBSS
28
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-118612 Abis IPHC Abis IPHC (per
TRX)
BSC6900 168
Configuring
Abis IPHC
GBFD-118602 A over IP A Over IP
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 169
Configuring A
over IP
GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1 A IP over E1
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 170
Configuring A
IP over E1/T1
GBFD-118610 UDP MUX for
A Transmission
UDP MUX for
A Transmission
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 171
Configuring
UDP MUX for
A
Transmission
GBFD-118623 TDM/IP Dual
Transmission
over A Interface
TDM/IP Dual
Transmission
over A Interface
(per TRX)
BSC6900 172
Configuring
TDM/IP Dual
Transmission
over A
Interface
GBFD-118603 Gb over IP GB Over IP
Resource (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 173
Configuring
Gb over IP
GBFD-118605 IP QOS IP QoS Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-118607 IP Performance
Monitor
IP Performance
Monitor
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 174
Configuring IP
Performance
Monitor
GBFD-118630 Ethernet OAM Ethernet OAM
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 175
Configuring
Ethernet OAM
GBFD-510601 PICO
Automatic
Configuration
and Planning
PICO Solution
Packet Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 176
Configuring
PICO/
Compact BTS
Automatic
Configuration
and Planning
GBSS
29
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-510602 PICO
Synchronizatio
n
PICO Solution
Packet Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 177
Configuring
PICO
Synchronizatio
n
GBFD-510603 PICO Dual-
band Auto-
planning
PICO Dual-
band Auto-
planning(per
TRX)
BSC6900 178
Configuring
PICO Dual-
band Auto-
planning
GBFD-510604 PICO USB
Encryption
PICO USB
Encryption(per
TRX)
BSC6900 179
Configuring
PICO USB
Encryption
GBFD-510605 PICO Access
Control List
(ACL)
PICO Access
Control List
(ACL)(per
TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-510606 PICO Sleeping
Mode
PICO Sleeping
Mode(per TRX)
BSC6900 180
Configuring
PICO Sleeping
Mode
GBFD-510607 PICO
Automatic
Optimization
PICO
Automatic
Optimization
(per TRX)
BSC6900 181
Configuring
PICO
Automatic
Optimization
GBFD-510608 PICO
Tranceiver
redundancy
PICO
Tranceiver
Redundancy
(per TRX)
BSC6900 182
Configuring
PICO
Transceiver
Redundancy
GBFD-510701 Compact BTS
Automatic
Configuration
and Planning
Easy GSM
Solution Packet
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 176
Configuring
PICO/
Compact BTS
Automatic
Configuration
and Planning
GBSS
30
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
Automatic
Capacity
Planning
Easy GSM
Solution Packet
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 183
Configuring
Compact BTS
Automatic
Capacity
Planning
Automatic
Neighbor Cell
Planning and
Optimization
Automatic
Neighbor Cell
Planning and
Optimization
(per TRX)
BSC6900 184
Configuring
Compact BTS
Automatic
Neighbor Cell
Planning and
Optimization
Timing Power
Off
Compact BTS
Timing Power
Off(per TRX)
BSC6900 185
Configuring
Compact BTS
Timing Power
Off
GBFD-510706 Local User
Management
Local User
Management
(per TRX)
BSC6900 186
Configuring
Local User
Management
GBFD-510301 Public Voice
Group Call
Service
Basic Voice
Group Call
Service(VGCS)
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBFD-510303 Late Group
Channel
Assignment
Late Group Call
Channel
Assignment
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBFD-510305 Single Channel
Group Call
Originating
Single Channel
Group Call
Originating
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBFD-510306 Talker
Identification
Talker
Identification
function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBSS
31
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-510307 Group Call
EMLPP
Group Call
EMLPP
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBFD-510308 Fast Group Call
Setup
Fast Group Call
Setup Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBFD-510309 Group Call
Reliability
Enhancing
Group Call
Reliability
Enhancing
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBFD-510302 Public Voice
Broadcast
Service
Basic Voice
Broadcast
Service(VBS)
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBFD-510304 Late Broadcast
Channel
Assignment
Late Broadcast
Channel
Assignment
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 187
Configuring
VGCS and
VBS
GBFD-510310 GSM-T Relay GSM-T Relay
(per TRX)
BSC6900 188
Configuring
GSM-T Relay
GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II
Handover
HUAWEI II
Handover
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 189
Configuring
HUAWEI II
Handover
GBFD-510502 Handover Re-
establishment
Handover Re-
establishment
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 190
Configuring
Handover Re-
establishment
GBFD-118701 BSS Sharing RAN Sharing
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 191
Configuring
BSS Sharing
GBFD-118702 MOCN Shared
Cell
MOCN
Common Cell
(per TRX)
BSC6900 192
Configuring
MOCN Shared
Cell
GBSS
32
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-118703 IMSI-Based
Handover
IMSI Based
Handover(per
TRX)
BSC6900 193
Configuring
IMSI-Based
Handover
GBFD-118704 Abis
Independent
Transmission
Abis
Independent
Transmission
(per TRX)
BSC6900 194
Configuring
Abis
Independent
Transmission
GBFD-510801 MSRD MSRD
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 195
Configuring
MSRD
GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in
Downlink
Dual Carriers in
Downlink
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 196
Configuring
Dual Carriers
in Downlink
GBFD-510803 Uplink
EGPRS2-A
Uplink
EGPRS2-A
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 197
Configuring
the EGPRS2-A
GBFD-510804 Downlink
EGPRS2-A
Downlink
EGPRS2-A
Resource (per
TRX)
BSC6900 197
Configuring
the EGPRS2-A
GBFD-510805 Latency
Reduction
Latency
Reduction
Function (per
64Kbps)
BSC6900 198
Configuring
Latency
Reduction
GBFD-510901 2G/3G
Neighboring
Cell Automatic
Optimization
2G/3G
Neighboring
Cell Automatic
Optimization
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-511002 Access Control
Class(ACC)
Access Control
Class(per TRX)
BSC6900 199
Configuring
Access Control
Class
GBSS
33
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA
Interoperability
Intersystem
Handover &
Reselection
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 200
Configuring
GSM/
WCDMA
Interoperabilit
y
Service Based
Handover
Intersystem
Handover due to
Service
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 201
Configuring
GSM/
WCDMA
Service Based
Handover
Load Based
Handover
Intersystem
Handover due to
Load Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 202
Configuring
GSM/
WCDMA Load
Based
Handover
GBFD-114323 2G/3G Cell
Reselection
Based on MS
State
2G/3G Cell
Reselection
Based on MS
State Function
(per TRX)
BSC6900 203
Configuring
2G/3G Cell
Reselection
Based on MS
State
GBFD-114325 Fast WCDMA
Reselection at
2G CS Call
Release
Fast 3G
Reselection at
2G Cs Call
Release
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 204
Configuring
the Fast
WCDMA
Reselection at
2G CS Call
Release
GBFD-511101 Load Based
Handover
Enhancement
on Iur-g
Handover
Based on Load
on Iur-g
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 205
Configuring
Load Based
Handover
Enhancement
on Iur-g
GBSS
34
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-511102 NACC
Procedure
Optimization
Based on Iur-g
between GSM
and WCDMA
NACC
Procedure
Optimization
Based on Iur-g
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 206
Configuring
NACC
(Network
Assisted Cell
Change)
Procedure
Optimization
Based on Iur-g
between GSM
and WCDMA
GBFD-511103 GSM and
WCDMA Load
Balancing
Based on Iur-g
BSC Load
Balancing
Based on Iur-g
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 207
Configuring
GSM and
WCDMA Load
Balancing
Based on Iur-g
GBFD-511104 GSM and
WCDMA
Traffic Steering
Based on Iur-g
BSC Service
Distribution
Based on Iur-g
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 208
Configuring
GSM and
WCDMA
Traffic
Steering Based
on Iur-g
GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection
Between GSM
and LTE
Cell Reselection
Between GSM
and LTE(per
TRX)
BSC6900 209
Configuring
Cell
Reselection
Between GSM
and LTE
GBFD-511302 PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Coverage
PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Coverage
(per TRX)
BSC6900 210
Configuring
PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Coverage
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Quality
PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Quality(per
TRX)
BSC6900 211
Configuring
PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Quality
GBSS
35
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Cell Load
PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Cell Load
(per TRX)
BSC6900 212
Configuring
PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Cell Load
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Mode
Priority
PS Handover
Between GSM
and LTE Based
on Mode
Priority (per
TRX)
BSC6900 None
GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE
Service Based
PS Handover
GSM/LTE
Service Based
PS Handover
(per TRX)
BSC6900 213
Configuring
GSM/LTE
Service Based
PS Handover
GBFD-511307 eNC2 Between
GSM and LTE
eNC2 Between
GSM and LTE
(per TRX)
BSC6900 214
Configuring
eNC2 Between
GSM and LTE
GBFD-511308 eNACC
Between GSM
and LTE
eNACC
Between GSM
and LTE (per
TRX)
BSC6900 215
Configuring
eNACC
Between GSM
and LTE
GBFD-511309 SRVCC SRVCC (per
TRX)
BSC6900 216
Configuring
SRVCC
GBFD-511310 Multi
Technology
Neighbour Cell
Based
Handover
Multi
Technology
Neighbour Cell
Based
Handover (per
TRX)
BSC6900 217
Configuring
Multi
Technology
Neighbour Cell
Based
Handover
GBFD-511312 Fast LTE
Reselection at
2G CS Call
Release
Fast LTE
Reselection at
GSM CS Call
Release (per
TRX)
BSC6900 218
Configuring
Fast LTE
Reselection at
2G CS Call
Release
GBSS
36
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-511313 CSFB CSFB (per
TRX)
BSC6900 219
Configuring
CSFB
GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-
SCDMA
Interoperability
Intersystem
Handover &
Reselection
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 220
Configuring
GSM/TD-
SCDMA
Interoperabilit
y
GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface
Between GSM
and TD-
SCDMA
Iur-g Interface
Between GSM
and TD-
SCDMA(per
TRX)
BSC6900 221
Configuring
Iur-g Interface
Between GSM
and TD-
SCDMA
GBFD-511402 Radio Resource
Reserved
Handover
Between GSM/
TD-SCDMA
Based on Iur-g
Radio Resource
Reserved
Handover
Between GSM/
TD-SCDMA
Based on Iur-g
(per TRX)
BSC6900 222
Configuring
Radio
Resource
Reserved
Handover
Between GSM/
TD-SCDMA
Based on Iur-g
BCCH
Extended
BCCH (per
TRX)
BSC6900 223
Configuring
Extended
BCCH
GBFD-511501 Multiple
CCCHs
Multiple CCCH
(per TRX)
BSC6900 224
Configuring
Multiple
CCCHs
GBFD-511502 Layered Paging Layered Paging
(per TRX)
BSC6900 225
Configuring
Layered
Paging
GBFD-511201 2G/3G Co-
Transmission
by TDM
Switching
2G/3G Co-
Transmission
by TDM
Switching
Function (per
TRX)
BSC6900 226
Configuring
2G/3G Co-
Transmission
by TDM
Switching
GBSS
37
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
GBFD-511701 Radio
Measurement
Data Interface
for Navigation
Radio
Measurement
Data Interface
for Navigation
(per TRX)
BSC6900 227
Configuring
Radio
Measurement
Data Interface
for Navigation
MRFD-211801 Multi-mode
Dynamic Power
Sharing(GSM)
GSM and
UMTS
Dynamic Power
Sharing
BSC6900 228
Configuring
Multi-mode
Dynamic
Power Sharing
(GSM)
MRFD-211802 GSM and
UMTS
Dynamic
Spectrum
Sharing(GSM)
GSM and
UMTS
Dynamic
Spectrum
Sharing(Per
Site)
BSC6900 229
Configuring
GSM and
UMTS
Dynamic
Spectrum
Sharing(GSM)
MRFD-211501 IP-Based Multi-
mode Co-
Transmission
on BS side
(GBTS)
None None 230
Configuring
IP-Based
Multi-mode
Co-
Transmission
on BS side
(GBTS)
MRFD-211504 TDM-Based
Multi-mode Co-
Transmission
via Backplane
on BS side
(GBTS)
None None 231
Configuring
TDM-Based
Multi-mode
Co-
Transmission
via Backplane
on BS side
(GBTS)
MRFD-211505 Bandwidth
sharing of
MBTS Multi-
mode Co-
Transmission
(GBTS)
Bandwidth
sharing of
MBTS Multi-
mode Co-
Transmission
(per Site)
BSC6900 None
GBSS
38
Control Item
License
Configured
on...
Configuration
Method
MRFD-211601 Multi-mode BS
Common
Reference
Clock(GBTS)
None None 232
Configuring
Multi-Mode
BS Common
Reference
Clock (GBTS)
MRFD-211703 2.0MHz Central
Frequency point
separation
between GSM
and UMTS
mode(GSM)
2.0MHz Central
Frequency point
separation
between GSM
and UMTS
mode(Per Site)
BSC6900 None

GBSS
39
3 Activating the GSM License
This describes how to activate the GSM license.
Prerequisites
l The BSC6900 is in service.
l The LMT is started and you are logged in to the BSC6900.
l The valid BSC6900 license is obtained and stored in the OMU active workspace \FTP
\License
Procedure
Step 1 Run LST LICENSE and enter the name of the license file to be activated to query the file
information.
If... Then...
The file information comply with the information of the
file that you apply for,
Go to Step 2.
The file information does not comply with the
information of the file that you apply for,
Exit the task and contact Huawei.
Step 2 Run the LST CFGMODE command to query the subrack configuration status. If the subrack
is offline, run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command to switch it to online.
Step 3 Run the ACT LICENSE command to active the License.
----End
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 3 Activating the GSM License
40
4 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC
Multi-band Sharing One BSC.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware
This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.
l Dependencies on Other Features
This feature does not depend on other features.
l License
This feature is not under license control.
l Other Prerequisites
The TRXs configured for the BTS supports the corresponding frequency bands.
Context
l Huawei GSM BSS supports the following types of multiband networks:
GSM850 band + GSM900 band + DCS1800 band
GSM850 band + GSM900 band + PCS1900 band
l The most common combination is GSM900 with DCS1800 and GSM850 with PCS1900.
l Huawei GSM BSS does not support the co-existence of a GSM900/DCS1800 co-BCCH
cell and a GSM850/PCS1900 co-BCCH cell.
l Huawei GSM BSS supports GSM900 band, DCS1800 band, PCS1900 band, and GSM850
band. Huawei GSM BSS does not support GSM450 band or GSM480 band.
The dual-band network configured on the GSM900 and DCS1800 bands of a BTS is used as an
example.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a GSM cell. In this step, set
Freq. Band to GSM900.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 4 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC
41
3. Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to set Freq. Band to DCS1800.
l Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover
parameters of the GSM900 and DCS1800 cells based on the network plan.
2. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 band to camp on a 900 MHz cell. Perform the
dialing test. The call is normal.
3. Use an MS supporting the DCS1800 band to camp on a 1800 MHz cell. Perform the
dialing test. The call is normal.
4. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 and DCS1800 bands to camp on a 900 MHz cell.
Perform the dialing test. After the call is set up, move the MS towards the center of
the 1800 MHz cell. Then, check the channel status in the monitoring window. The
MS is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell, and the call is kept alive.
NOTE
l On the LMT, click Device Maintenance. In the Device Navigation Tree, right-click a specified
cell, and then choose Monitor Channel Status.
l When a call is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell, the color of a channel in the Monitor Channel
Status window is displayed as green. This indicates that the channel is occupied by the call
handed to the 1800 MHz cell.
l Deactivation Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL. In this step, set Freq. Band to
GSM900.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELL to query the value Active status.
Expected result: The value of Active status is DEACTIVATED.
3. Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to deactivate the cell whose Freq. Band is DCS1800.
----End
Example
//Activating Multi-band Sharing One BSC
//Adding a GSM cell
ADD GCELL: CELLID=0, CELLNAME="Cell0", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="460", MNC="10",
LAC=10, CI=11, NCC=0, BCC=0, IUOTP=Normal_cell, FLEXMAIO=OFF;
//Activating the GSM cell
ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
//Adding a DCS cell
ADD GCELL: CELLID=1, CELLNAME="Cell1", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="10",
LAC=11, CI=12, NCC=0, BCC=0, IUOTP=Normal_cell, FLEXMAIO=OFF;
//Activating the DCS cell
//Verifying Multi-band Sharing One BSC
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2;
//Deactivating NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)
DEA GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 4 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC
42
5 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)
Emergency Call Service (TS12).
Prerequisites
l License
Context
The emergency call service takes precedence over other services during network access even if
the MS requesting the service is suspended or the telephone charge is overdue.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to enable the emergency
call service. In this step, set Emergent Call Disable to NO(No).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC to query whether the
emergency call service is enabled.
Expected result: The value of Emergent Call Disable is No.
2. Tracing Messages on the A Interface. On the Basic tab page, set DPC(HEX) to the
DPC of the cell and select the BSSAP check box. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell
ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the cell. Click Submit.
3. Use the MS to make an emergency call. After the call is put through, you can hear a
voice prompt.
4. Check the BSSAP messages traced on the A interface.
Expected result: An EMERGENCY_SETUP message is traced on the A interface.
This indicates that the emergency call service is enabled.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 5 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)
43
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to disable the emergency
call service. In this step, set Emergent Call Disable to YES(Yes).
----End
Example
//Activating Emergency Call Service (TS12)
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ERGCALLDIS=NO;
//Deactivating Emergency Call Service (TS12)
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ERGCALLDIS=YES;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 5 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)
44
6 Configuring IMSI Detach
IMSI Detach.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
After the IMSI is detached, the MS is marked as an invalid MS by the network. The network
does not send any paging message to this MS.
The network informs the MS whether the IMSI attach or detach is allowed by sending the system
information type 3 message.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, set
Attach-detach Allowed to YES(Yes).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLIDLEBASIC to query the value of
Attach-detach Allowed.
Expected result: The value of Attach-detach Allowed is YES(Yes).
2. On the BSC6900 LMT, initiate A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing
Messages on the A Interface. On the Basic tab page, set DPC(HEX) to the DPC of
the cell and select the BSSAP check box. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID
(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the cell. Click Submit.
3. After the A interface message tracing window is displayed, power off the MS.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 6 Configuring IMSI Detach
45
Expected result: The IMSI DETACH INDICATION message is traced on the A
interface.
Attach-detach Allowed to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating IMSI Detach
SET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ATT=YES;
//Deactivating IMSI Detach
SET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ATT=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 6 Configuring IMSI Detach
46
7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover
HUAWEI I Handover.
Prerequisites
This feature does not depend on the hardware.
l License
Neighboring 2G cells have been configured. For details, see Configuring the Neighboring
Cell Relations.
Context
Handover is used to keep the call continuity of the UE during its movement. It also helps optimize
the network performance by balancing the traffic between cells.
Huawei I handover is classified into high-speed railway quick handover, emergency handover,
enhanced dual-band network handover, load handover, and normal handover. The emergency
handover is classified into TA handover, bad quality (UL/DL) handover, quick level drop
handover, interference handover, and no downlink measurement report handover. The normal
handover is classified into edge handover, hierarchical handover, PBGT handover, concentric
cell handover, AMR handover, and better 3G cell handover.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 7 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover
47
CAUTION
l After quick handover, bad quality handover, and TA handover are successful, penalty is
applied on the old cell during the penalty time to prevent an immediate handover back to the
old cell.
l During TA handover, if the TA Threshold of a co-site neighboring cell is lower than or equal
to the TA Threshold of the serving cell, a handover to the cell is prohibited.
l Intra-cell handover is allowed for the interference handover. However, when intra-cell
handover is triggered several times continuously, it will be forbidden within a specified
duration.
l On the enhanced dual-band network, the MS should not be handed over to a cell in the same
underlaid/overlaid cell group when the load handovers between the overlaid cell and the
underlaid cell (specified by Load HO From UL Subcell to OL Subcell Allowed and Load
HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled) are allowed. This is to prevent a load handover
of a normal cell from colliding with a load handover between the overlaid cell and the
underlaid cell on the network.
l PBGT handover toward a cell of the same group is not allowed once it is triggered between
the enhanced dual-band network cells.
l After the fast-moving micro cell handover is successful, penalty is applied on all the
neighboring micro cells.
l SDCCH handover supports the quick handover, TA handover, bad quality handover, quick
level drop handover, interference handover, no downlink measurement report handover, edge
handover, and fast-moving micro cell handover. It does not support the enhanced dual-band
network handover, load handover, hierarchical handover, PBGT handover, AMR handover,
better 3G cell handover, concentric cell handover, and tight BCCH handover.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Current HO
Control Algorithm set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG with Current HO
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN with Current HO
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO with Current HO Control
Algorithm set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD after setting MAX
Consecutive HO Times as required.
6. Optional: To improve the effect of handover and power control when the BCCH
participates in baseband frequency hopping, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLCCCH with PWRC set to YES(Yes) and run the BSC6900 MML command
SET GCELLOTHEXT with Power Control and Handover CMP CON Sw set to
YES(Yes).
7. Activating the quick handover algorithm
GBSS
48
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set
Neighboring Cell Type as required, set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes), and
then set Chain Neighbour Cell Type as required.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Quick
Handover Enable set to YES(Yes).
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST. In this step, set
Handover Direction Forecast Enable to YES(Yes), and then set Quick Move
Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, Quick Handover
Down Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish
Time, Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MR
Number, Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore Measurement
Report Number, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS,
Handover Direction Forecast Statistic Times, Frequency Shift Handover
Statistic Time, and Frequency Shift Handover Duration to appropriate values.
NOTE
If a neighboring cell is an external neighboring cell, you need to run the BSC6900 MML
command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover
Punish Time, and Quick Handover Punish Value.
d. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT after
setting UL Frequency Adjust Switch, DL Frequency Adjust Switch, and UL
Frequency Adjust Value according to the frequency offset information reported
by the base station.
8. Activating the TA handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with TA HO
Allowed set to YES(Yes).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG after setting TA
Threshold as required.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN after setting
Penalty Time after TA HO and Penalty Level after TA HO as required.
9. Activating the bad quality handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with BQ HO
b. Optional: For non-AMR calls, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLHOEMG after setting UL Qual. Threshold and DL Qual.
c. Optional: For AMR FR calls or AMR HR calls, run the BSC6900 MML
command SET GCELLAMRQUL after setting UL Qual. Limit for AMR
FR, DL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR, and DL
Qual. Limit for AMR HR as required.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN after setting
Penalty Time after BQ HO and Penalty Level after BQ HO as required.
10. Activating rapid level drop handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with
Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Edge HO UL RX_LEV
Threshold set to an appropriate value.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG after setting Filter
Parameter A1, Filter Parameter A2, Filter Parameter A3, Filter Parameter
GBSS
49
A4, Filter Parameter A5, Filter Parameter A6, Filter Parameter A7, Filter
Parameter A8, and Filter Parameter B as required.
11. Activating the interference handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Interference
HO Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Intracell HO Allowed and Inter-layer HO
Threshold to appropriate values.
NOTE
If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, you need to run the BSC6900
MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL with Inter-layer HO Threshold set to an
appropriate value.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD after setting
Forbidden time after MAX Times as required.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after setting Adjacent
Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLAMRQUL after setting
Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 1 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh
2 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 3 for Non-AMR FR,
11 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 12 for Non-AMR FR, and
Interfere HO Qual. Thresh Offset for AMR FR as required.
12. Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG with No Dl Mr.HO
Allowed set to YES(Yes) and No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit, Cons.No Dl
Mr.HO Allowed Limit, No Dl Mr. HO Statistic Time, and No Dl Mr. HO
Last Time set to appropriate values.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN after setting
Filter Length for TCH Qual and Filter Length for SDCCH Qual as required.
13. Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell IUO
Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double Frequency Cell), set Cell Inner/Extra
Property and Same Group Cell Index Type to appropriate values, and set Same
Group Cell Name or Same Group Cell Index based on the value of Same
Group Cell Index Type.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA after setting
Load HO Allowed, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold, Inner Cell
Serious OverLoad Thred, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level,
Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH, UL Subcell Serious Overload
Threshold, UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Periods, MOD Step LEN of
UL Load HO Period, Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO, UL Subcell
Lower Load Threshold, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, Outgoing
OL Subcell HO Level TH, OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period, Step
Length of OL Subcell Load HO, Distance Between Boundaries of Subcells,
and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries as required.
14. Activating the load handover algorithm
GBSS
50
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Load
Handover Support set to YES(Yes) and Inter-layer HO Threshold and Edge
HO DL RX_LEV Threshold set to appropriate values.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD after setting System
Flux Threshold for Load HO, Load HO Threshold, Load handover Load
Accept Threshold, Load HO Bandwidth, Load HO Step Period, and Load
HO Step Level as required.
NOTE
If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run the
BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL after setting Load handover Load
Accept Threshold as required. If this cell is configured with external 3G neighboring
cells, you need to run the MML command MOD GEXT3GCELL after setting Load
handover Load Accept Threshold.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after setting Adjacent
15. Activating the edge handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Edge HO
Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO
UL RX_LEV Threshold, Handover Algorithm I Edge HO Watch Time, and
Handover Algorithm I Edge HO Valid Time set to appropriate values.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after setting Adjacent
16. Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA after setting
Layer of The Cell as required.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with MS Fast
Moving HO Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Inter-layer HO Threshold set to an
appropriate value.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD after setting MS Fast-
moving Time Threshold, MS Fast-moving Watch Cells, MS Fast-moving
Valid Cells, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on MS Fast
Moving HO as required.
NOTE
BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Layer of The Cell, Inter-layer
HO Threshold, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on MS Fast Moving
HO.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after setting Adjacent
17. Activating the inter-layer handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Level HO
Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Inter-layer HO Threshold set to an appropriate
value.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA after setting
Layer of The Cell and Cell Priority.
GBSS
51
NOTE
BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Layer of The Cell and Cell
Priority as required.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after setting Layer HO
Watch Time, Layer HO Valid Time, and Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO
Hysteresis.
18. Activating the PBGT handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with PBGT HO
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA after setting
Layer of The Cell and Cell Priority as required.
NOTE
BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL after setting Layer of The Cell and
Cell Priority.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set
Neighboring Cell Type, set Current HO CTRL Algorithm in Source Cell to
HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I), and then set PBGT Watch
Time, PBGT Valid Time, and PBGT HO Threshold as required.
19. Activating the AMR handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set
Intracell F-H HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set F2H HO Threshold, H2F
HO Threshold, Intracell F-H HO Stat Time, and Intracell F-H HO Last
Time as required.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV with TCH Rate Adjust
Allow set to YES(Yes).
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS with Speech
Version set to at least FULL_RATE_VER3 and HALF_RATE_VER3.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC with A Interface Tag set
to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD after setting AMR
TCH/H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold as
required.
20. Activating the SDCCH handover algorithm
SDCCH HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set F2H HO Threshold, H2F HO
Threshold, Intracell F-H HO Stat Time, and Intracell F-H HO Last Time as
required.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL after setting Inter-
BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed as required.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to query the setting of
Current HO Control Algorithm.
Expected result: The value of Current HO Control Algorithm is
HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).
GBSS
52
2. Start the BSSAP message tracing task by referring to Tracing Messages on the A
Interface.
Expected result: The BSC sends the MSC a Handover Performed message with the
handover cause value of better-cell, distance, uplink-quality, downlink-quality,
traffic, uplink-strength, or downlink-strength.
In the case of the quick handover, the handover cause value is better-cell.
In the case of the TA handover, the handover cause value is distance.
In the case of the BQ handover, the handover cause value is uplink-quality or
downlink-quality.
In the case of the rapid level drop handover algorithm, the handover cause value
is uplink-strength.
In the case of the interference handover, the handover cause value is uplink-
quality or downlink-quality.
In the case of the no downlink measurement report handover, the handover cause
value is uplink-quality.
In the case of the enhanced dual-band network handover, the handover cause value
is better-cell or traffic.
In the case of the load handover, the handover cause value is traffic.
In the case of the edge handover, the handover cause value is uplink-strength or
downlink-strength.
In the case of the fast-moving micro cell handover, the handover cause value is
better-cell.
In the case of the inter-layer handover, the handover cause value is better-cell.
In the case of the PBGT handover, the handover cause value is better-cell.
In the case of the AMR handover, the handover cause value is downlink-
quality.
In the case of the SDCCH handover, the handover cause value is better-cell,
distance, uplink-quality, downlink-quality, traffic, uplink-strength, or
downlink-strength.
This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activating HUAWEI I handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;
SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOTRYCNT=3;
//Activating the quick handover algorithm
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=YES,
CHAINNCELLTYPE=QUICK_HO_NCELL_TYPE_A;
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
QUICKHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLHOFAST: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOUPTRIGE=50, HODOWNTRIGE=50,
MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, SCELLFILTER=4, NCELLFILTER=4, IGNOREMRNUM=1,
GBSS
53
TIMEPUNISH=10, HOPUNISHVALUE=63, HOOFFSET=68, MSLEVSTRQPBGT=NO,
HODIRFORECASTEN=YES, HODIRSTATIME=3, HODIRLASTTIME=2, AFCHOSTATTIME=4,
AFCHOLASTTIME=3;
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES,
FREQADJVALUE=36671;
//Activating the TA handover algorithm
TAHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
TALIMIT=125;
SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
SSTAPUNISH=40, TIMETAPUNISH=10;
//Activating the bad quality handover algorithm
BQHOEN=YES;
DLQUALIMIT=55, ULQUALIMIT=60;
SSBQPUNISH=63, TIMEBQPUNISH=10;
//Activating rapid level drop handover algorithm
RXQCKFALLHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10;
FLTPARAA1=10, FLTPARAA2=10, FLTPARAA3=10, FLTPARAA4=10, FLTPARAA5=10,
FLTPARAA6=10, FLTPARAA7=10, FLTPARAA8=10, FLTPARAB=0;
//Activating the interference handover algorithm
INTRACELLHOEN=YES, INTERFHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=2;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BANTIME=20;
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;
SET GCELLAMRQUL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0 ,RXQUAL1=35;
//Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm
NODLMRHOEN=YES, NODLMRHOQUALLIMIT=50, NODLMRHOALLOWLIMIT=8,
NODLMRHOSTATTIME=1, NODLMRHOLASTTIME=1;
DATAQUAFLTLEN=4, SIGQUAFLTLEN=2;
//Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=EDB_cell, CELLINEXTP=Inner,
DBLFREQADJIDTYPE=BYID, DBLFREQADJCID=1;
SET GCELLHOEDBPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OUTASSOPTEN=YES;
//Activating the load handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, LoadHoEn=YES,
DLEDGETHRES=20, HOTHRES=25;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SYSFLOWLEV=10, TRIGTHRES=90,
LoadAccThres=80, LOADOFFSET=25, LOADHOPERIOD=10, LOADHOSTEP=5;
//Activating the edge handover algorithm
FRINGEHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10, DLEDGETHRES=20, EDGESTAT1=6, EDGELAST1=4;
//Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3;
QCKMVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QCKSTATCNT=3, QCKTRUECNT=2,
QCKTIMETH=15, SPEEDPUNISH=30, SPEEDPUNISHT=4;
GBSS
54
//Activating the inter-layer handover algorithm
LEVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25;
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3, PRIOR=PRIOR-3;
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67, LEVSTAT=6, LEVLAST=4;
//Activating the PBGT handover algorithm
PBGTHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3, PRIOR=PRIOR-3;
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67, PBGTSTAT=6, PBGTLAST=4;
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, PBGTMARGIN=68,
PBGTSTAT=6, PBGTLAST=4;
//Activating the AMR handover algorithm
INTRACELLFHHOEN=YES, INFHHOSTAT=10, INFHHOLAST=8, INHOF2HTH=25,
INHOH2FTH=12;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES;
SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-0&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HALF_RATE_VER
1-1&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-1&FULL_RATE_VER5-0;
SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=ON,
AMRTCHHPRIORLOAD=55;
//Activating the SDCCH handover algorithm
INHOH2FTH=12;
SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INRBSCSDHOEN=YES;
GBSS
55
8 Configuring Directed Retry
Directed Retry.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
Directed retry is a special type of handover. That is, during the assignment procedure, the BSC
initiates the directed retry procedure to switch the MS to a neighboring cell if no TCH is available
or the traffic load is heavy in the serving cell.
This feature helps reduce call access failures due to TCH congestion in the serving cell, thereby
increasing the access success rate. It can also balance the traffic load between different cells.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set
Directed Retry to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLCCBASIC. Set Directed Retry
Load Access Threshold based on the actual load of candidate neighboring cells.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Current
HO CTRL Algorithm in Source Cell to an appropriate value. Run the BSC6900
MML commandSET GCELLHOCTRL if Current HO CTRL Algorithm in
Source Cell is set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I). In this step, set
Min Power Level For Directed Retry based on the actual receive level of
neighboring cells. Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD G2GNCELL if Current
HO CTRL Algorithm in Source Cellis set to HOALGORITHM2(Handover
algorithm II). In this step, set cells 0 and 1 to neighboring cells, and set Inter-cell
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 8 Configuring Directed Retry
56
HO Hysteresis and Directed Retry Handover Level Range for cell 1 to appropriate
values.
4. Optional: Set the number of cells for directed retry and the priorities of these cells.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT with DRD HO
Target Cell Selection Optimized set to YES(Yes).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD with Max. Num. of
HO Attempts set to an appropriate value.
1. Block the TCHs in cell 0. Meanwhile, ensure that the SDCCHs in cell 0 are available
for use.
2. Trace the BSSAP messages on the A interface and the RSL messages on the Abis
interface in cells 0 and 1 by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface and
Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface.
3. Make a call in cell 0.
4. View the BSSAP messages traced on the A interface and RSL messages traced on the
Abis interface in cells 0 and 1.
Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the speech quality is good. The
Handover Detection message is traced on the Abis interface in cell 1. The Assignment
Complete message is traced on the A interface in cell 1.
5. Open the Single User CS Trace page. You can see that the value of the ucHoCause
information element (IE) in the Handover Triggered Indication message is directed-
retry.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA with Directed
Retry set to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating directed retry
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DIRECTRYEN=YES;
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DRTAGCELLSEL=YES;
//Deactivating directed retry
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DIRECTRYEN=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 8 Configuring Directed Retry
57
9 Configuring Assignment and Immediate
Assignment
Assignment and Immediate Assignment.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
Assignment and immediate assignment are two important procedures during call setup. Normal
immediate and immediate assignment procedures do not require setting of any parameter.
Parameter setting is required only in the immediate assignment of TCHs. The following section
describes how to configure the function of immediate TCH assignment.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TCH
Immediate Assignment to YES(Yes).
1. When an MS camps on a cell and no MS is processing services in the cell, block the
SDCCHs and disable the SDCCH dynamic adjustment function.
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block an
SDCCH. In this step, set Channel No. to the number of the SDCCH and
Administrative State to Lock(Lock). To block more SDCCHs, run the SET
GTRXCHANADMSTAT command for each SDCCH you want to block.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 9 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment
58
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to disable
SDCCH dynamic adjustment. In this step, set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation
Allowed to NO(No).
2. Use the MS to initiate a call.
3. Check the messages traced over the Abis interface.
On the Abis interface message tracing window, the CHANNEL ACTIVATION
message is traced. The field Channel Mode and Type indicates that a TCH, instead of
an SDCCH, is assigned during immediate assignment. During assignment, the
messages Mode Modify Request and Mode Modify Acknowledge are traced.
4. After the verification, unblock the SDCCH and enable SDCCH dynamic adjustment
immediately.
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to unblock
an SDCCH. In this step, set Channel No. to the number of the SDCCH and
Administrative State to Unlock(Unlock). To unblock more SDCCHs, run the
SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command for each SDCCH you want to unblock.
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to enable
SDCCH dynamic adjustment. In this step, set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation
Allowed to YES(Yes).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TCH
Immediate Assignment to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Assignment and Immediate Assignment
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IMMASSEN=YES;
//Deactivating Assignment and Immediate Assignment
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IMMASSEN=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 9 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment
59
10 Configuring Call Reestablishment
Call Reestablishment.
Prerequisites
l License
The MSC supports this feature.
Context
When an MS encounters a radio link failure during the call, the call reestablishment procedure
can be performed to reestablish the radio link connection so that the original call can proceed.
This mechanism shortens call interruption and improves user experience.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Call
Reestablishment Forbidden to NO(No).
2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLTMR. In this step, set
TREESTABLISH to an appropriate value. If this parameter is set to a great value,
the radio resources assigned previously are reserved for a long time, which results in
network congestion.
1. Select a cell for test. The test cell must have two TRXs, where, TRX1 is the BCCH
TRX and TRX2 is the non-BCCH TRX. TRX2 requires an independent variable
attenuator or a device that can dynamically adjust the uplink and downlink signals of
TRX2.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 10 Configuring Call Reestablishment
60
2. Use an MS to make a call on the test cell. Block all the TCHs on TRX1 so that the
MS uses a TCH on TRX2. Then, unblock all the TCHs on TRX1. For details about
how to block and unblock TCHs, see SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT
3. Attenuate the signals of TRX2 sharply by using the variable attenuator or other
devices, check the signaling traced on the A and Abis interfaces, and monitor the
channel status of the test cell.
Expected result:
As displayed in the channel status monitoring window, the MS reestablishes a call
on TRX1 of the test cell.
The signaling messages shown in Figure 10-1 are traced.
GBSS
61
Figure 10-1 Signaling messages

GBSS
62
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Call
Reestablishment Forbidden to YES(Yes).
----End
Example
//Activating Call Reestablishment
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CALLRESTABDIS=NO;
SET GCELLTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MSIPFAILINDDELAY=10000;
//Deactivating Call Reestablishment
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CALLRESTABDIS=YES;
GBSS
63
11 Configuring TCH Re-assignment
TCH Re-assignment.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
TCH re-assignment is a procedure in which the BSC re-assigns a TCH to the MS after the MS
returns to the SDCCH because a TCH fails to be assigned to the MS.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set Allow
Reassign to YES(Yes).
1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set
Frequency Band of Reassign to Same_Band(Same Band).
NOTE
This parameter indicates the frequency band to be assigned during TCH re-assignment. If the
parameter is set to Same_Band(Same Band), then a channel of the same frequency band as
the originally assigned TCH is assigned preferentially.
2. Reserve an idle TCH on the BCCH TRX and block other TCHs on the BCCH TRX.
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block a TCH.
In this step, set Channel No. to the number of the TCH to be blocked and
Administrative State to Lock(Lock).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 11 Configuring TCH Re-assignment
64
3. Reserve an idle TCH on the non-BCCH TRX and block other TCHs on the non-BCCH
TRX. In addition, degrade the uplink signal transmitted on the TRX, for example,
remove the uplink antenna for the non-BCCH TRX.
Expected result: Initiate a call in the cell. In the first assignment, a TCH on the non-
BCCH TRX is assigned. The call is re-assigned onto the TCH of the BCCH TRX,
because the assignment over the Um interface fails for this TRX.
Reassign to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating TCH Re-assignment
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REASSEN=YES;
//Verifying TCH Re-assignment
SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REASSFREQBAND=Same_Band;
//Deactivating TCH Re-assignment
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REASSEN=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 11 Configuring TCH Re-assignment
65
12 Configuring Radio Link Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the link error indication procedure
of the basic feature GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management. Other procedures of the feature do
not need to be configured.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
The procedures involved in radio link management are as follows:
l Link establishment indication
l Link establishment request
l Link release indication
l Link release request
l Transmission of a transparent L3-Message in acknowledged mode
l Reception of a transparent L3-Message in acknowledged mode
l Transmission of a transparent L3-Message in unacknowledged mode
l Reception of a transparent L3-Message in unacknowledged mode
l Link error indication
The link error indication procedure enables the BTS to notify the BSC of exceptions that occur
on the radio link layer.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR to set parameters for a
specified cell. In this step, set T200 SDCCH, T200 FACCH/Full Rate, T200
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 12 Configuring Radio Link Management
66
FACCH/Half Rate, T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0, T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3, T200
SACCH SDCCH, T200 SDCCH SAPI3, Use LAPDm N200, N200 of Establish,
N200 of Release, N200 of SACCH, N200 of SDCCH, N200 of FACCH/Half
Rate, and N200 of FACCH/Full Rate to appropriate values.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCTMR to query call control timer
parameters for the corresponding cell.
Expected result: The parameter values queried by running the preceding command
are the same as the values set in the activation procedure.
2. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace and display the Abis Interface CS Trace dialog
box. On the Basic tab page, select RSL under Trace Type. On the RSL tab page,
select RLM under Message Type, select TRX from the Filter Flag drop-down list,
and then specify the TRX ID.
3. Use an MS to make a call and query the channel occupied by the call. Remove the
battery of the MS during the call.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to initiate a forced handover for the
MS. Set Handover Scope to FREE(Free).
5. Check messages traced in step 2. Then, check whether the interval between the DATA
REQ message and the ERROR INDication message is consistent with the values of
N200 and T200 set in the activation procedure. The DATA REQ message contains
the Handover command message, which is transmitted over the Um interface.
Expected result: The interval of the messages for the full-rate channel is basically the
same as the product of values of N200 of FACCH/Full Rate and T200 FACCH/Full
Rate. The interval of the messages for the half-rate channel is basically the same as
the product of values of N200 of FACCH/Half Rate and T200 FACCH/Half Rate.
----End
Example
//Activating the link error indication procedure of Radio Link Management
SET GCELLCCTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, T200SDCCH=1, T200FACCHF=1,
T200FACCHH=1, T200SACCT0=1, T200SACCH3=1, T200SACCHS=1, T200SDCCH3=1;
//Verifying the link error indication procedure of Radio Link Management
LST GCELLCCTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
SET FHO: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOMOD=FREE;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 12 Configuring Radio Link Management
67
13 Configuring BTS Software Management
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the integrity check function
introduced in the basic feature MRFD-210402 BTS Software Management. Other functions
involved in the feature do not need to be configured.
Prerequisites
Only 3900 series base stations support this feature.
l License
The M2000 supports this feature.
Context
When software and a configuration file are transmitted between the M2000 and the BSC, the
software and file may be damaged because of unstable transmission links or malicious attacks.
The integrity check function can check the correctness and integrity of software and
configuration files.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSDIGSIGN to turn on the BTS software
integrity protection switch. In this step, set Software Digital Signature Verification
Switch to ON(On).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSDIGSIGN to check whether the BTS
software integrity protection switch has been turned on.
Expected result: Software Digital Signature Verification Switch is set to ON
(On).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 13 Configuring BTS Software Management
68
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSDIGSIGN to turn off the BTS software
integrity protection switch. In this step, set Software Digital Signature Verification
Switch to OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activation procedure
SET BTSDIGSIGN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, DIGSIGNSW=ON;
//Verification procedure
DSP BTSDIGSIGN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;
//Deactivation procedure
SET BTSDIGSIGN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, DIGSIGNSW=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 13 Configuring BTS Software Management
69
14 Configuring Combined Cabinets and
Cabinet Groups of BTSs
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic features GBFD-111501
BTS Combined Cabinet and GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group.
Prerequisites
The cabinets and cables of the BTSs in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode are
installed.
The DIP switches of the BTSs in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode are set.
NOTE
For details about how to install cabinets, connect cables, and set DIP switches, see the relevant
Product Description and Installation Guide contained in customer documents.
The BTS3012, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and BTS3900E support the combined-cabinet
installation mode.
The BTS3012, BTS3012II, BTS3012III, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and
BTS3900E support the cabinet-group installation mode.
l License
Context
l Combined cabinets
Multiple BTS cabinets of the same type are connected together to serve as one BTS. In
this case, the DTRU subrack is enlarged.
The cabinet configured with the DTMU is the main cabinet, whereas the cabinet not
configured with the DTMU is the extension cabinet. The extension cabinet shares the
DTMU with the main cabinet.
Figure 14-1 shows the connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets.
GBSS
14 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of
BTSs
70
Figure 14-1 Connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets

l Cabinet groups
Multiple groups of compatible combined cabinets are connected together to serve as
one BTS. In this case, the service capacity of each site is increased. The first cabinet of
each cabinet group is the main cabinet.
A cabinet group can be one main cabinet or two combined cabinets. The cabinet group
that provides synchronization clock signals is called main cabinet group. Other cabinet
groups are called extension cabinet groups. The main cabinet of each cabinet group
can be configured with one or two DTMUs.
Figure 14-2 shows the connections of the BTS3012 cabinets groups.
Figure 14-2 Connections of BTS3012 cabinet groups

l The BTS3012 supports a maximum of two combined cabinets and three cabinet groups.
Two combined cabinets of the BTS3012 support 24 carriers, and three cabinet groups
support 72 TRXs.
l Combined cabinets and cabinet groups are distinguished in cabinet numbers. In cabinet
group mode, three consecutive combined cabinets form one cabinet group. The main
cabinet group is comprised of cabinets 0 to 2, extension cabinet group 1 is comprised of
cabinets 3 to 5, and extension cabinet group 2 is comprised of cabinets 6 to 8. The BTS3012
supports a maximum of two combined cabinets and three cabinet groups. The
corresponding cabinet numbers are as follows:
Main cabinet group: 0 and 1
Extension cabinet group 1: 3 and 4
Extension cabinet group 2: 6 and 7
GBSS
BTSs
71
Procedure
l Activation procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a BTS.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCABINET to add a cabinet.
NOTE
In combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode, the principles for adding Cabinet No. are as
follows:
l If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, Cabinet No. is 0 and 1.
l If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, Cabinet No. is 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, and 7.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTRXBRD to add TRX boards.
NOTE
If the BTS3012 does not support the separated mode, the QTRU cannot be configured.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add GSM cells.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLFREQ to add cell frequencies.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLOSPMAP to add cell signaling
point relation.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CELLBIND2BTS to bind cells to the BTS.
8. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set the basic
GPRS attributes of 2G cells.
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GTRX to add TRXs for a cell.
10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD to bind logical
TRXs to the channels on TRX boards
11. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to set TRX device
attributes.
12. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIDLETS to configure idle
timeslots.
NOTE
During the processing of PS services, perform step 8, step 11, and step 12.
13. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSANTFEEDERBRD to add the antenna
board.
14. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSANTFEEDERCONNECT to
configure the connection relation of antennas of the BTS.
15. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSANTFEEDERBRD to modify the
frequency band attributes of BTS antennas.
16. Repeat Step 2 through Step 15 to add and configure the extension cabinet and
information about the cabinet according to the principles for adding cabinet
numbers in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode.
NOTE
If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, addition of cells for the extension cabinet is not
required. Therefore, you do not need to repeat Step 4 through Step 8.
17. Add the BTS connection according to the type of BTS connection.
If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, go to Step 18.
If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, go to Step 19.
GBSS
BTSs
72
18. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection links
from the main cabinet to the BSC, and then set Dest Node Type to BSC. In addition,
set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No..
19. Add the connection links from the main cabinet group to the BSC, and add the
connection links from the extension cabinet groups to the main cabinet group or the
BSC.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection
links from the main cabinet group to the BSC, and then set Dest Node Type to
BSC. In addition, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No..
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection
links from the extension cabinet groups to the main cabinet group or the BSC
If the extension cabinet groups connect to the main cabinet group, set Dest
Node Type to BTS. In addition, set the following parameters related to the
BTSs in extension cabinet groups: Dest Parent Index Type, Dest Parent BTS
Index, and Dest Parent BTS Port No..
If the extension cabinet groups connect to the BSC, set Dest Node Type to
BSC. In addition, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No..
20. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS.
l Verification procedure
1. Click Device Maintenance on the LMT. The Device Maintenance tab page is
displayed.
2. Click the added BTSs in Activation Procedures in Device Navigation Tree. The
corresponding device panels are displayed on BTS Device Panel.
3. Select the main and extension cabinets in the Rack No. drop-down list. Then, check
the board status on BTS Device Panel.
If the board status is Normal, the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet and cabinet-
group mode.
If the board status is Faulty, clear the alarm according to handling suggestions
provided in the BSC6900 Alarm Reference.
l Deactivation procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate a BTS.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTS to delete a BTS.
----End
Example
//Add a BTS
ADD BTS: BTSID=9, BTSNAME="BTS3012_TDM", BTSTYPE=BTS3012, BTSDESC="3012",
SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM;
//Add a cabinet
ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRANMODE=NOT_SUPPORT,
TYPE=BTS3012;
//Add TRX boards
ADD BTSTRXBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, BT=TRU, SRN=1, SN=0;
//Add GSM cells
ADD GCELL: CELLID=0, CELLNAME="cell0", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="460", MNC="10",
LAC=10, CI=11, IUOTP=Normal_cell;
//Add cell frequencies
ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQ1=1, FREQ2=2;
GBSS
BTSs
73
//Add cell signaling point relation
ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPC=153;
//Bind cells to the BTS
ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSID=9;
//Set the basic GPRS attributes of 2G cells
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=NO;
//Add TRXs for a cell
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TRXID=0, FREQ=1,ISMAINBCCH=YES;
//Bind logical TRXs to the channels on TRX boards
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=0, TRXTP=TRU, TRXPN=0, SRN=1, SN=0;
//Set TRX device attributes
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8;
//Add the extension cabinet of the main cabinet group
TYPE=BTS3012;
//Add the main cabinet of the extension cabinet group
TYPE=BTS3012;
//Configure idle timeslots
SET BTSIDLETS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CGN=1, TSCOUNT=20;
//Add the antenna board
ADD BTSANTFEEDERBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, SRN=3, SN=4, BT=DDPM_DDPU,
DTRX=1, DTRXSRN=1, DTRXSN=0, DTRXPN=0, AORB=A;
//Configure the connection relation of antennas of the BTS
SET BTSANTFEEDERCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, SRN=3, SN=4, BT=DDPM_DDPU,
DTRX=1, DTRXSRN=1, DTRXSN=0, DTRXPN=1,AORB=B;
//Add the connection links from the main cabinet group to the BSC
ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=25,
PN=1;
//Add the connection links from the extension cabinet groups to the main
cabinet group
ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, INPN=8, DESTNODE=BTS,
UPBTSIDTYPE=BYID, UPBTSID=9, FPN=1;
//activate a BTS
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, ACTTYPE=ACTALL;
//Deactivate a BTS
DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
//Delete a BTS
RMV BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
GBSS
BTSs
74
15 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over
IP
Connection Inter BSC over IP.
Prerequisites
If the Abis or A interface uses IP transmission, switches can be used to interconnect the
IP interface boards of two BSCs. If the Abis or A interface does not use IP transmission,
a pair of IP interface boards need to be configured for each BSC.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate
the license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2
Overview of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
IP-based inter-BSC interconnection enables operators to use IP networks to interconnect the
BSCs so that the BSCs can communicate with each other directly. Inter-BSC interconnection is
used for exchanging information between BSCs in scenarios such as an inter-BSC soft-
synchronized network or interference-based channel allocation (IBCA). Only signaling can be
exchanged over inter-BSC interconnection.
Procedure
1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD at the current BSC to add
a pair of IP interface boards.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP at the current BSC to add a device
IP address.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHIP at the current BSC to add a port IP
address.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 15 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP
75
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT at the current BSC to add an IP route.
In this step, set Destination IP address to the port IP address of the peer board (that
is, the port IP address of the IP interface board at the peer BSC).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC at the current BSC to add an OSP.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC at the current BSC to add a DSP.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE at the current BSC to add an M3UA
local entity.
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE at the current BSC to add an M3UA
destination entity.
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS at the current BSC to add an M3UA
link set.
10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT at the current BSC to add an M3UA
route.
11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK at the current BSC to add an
SCTP link.
12. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK at the current BSC to add an M3UA
link. After this command is executed, the configuration of links at the current BSC is
complete.
13. Repeat Step 1 through Step 12 to configure the links at the peer BSC.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC, and verify that the value of SCCP
DSP state is Accessible.
----End
Example
//Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP
//(Optional) Adding a pair of IP interface boards
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=XPU, BRDTYPE=XPUa, LGCAPPTYPE=RGCP, SN=0;
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=XPU, BRDTYPE=XPUa, LGCAPPTYPE=RGCP, SN=1;
//Adding a device IP address for the current BSC
ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=24, DEVTYPE=LOGIC_IP, IPADDR="10.10.10.216";
//Adding a port IP address for the current BSC
ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=24, PN=1, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="2.2.2.2",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
//Adding an IP route for the current BSC
ADD IPRT: SRN=0, SN=24, DSTIP="10.10.10.217", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255",
NEXTHOP="2.2.2.1", PRIORITY=HIGH, REMARK="IPRT";
//Adding an OSP for the current BSC
ADD OPC: NAME="BSC216", SPX=0, NI=NATB, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF,
SPC=H'A1;
//Adding a DSP for the current BSC
ADD N7DPC: NAME="BSC217", DPX=0, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=H'B1, DPCT=IUR_G,
BEARTYPE=M3UA;
GBSS
76
//Adding an M3UA local entity
ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, RTCONTEXT=0, NAME="BSC216";
//Adding an M3UA destination entity
ADD M3DE: DENO=98, LENO=0, DPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, RTCONTEXT=0,
NAME="BSC217";
//Adding an M3UA link set
ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DENO=98, NAME="T0217";
//Adding an M3UA route
ADD M3RT: DENO=98, SIGLKSX=1, PRIORITY=0, NAME="TO217";
//Adding an SCTP link
ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, DSCP=48,
LOCPN=60000, LOCIP1="10.10.10.216", PEERIP1="10.10.10.217", PEERPN=2905,
LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;
//Adding an M3UA link
ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, PRIORITY=0,
NAME="TO217";
GBSS
77
16 Configuring Link aggregation
Link aggregation.
Prerequisites
This feature is only supported on BSC6900.
This feature applies only to 3900 series base stations excluding the BTS3902E.
l License
l Requirements for Transmission Networking
In the earlier versions than RAN13.0, trunk group configuration can't support IP PM.
This feature supports IP networking, layer 2 (L2) networking, and layer 3 (L3)
networking.
l Requirements for Other NEs and Transmission Devices from Other Vendors
This feature requires the support from peer transmission devices, such as switches and
base stations.
Context
This feature enables multiple FE or GE ports to be bound to form a logical port. This provides
high bandwidth for end-to-end transmission, achieves load sharing across these FE or GE ports,
and improves the transmission reliability.
Procedure
Activate Link Aggregation on the BSC6900.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address to a
board.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRK to add an Ethernet link
aggregation group. In this step, set the Trunk group work mode to
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 16 Configuring Link aggregation
78
LOAD_SHARING(Load sharing), set the Aggregation Mode to
STATIC_LACP when the peer end supports the LACP protocol or set the
Aggregation Mode to MANUAL_AGGREGATION when the peer end does not
support the LACP protocol, and set the Flow control switch to ON(ON).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRKLNK to add a specified
physical port to an Ethernet link aggregation group.
NOTE
If the Ethernet link aggregation group is configured with multiple physical ports, repeat this step
until all the required physical ports are configured.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRKIP to add an IP address to an
Ethernet link aggregation group. When multiple virtual local area network
(VLAN) gateways are planned, run this command for each IP address you want to
add.
Activate Link Aggregation on the NodeB.
1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address to an
Ethernet port. In this step, set Port Type to ETHTRK(Ethernet Trunk).
2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ETHTRK to add an Ethernet link
aggregation group.
3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ETHTRKLNK to add a member port to
an Ethernet link aggregation group. When multiple member ports need to be added,
run this command for each port you want to add.
Verify the effect of Link Aggregation on the BSC6900.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHTRK to query whether an Ethernet
link aggregation group is available.
NOTE
Expected result: If the value of Status of ETHTRK is UP in the command output, the Ethernet
link aggregation group is available.
2. Set the IP address of the peer NE to be on the same network segment as the IP
address for the Ethernet link aggregation group. For example, set the IP address
of the peer NE to 16.16.16.2.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP to check the IP communication
between the local and peer ends.
NOTE
Expected result: If this command is executed and the command output indicates that no packet
loss occurs, the Ethernet link aggregation group has been successfully configured.
Verify the effect of Link Aggregation on the NodeB.
1. Run the NodeB MML commandDSP ETHTRK to query whether an Ethernet link
aggregation group is available.
2. Run the NodeB MML commandDSP ETHTRKLNK to query whether a member
port of an Ethernet link aggregation group is available.
Deactivate Link Aggregation on the BSC6900.
GBSS
79
1. Run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV ETHTRKIP to remove an IP address
from an Ethernet link aggregation group. If the removal fails, perform operations
as prompted.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV ETHTRK to remove an Ethernet link
aggregation group.
Deactivate Link Aggregation on the NodeB.
1. Run the NodeB MML commandRMV DEVIP to remove a device IP address.
2. Run the NodeB MML commandRMV ETHTRK to remove an Ethernet link
aggregation group.
----End
Example
//Activating Link Aggregation on the BSC6900
ADD ETHTRK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY,
LACPMODE=MANUAL_AGGREGATION, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON;
ADD ETHTRKLNK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, TRKLNKSN=26, TRKLNKPN=2,
WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, PORTPRI=101;
ADD ETHTRKLNK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, TRKLNKSN=27, TRKLNKPN=2,
WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, PORTPRI=102;
ADD ETHTRKIP: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="126.126.126.1",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/Activating Link Aggregation on the NodeB
//Adding a device IP address to an Ethernet port
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETHTRK, PN=0,
IP="192.168.2.24", MASK="255.255.255.0";
//Adding an Ethernet link aggregation group and adding a member port to
an Ethernet link aggregation group
ADD ETHTRK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0;
ADD ETHTRKLNK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0, PN=0,
PRI=255, FLAG=YES;
//Deactivating Link Aggregation on the BSC6900
//Removing active/standby Ethernet link aggregation groups
RMV ETHTRKIP: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, IPINDEX=0;
RMV ETHTRK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2;
//Deactivating Link Aggregation on the NodeB
//Removing a device IP address from an Ethernet port
RMV DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETHTRK, PN=0,
IP="192.168.2.24";
//Removing an Ethernet link aggregation group
RMV ETHTRK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0;
GBSS
80
17 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of
TRX Due to PSU Failure
Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure.
Prerequisites
The following types of BTSs support the feature: the DBS3900, BTS3900, and
BTS3900A
l License
Context
If a BTS uses an AC power input and the power switch unit (PSU) is faulty, the power amplifiers
of some TRXs are shut down to reduce the power demand of the BTS to ensure the normal
operation of the BTS.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP to set the parameters related to
TRX shutdown of the PSU board. In this step.
Set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES).
Set Tran. Cabinet Configured according to actual requirements.
Set Service Priority Policy to GSM_PRIOR.
GSM Multi Carrier BTS Standard does not need to be set.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSPSUFP to query the parameters related
to TRX shutdown when the PSUs are faulty in the corresponding site.
Expected result:
GBSS
17 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU
Failure
81
The value of Board Parameter Configuration Enabled queried in step 2 is
YES.
The value of Tran. Cabinet Configured queried in step 2 is the same as that set
in step 1.
The value of Service Priority Policy queried in step 2 is GSM_PRIOR.
2. Remove some PSUs of the site. Ensure that the remaining PSUs and the DCDU cannot
supply power to all the TRXs at the site but can supply power to other equipment.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status of
all TRXs at the entire site. In this step, set Object Type to SITE.
Expected result: the status of some TRXs is Enabled and that of some others is
Disabled. The BTS works properly and there is no call drops due to insufficient power
supply.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP. In this step, set Board
Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO).
Expected result: Some TRXs do not automatically shut themselves down when PSU
faults occur.
----End
Example
SET BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CFGFLAG=YES, ISTRANCABCON=CONFIG,
SRVPRIPOLICY=GSM_PRIOR;
LST BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=SITE, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
SET BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CFGFLAG=NO;
GBSS
17 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU
Failure
82
18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control
Call-Based Flow Control.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
In cases of emergencies or disasters, a large number of fixed telephones or cell phones from
external networks request to reach the emergency or disaster center. This causes considerable
increase in the mobile terminated services and also causes heavy traffic in the system. This
feature identifies mobile originated call (MOCs) and mobile terminated calls (MTCs) by
different flags and protects either MOCs or MTCs from the effects of flow control. It also allows
telecom operators to decide whether to discard signaling of MOCs or MTCs using flow control,
thereby keeping the system load within a normal level.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA. In this step, set MTC Access
CPU Rate to be greater than SHARE IN CPU RATE but less than MOC Access
CPU Rate.
NOTE
When the value of MOC Access CPU Rate is greater than that of MTC Access CPU Rate,
the call-based flow control is triggered, and flow control is preferentially implemented on
MTCs.
1. Retrieve the counter L3189A: Discarded Channel Requests (MOC) and the counter
L3189B: Discarded Channel Requests (MTC) on the M2000.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control
83
Expected result: The value of the counter L3189A: Discarded Channel Requests
(MOC) is smaller than that of the counter L3189B: Discarded Channel Requests
(MTC).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA. In this step, set MOC Access
CPU Rate to a value that is smaller than or equal to the value of MTC Access CPU
Rate.
----End
Example
//Activating Call-Based Flow Control
SET BSCFCPARA: SHAREINCPURATE=50, MOCACCESSCPURATE=51,
MTCACCESSCPURATE=52;
//Deactivating Call-Based Flow Control
SET BSCFCPARA: MOCACCESSCPURATE=52, MTCACCESSCPURATE=51;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 18 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control
84
19 Configuring Pre-Processing of
Measurement Report
Pre-Processing of Measurement Report.
Prerequisites
The BTS must support this function.
l License
Context
The function of pre-processing of measurement report enables the BTS to interpolate and filter
measurement reports (MRs) and then report the results of the processed MRs to the BSC. In this
manner, the BSC does not need to process the MRs, reducing the load of the BSC. The CPU
load of the board for processing the signaling of the CS services is reduced, and the signaling
on the Abis interface is decreased, therefore minimizing the risks of Abis transmission
congestion.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL command to set
MR.Preprocessing to BTS_Preprocessing and set Transfer Original MR,
Transfer BS/MS Power Class, and Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR as required.
1. Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. For details, see Tracing CS
Domain RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC6900 LMT User Guide.
2. Use the MS to call a fixed-line phone in the test cell.
3. Verify that the Preprocessed Measurement Result message is present.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 19 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report
85
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL command to set
MR.Preprocessing to BSC_Preprocessing.
----End
Example
//Activating Pre-Processing of Measurement Report
SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
BTSMESRPTPREPROC=BTS_Preprocessing, PRIMMESPPT=NO, BSMSPWRLEV=YES,
MRPREPROCFREQ=Once_ps;
//Deactivating Pre-Processing of Measurement Report
BTSMESRPTPREPROC=BSC_Preprocessing;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 19 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report
86
20 Configuring System Information
Sending
System Information Sending.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
System information involves main radio network parameters on the Um interface, including
network identity parameters, cell selection parameters, system control parameters, and network
function parameters. Based on the received system information, an MS can properly select and
access a radio network. Then, the MS can fully use various services provided by the network
and well cooperate with the network.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support
Sent 2QUATER to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to configure neighboring 3G
cells based on the network plan.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to enable outgoing inter-
RAT handovers and incoming inter-RAT handovers. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out
BSC Handover Enable and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 20 Configuring System Information Sending
87
1. Initiate Abis interface message tracing by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages
on the Abis Interface. In the Trace Type area, click RSL to trace RSL messages on
the Abis interface.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to send system
information. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index) and the cell index to an
appropriate value.
3. Check the CS domain messages traced on the Abis interface.
Expected result: The value of si2-quarter-ind in the System Information Type 3
message is 1. This indicates that the feature has been activated.
Sent 2QUATER to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating System Information Sending
SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES;
ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=2047, NBR3GNCELLID=5100;
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES,
INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;
//Deactivating System Information Sending
SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 20 Configuring System Information Sending
88
21 Configuring Daylight Saving Time
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature Daylight Saving
Time (DST).
Prerequisites
l License
Context
With the DST change rules, you can select the date configuration, week configuration, or hybrid
configuration. Date configuration indicates the DST starts from or ends on a certain date in a
certain month. Week configuration indicates that the DST starts from or ends on a certain day
of a certain week in a certain month. Hybrid configuration indicates that the DST starts from or
ends on a certain day after a certain date in a certain month.
Procedure
1. Run the SET TZ command to configure DST. In this step, set DaylightSave to YES
(Yes), set StartType, StartTime, EndType, EndTime, and AdjustMethod as
required.
1. Run the LST TZ command to check whether DaylightSave is set to YES.
2. As it was daylight saving time, the time with sign DST in MML, Alarms, and log
reports shows the feature has been active, such as 2011-07-01 15:50:25 DST.
1. Run the SET TZ command. In this step, set DaylightSave to NO(No).
----End
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 21 Configuring Daylight Saving Time
89
Example
//Activating Daylight Saving Time
SET TZ: ZONET=GMT-0800, DST=YES, SM=WEEK, SMONTH=MAR, SWSEQ=LAST,
SWEEK=SUN, ST=02&00&00, EM=WEEK, EMONTH=OCT, EWSEQ=LAST, EWEEK=SUN,
ET=03&00&00, TO=60;
//Deactivating Daylight Saving Time
SET TZ: ZONET=GMT-0800, DST=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 21 Configuring Daylight Saving Time
90
22 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic
Adjustment
SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment.
Prerequisites
l License
l Others
This feature does not need to be configured when PCU is inner.
This feature needs to be configured when PCU is outer.
Context
When the number of users in a cell increases substantially, some users may not be able to access
the network because they cannot obtain SDCCHs. In this case, some TCHs need to be converted
to SDCCHs. When TCHs are not sufficient enough to meet requirements of channel conversion,
dynamic PDCHs are converted to SDCCHs to ensure that all the users can access the network.
When the traffic load decreases, the TCHs and dynamic PDCHs used as SDCCHs are converted
back to TCHs to increase system capacity.
When SDCCHs are insufficient, channels are converted to SDCCHs in the following sequence:
TCHs on the BCCH frequency band, TCHs not on the BCCH frequency band, and dynamic
PDCHs.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 22 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment
91
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set both
SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed and Dynamic PDCH Conversion to
SDCCH Allowed to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set
Idle SDCCH Threshold N1, Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum, TCH Minimum
Recovery Time, and Num of TSs Convertible to SDCCHs per TRX to appropriate
values.
NOTE
When TCHs on the BCCH frequency band are insufficient, set Dynamically Adjust Inter-
Freq Band SDCCH to YES(Yes) as required.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set Maximum
Rate Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell and Reservation Threshold of Dynamic
Channel Conversion to appropriate values.
NOTE
Monitor Channel Status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status.
As all the channels are occlusive except BCCH.
1. The value of Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 is not smaller than the number of configured
SDCCH channel, and make a CS call in the cell.
Expected result: A TCH is converted to an SDCCH.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set Maximum
Rate Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell to 100 and Reservation Threshold of Dynamic
Channel Conversion to 0.
3. Perform PS services in the cell.
Expected result: All TCHFs are converted to PDCHs.
4. Make another CS call in the cell.
Expected result: A dynamic PDCH is converted to an SDCCH.
5. Enable the cell to remain in the idle state for two minutes. The minimum time of
SDCCHs convert back to TCHs is 120 seconds.
Expected result: The two channels used as SDCCHs are converted back to TCHs.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set both
SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed and Dynamic PDCH Conversion to
SDCCH Allowed to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, SDDYN=YES, PDCH2SDEN=YES;
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, IDLESDTHRES=8, CELLMAXSD=100,
MINRESTIMETCH=60;
SET GCELLPSCHM: MAXPDCHRATE=30, DYNCHTRANRESLEV=2;
//Deactivating SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, SDDYN=NO, PDCH2SDEN=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 22 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment
92
23 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan
Cell Frequency Scan.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
CAUTION
Cell frequency scan has the following impacts on other features:
l Cell frequency scan occupies an idle TCH.
l Cell frequency scan cannot be performed when an RF hopping loopback test is performed.
l The cell frequency scan cannot be performed when an idle frame test is performed.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLFREQSCAN command to
configure cell frequency scan.
NOTE
No restriction is imposed on the number of commands in the batch processing file when the
commands are processed in batches. In addition, 50 commands are executed per 30 seconds in
sequence. Therefore, Duration minute cannot be set to a very small value. Otherwise, the execution
of the commands cannot be completed in the specified duration.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 23 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan
93
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLFREQSCAN command to query
the information of cell frequency scan.
1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Configure cell frequency scan
SET GCELLFREQSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STRTM=17&06&07, TIME=5,
FREQBAND=E-GSM900, FREQLST_E900=0&975&1023;
//Query the frequency scan information of the cell with index of 0
LST GCELLFREQSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 23 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan
94
24 Configuring Signaling Transport Point
(STP)
Signaling Transport Point (STP).
Prerequisites
The XPUa board is configured.
l License
l Others
The OPC is configured.
The physical layer and the data link layer on the A interface are configured.
The CN supports this feature.
Context
According to the requirements of the operator, the BSC can be connected to the MSC directly
or through STP.
To use an MGW as an STP, ensure that the MGW supports MTP3/M3UA signaling transfer.
Procedure
TDM transmission
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC to add an Originating Signaling
Point (OSP). In this step, set OSP code bits to BIT14(BIT14).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MGW as the
destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 24 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)
95
signaling point code of the MGW, DSP type to STP, DSP bear type to M3UA,
and Adjacent flag to YES(DIRECT_CONNECT).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 link set. In
this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 link to the
link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set
index set in 3.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In this
step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2 and Signalling link set index to the
Signalling link set index set in 3.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MSC as the
signaling point code of the MSC, DSP type to A, DSP bear type to MTP3, and
Adjacent flag to NO(NO_DIRECT_CONNECT).
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node. In this
step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6.
IP transmission
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE to add an M3UA local entity.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MGW as the
signaling point code of the MGW, DSP type to STP, DSP bear type to M3UA,
and Adjacent flag to YES(DIRECT_CONNECT).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE to add an M3UA destination
entity. In this step, set Local entity No. to the M3UA Local entity No. set in 1,
DSP index to the DSP index set in 3.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS to add an M3UA signaling link
set. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in
4.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK to add an M3UA link. In this
step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 5, and set
Subrack No., Slot No., and SCTP link No. to the Subrack No., Slot No., and
SCTP link No. set in 2.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route. In this
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MSC as the
signaling point code of the MSC, DSP type to A, DSP bear type to M3UA, and
Adjacent flag to NO(NO_DIRECT_CONNECT).
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE to add an M3UA destination
entity. In this step, set Local entity No. to the M3UA Local entity No. set in 1,
DSP index to the DSP index set in 8.
GBSS
96
10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route. In this
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to check that SCCP DSP state is
set to Accessible.
TDM transmission
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCNNODE to remove the CN node.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT to remove the MTP3 route.
In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6 and Signalling link set
index to the Signalling link set index set in 3.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of the MSC.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT to remove the MTP3 route.
In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2 and Signalling link set
index to the Signalling link set index set in 3.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK to remove the MTP3 link
from the link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link
set index set in 3.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LKS to remove the MTP3 link
set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set
in 3.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of the
MGW.
IP transmission
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3RT to remove the M3UA route. In
this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 9 and Signalling link set index
to the Signalling link set index set in 5.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3DE to remove the M3UA destination
entity. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in
9.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of the MSC.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3RT to remove the M3UA route. In
this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 4 and Signalling link set index
to the Signalling link set index set in 5.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LNK to remove the M3UA link from
the link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set
index set in 5.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LKS to remove the M3UA signaling
link set. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set
in 4.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3DE to remove the M3UA destination
entity. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in
4.
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of the
MGW.
GBSS
97
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SCTPLNK to remove the SCTP link.
10. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LE to remove the M3UA local entity.
----End
Example
//Activating Signaling Transport Point (STP)
//TDM transmission
ADD OPC: NAME="test", SPX=1, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=260;
ADD N7DPC: NAME="MGW", DPX=1, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=270, DPCT=STP,
BEARTYPE=MTP3, NEIGHBOR=YES;
ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DPX=1, NAME="MGWMTP3LKS";
ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=1, SRN=1, SN=0, TCMODE=SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL,
ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS16-0, ASRN=3, ASN=18, MTP2LNKN=1, APN=0,
ATSMASK=TS16-0, LKTATE=64K, NAME="MTP3LNKS1_1";
ADD MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MGWRT";
ADD N7DPC: NAME="MSC", DPX=2, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=280, DPCT=A,
BEARTYPE=MTP3, NEIGHBOR=NO;
ADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MSCRT";
ADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1, DPX=2, DPCGIDX=1, OPNAME="share", CNID=2,
DFDPC=YES, ATransMode=TDM;
//IP transmission
ADD M3LE: LENO=1, SPX=1, ENTITYT= M3UA_IPSP, NAME="LOCALBSC";
ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=1, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=100, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA,
LOCIP1="172.17.15.253", PEERIP1="172.17.12.253", PEERPN=2905,
LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;
ADD N7DPC: NAME="MGW", DPX=1, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=270, DPCT=STP,
BEARTYPE=M3UA, NEIGHBOR=YES;
ADD M3DE: DENO=1, LENO=1, DPX=1, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MGW";
ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DENO=1, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MGWLKS";
ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGLNKID=1, SRN=1, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=100,
NAME="MGWLNK";
ADD M3RT: DENO=1, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MGWM3RT";
ADD N7DPC: NAME="MSC", DPX=2, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=280, DPCT=A,
BEARTYPE=M3UA, NEIGHBOR=NO;
ADD M3DE: DENO=2, LENO=1, DPX=2, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MSCM3DE";
ADD M3RT: DENO=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MSCM3RT";
//Verifying Signaling Transport Point (STP)
DSP N7DPC:;
//Deactivating Signaling Transport Point (STP)
//TDM transmission
RMV GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1;
RMV MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=1;
RMV N7DPC: DPX=2;
RMV MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=1;
RMV MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1;
RMV N7DPC: DPX=1;
//IP transmission
RMV M3RT: DENO=2, SIGLKSX=1;
RMV M3DE: DENO=2;
RMV N7DPC: DPX=2;
RMV M3RT: DENO=1, SIGLKSX=1;
RMV M3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGLNKID=1;
RMV M3LKS: SIGLKSX=1;
RMV M3DE: DENO=1;
RMV N7DPC: DPX=1;
GBSS
98
RMV SCTPLNK: SRN=1, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=100;
RMV M3LE: LENO=1;
GBSS
99
25 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point
Code
14-Digit Signaling Point Code.
Prerequisites
l License
l Others
The CN supports this feature.
Context
Huawei GBSS can be connected to the MSC through the No.7 signaling system. The No.7
signaling system adopts the coding scheme in the 14-bit format. The signaling point code consists
of three sub-fields: sub-field for identifying the world geographical zone where the network is
located; sub-field for identifying the geographical area or network within a specific world zone;
sub-field for identifying the signaling point within a specific geographical area or network.
Procedure
1. At a newly deployed site, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC to add an
Originating Signaling Point (OSP). In this step, set OSP code bits to BIT14
(BIT14).
2. If the OSPs in non-14-bit format have been configured, run the BSC6900 MML
command RMV OPC to remove all the OSPs, and then proceed with Step 1.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 25 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code
100
NOTE
A Signaling Point Code (SPC) must be unique in the signaling network and cannot be
0.BSC6900 does not support configuration of OSPs with different number of bits.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OPC to check that OSPs are in the 14-bit
format.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV OPC to remove all configured OSPs.
----End
Example
//Activating 14-Digit Signaling Point Code
ADD OPC: NAME="test", SPX=1, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=H'2cc7;
//Verifying 14-Digit Signaling Point Code
LST OPC:;
//Deactivating 14-Digit Signaling Point Code
RMV OPC: SPX=1;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 25 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code
101
26 Configuring Discontinuous Reception
(DRX)
Discontinuous Reception (DRX).
Prerequisites
l License
The BCCH, SDCCH, and TCHs have been configured in the test cell.
Context
DRX increases the call duration and standby time of an MS.
Each MS is mapped to a paging group, and each paging group is mapped to a paging sub-channel
in the serving cell. In idle mode, the MS detects the paging messages broadcast by the system
only on the mapped paging sub-channel. The MS blocks other paging sub-channels by powering
off certain hardware. This also saves power.
The configuration of a BTS3012 in TDM mode is taken as an example.
Procedure
CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH to 2 and Multi-Frames in a Cycle on the
Paging CH to 2_M_PERIOD(2 Multiframe Period).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 26 Configuring Discontinuous Reception (DRX)
102
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to forcibly send the
system message to the test cell.
2. Enable an Abis Interface CS Trace task, then select RSL in the test cell.
3. Check the messages with the type of BCCH Information over the Abis interface for
the one whose system-info-type is system-information-3. In the IE control-
channel-description of this message, if bs-ag-blks-res (CCCH Blocks Reserved
for AGCH) is 2 and bs-pa-mfrms (Multi-Frames in a Cycle on the Paging CH) is
0, the system message is correct.
4. Use a MS to make a call to another MS (assume that the IMSI of the called MS is
"M"), and ensure that the call is set up successfully.
5. Check the CS message of the Page Command type over the Abis interface. If the IE
paging-group in this message is M%1000%14%14, the paging group contained in
the paging message is consistent with the settings in the system message. In this case,
the MS can implement DRX by monitoring the paging sub-channel.
NOTE
"%" in M%1000%14%14 indicates the MOD operation, and the group number is in decimal
format.
----End
Example
SET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, BSAGBLKSRES=2,
BSPAMFRAMS=2_M_PERIOD;
SND GCELLSYSMSG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 26 Configuring Discontinuous Reception (DRX)
103
27 Configuring BTS Power Management
BTS Power Management.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
BTS power management enables the BTS to allocate load dynamically based on the actual power
situation, thereby prolonging the working time of the BTS.
Power management is applicable to the following scenarios:
l No mains supply
Soft shutdown: The BTS automatically blocks all TCH TRXs except the BCCH TRX.
Hard shutdown: When the battery capacity drops to a predefined threshold value, the
BTS automatically shuts down all TRXs.
l Unfavorable operating environment
When the temperature inside a BTS cabinet exceeds a predefined threshold value, the
BTS shuts down PAs for some TRXs.
When critical faults occur on a TRX, for example, the VSWR value far exceeds the
limit, the BTS shuts down the TRX.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP. In this step, set Board
Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES) and power management
parameters to appropriate values.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 27 Configuring BTS Power Management
104
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAPMUBP to query the value of Board
Parameter Configuration Enabled.
Expected result: Board Parameter Configuration Enabled is set to YES(YES), and
power management parameters are set based on configurations.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP. In this step, set Board
Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO).
----End
Example
//Activating BTS Power Management
SET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES,
PTYPE=APM30, HTSDF=ENABLE;
//Verifying BTS Power Management
LST BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0;
//Deactivating BTS Power Management
SET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0, CFGFLAG=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 27 Configuring BTS Power Management
105
28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control
Algorithm
Enhanced Power Control Algorithm.
Prerequisites
l License
The BSC to which the test cell belongs is connected to the M2000, and cell-level
counters can be retrieved on the M2000.
Context
Enhanced power control algorithm refers to HUAWEI II power control algorithm.
Power control is a process in which the BSS controls MS or BTS transmit power. Without
affecting the speech quality, power control reduces the interference in the entire network and
decreases power consumption. Power control mainly applies to the network with tight frequency
reuse, high traffic volume, or strong interference. In the GSM network, power control can be
separately performed on the uplink and downlink. It can also be performed on each MS.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set
Power Control Switch to PWR2(Power control II).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR2. In this step, set MR.
Compensation Allowed to YES(Yes), and set AMR MR. Compensation Allowed
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 28 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm
106
to YES(Yes). In addition, adjust Huawei II power control parameters or set them to
their default values.
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCCH to improve the
effect of handover and power control when the BCCH participates in baseband
frequency hopping. In this step, set PWRC to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML
command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set Power Control and Handover
CMP CON Sw to YES(Yes).
1. Configure two cells, cell 0 and cell 1, on the BSC6900 and set the frequencies of the
BCCH TRXs of the two cells as non co-channel or adjacent-channel frequencies while
the frequencies of the non-BCCH TRXs as co-channel or adjacent-channel
frequencies.
2. Retrieve the following counters related to cell 0 on the M2000.
Table 28-1 Counters for verifying HUAWEI II power control
Measurement Unit Counter Name
Measurement of Power
Control Messages in MR
per Cell
Average MS Power Level of Non-AMR Call
Average BTS Power Level of Non-AMR Call
Ratio of Maximum Downlink Power Duration (%)
Ratio of Maximum Uplink Power Duration (%)
Mean Strength of Downlink Signals
Mean Strength of Uplink Signals
Mean Quality of Downlink Signals
Mean Quality of Uplink Signals
Interference Band
Measurement per TRX
Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 1
Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 1
Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 1
GBSS
107
Receive Quality
Measurement per TRX
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 0)
Quality Rank 1)
Quality Rank 2)
Quality Rank 3)
Quality Rank 4)
Quality Rank 5)
Quality Rank 6)
Quality Rank 7)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 0)
Quality Rank 1)
Quality Rank 2)
Quality Rank 3)
Quality Rank 4)
Quality Rank 5)
Quality Rank 6)
Quality Rank 7)
Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 0)
GBSS
108
Quality Rank 1)
Quality Rank 2)
Quality Rank 3)
Quality Rank 4)
Quality Rank 5)
Quality Rank 6)
Quality Rank 7)
Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive
Quality Rank 0)
Quality Rank 1)
Quality Rank 2)
Quality Rank 3)
Quality Rank 4)
Quality Rank 5)
Quality Rank 6)
Quality Rank 7)

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set UL
PC Allowed and DL PC Allowed of cell 0 and cell 1 to NO(No).
4. Initiate a large number of calls in cell 0 and cell 1.
5. Check the counters for one hour and save them.
PC Allowed and DL PC Allowed of cell 0 and cell 1 to YES(Yes).
Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1 to PWR2(Power control II).
GBSS
109
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR2. In this step, set MR.
Compensation Allowed to YES(Yes), and set AMR MR. Compensation Allowed
to YES(Yes) for cell 0 and cell 1.
11. Compare the measured counter results obtained from Step 10 and Step 5.
Expected result: For the counters related to power level, the power level obtained in
Step 10 is smaller than that obtained in Step 5. For the counters related to interference
band, the value of a counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 10 is larger than
that obtained in Step 5. For the counters related to receive quality, the value of a
counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 10 is larger than that obtained in
Step 5.
----End
Example
//Activating HUAWEI II Power Control Algorithm
SET GCELLPWRBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLSW=PWR2;
SET GCELLPWR2: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MRCOMPREG=YES, AMRMRCOMPREG=YES;
GBSS
110
29 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message
Filter
DTMF Downlink Message Filter.
Prerequisites
l License
A over TDM transmission is used.
Context
CAUTION
After this feature is configured, the processing capability of DSPs is decreased by about 10%.
This feature shields the downlink DTMF messages on the user plane and control plane of the A
interface. In this case, after the call is set up, the called cell phone will not receive DTMF signals.
By shielding downlink DTMF signals, this feature enhances the GBSS network security.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA with Downlink DTMF
Signaling Processing Allowed set to OPEN(Open).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 29 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message Filter
111
1. Use an MS to make a call to another MS. During the call, press a key on either MS.
Expected result: The peer end cannot hear clear DTMF tones but silence.
Signaling Processing Allowed set to CLOSE(Close).
3. Repeat Step 1.
Expected result: The peer end hears clear DTMF tones.
Signaling Processing Allowed set to CLOSE(Close).
----End
Example
//Activating DTMF downlink message filter
SET OTHSOFTPARA: DLDTMFPRCSW=OPEN;
//Deactivating DTMF downlink message filter
SET OTHSOFTPARA: DLDTMFPRCSW=CLOSE;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 29 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message Filter
112
30 Configuring High Speed Signaling
High Speed Signaling.
Prerequisites
This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP or
GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.
l Dependency on License
l Other prerequisites
The MSC supports high-speed signaling.
TDM transmission is applied over the A interface.
The EIUa/OIUa board is configured.
The OPC and DPC are configured.
Context
This feature is characterized by:
l High capacity
The BSC is not limited by the capacity of a single signaling point when narrowband
signaling is used. This feature not only meets the requirements for signaling link bandwidth
of large capacity processing capability but also saves operators' signaling resources and
simplifies network topology.
l Flexible bandwidth configuration
The high-speed signaling link bandwidth is N x 64 kbit/s. Where, N ranges from 1 to 31.
Operators can flexibly configure the high-speed signaling link bandwidth based on the
traffic volume to reduce the transmission cost.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 30 Configuring High Speed Signaling
113
l Short delay
High-speed signaling links carry signaling data using multiple timeslots. This reduces the
transmission delay of signaling data over the A interface especially in off-peak hours,
reducing the call setup duration.
Generally, high-speed signaling links are used for terrestrial transmission. Satellite transmission
does not use high-speed signaling links.
WARNING
Reconfiguring the signaling link over the A interface will disrupt the services of the BSC6900.
Therefore, perform the operation when the traffic is light, for example, in the early morning.
The whole process (including board restart) takes about 10 minutes.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 to add an E1/T1 on the A interface.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling link
set.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK. In this step, set Link Bear
Type to MTP2(MTP2) and Link rate type to 2M(2Mbit/s).
NOTE
In BM/TC separated mode where the TCS is configured remotely, you are advised to set Ater
Mask of the MTP3 signaling links on the main TCS to values rather than TS1.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST MTP3LNK to query the information about
the MTP3 signaling link.
Expected result: The value of Link rate type is 2Mbit/s.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK. In this step, set Signalling
link set index and Signalling link code.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT. In this step, set DSP index and
Signalling link set index.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LKS. In this step, set Signalling link
set index.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV AE1T1 to remove an E1/T1 on the A
interface.
----End
Example
/*Activation procedure*/
//Configuring an E1/T1 over the A Interface
ADD AE1T1: SRN=0, SN=12, PN=1, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC,
GBSS
114
BSCFLAG=MAINBSC, STCIC=0;
//Configuring an MTP3 signaling link set
ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=0, NAME="123";
//Configuring an MTP3 signaling link
ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2,
TCMODE=SEPERATE_BSC_INTERFACE, ATERIDX=1,
ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS1
1-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1
&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1,
MTP2LNKN=1, LKTATE=2M, NAME="123";
//Adding an MTP3 signaling route
ADD MTP3RT: DPX=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="111";
/*Deactivation procedure*/
//Removing an MTP3 signaling link
//Removing an MTP3 signaling route
//Removing an MTP3 signaling link set
RMV MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0;
//Removing an E1/T1 over the A interface
RMV AE1T1: SRN=0, SN=12, PN=1;
GBSS
115
31 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call
Guaranteed Emergency Call.
Prerequisites
l License
l Others Prerequisites
The MSC is enabled with the eMLPP function.
Context
The Guaranteed Emergency Call feature is introduced to increase the setup success rate of
emergency calls to the greatest extent. Therefore, normal communications are ensured in disaster
relief activities.
This feature has the following characteristics:
l Emergency calls are preferentially assigned full-rate TCHs (TCHFs) in the immediate
assignment phase.
l The system reserves TCHFs for the MSs making emergency calls.
l The MSs making emergency calls preempt the channels occupied by low-priority calls.
Without this feature, the TCHs occupied by emergency calls can be preempted by high-priority
calls. After this feature is enabled, emergency calls can preempt the TCHs occupied by other
calls when there is no idle TCH. Emergency calls, however, cannot preempt the TCHs occupied
by other emergency calls.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 31 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call
116
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to query the value of
Priority of Emergency Call. If the value of Priority of Emergency Call is 15, this
feature is not activated.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Priority of
Emergency Call to an appropriate value, for example, 1.
Max Channel Num Reserved for EC to an appropriate value, for example, 2.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Emergency
Call Preemption Permitted to ON(On).
5. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLTMR. In this step, set
Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC to an appropriate value, for example, 15.
Priority of Emergency Call.
Expected result: The value of Priority of Emergency Call is 1.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCHMGBASIC to query the value
of Max Channel Num Reserved for EC.
Expected result: The value of Max Channel Num Reserved for EC is 2.
Emergency Call Preemption Permitted.
Expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is ON(On).
4. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLTMR to query the value
of Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC.
Expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is 15.
5. Use an MS to make an emergency call.
All the TCHs in the cell are occupied by common calls and there are no idle TCHs.
There exists a call whose priority is lower than the priority of the emergency call and
the channel resources of the call can be preempted.
Expected result: A call in the cell is released because its resources are preempted.
6. The MS makes the emergency call successfully. An SDCCH is assigned in the
immediate assignment phase and a TCHF is assigned in the assignment phase.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Priority of
Emergency Call to 15.
Priority of Emergency Call.
Expected result: The value of Priority of Emergency Call is 15.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Emergency
Call Preemption Permitted to OFF(Off).
Emergency Call Preemption Permitted.
GBSS
117
Expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is OFF
(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating Guaranteed Emergency Call
LST GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CELLID=1;
SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, EMCPRILV=1;
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RSVCHMFORECNUM=2;
SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, PREEMPTIONPERMIT=ON;
SET GCELLTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, WAITRESVCHANREFRESHTIMER=15;
//Deactivating Guaranteed Emergency Call
SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, EMCPRILV=15;
SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, PREEMPTIONPERMIT=OFF;
GBSS
118
32 Configuring License Control for Urgency
License Control for Urgency.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
CAUTION
This feature is enabled only in scenarios where the traffic volume increases abruptly, for
example, in a disaster.
This function can be performed only three times for each R version and it is valid only in seven
days since it is enabled.
After this feature is enabled, the network capacity can reach the maximum supported by the
hardware.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace
Protection Period Switch to ON(ON).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LICUSAGE to check the resource items of
the license.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 32 Configuring License Control for Urgency
119
The returned result shows that all the values of the resource items reach the maximum.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LICENSECTRL to query the setting of
Grace Protection Period Switch State.
Expected result: In the returned result, there are the settings of Remaining Grace
Protection Times and Remaining Grace Protection Days, and Grace Protection
Period Switch State is set to ON.
3. On the next day (later than 1 a.m.) after this feature is enabled, check whether the
event EVT-22812 Operation of Maximum License Capacity is reported by the alarm
console of BSC6900.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace
Protection Period Switch to OFF(OFF).
----End
Example
SET LICENSECTRL: SWITCH=ON;
SET LICENSECTRL: SWITCH=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 32 Configuring License Control for Urgency
120
33 Configuring the satellite transmission on
the Pb interface
Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
l If terrestrial lines between the BSC and the external PCU cannot be installed or the
installation cost of the terrestrial lines is high, satellite transmission can be deployed on the
Pb interface.
l The transmission delay over the G-Abis interface of a satellite-capable cell is longer than
that over the G-Abis interface of an ordinary cell. If the same amount of data is transmitted
by these two types of cell, it takes longer time for the satellite-capable cell to wait for a
response message from the MS. Therefore, the transmission performance of a satellite-
capable cell is worse than that of an ordinary cell. Under the condition that the average
downlink rate of an MS is not affected, the network reduces the maximum number of
downlink PDCHs allocated to the MS so that the time required for the RLC sending window
to overflow is prolonged.
Procedure
1. Configure satellite transmission on the Pb interface on the LMT.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PBE1T1. In this step, set Transmission
Mode to SATEL(Satellite Transmission).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 33 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface
121
NOTE
The value of Start PCIC must be a multiple of 128.
After satellite transmission is applied on the Pb E1 link, the Pb signaling link automatically
switches to the satellite transmission mode accordingly.
2. Configure satellite transmission on the Pb interface through PCU LocalWS.
Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate a cell.
Run the pcu add sattrans<LCNo> yes command to configure satellite
transmission for the cell.
Run the mt gcell active <LCNo> command to activate the cell.
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step,
set T3168 to 2000ms(2000ms), T3192 to 0ms(0ms), and BS_CV_MAX to 15.
1. Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate the cell.
2. Run the pcu add sattrans<LCNo> yes command to configure satellite transmission
for the cell.
3. Run the mt gcell active<LCNo> command to activate the cell.
4. Run the mt gcell show stat<LCNo> command to verify that the state of the cell is
UNBLOCK.
5. Use the MS to perform PS services. PS services are normally performed.
1. Disable satellite transmission on the Pb interface on the LMT.
Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD PBE1T1. In this step, set Transmission
Mode to TRRS(Terrestrial Transmission).
2. Configure terrestrial transmission on the Pb interface through PCU LocalWS.
Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate the cell.
Run the pcu set sattrans<LCNo> no command to configure terrestrial
transmission for the cell.
Run the mt gcell active <LCNo> command to activate the cell.
set T3168 to 500ms(500ms), T3192 to 500ms(500ms), and BS_CV_MAX to 10.
----End
Example
/*Activating Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface*/
ADD PBE1T1: SRN=0, SN=20, PN=0, PCUNO=0, SPCIC=0, TNMODE=SATEL;
/*Deactivating Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface*/
MOD PBE1T1: SRN=0, SN=20, PN=0, TNMODE=SATEL, OPMODE=MODRANGETS,
STARTTS=4, ENDTS=32, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 33 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface
122
34 Configuring Connection with TMA
Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier).
Prerequisites
l Hardware Dependencies for Common TMA
The RRU3004 does not support the connection with a common TMA.
The RRU3008 and RRU3908 support the connection with a common TMA.
The GRFU and MRFU support the connection with a common TMA.
The DRFU supports the connection with a common TMA through the GATM board.
l Hardware Dependencies for Smart TMA
The 3012 series base stations do not support the configuration of the smart TMA.
A 3900 or 3036 series base station with the GATM board does not support the
configuration of the smart TMA.
A 3900 or 3036 series base station with the RXU board does not support the
configuration of the smart TMA in non-SRAN mode.
An antenna device is numbered uniquely within a site. In addition, the device number
of a Remote Electrical Tilt (RET) and that of a TMA must be different within a site.
l License
Context
Installed on the tower top, the TMA is a device for amplifying uplink signals. As an optional
component of the antenna system, the TMA compensates for the feeder loss caused by a long
feeder to improve the uplink sensitivity and converge. In a network whose uplink coverage is
limited, the TMA can be installed to improve the receiver sensitivity and expand the cell radius,
reducing the number of BTSs and minimizing investments.
If a BTS is configured with the TMA, users must configure the BTS-related parameters based
on the actual RF antenna port, power supply mode, and TMA characteristics.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 34 Configuring Connection with TMA
123
Procedure
l Activation Procedure for a Common TMA
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP to configure TMA data after
setting Antenna Tributary 1 Flag, Antenna Tributary 1 Factor, Antenna
Tributary 2 Flag, and Antenna Tributary 2 Factor.
l Activation Procedure for a Smart TMA
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP to turn on the power switches
for antenna ports.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to scan antenna devices.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTMA to add a smart TMA.
4. Optional: To modify the attributes of a TMA subunit, run the BSC6900 MML
command MOD BTSTMASUBUNIT.
5. Optional: To modify the attributes of a TMA device, run the BSC6900 MML
command MOD BTSTMADEVICEDATA.
l Verification Procedure for a Common TMA
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXUBP to query the TMA-related
parameters, including Antenna Tributary 1 Flag, Antenna Tributary 1 Factor,
Antenna Tributary 2 Flag, and Antenna Tributary 2 Factor.
2. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace. On the Trace Navigation Tree pane, navigate
to Trace > GSM Services > Abis Interface CS Trace. On the Basic tab page of the
displayed dialog box, select RSL under Trace Type. On the RSL tab page, select
DCM(Measurement Report) under Message Type, select TRX under Filter Flag,
and then specify the TRX ID.
3. For the RRU or RFU board whose RF feeder is attached with the TMA, perform a
dialing test to occupy the channel. Then, check the measured level reported by the
BTS.
Expected result: The Uplink RxLev specified in the Measurement Report message is
normal.
l Verification Procedure for a Smart TMA
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to check whether the
antenna devices are functioning.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSTMA to query the information of a smart
TMA.
l Deactivation Procedure for a Common TMA
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP to configure the TMA data. In
this step:
Set Antenna Tributary 1 Flag to NO(NO).
Set Antenna Tributary 2 Flag to NO(NO).
l Deactivation Procedure for a Smart TMA
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSTMA to remove a smart TMA.
----End
Example
//Activating a common TMA
SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3,
GBSS
124
RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=SGL_ANTENNA, HAVETT1=YES, ATTENFACTOR1=5,
HAVETT2=YES, ATTENFACTOR2=10;
//Activating a smart TMA
SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=3,
RXUTYPE=MRRU, PwrSwitchRET=ON, THRESHOLDTYPERET=UER_SELF_DEFINE,
OverCurAlmThdRET=600, OverCurClrThdRET=300, UnderCurAlmThdRET=50,
UnderCurClrThdRET=100;
STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=3;
ADD BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1, DEVICENAME="tafang",
PWRSUPPLYTYPE=SINGLE_PORT_POWER, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4,
CTRLPORTSN=3, SUBUNITNUM=2;
//Verifying a common TMA
LST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3;
SET FHO: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOMOD=FREE;
//Verifying a smart TMA
STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=3;
DSP BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1;
//Deactivating a common TMA
RXUTYPE=DRFU, HAVETT1=NO, HAVETT2=NO;
//Deactivating a smart TMA
RMV BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1;
GBSS
125
35 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt
Remote Electrical Tilt.
Prerequisites
The base station is connected to a remote electrical tilt (RET) antenna properly.
The power switch for an RET antenna is turned on. The overcurrent and undercurrent
thresholds are checked since they are related to the number of RET antennas installed
on a board.
l License
Context
With this feature activated, users can remotely adjust the tilt of an RET antenna to optimize
network performance.
Procedure
l The following operations are applicable to the version V100R012 or later:
Activation Procedure
1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set
RET ALD Power Switch, RET ALD Over Current Occur Threshold, RET ALD
Over Current Clear Threshold, RET ALD Under Current Occur Threshold, and
RET ALD Under Current Clear Threshold to appropriate values.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to start an RET antenna
scanning task.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRET to add an RET antenna.
NOTE
For vendor information, see the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 35 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt
126
4. Optional: To modify parameters concerning an RET antenna subunit, run the
BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSRETSUBUNIT.
5. Optional: To modify parameters concerning the attributes of an RET device, run the
BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSRETDEVICEDATA.
6. Optional: To set the tilt angle of an RET antenna, run the BSC6900 MML
command MOD BTSRETTILT.
Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to check whether an RET
antenna scanning task has been started.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRET to query the dynamic information
on an RET antenna.
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRETSUBUNIT to query the
dynamic information on an RET antenna subunit.
Deactivation Procedure
l The following operations are applicable to the version V100R009 or earlier:
Activation Procedure
1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set
RET ALD Power Switch, RET ALD Over Current Occur Threshold, RET ALD
Over Current Clear Threshold, RET ALD Under Current Occur Threshold, and
RET ALD Under Current Clear Threshold to appropriate values.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to start an RET antenna
scanning task.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRET to add an RET antenna.
NOTE
For vendor information, see the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.
4. Optional: To set the tilt angle of an RET antenna, run the BSC6900 MML
command SET BTSRETANTTILT.
Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to check whether an RET
antenna scanning task has been started.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRETANTTILT to query the tilt range
of the RET antenna and it's current tilt angle.
Deactivation Procedure
----End
Example
l The following scripts are applicable to the version V100R012 or later:
SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
RXUNAME="rru1", RXUTYPE=MRRU, PwrSwitchRET=ON;
STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4,
GBSS
127
CTRLPORTSN=0;
ADD BTSRET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="tianxian",
CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0,
CTRLPORTNO=0, RETTYPE=MULTI_RET, SUBUNITNUM=1, SCENARIO=REGULAR,
VENDORCODE="AA", SERIALNO="123456";
MOD BTSRETSUBUNIT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1,
TILT=50;
MOD BTSRETDEVICEDATA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1,
BEARING=50, MODELNO="1";
MOD BTSRETTILT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, OPMODE=DEVICENO, DEVICENO=0,
TILT=45;
CTRLPORTSN=0;
DSP BTSRET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0;
DSP BTSRETSUBUNIT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0;
l The following scripts are applicable to the version V100R009 or earlier:
SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
RXUNAME="rru1", RXUTYPE=MRRU, PwrSwitchRET=ON;
CTRLPORTSN=0;
ADD BTSRET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="tianxian",
CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0,
CTRLPORTNO=0, RETTYPE=MULTI_RET, SUBUNITNUM=1, SCENARIO=REGULAR,
VENDORCODE="AA", SERIALNO="123456";
SET BTSRETANTTILT: OPMODE=DEVICENO, BTSIDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9,
DEVICENO=0, TILT=45;
CTRLPORTSN=0;
DSP BTSRETANTTILT: OPMODE=SITE, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9;
GBSS
128
36 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive
Diversity
2-Antenna Receive Diversity.
Prerequisites
The BTS3006C or BTS3002E is configured with the DATM board.
The BTS3012 or BTS3012AE is configured with the DATU board.
The BTS3900, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L that uses the DRFU is configured with the
GATM board.
l License
Context
Two-antenna receive diversity is an effective approach of reducing signal attenuation by using
two antennas to receive a signal at the reception end, where two received signals are combined
after processing.
The following procedures assume that two-antenna receive diversity is configured for a DRFU
of a BTS3900.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRFU
Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+2RX]).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 36 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity
129
NOTE
Based on the type and number of TRX boards, the receiving and sending mode can be set to
SGLDOUBLE_ANTENNA(Single Feeder[1TX + 2RX]), DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double
Feeder[2TX + 2RX]), or DOUBLEDOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[1TX + 2RX])
to meet site requirements.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXUBP to query the receiving and
sending mode of the TRX board.
Expected result: DRFU Sending Receiving Mode is set to DOUBLE_ANTENNA
(Double Feeder[2TX + 2RX]).
----End
Example
RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=DOUBLE_ANTENNA;
//Verifying 2-Antenna Receive Diversity
LST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=153, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 36 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity
130
37 Configuring BTS Clock
BTS Clock.
Prerequisites
When the synchronization with the GPS clock is configured, the DBS3900/BTS3900/
BTS3900A must be configured with the USCU.
When the synchronization with the BITS clock is configured, the DBS3900/BTS3900/
BTS3900A must be configured with the USCU.
l License
Context
l The synchronization of the BTS clock provides the basis for the frame synchronization.
The BTS uses the synchronization clock to obtain the reference clock source for the internal
frame synchronization.
l The BTS supports three clock synchronization modes: synchronization with the Abis clock,
synchronization with the GPS clock, and synchronization with the BITS clock. In addition,
the BTS internal clock can work in free-run mode to temporarily provide a stable reference
clock source for the BTS.
Procedure
Synchronization with the Abis clock (default mode)
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA. In this step, set Clock
Type to TRCBSC_CLK(Trace BSC Clock).
Synchronization with the GPS clock
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to
TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock).
Synchronization with the BITS clock
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 37 Configuring BTS Clock
131
EXTSYN_CLK(External Sync Clock).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSCLK to query the current configuration
of the system clock.
Expected result:
If... Then...
The clock information corresponds to
the clock type configured
The configuration is successful.
The clock information is inconsistent
with the configuration
The configuration is unsuccessful.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSATTR to query the attributes of the
BTS. Here,
Set List Object to SITE(By Site).
Select CLKATTR(CLKATTR) under the BTS Attribute check box.
Expected result: Clock attribute is Available.
----End
Example
//Configure the Synchronization with the Abis clock.
SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=TRCBSC_CLK;
//Configure the Synchronization with the GPS clock
SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK;
//Configure the Synchronization with the BITS clock
SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=EXTSYN_CLK;
LST BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;
DSP BTSATTR: OBJTP=SITE, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, SITEATTR=CLKATTR;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 37 Configuring BTS Clock
132
38 Configuring Voice Fault Detection
Voice Fault Detection.
Prerequisites
The crosstalk detection function cannot be used together with the features
GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch, GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch, GBFD-115701
TFO, GBFD-115702 TrFO, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, and GBFD-118601
Abis over IP.
The one-way audio detection function cannot be used together with the features
GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch and GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch.
l License
The crosstalk detection function can be enabled only in A over TDM transmission mode.
Context
This feature provides alarm mechanisms for crosstalk and one-way audio. The BSC records the
number of times of crosstalk and one-way audio occurrences periodically. If the number exceeds
a specified threshold, the BSC reports the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm.
Procedure
l Activation procedure for One-Way Audio Detection
Ater or Abis over TDM
1. Run the BSC6900SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set One-Way Mute
Alarm Reporting Period to 12, Speech Channel Alarm Threshold to 10,
Speech Channel Alarm Clearance Threshold to 6, One-Way Audio Log
Type to LEV2_MUTETEST_LOG_REC, and Force HO Upon Speech
Problem to an appropriate value.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 38 Configuring Voice Fault Detection
133
2. Run the BSC6900SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Mute Detect
Class1 Switch to ENABLE(ENABLE), Period of Mute Detect Class1 to 5,
Exceptional Frame Threshold of Mute Detect Class1 to 25, Mute Detect Class2
Switch to ENABLE(ENABLE), Period of Mute Detect Class2 TRAU Frame
to 2, and Period of Mute Detect Class2 to 4.
NOTE
If the proportion of bad frames to all speech frames exceeds the threshold specified in
Exceptional Frame Threshold of Mute Detect Class1 in the measurement period specified in
Period of Mute Detect Class1, one-way audio may have occurred. Then the one-way audio
detection class 2 starts. If no test speech frame is received in the measurement period specified
in Period of Mute Detect Class2, the one-way audio is confirmed, and the BSC records a one-
way audio occurrence. If the number of times of one-way audio occurrences exceeds the threshold
specified in Speech Channel Alarm Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-
Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period, the BSC reports the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm.
If the number of times of one-way audio occurrences is smaller than the threshold specified in
Speech Channel Alarm Clearance Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-
Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period, the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm is cleared. If Force
HO Upon Speech Problem is set to ON(On), the BSC hands over the calls to another cell to
avoid voice faults when detecting one-way audio class 2.
A, Ater, or Abis over IP
Alarm Reporting Period to 12, Speech Channel Alarm Threshold to 10,
Speech Channel Alarm Clearance Threshold to 6, and One-Way Audio Log
Type to IP_MUTETEST_LOG_REC.
Class1 Switch to ENABLE(ENABLE), Period of Mute Detect Class1 to 5,
Exceptional Frame Threshold of Mute Detect Class1 to 25, and Speech
Channel Alarm Threshold to an appropriate value.
NOTE
If the proportion of bad frames to all speech frames exceeds the threshold specified in
Exceptional Frame Threshold of Mute Detect Class1 in the measurement period specified in
Period of Mute Detect Class1, the BSC records a one-way audio occurrence. If the number of
times of one-way audio occurrences exceeds the threshold specified in Speech Channel Alarm
Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period,
the BSC reports the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm. If the number of times of one-way audio
occurrences is smaller than the threshold specified in Speech Channel Alarm Clearance
Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period,
the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm is cleared.
l Activation procedure for Crosstalk Detection
Alarm Reporting Period to 12, Speech Channel Alarm Threshold to 10, Speech
Channel Alarm Clearance Threshold to 6, Force HO Upon Speech Problem to
an appropriate value, and do not set Cross Call Detect Time Threshold to 255.
GBSS
134
NOTE
The Cross Call Detect Time Threshold specifies the tolerance duration for crosstalk. If the duration
of crosstalk exceeds the threshold specified in Cross Call Detect Time Threshold, the BSC records
a crosstalk occurrence. If the number of times of crosstalk occurrences exceeds the threshold specified
in Speech Channel Alarm Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute
Alarm Reporting Period, the BSC reports the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm. If the number
of times of crosstalk occurrences is smaller than the threshold specified in Speech Channel Alarm
Clearance Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute Alarm Reporting
Period, the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm is cleared. If Force HO Upon Speech Problem is
set to ON(On), the BSC hands over the calls to another cell to avoid voice faults when detecting
crosstalk.
1. When crosstalk or one-way audio occurs, view Dynamic Alarms.
Expected result: The BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm exists with Failure
Type being Crosstalk or One-way Audio.
NOTE
If the number of times of actual crosstalk or one-way audio occurrences exceeds the threshold
specified in Speech Channel Alarm Threshold, the LMT reports the BSS Internal Voice
Channel Alarm.
l Deactivation procedure for One-Way Audio Detection
Ater or Abis over TDM
Class1 Switch to DISABLE(DISABLE) and Mute Detect Class2 Switch to
DISABLE(DISABLE).
A, Ater, or Abis over IP
Class1 Switch to DISABLE(DISABLE).
l Deactivation procedure for Crosstalk Detection
1. Run the BSC6900SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set Cross Call Detect
Time Threshold to 255.
----End
Example
//Activating One-Way Audio Detection in Ater or Abis over TDM transmission
mode by running the following commands:
1. SET BSCBASIC: SpeechAlmPeriod=12, SPEECHCHANALARMTHRES=10,
SPEECHCHANRESUMEALARMTHRES=6,
MuteTestLogStyle=LEV1_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0&LEV2_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-1&IP_MUTET
EST_LOG_REC-0&CIC_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0, SpeechErrorForceHOSwitch=OFF;
2. SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCMUTEDETECTFLAG=ENABLE,
MUTECHECKCLASS1PERIOD=5, EXCEPFRAMETHRES=25,
MUTECHECKCLASS2SWITCH=ENABLE, DETECTFRAMEPERIOD=2, MUTECHECKPEIROD=4;
//Activating One-Way Audio Detection in A, Ater, or Abis over IP
transmission mode by running the following commands:
1. SET BSCBASIC: SpeechAlmPeriod=12, SPEECHCHANALARMTHRES=10,
SPEECHCHANRESUMEALARMTHRES=6,
MuteTestLogStyle=LEV1_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0EV2_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0&IP_MUTETES
T_LOG_REC-1&CIC_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0, SpeechErrorForceHOSwitch=OFF;
2. SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCMUTEDETECTFLAG=ENABLE,
MUTECHECKCLASS1PERIOD=5, EXCEPFRAMETHRES=25;
//Activating Crosstalk Detection by running the following commands:
1. SET BSCBASIC: CROCALTMTHRD=64, SpeechAlmPeriod=12,
GBSS
135
SPEECHCHANALARMTHRES=10, SPEECHCHANRESUMEALARMTHRES=6,
SpeechErrorForceHOSwitch=OFF;
2. SET GCELLBTSSOFTPARA: CROCALCHKSW=ON;
//Deactivating One-Way Audio Detection in Ater or Abis over TDM
transmission mode by running the following command:
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCMUTEDETECTFLAG=DISABLE,
MUTECHECKCLASS2SWITCH=DISABLE;
//Deactivating One-Way Audio Detection in A, Ater, or Abis over IP
transmission mode by running the following command:
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCMUTEDETECTFLAG=DISABLE;
//Deactivating Crosstalk Detection by running the following command:
SET BSCBASIC: CROCALTMTHRD=255;
GBSS
136
39 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common
CPRI Interface (GBTS)
Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS).
Prerequisites
As Figure 39-1 shows, the hardware of the base station is installed.
Figure 39-1 Network topology of Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface

NOTE
As Figure 39-1 shows, CPRI0, CPRI1, and CPRI2 on the GTMU board are respectively connected
to one CPRI port on the WBBP board. CPRI3, CPRI4, and CPRI5 are connected to the RRU3908.
l License
GBSS
39 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface
(GBTS)
137
Context
In the traditional GSM+UMTS dual-mode solution, the GSM and UMTS base stations use the
same site. Different RF modules are used for different radio standards and therefore separate
optical cables are required. As a result, many optical cables are required for the entire system,
which increases the deployment cost. After this feature is applied, the demand of optical cables
is reduced by 50%, which helps reduce the cost of the optical modules and optical cables and
reduce the expense in the installation and maintenance of the optical cables between the BBU
and RF modules.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSSFPMODE to configure the switching
relation of the SFP ports and switch the data of CPRI0, CPRI1, and CPRI2 on the
GTMU to CPRI3, CPRI4, and CPRI5 on the GTMU.
NOTE
The switching relation of the SFP ports is configured only on the GSM side.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSSFPMODE to query the configurations
of the SFP ports.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSSFPMODE to remove the SFP port
switching relation.
----End
Example
ADD BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0,
SWITCHPORTNO=3;
LST BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0;
RMV BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0;
GBSS
39 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface
(GBTS)
138
40 Configuring PBT
Power Boost Technology (PBT).
Prerequisites
BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012 (QTRU), BTS3012AE (QTRU), DBS3900
(RRU3008), BTS3900A (GRFU), BTS3900L (GRFU), BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do
not support PBT currently.
When a double-transceiver TRX board uses PBT, only channel 0 is configured with one
carrier.
l License
Context
PBT aims to increase the downlink transmit power to extend network coverage. In PBT mode,
only one carrier is configured for a double-transceiver TRX board. A signal transmitted from
the carrier is modulated and then converted into a radio frequency (RF) signal, known as DA
conversion. Then, the RF signal is transmitted to two power amplifiers (PAs). After being
amplified, the two signals are combined and output. The transmit power is increased because
the two signals are aligned accurately. This increases downlink signal strength. PBT is applicable
to wide coverage areas.
The following procedure illustrates how to configure PBT for the DTRU on a BTS3012.
Figure 40-1 shows connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in PBT mode.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 40 Configuring PBT
139
Figure 40-1 Connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in PBT mode
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to
PBT(PBT).
NOTE
In PBT mode, the single carrier must be configured on channel 0.
GBSS
140
1. Optional: Use an MS to make a call.
NOTE
This operation is required if the test TRX does not carry a BCCH carrier. This operation can be
skipped if the test TRX carries a BCCH carrier.
NONE(None). Then, use an optical power meter to measure the power of the test base
station, and record the measurement result.
PBT(PBT).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to check the value of Send
Mode.
Expected result: Send Mode is set to PBT(PBT).
5. Use the optical power meter to measure the power of the test base station, and record
the measurement result.
6. Compare the measurement result obtained in step 2 with that obtained in step 5.
Expected result: The power measured in step 5 is greater than that measured in step
2. This indicates that PBT has taken effect.
----End
Example
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=PBT;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=NONE;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=PBT;
LST GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TRXID=0;
GBSS
141
41 Configuring Transmit Diversity
Transmit Diversity (TD).
Prerequisites
BTS3012 (QTRU), BTS3012AE (QTRU), BTS3900A (GRFU), BTS3900L (GRFU),
BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support TD currently.
When a double-transceiver TRX board uses TD, only channel 0 is configured with one
carrier.
The cell where TD is applied has at least one dual-polarized antenna or two single-
polarized antennas.
l License
Context
In TD mode, one baseband signal is transmitted through two radio frequency (RF) channels.
This prevents signal levels from changing dramatically and also prevents signal quality from
dropping since there is no correlation between two antennas. As an effect of this, service quality
for users that move at a low speed is improved and the downlink network coverage is expanded.
To sum up, TD improves the downlink signal quality and meets the requirements of high signal
quality in some special areas.
The following procedure illustrates how to configure TD for the DRRU on a GSM DBS3900.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRRU
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 41 Configuring Transmit Diversity
142
DIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity).
NONE(None).
2. Use an optical power meter to measure the power of the test base station, and record
the measurement result.
Expected result: The power is 0.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRRU
DIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity).
5. Use an optical power meter to measure the power of channel B, and record the
measurement result.
Expected result: The power is not 0, which indicates that TD has taken effect.
----End
Example
RXUTYPE=DRRU, SndRcvMode=DOUBLE_ANTENNA, Lvl1Vswr=22, Lvl2Vswr=30;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8, SNDMD=DIVERSITY;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=NONE;
RXUTYPE=DRRU, SndRcvMode=DOUBLE_ANTENNA, Lvl1Vswr=22, Lvl2Vswr=30;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8, SNDMD=DIVERSITY;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 41 Configuring Transmit Diversity
143
42 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity
4-Way Receiver Diversity. The 4-way receive diversity combines 4-way receive signals to
optimize the quality of uplink signals.
Prerequisites
The BTS3012 (QTRU), BTS3012AE (QTRU), DBS3900 (RRU3004/RRU3008),
BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L(GRFU), and BTS3900B/BTS3900E do not support
this feature.
A DTRU board that adopts the 4-way receive diversity technique can be configured
with only one carrier.
The cell has two dual-polarized antennas or four single-polarized antennas.
l License
Context
The 4-way receive diversity enables signals from four directions to be transmitted to a single
carrier simultaneously. The carrier then combines these 4-way receive signals to improve uplink
receive sensitivity. In this way, this technique optimizes the quality of uplink signals to meet the
demanding requirements for radio communications in certain cases and to improve the uplink
performance in wide network coverage scenarios.
The following procedures assume that the 4-way receive diversity is configured for two
associated DRFUs of a BTS3900.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 42 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity
144
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRFU
Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX
+4RX]).
NOTE
The two associated DRFUs must be configured simultaneously.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Receive
Mode to FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver).
NOTE
l If the carrier of a double-transceiver TRX board is configured on channel 0, Send Mode can be
set to DTIC(Transmit Independency or Combination), PBT(PBT), DIVERSITY(Transmit
Diversity), DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity), or DPBT(DPBT).
l If the carrier of the double-transceiver TRX board is configured on channel 1, Send Mode must
be set to DTIC(Transmit Independency or Combination).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query the attributes of the
TRX board.
Expected result: Receive Mode is set to FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity
Receiver).
----End
Example
//Activating 4-Way Receiver Diversity
RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA;
RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, RCVMD=FOURDIVERSITY;
//Verifying 4-Way Receiver Diversity
LST GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=9, TRXID=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 42 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity
145
43 Configuring Dynamic Transmit
Diversity
Dynamic Transmit Diversity.
Prerequisites
BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012(DTRU), BTS3012AE(DTRU), DBS3900,
BTS3900(DRFU/MRFUe), BTS3900A(DRFU/MRFUe) and BTS3900L(DRFU/
MRFUe) support the feature dynamic transmit diversity currently.
The test cell has at least one dual-polarized antenna or two single-polarized antennas.
The feature depends on the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.
This feature is mutually exclusive with the following features: GBFD-113701
Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping), GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping
and GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.
This feature is mutually exclusive with the following feature when multi-carrier RRU
dynamic TX diversity is used: GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing(Dual PA power
sharing)
l License
Context
In dynamic transmit diversity mode, the transmit diversity technique is applied to two carriers'
same timeslots only. The two carriers belong to a double-transceiver TRX board. After these
timeslots are released, they stop using the transmit diversity technique to transmit signals. The
dynamic transmit diversity technique makes full use of idle timeslots, improves signal quality
in rural areas, and strikes a balance between system capacity and network coverage by
dynamically adjusting network coverage or system capacity according to the actual situation in
the live network.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 43 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity
146
The following operation illustrates how to configure the dynamic transmit diversity technique
for the DTRU on a BTS3012.
Procedure
Dynamic Transmission Div Supported to DDIVERSITY(DDIVERSITY).
DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity) for the TRXs in the overlaid subcell.
NOTE
l You can run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXIUO to query the attributes of
TRXs in the overlaid subcell.
l If the dynamic transmit diversity technique is to be applied to a DTRU, two carriers must
be configured and the technique must not be applied to the BCCH carrier.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign
Optimum Layer to SysOpt(System optimization).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXADMSTAT. In this step, set
Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for carriers except the BCCH carrier and those
carriers whose send mode is not DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity).
CAUTION
Setting Administrative State for the TRX to Lock(Lock) may causes congestion in
the cell where the TRX is located.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, set
Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TCH or TCHF of the BCCH carrier.
CAUTION
Setting Administrative State for the TCH or TCHF of main BCCH carrier to Lock
(Lock) may causes congestion in the cell where the TRX is located.
4. Monitor the status of the TCH or TCHF by referring toMonitoring Channel Status,
and use an MS to make an emergency call.
NOTE
A TCH in the overlaid subcell is assigned to the MS only when the uplink receive level of the
SDCCH meets the following conditions: The difference between the assign-optimum-level
threshold and the PBT gain is smaller than the SDCCH uplink receive level. The SDCCH uplink
receive level is smaller than the assign-optimum-level threshold. The default assign-optimum-
level threshold is 35 while the default PBT gain is 4. You can change the assign-optimum-level
threshold according to the SDCCH uplink receive level to enable the system to assign a channel
to the overlaid subcell. In this way, dynamic transmit diversity can be triggered.
Expected result: Checking the channel monitoring tab page on the BSC6900 LMT,
you can find that the emergency call occupies channels of the two carriers' same
GBSS
147
timeslots. One channel is in the Working state while the other one is in the
Subordinate Channel state.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV, in this step, set Send Mode for
TRXs in the overlaid subcell to other send modes supported by the TRXs.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC, in this step, set
Dynamic Transmission Div Supported to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
Example
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DYNPBTSUPPORTED=DDIVERSITY;
SET GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, TRXID=2, SNDMD=DDIVERSITY;
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPTILAYER=SysOpt;
SET GTRXADMSTAT: TRXID=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;
SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, ADMSTAT=Lock;
SET GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, TRXID=2, SNDMD=NOCOMB;
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DYNPBTSUPPORTED=NOTSUPPORT;
GBSS
148
44 Configuring Dynamic PBT
Dynamic PBT.
Prerequisites
BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012 (QTRU), BTS3012AE (QTRU), DBS3900
(RRU3008), BTS3900A (GRFU), BTS3900L (GRFU), BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do
not support the feature Dynamic PBT currently.
The feature depends on the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.
l License
Context
In dynamic Power Boost Technology (PBT) mode, the PBT is applied to two carriers' same
timeslots only. The two carriers belong to a double-transceiver TRX board. After these timeslots
are released, they stop using the PBT to transmit signals. The dynamic PBT makes full use of
idle timeslots, improves signal quality for some areas with poor signal quality, and strikes a
balance between system capacity and network coverage by dynamically adjusting network
coverage or system capacity according to the actual situation in the live network.
Moreover, the dynamic PBT increases the handover success rate for MSs located at the edge of
a cell, and therefore improves the performance of a concentric cell where the Co-BCCH function
is enabled.
The following operation illustrates how to configure the dynamic PBT for the DTRU on a
BTS3012.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 44 Configuring Dynamic PBT
149
Dynamic Transmission Div Supported to DPBT(DPBT).
DPBT(DPBT) for TRXs in the overlaid subcell.
NOTE
l You can run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXIUO to query the attributes of
TRXs in the overlaid subcell.
l If the dynamic PBT is to be applied to a radio frequency (RF) module, two carriers must
be configured for the module and the dynamic PBT must not be applied to the BCCH
carrier.
Optimum Layer to SysOpt(System optimization).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXADMSTAT. In this step, set
Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for carriers except the BCCH carrier and those
carriers whose send mode is not DPBT(DPBT).
Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TCH or TCHF of the BCCH carrier.
4. Monitor the status of the TCH or TCHF by referring toMonitoring Channel Status,
and use an MS to make an emergency call.
NOTE
A TCH in the overlaid subcell is assigned to the MS only when the uplink receive level of the
SDCCH meets the following conditions: The difference between the assign-optimum-level
threshold and the PBT gain is smaller than the SDCCH uplink receive level. The SDCCH uplink
receive level is smaller than the assign-optimum-level threshold. The default assign-optimum-
level threshold is 35 while the default PBT gain is 4. You can change the assign-optimum-level
threshold according to the SDCCH uplink receive level to enable the system to assign a channel
to the overlaid subcell. In this way, dynamic transmit diversity can be triggered.
Expected result: Checking the channel monitoring tab page on the BSC6900 LMT,
you can find that the emergency call occupies channels of the two carriers' same
timeslots. One channel is in the Working state while the other one is in the
Subordinate Channel state.
----End
Example
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DYNPBTSUPPORTED=DPBT;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, SNDMD=DPBT;
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPTILAYER=SysOpt;
SET GTRXADMSTAT: TRXID=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 44 Configuring Dynamic PBT
150
45 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage
Enhanced EDGE Coverage.
Prerequisites
Enhanced EDGE coverage is supported by the following BTSs and TRXs.
Double-transceiver series base stations
DTRUs and DTRMs of BTS3012, BTS3012II, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, and
BTS3002E.
3900 series base stations
DBS3900, BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, and BTS3900E.
NOTE
Neither QTRUs nor BTS3900B supports enhanced EDGE coverage.
The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This
feature depends on the feature GBFD-114201 EGPRS.
If the DTRU is used, this feature depends on the following feature: GBFD-118102
Dynamic PBT(Power Boost Technology) and GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit
Diversity.
l License
Context
l The Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature described in this feature only applies to the 8PSK
modulation mode.
l The Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature improves the average power of PS services through
the coverage enhancement technology and power sharing technology, thus ensuring that
data services can have the same cell coverage capability as speech services. This feature is
applicable to both the DTRU and QTRU.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 45 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage
151
l After the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature is activated, the Cell 8PSK Power
Attenuation Grade parameter becomes invalid automatically.
l Table 45-1 list the conditions for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature for
the BTS3012 series.
Table 45-1 Prerequisites for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature
(BTS3012 series)
Prerequisite Whether Enhanced EDGE Coverage
Is Supported
The TRX module is DTRU (type B). Supported.
The power of two carriers configured on
the DTRU is 60 W, and the static power
levels of both carriers are equal to 0.
Supported.
The TRX module is DTRU (type A) or
QTRU.
Not supported.
A single DTRU module is configured with
one carrier.
Not supported.
When a single DTRU module is configured
with two carriers, the intelligent shutdown
function is performed on one of the
carriers.
Not supported.
The two carriers configured on the DTRU
module belong to two cells.
Not supported.
When one of the carriers is configured as
the BCCH, the other non-BCCH carrier of
the DTRU module is supported or not.
Not supported.
The transmit mode of the DTRU is
configured as PBT (excluding dynamic
PBT) or transmit diversity (excluding
dynamic transmit diversity).
Not supported.
A channel of the DTRU is faulty. Not supported.

l Table 45-2 list conditions for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature for the
BTS3900E.
Table 45-2 Prerequisites for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature
(BTS3900E)
Prerequisite Whether Enhanced EDGE Coverage
Is Supported
Not FH, RF FH, and baseband FH Supported.
RanSharing Supported.
GBSS
152

Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA, and then set High-
Order Modulation Power Increase Allowed to ALLOWED(Allowed), set Enable
Enhanced EDGE Coverage to ALLOWED(Allowed).
NOTE
l The support of High-Order Modulation Power Increase Allowed by the BCCH is
determined by the High-Order Modulation Power Increase on BCCH TRX Allowed
parameter.
l The Power Increase in 8PSK parameter is used to control the increased amplitude of the
maximum power in 8PSK modulation mode.
1. Check traffic statistics information about the measurement unit High-Order
Modulation Power Increase Measurement per TRX on the M2000, and then
determine the effect of the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature. For details, see the
M2000 product documentation.
NOTE
The measurement unit High-Order Modulation Power Increase Measurement per TRX
contain 11 counters, such as Number of Bursts in High-Order Modulation Scheme and
Number of Bursts with High-Order Modulation Power Increase of n dB. The value of n
can be either of the following values: 0.4, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.4, 2.8, 3.2, 3.6, or 4.0.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA, and then set High-
Order Modulation Power Increase Allowed to NOT_ALLOWED(Not
Allowed).
----End
Example
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HIGHMODPWREN=ALLOWED,
EDGEPWREN=ALLOWED;
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HIGHMODPWREN=NOT_ALLOWED;
GBSS
153
46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing
Dynamic Power Sharing.
Prerequisites
l Dependency on Hardware
Only multi-carrier RF modules support this feature.
Only multi-carrier RF modules in dual-transmit mode support dual-PA power sharing.
l Dependency on Other Features
feature depends on the feature GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.
The single-PA power sharing function cannot be used together with any of the following
features: GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation),
GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and GBFD-114001
Extended Cell.
For the radio frequency unit (RFU), the dual-PA power sharing function cannot be used
together with any of the following features: GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier
Intelligent Shutdown, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell,
GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping,
baseband hopping), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and
GBFD-114001 Extended Cell.
For the remote radio unit (RRU), the dual-PA power sharing function cannot be used
together with any of the following features: GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier
Intelligent Shutdown, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell,
GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity, GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity,
GBFD-117002 IBCA, GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-114001 Extended Cell, and
GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.
If the Dynamic Power Sharing feature has been enabled in a cell, you do not need to
enable the GBFD-117602 Active Power Control feature because the Dynamic Power
Sharing feature contains all of its functions.
If power control parameters are not properly set, there will be a high percentage of high
signal levels. When this occurs, network performance will not be improved even if
Dynamic Power Sharing is enabled and the number of peak clipping attempts is
minimized. Therefore, set downlink power control parameters to appropriate values and
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 46 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing
154
enable the GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink function
before enabling Dynamic Power Sharing.
l License
Dependency on frequency bands and cells: All activated TRXs of a multi-transceiver
unit must work on the same frequency band and must be configured in the same cell.
In the case of a concentric cell, all activated TRXs must be configured in the underlaid
or overlaid subcell.
Restriction on PS channel allocation: If the remaining power of the timeslot of a PS
channel is lower than the maximum transmit power of the TRX, the channel cannot be
converted into a packet data channel (PDCH).
Restriction on cell configuration: To avoid cell congestion and enhance network
performance after this feature is enabled, the Channel Assign Allow for Insuff
Power parameter must be set to YES(Yes) and the recommended value of the C/I
Estimate Value parameter is 10 dB.
Restriction on TRX configuration: The percentage of stand-alone dedicated control
channels (SDCCHs) and PDCHs must be less than or equal to 30% the total number of
channels in a cell. It is recommended that static PDCHs be configured on BCCH carriers
and only one SDCCH be configured on each timeslot.
Context
With this feature, the transmit power of a TRX can be improved if the transmit power of the
TRX cannot meet the actual requirements. In addition, if the total transmit power of TRXs in a
TRX group exceeds the transmit power threshold of the TRX group, calls with different power
requirements are grouped into different timeslots to ensure that the total power of the same
timeslot on the TRX group does not exceed the transmit power threshold. Therefore, this feature
decreases the number of peak clippings and improves the network performance.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set Multi-
Density TRX Power Sharing to DYNAMIC(Dynamic power sharing).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to improve the transmit power
of the TRX. In this step, set Power Type based on the network plan.
1. Log in to the M2000 client, choose Performance > Query Result. Click New
Query in the display window. Then, the New Query dialog box is displayed. Choose
BSC6900 GSM > BTSM Measurement > TRX State Measurement per TRX to
check the values of counters such as The total BURST count cut 0.5dB power, The
total BURST count cut 1.0dB power, The total BURST count cut 1.5dB power,
and The total BURST count cut 2.0dB power before and after this feature is
activated.
The expected result: After this feature is activated, the probability of peak clipping
for timeslots is decreased.
GBSS
155
NOTE
When the transmit power of all the calls on a timeslot of a TRX group is greater than the
maximum transmit power of the BTS, the BTS decreases the power of all the calls to ensure
its normal operation. Number of Timeslots with Power Decreased provides the number of
timeslots whose transmit power is decreased.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD to set Multi-Density
TRX Power Sharing to NONE(None).
----End
Example
//Activating dynamic power sharing
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QTRUPWRSHARE=DYNAMIC;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWT=50W;
//Deactivating dynamic power sharing
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QTRUPWRSHARE=NONE;
GBSS
156
47 Configuring Extended Cell
Extended Cell.
Prerequisites
The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This
feature depends on the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.
l License
The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the
license, see 3 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2 Overview
of Feature Activation Guide.
Context
The Extended Cell feature expands the cell radius and improves the capability of the BTS for
wide coverage.
This feature is applicable to areas with a small population and low signal fading such as deserts,
seashores, islands, and water areas.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL with Cell Extension Type set to
DualTS_ExtCell(Double Timeslot Extension Cell).
1. Monitor the channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status.
Expected result: One of the two adjacent TCHs with the same TRX number is not
displayed, as shown in Figure 47-1.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 47 Configuring Extended Cell
157
Figure 47-1 Channels in a cell enabled with Extended Cell
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL with Cell Extension Type set to
Normal_cell(Normal cell).
2. Verify that Extended Cell has been deactivated by monitoring the channel status. For
details, see Monitoring Channel Status.
Expected result: Both of the two adjacent TCHs with the same TRX number are
displayed, as shown in Figure 47-2.
Figure 47-2 Channels in a cell not enabled with Extended Cell
----End
Example
//Activating Extended Cell
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EXTTP=DualTS_ExtCell;
//Deactivating Extended Cell
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EXTTP=Normal_cell;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 47 Configuring Extended Cell
158
48 Configuring Concentric Cell
Concentric Cell.
Prerequisites
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115830 VAMOS.
l License
The cell is configured.
Context
l When tight frequency reuse is adopted, the concentric cell technology can be used to avoid
or reduce radio interference and therefore to ensure voice quality.
l The concentric cell technology divides an ordinary cell into two service layers: overlaid
(OL) subcell and underlaid (UL) subcell. Compared with the UL subcell, the OL subcell
is configured with more channels and therefore it becomes the primary traffic bearer layer.
The OL subcell aims to absorb most subscribers in the concentric cell. The UL subcell aims
to provide services for areas that are not covered by the OL subcell.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell IUO Type
to Concentric_cell(Concentric Cell) and Enhanced Concentric Allowed to an
appropriate value.
NOTE
After enhanced concentric cell is enabled, the BSC automatically configures the OL subcell
and the UL subcell as neighboring cells. The neighboring cell relationship cannot be removed.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 48 Configuring Concentric Cell
159
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXIUO. In this step, set Concentric
Attribute to OVERLAID(Overlaid Subcell) or UNDERLAID(Underlaid
Subcell) based on the network plan.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set
Concentric Circles HO Allowed to YES(Yes).
NOTE
It is recommended that Concentric Attribute on the BCCH TRX be set to UNDERLAID
(Underlaid Subcell).
4. Run the SET GCELLHOIUO command to set the handover parameters in the
concentric cell based on the current network status.
Optimum Layer to USubcell(Underlaid subcell).
2. Use an MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell.
NOTE
To facilitate the verification, ensure that only one call is made in the serving cell.
Expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing the operations
given in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on
the Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in the
underlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block the
channel that is occupied by the call. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock
(Lock).
Expected result: You can learn that the call is handed over to another TCH on the TRX
in the underlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.
CAUTION
Setting Administrative State for the TRX to Lock(Lock) may cause congestion in
4. Repeat step 3 to block all available channels on the TRX in the underlaid subcell.
in the overlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.
Optimum Layer to OSubcell(Overlaid subcell).
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block all TCHs
on the TRX in the underlaid subcell. In this step, set Administrative State to Unlock
(Unlock).
7. Use the MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell.
overlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.
GBSS
160
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell IUO Type
to Normal_cell(Normal Cell).
----End
Example
//Activating Concentric Cell
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=Concentric_cell, ENIUO=ON,
FLEXMAIO=OFF;
SET GTRXIUO: TRXID=0, IUO=UNDERLAIDOVERLAID;
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CONHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ULTOOLHOALLOW=YES,
OLTOULHOALLOW=YES;
//Verifying Concentric Cell
//Configuring the underlaid subcell to be preferentially assigned
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
OPTILAYER=USubcell;
//Making a call. Checking that the call occupies a channel of the
underlaid subcell
DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;
//Blocking the channel that the call occupies (assuming that channel 2 of
TRX 2047 is occupied)
//Checking that the call is successfully handed over to a channel of the
overlaid subcell
//Blocking TCHs of all the TRXs of the underlaid subcell
//Making a call. Checking that the call occupies a channel of the overlaid
subcell
//Unblocking TCHs of all the TRXs of the underlaid subcell
SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Unlock;
//Configuring the overlaid subcell to be preferentially assigned
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, OPTILAYER=OSubcell;
//Making a call Checking that the call occupies a channel of the overlaid
subcell
//Deactivating Concentric Cell
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=Normal_cell;
GBSS
161
49 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell
Co-BCCH Cell.
Prerequisites
The feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell has been configured before this feature is
activated.
l License
The BTS supports the configured frequency band.
Context
Co-BCCH cell increases the traffic capacity of a cell, reduces handovers and interference, and
supports continuous coverage and sparse coverage in hot spots.
A co-BCCH cell consists of an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell. The frequency band
configuration is as follows:
l If the overlaid subcell is configured to be work at DCS1800M, then the underlaid subcell
must be configured to be work at GSM900M or GSM850M.
l If the overlaid subcell is configured to work at PCS1900M, then the underlaid subcell must
be configured to work at GSM850M.
NOTE
The signal loss of DCS1800M changes with the transmission distance. At the distance of 0.5-1 km, the
signal power of DCS1800M is about 15 dB lower than the signal power of GSM900M.
The configuration of the co-BCCH cell must comply with the following principles:
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 49 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell
162
l Generally, a channel in the overlaid subcell is not directly assigned to a call, an incoming
inter-cell handover request is not directly assigned to the overlaid subcell, and a call beyond
the coverage of the DCS1800M TRX is not assigned to the overlaid subcell.
l The traffic in the underlaid subcell and the overlaid subcell should be properly assigned to
implement traffic balance between the subcells.
l Generally, the GSM900M or GSM850M TRX is configured in the underlaid cell to expand
the coverage, whereas the DCS1800M or PCS1900M TRX is configured in the overlaid
cell to absorb the traffic. Generally, the BCCH is configured on the GSM900M TRX. The
priorities of different types of TRXs are: P-GSM > E-GSM > R-GSM.
l The SDCCH, PDCH, and BCCH should be configured on the same TRX.
l The frequency hopping between GSM900M and DCS1800M is not allowed. Frequency
hopping within the same frequency band is allowed.
l Avoid using a multi-layer concentric cell due to inconsistent combination modes of the
TRXs on the same frequency band. A multi-layer concentric cell affects the network KPIs,
such as handover success rate and assignment success rate.
Procedure
1. Optional: When the frequency band of a cell is GSM850_1900, run the BSC6900
MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Support High Frequency
Band to PCS1900.
NOTE
If the frequency band of the cell to be added is GSM900_DCS1800 or GSM850_1800, perform
the following steps:
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a cell and set the parameters
Freq. Band and BCCH IUO of Double Frequency Cell.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to configure the concentric cell
attributes of the cell.
NOTE
After performing this step, run the MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO to set the handover
parameters for the concentric cell.
Optimum Layer to USubcell(Underlaid subcell).
2. Use an MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell.
NOTE
To facilitate the verification, ensure that only one call is made in the serving cell.
underlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block the
channel that is occupied by the call. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock
(Lock).
GBSS
163
in the underlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.
CAUTION
Setting Administrative State for the TRX to Lock(Lock) may cause congestion in
4. Repeat step 3 to block all available channels on the TRX in the underlaid subcell.
in the overlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.
Optimum Layer to OSubcell(Overlaid subcell).
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block all TCHs
on the TRX in the underlaid subcell. In this step, set Administrative State to Unlock
(Unlock).
7. Use the MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell.
overlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCELL to remove the co-BCCH cell to
be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activating Co-BCCH Cell
//Assuming that the cell ID is 2047
//Setting Support High Frequency Band to PCS1900
SET BSCBASIC: HiFreqBandSupport=PCS1900;
//Adding a co-BCCH cell with the frequency band set to GSM850_1900 and the
cell type set to concentric cell
ADD GCELL: CELLID=2047, CELLNAME="PCS1900", TYPE=GSM850_1900, MCC="460",
MNC="08", LAC=0808, CI=0001, IUOTP=Concentric_cell, ENIUO= OFF,
DBFREQBCCHIUO=Extra, FLEXMAIO=OFF;
//Modifying concentric cell attributes
MOD GCELL MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, IUOTP=Concentric_cell,
ENIUO=OFF;
//Setting the concentric cell handover algorithm to handover algorithm I
and allowing handover from the underlaid subcell to the overlaid subcell
ULTOOLHOALLOW=YES;
//Verifying Co-BCCH Cell
//Configuring the underlaid subcell to be preferentially assigned
OPTILAYER=USubcell;
//Making a call. Checking that the call occupies a channel of the
underlaid subcell
//Blocking the channel that the call occupies (assuming that channel 2 of
GBSS
164
TRX 2047 is occupied)
//Checking that the call is successfully handed over to a channel of the
overlaid subcell
//Blocking TCHs of all the TRXs of the underlaid subcell
//Making a call. Checking that the call occupies a channel of the overlaid
subcell
//Unblocking TCHs of all the TRXs of the underlaid subcell
SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Unlock;
//Configuring the overlaid subcell to be preferentially assigned
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, OPTILAYER=OSubcell;
//Making a call Checking that the call occupies a channel of the overlaid
subcell
//Deactivating Co-BCCH Cell
//Removing the configured co-BCCH cell
RMV GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;
GBSS
165
50 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band
Network
Enhanced Dual-Band Network.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
The enhanced dual-band network is an improved version of the existing dual-band network. In
the enhanced dual-band network, two single-band cells at the same level and layer with different
coverage areas logically form a cell group with two bidirectional neighboring cells. One is an
overlaid subcell and the other is an underlaid subcell. In the enhanced dual-band network
algorithm, channel resources can be shared and cell load can be balanced between the two cells
in a cell group.
NOTE
l If the two cells belong to different operators, an enhanced dual-band network cannot be configured.
l Before changing the relationships between the cells and the operator, check whether an enhanced dual-
band network is configured. If an enhanced dual-band network is configured, modify the parameters
for the enhanced dual-band network.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 50 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network
166
1. A GSM900 cell and a DCS1800 cell are configured in the BSS. Run the BSC6900
MML command ADD G2GNCELL to configure the GSM900 cell as a unidirectional
neighboring 2G cell of the DCS1800 cell.
2. Repeat Step 1 to configure the DCS1800 cell as a unidirectional neighboring 2G cell
of the GSM900 cell, so that the two cells are configured as bidirectional neighboring
cells of each other.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to modify the parameters for the
GSM900 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double
Frequency Cell), Cell Inner/Extra Property to Extra(Extra), Same Group Cell
Index Type to BYID(By Index), and Same Group Cell Index to the index of the
DCS1800 cell.
Verify the call access function in the enhanced dual-band network by performing the
following operations:
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set
ECSC to YES(Yes).
Directed Retry of the two cells to YES(Yes).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the
parameters for the GSM900 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell Assignment
Optimization to YES(Yes), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL
Subcell General Overload Threshold to 1, and both Distance Between
Boundaries of Subcells and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries to 0. Set
Load HO Allowed and Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to NO(No).
4. Make MS1 and MS2 (both supporting the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency
bands) camp on the GSM900 cell. Then, use MS1 to make a call to a fixed-line
phone. MS1 is assigned a channel in the GSM900 cell.
5. Maintain the call of MS1 and use MS2 to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the
GSM900 cell. MS2 is assigned a channel in the DCS1800 cell because the load of
the underlaid subcell is higher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold.
This indicates that the call in the underlaid subcell can be assigned a channel in
the overlaid subcell when the traffic in the underlaid subcell is heavy and the signals
in the overlaid subcell are strong enough.
6. Terminate the calls. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters for the DCS1800 cell. In this step,
set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment
Optimization to YES(Yes), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 50, and UL
Subcell General Overload Threshold to 80.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL to set the parameters
for the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set Min Power Level For Directed Retry to
0.
8. Make MS1 camp on the DCS1800 cell and make a call. MS1 is assigned a channel
in the underlaid GSM900 subcell because the load of the underlaid subcell is not
higher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold. This indicates that the call
in the overlaid subcell can be assigned a channel in the underlaid subcell when the
traffic in the underlaid subcell is light.
Verify the handover in the enhanced dual-band network by performing the following
operations:
GBSS
167
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set the
parameters for enabling each type of handover to NO(No) and Edge HO DL
RX_LEV Threshold to 4.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the
parameters for the DCS1800 cell. In this step. set UL Subcell Assignment
Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No),
UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 50, UL Subcell General Overload
Threshold to 80, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HO of OL Subcell to
UL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH to 10, and
Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 5.
3. Make MS1 camp on the DCS1800 cell and make a call to a fixed-line phone. MS1
is assigned a channel in the overlaid subcell. Then, MS1 is handed over to the
GSM900 cell because the load of the underlaid subcell is lower than UL Subcell
General Overload Threshold. On the A interface, the HANDOVER PERFORM
message is traced and the handover cause value in the message is traffic.
4. Keep the call alive. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters for the GSM900 cell. In this step.
Optimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL Subcell
General Overload Threshold to 1, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HO
of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level
TH to 10, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 5.
5. The call is handed over from the GSM900 cell back to the DCS1800 cell because
the load in the underlaid subcell is higher than UL Subcell General Overload
Threshold. On the A interface, the HANDOVER PERFORM message is traced
and the handover cause value in the message is traffic.
6. Keep the call alive. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters for the DCS1800 cell. In this step.
Optimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL Subcell
General Overload Threshold to 1, Load HO Allowed to NO(No), Load HO of
OL Subcell to UL Subcell to NO(No), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH to
63, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 62. Set Inner Cell EDGE HO
Enable to YES(Yes).
7. MS1 is handed over to the GSM900 cell because the receive level of MS1 is lower
than Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH. On the A interface, the HANDOVER
PERFORM message is traced and the handover cause value in the message is
better cell.
NOTE
This type of edge handover requires that the underlaid subcell is more preferably selected as the target
cell for handover than the overlaid subcell. You can adjust the levels of the overlaid subcell and
underlaid subcell, so that the level of the underlaid subcell is higher than the level of the overlaid
subcell.
GSM900 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal Cell).
DCS1800 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal Cell).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL to remove the DCS1800 cell
from the neighboring cell list of the GSM900 cell.
GBSS
168
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL to remove the GSM900 cell
from the neighboring cell list of the DCS1800 cell.
----End
Example
//Activating Enhanced Dual-Band Network
ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, NBR2GNCELLID=2,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, IUOTP=EDB_cell, CELLINEXTP=Extra,
//Deactivating Enhanced Dual-Band Network
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, IUOTP=Normal_cell;
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=2, IUOTP=Normal_cell;
GBSS
169
51 Configuring Flex MAIO
Flex Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO).
Prerequisites
BTS3900B does not support this feature.
The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.
This feature depends on the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping,
baseband hopping).
This feature is mutually exclusive to the features GBFD-117002 IBCA, GBFD-118106
Dynamic Power Sharing and GBFD-115830 VAMOS.
l License
Frame offset is not configured for the BTS.
A cell is configured for frequency hopping, and the MAs list used by the same timeslot
have the same length.
Context
Under the BTSs with large capacity, adjacent-channel or co-channel interference is likely to
occur among channels because the frequency resources are insufficient and tight frequency reuse
is adopted. When dynamic MAIO is enabled, the MAIO value is dynamically adjusted according
to the current interference and the MAIO value with the minimum interference is assigned to
the channel. This reduces the adjacent-channel and co-channel interference in the GSM system.
It also achieves tight frequency reuse within the BTSs and therefore improves the system
capacity.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 51 Configuring Flex MAIO
170
CAUTION
l PS services provided by an external PCU do not support dynamic MAIO.
l Flex MAIO must be configured for all the cells under the same BTS, and the settings of flex
MAIO parameters must be the same in all the cells.
l Each cell can be configured with a maximum of two MAs. Flex MAIO cannot be enabled
simultaneously in both the overlaid cell and the underlaid cell.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL with Start Flex MAIO Switch
and HSN Modification Switch set to ON(On).
1. Perform the single user CS trace by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages of a
Single Subscriber.
2. Make a call in the cell that is enabled with Flex MAIO.
3. View the hopping channel Information Element (IE) of the Channel Activation
message.
Expected result: The hopping channel IE carries a valid MAIO (not 255) and HSN
information.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL with Start Flex MAIO Switch
set to OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating Flex MAIO
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FLEXMAIO=ON, HSNSW=ON;
//Deactivating Flex MAIO
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FLEXMAIO=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 51 Configuring Flex MAIO
171
52 Configuring ICC
ICC.
Prerequisites
Currently, the following BTSs support ICC: the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C,
BTS3002E, BTS3900E GSM, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, BTS3900L GSM and
DBS3900 GSM.
l License
Context
Interference Cancellation Combining (ICC) is a technology that combines signals of multiple
antennas to suppress interference. Generally, the interference received by different antennas is
generated by the same interference source. Thus, there are correlations between the interference
signals received by different antennas. ICC uses the correlations when combing signals to
eliminate some interference. In this way, ICC improves the anti-interference capability of
equipment and increases the uplink coverage and receiver sensitivity.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBTSSOFT to view the value of
software parameter No. 53.
2. If the value is an odd number, it indicates that the ICC function is enabled. Otherwise,
run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBTSSOFT to enable the ICC
function. In this step,
Set Item Index to 53.
Set Item Value to its current value plus one.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 52 Configuring ICC
172
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBTSSOFT to view the value of
software parameter No. 53.
Expected result: If the value is an odd number, it indicates that the ICC function is
enabled. Otherwise, the ICC function is disabled.
2. Perform an FTP service in the existing network and then view the upload rate. If the
ICC function is enabled, the upload rate is increased. If the ICC function is disabled,
the upload rate is decreased.
----End
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 52 Configuring ICC
173
53 Configuring EICC
EICC.
Prerequisites
The BTS3012 that uses the QTRU, BTS3012AE that uses the QTRU, BTS3900E, and
BTS3900B do not support the feature.
The RRU3008 V1 and RRU3908 V1 do not support the feature when they are configured
with more than four carriers.
It is recommended that this feature be used together with the features GBFD-118201
Soft-Synchronized Network and GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-510101 Automatic
Frequency Correction (AFC).
l License
Context
l The interference between signals received by multiple antennas has both spatial correlation
and temporal correlation: co-channel interference (CCI) and intersymbol interference (ISI).
ICC eliminates these two types of interference independently. EICC, however, considers
the correlation of these two types of interference and constructs the multidimensional
combining coefficient matrix to combine the signals according to the maximum signal-to-
noise ratio (SNR) criteria. In this way, EICC achieves better uplink signals.
l EICC requires the matrix of interference, which is calculated on the basis of the training
sequence of desired signals. For each receive signal, the network estimates a channel model
based on the training sequence of the signal, reconstructs the desired signal, and subtracts
the desired signal from the receive signal to obtain the interference signal. By doing so, the
network estimates the matrix of each interference signal and analyzes the statistical
dependency of these interference signals. Based on the statistical dependency, some
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 53 Configuring EICC
174
interference is eliminated during the combination of receive signals to maximize
combination gains.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to enable EICC for a cell. In
this step, set EICC Allowed to YES(Yes).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query the value of EICC
Allowed.
2. Perform an FTP upload in a live network with interference. Then, check the upload
rate. If the EICC function is enabled, the upload rate increases. If the EICC function
is disabled, the upload rate decreases.
3. Make a call in a live network with interference. Then, check the counters related to
uplink receive quality on the M2000 in the following way: Choose Performance >
Query Result from the menu bar. In the displayed window, click New Query. The
Query Result window is displayed. Navigate to BSC6900 GSM > MR
Measurement > Receive Quality Measurement per TRX. Then, check the value of
the counter Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) and
calculate the proportion of this counter to the sum of Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF
(Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) through Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(Mean
Receive Quality Rank 7). If the EICC function is enabled, the proportion is high,
indicating that the speech quality is good. If the EICC function is disabled, the
proportion is low, indicating that the speech quality is poor.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to disable EICC for a cell.
In this step, set EICC Allowed to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating EICC
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STIRCALLOWED=YES;
//Verifying EICC
LST GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
//Deactivating EICC
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STIRCALLOWED=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 53 Configuring EICC
175
54 Configuring VAMOS
VAMOS.
Prerequisites
Only the MRRU/GRRU and MRFU/GRFU of 3900 series base stations support
VAMOS.
The VAMOS-capable MS is classified into Non-SAIC, SAIC, VAMOS level I, and
VAMOS level II. At present, VAMOS level I and VAMOS level II MSs are not available
for commercial use.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-117501 Enhanced
Measurement Report(EMR), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-117002 IBCA,
GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell, GBFD-114001 Extended Cell, GBFD-113521 A5/1
Encryption Flow Optimization, GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch, GBFD-117701 BSC
Local Switch or GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC).
In A over IP mode, the configurations of the features on which this feature depends are
complete. This feature depends on the features GBFD-117601 Configuring HUAWEI
III Power Control Algorithm, GBFD-115502 AMR HR / GBFD-113401 Configuring
Half Rate Speech (HR), GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC, and GBFD-117301
Flex Abis.
In A over TDM mode, the configurations of the features on which this feature depends
are complete. This feature depends on the features GBFD-117601 Configuring
HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm, GBFD-115502 AMR HR/GBFD-113401
Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR), GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC, and
GBFD-118601 Configuring Abis over IP / GBFD-118611 Configuring Abis IP over
E1/T1.
l License
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 54 Configuring VAMOS
176
VAMOS supports the following transmission modes over the Abis interface: TDM in
Flex Abis mode, Ethernet IP, IP over E1, and high level data link control (HDLC).
Context
CAUTION
If VAMOS is enabled only in some cells controlled by the BSC, and Mute SAIC Terminal
Processing Switch or Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch is set to ON(On),
multiplexing may not be performed when a call is handed over from a cell not enabled with
VAMOS to a cell enabled with VAMOS because the IMEI of the MS is not obtained. This affects
the VAMOS traffic volume. Therefore, it is recommended that the BSS identification function
be enabled to obtain the IMEI of an MS. To enable this function, run the BSC6900 MML
command SET IDRQTEST. In this steps, set BSS Identity Request Initiation to ON(Switch
On) , Time for BSS Identity Request to 65535 , Single-User Tracing Mode to
SNDONEIDRQ(Send An IDENTITY REQUEST Message) , and MS Identity Type for
Single-User Tracing to IMEI(IMEI).
Voice service over Adaptive Multi-user channels on One Slot (VAMOS) aims to expand the
capacity of a GSM network without adding TRXs or frequencies. Without adding any
configurations, VAMOS increases the traffic volume.
Although VAMOS expands the network capacity and reduces the network congestion rate, it
affects the voice quality and deteriorates some other KPIs. Therefore, it is recommended that
the Half-Rate Service feature be enabled preferentially to expand network capacity and VAMOS
be enabled only when network capacity needs to be further expanded. VAMOS is not
recommended for users sensitive to voice quality.
VAMOS is applicable to scenarios with loose frequency reuse.
VAMOS deteriorates voice quality and causes interference to the entire network. Therefore, it
is recommended that VAMOS multiplexing be enabled to increase network capacity when
channels are congested in a cell and VAMOS demultiplexing be enabled to improve voice quality
when the cell load is low.
Call drops may occur if users dynamically add a carrier in a network where the VAMOS feature
has been enabled. Therefore, it is recommended that users perform this operation in low traffic
hours.
VAMOS multiplexing is classified into:
l VAMOS multiplexing during assignment
l VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover
VAMOS demultiplexing is classified into:
l VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load
l VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality
Procedure
Activating VAMOS multiplexing during assignment
GBSS
177
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3, In this step, set III
Power Control Optimized Enable to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set
VAMOS Switch to ON(On), set Allow Channel Multiplex in Assignment to
ON(On), set Primary TSC in VAMOS and Secondary TSC in VAMOS to
appropriate values.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set Waiting
for MR on SDCCH Switch to ON(On).
Activating VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover
VAMOS Switch to ON(On), set Allow Channel Multiplex via In-Cell HO to
appropriate values.
Activating VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load
VAMOS Switch to ON(On), set Channel Demultiplex on Low Cell Load to
appropriate values.
Activating VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality
VAMOS Switch to ON(On), set Channel Demultiplex on Bad Qual. to ON
(On), set Primary TSC in VAMOS and Secondary TSC in VAMOS to
appropriate values.
Verifying VAMOS multiplexing during assignment
Assume that there are idle half-rate traffic channels (TCHHs) in cell 0, both MS1 and
MS2 support SAIC, the Abis interface uses IP transmission, and the BTS supports
VAMOS.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set
TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 and AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to OFF
(Off),set Load of UL-OL Cells Rate Select Allowed to NO(No).
both Ratio of TCHH and Ratio of AMR-HR to 100.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set TCH
Rate Modify to YES(Yes).
VAMOS Switch to ON(On), Allow Channel Multiplex in Assignment to ON
(On), Channel Multiplex Load Thres. to 0, Channel Multiplex ATCB Thres.
Offset in Asgmt. to 0, ATCB Thres. of Established SAIC Calls to 1, Channel
Multiplex Rx Qual. Thres. Offset in Asgmt. to 0, UL Rx Qual. Thres. of
Established Calls to 70, DL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls to 70, and
GBSS
178
Path Loss Offset Thres. of VAMOS Call to 63, Load Thres. in Overlaid
Subcell to 0, and set ATCB Offset in Overlaid Subcell to 128.
5. Start channel status monitoring in cell 0. Figure 54-1 shows the TCHH status in
cell 0.
Figure 54-1 TCHH status 1

6. Use MS1 and MS2 to call each other in cell 0.
7. Check the TCHH status in cell 0.
Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the voice quality is good. MS1
and MS2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Figure 54-2 shows the possible TCHH
status in cell 0.

Verifying VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover
Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, both MS1 and MS2 support SAIC, the Abis
interface uses IP transmission, and the BTS supports VAMOS.
(Off).
VAMOS Switch to ON(On), Channel Multiplex Load Thres. to 0, ATCB
Thres. of Established SAIC Calls to 1, UL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established
Calls to 70, DL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls to 70, and Path Loss Offset
Thres. of VAMOS Call to 63.
cell 0.
GBSS
179

Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the voice quality is good.
MS1 and MS2 occupy their respective TCHHs during call establishment. Figure
54-4 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0.

8. Several seconds later, MS1 and MS2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Figure

Verifying VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load
(Off).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set both
VAMOS Switch and Channel Demultiplex on Low Cell Load to ON(On) and
set Load Thres. of Channel Demultiplex to 100.
cell 0.
GBSS
180


8. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to trigger a VAMOS multiplexing
handover of an MS. Then, check the TCHH status. Figure 54-8 shows the possible
TCHH status in cell 0.

9. Check the TCHH status in cell 0 a few seconds later. Figure 54-9 shows the
possible TCHH status in cell 0.

Expected result: After VAMOS multiplexing through handover is performed
successfully, MS1 and MS2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Several seconds
later, VAMOS demultiplexing is triggered and MS1 and MS2 occupy their
respective TCHHs.
Verifying VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality
(Off).
GBSS
181
VAMOS Switch and Channel Demultiplex on Bad Qual. to ON(On) and set
both UL RX Bad Qual. Demultiplex Thres. and DL RX Bad Qual. Demultiplex
Thres. to 0.
cell 0.


8. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to trigger a VAMOS multiplexing
handover of an MS. Then, check the TCHH status. Figure 54-12 shows the

9. Check the TCHH status in cell 0 a few seconds later. Figure 54-13 shows the
GBSS
182

Expected result: After VAMOS multiplexing through handover is performed
successfully, MS1 and MS2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Several seconds
later, VAMOS demultiplexing is triggered and MS1 and MS2 occupy their
respective TCHHs.
Deactivating VAMOS multiplexing during assignment
VAMOS Switch to ON(On) and Allow Channel Multiplex in Assignment to
OFF(Off).
VAMOS Switch to OFF(Off).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set Waiting
for MR on SDCCH Switch to OFF(Off).
Deactivating VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover
VAMOS Switch to ON(On) and Allow Channel Multiplex via In-Cell HO to
OFF(Off).
Deactivating VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load
VAMOS Switch to ON(On) and Channel Demultiplex on Low Cell Load to
OFF(Off).
Deactivating VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality
VAMOS Switch to ON(On) and Channel Demultiplex on Bad Qual. to OFF
(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating VAMOS multiplexing during assignment
SET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLOPTIMIZEDEN=YES;
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON,
VamosAssSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDCCHWaitMREn=ON;
//Verifying VAMOS multiplexing during assignment
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=OFF;
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ALLOWHALFRATEUSERPERC=100,
ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC=100;
SET OTHSOFTPARA: TCHRATEMODIFY=YES;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0;
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosAssSwitch=ON,
GBSS
183
VamosMultLoadThd=0, VamosAssMultAtcbOffset=0, VamosAssUlQualThdOffset=0,
VamosIntraHoSaicAtcbThd=1, VamosIntraHoUlQualThd=70,
VamosIntraHoDlQualThd=70, VamosPathLossMaxDiffValue=63;
//Deactivating VAMOS multiplexing during assignment
VamosAssSwitch=OFF;
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=OFF;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDCCHWaitMREn=OFF;
//Activating VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover
VamosIntraHoSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2;
//Verifying VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover
VamosMultLoadThd=0, VamosIntraHoSwitch=ON, VamosIntraHoSaicAtcbThd=1,
VamosIntraHoUlQualThd=70, VamosIntraHoDlQualThd=70,
VamosPathLossMaxDiffValue=63;
//Deactivating VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover
VamosIntraHoSwitch=OFF;
//Activating VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load
VamosLoadReuseSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2;
//Verifying VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load
VamosLoadReuseSwitch=ON, VamosLoadReuseLoadThd=100;
//Deactivating VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load
VamosLoadReuseSwitch=OFF;
//Activating VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality
VamosQualReuseSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2;
//Verifying VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality
VamosQualReuseSwitch=ON, VamosQualReuseDownLinkQualThd=0,
VamosQualReuseUpLinkQualThd=0;
GBSS
184
//Deactivating VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality
VamosQualReuseSwitch=OFF;
GBSS
185
55 Configuring Mute SAIC MS
Identification
Mute SAIC MS Identification.
Prerequisites
This feature depends on GBFD-115830 VAMOS.
l License
Context
VAMOS aims to expand the GSM network capacity without adding TRXs or frequencies. Mute
SAIC MSs are the MSs that support SAIC but report Non-SAIC in CLASSMARK3. A non-
SAIC MS can only be multiplexed with a VAMOS Level II MS. However, VAMOS level II
MSs are not available for commercial use at present. To improve VAMOS multiplexing rate,
Huawei BSC provides an effective detection mechanism to identify the Mute SAIC MSs.
A database is created at the BSC to record whether an MS is a Mute SAIC MS. The BSC
differentiates Mute SAIC MSs from Non-SAIC MSs upon channel allocation.
The Mute VAMOS MS Identification is applicable in scenarios with loose frequency reuse and
limited network capacity. The MS may drop off when the BSC When the Mute SAIC MS
identification is enabled, call drops may occur during detection of SAIC-capable MSs.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set Mute
SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to ON(On) and set Abnormal Average RX
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 55 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification
186
Qual Times Threshold to an appropriate value. Note that the value of Abnormal
Average RX Qual Times Threshold must be smaller than or equal to the value of
Periods for Auto Mute SAIC Identify.
NOTE
When the value of Periods for Auto Mute SAIC Identify is fixed, an MS is easier to be
determined as a Mute SAIC MS when the value of Abnormal Average RX Qual Times
Threshold is greater. It is recommended that Abnormal Average RX Qual Times
Threshold be set to 1 when Periods for Auto Mute SAIC Identify uses the default value 3.
Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, the Abis interface uses IP transmission, the
BTS supports VAMOS, and MS 1 and MS 2 are Mute SAIC MSs.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS with the following
parameter settings: VAMOS Switch set to ON(On), Allow Channel Multiplex via
In-Cell HO set to ON(On), Channel Multiplex Load Thres. set to 0, ATCB Thres.
of Established SAIC Calls set to 1, UL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls set
to 70, DL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls set to 70, and Path Loss Offset
Thres. of VAMOS Call set to 63.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD with TCH Traffic Busy
Threshold set to 0.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV with TCH Rate Adjust
Allow set to YES(Yes).
4. View the International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) on the back of each MS or
input *#06# on each MS to display their respective IMEIs. The MS model and origin
comprise the initial 8-digit portion of the IMEI, known as type approval code (TAC).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GMSSAICCAP to set MS 1 as a Mute SAIC
MS with TAC set to the initial eight digits of the IMEI, Mute SAIC Flag set to YES
(Yes), and Problem SAIC Flag set to UNCERTAIN(Uncertain).
NOTE
If you are not sure whether an MS is a problem SAIC MS, set Problem SAIC Flag to
UNCERTAIN(Uncertain).
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GMSSAICCAP to set MS 2 as a Mute SAIC
MS with TAC set to the initial eight digits of the IMEI, Mute SAIC Flag set to YES
(Yes), and Problem SAIC Flag set to UNCERTAIN(Uncertain).
7. Start channel status monitoring in cell 0. Figure 55-1 shows the TCHH status in cell
0.

8. Use MS 1 and MS 2 to call each other in cell 0.
9. Observe the TCHH status in cell 0. MS 1 and MS 2 occupy their respective TCHHs.
Figure 55-2 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0.
GBSS
187

10. Check whether two MSs are multiplexed a few seconds later. Figure 55-3 shows the
possible TCHH status in cell 0 after multiplexing.

11. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS with VAMOS Switch set
to ON(On) and Mute SAIC Terminal Processing Switch set to OFF(Off).
12. Run Step 8 through Step 10 again. The two MSs cannot be multiplexed.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS with VAMOS Switch set
to ON(On) and Mute SAIC Terminal Processing Switch set to OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating Mute SAIC MS identification
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, MuteSaicSwitch=ON;
//Verifying Mute SAIC MS identification
VamosMultLoadThd=0, VamosIntraHoSwitch=ON, VamosIntraHoSaicAtcbThd=1,
VamosIntraHoUlQualThd=70, VamosIntraHoDlQualThd=70,
VamosPathLossMaxDiffValue=63;
SET GTRXDEV: TCHAJFLAG=YES;
ADD GMSSAICCAP: TAC="11111111", MuteSAICFlag=YES,
ProSAICFlag=NOT_ALLOWED;
ADD GMSSAICCAP: TAC="22222222", MuteSAICFlag=YES,
ProSAICFlag=NOT_ALLOWED;
//Deactivating Mute SAIC MS identification
SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, MuteSaicSwitch=OFF;
GBSS
188
56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop
Solution
VAMOS Call Drop Solution.
Prerequisites
The feature GBFD-115830 VAMOS has been configured before this feature is
activated.
l License
Context
VAMOS aims to expand the GSM network capacity without adding TRXs or frequencies. Test
results, however, indicate that call drops are likely to occur after SAIC-capable MSs are
multiplexed with other MSs. To obtain the desired capacity gain through VAMOS, the BSC
provides a mechanism to identify defective SAIC-capable MSs so that these MSs can be
multiplexed with other suitable MSs based on support capability. In addition, the BSC uses a
power control policy specific to defective SAIC-capable MSs to ensure speech quality.
A database is created at the BSC to record whether the MSs under the BSC have defects in SAIC.
All the MSs under the BSC are classified into three types: defective SAIC-capable MSs that
cannot use VAMOS, defective SAIC-capable MSs that can use VAMOS but require alpha
hopping modulation, and normal SAIC-capable MSs that can use VAMOS but require alpha-
QPSK modulation. Before allocating a channel to an MS, the BSC determines the MS type and
the required modulation scheme by checking the records in the database.
The VAMOS call drop solution is applicable in scenarios with loose frequency reuse and limited
network capacity.When the VAMOS call drop solution is enabled, call drops may occur during
detection of SAIC-capable MSs with AFC defects.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 56 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution
189
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set Problem
SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to ON(On) and set Faulty SAIC MS Mean RX
Qual Abnor Thres to an appropriate value. Note that the value of Faulty SAIC MS
Mean RX Qual Abnor Thres must be smaller than or equal to the value of Auto
Identify Periods for Faulty SAIC MS.
NOTE
When the value of Auto Identify Periods for Faulty SAIC MS is fixed, an MS is easier to be
determined as a defective SAIC-capable MS that can use VAMOS but require alpha hopping
modulation when the value of Faulty SAIC MS Mean RX Qual Abnor Thres is greater. It
is recommended that Faulty SAIC MS Mean RX Qual Abnor Thres be set to 1 when Auto
Identify Periods for Faulty SAIC MS uses the default value 3.
Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, IP transmission is used over the Abis interface,
the BTS supports VAMOS, and MS1 and MS2 are SAIC-capable but MS2 has defects in
SAIC.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set VAMOS
Switch to ON(On) and Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to OFF(Off).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set TCH
Traffic Busy Threshold to 0.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set TCH Rate
Adjust Allow to YES(Yes).
4. Initiate channel status monitoring in cell 0. Figure 56-1 shows the TCHH status in
cell 0.

6. Check the TCHH status in cell 0. MS1 and MS2 occupy their respective TCHHs.
Figure 56-2 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to hand over an MS for VAMOS
multiplexing. MS1 and MS2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Figure 56-3 shows
the possible TCHH status in cell 0.
GBSS
190

8. A call drop occurs on defective SAIC-capable MS2 a few seconds later.
VAMOS Switch and Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to ON(On).
10. View the International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) on the back of each MS or
input *#06# on each MS to display their respective IMEIs. The MS model comprises
the initial 8-digit portion of the IMEI, known as type approval code (TAC).
11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GMSSAICCAP to set MS1 as a normal
SAIC-capable MS. In this step, set TAC to the first eight digits of the IMEI of MS1,
Mute SAIC Flag to NOTINVOLVED(Not involved), and Problem SAIC Flag to
NO(No).
12. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GMSSAICCAP to set MS2 as a defective
SAIC-capable MS. In this step, set TAC to the first eight digits of the IMEI of MS2,
Mute SAIC Flag to NOTINVOLVED(Not involved), and Problem SAIC Flag to
YES(Yes).
13. Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to multiplex MS1 and MS2 on the same TCHH. MS2
does not experience a call drop.
Expected result: When Problem SAIC Flag is set to NO(No), a call drop occurs in
MS2 after being multiplexed with normal SAIC-capable MS1. When Problem SAIC
Flag is set to YES(Yes), MS2 does not experience a call drop after being multiplexed
with normal SAIC-capable MS1.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set VAMOS
Switch to ON(On) and Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating VAMOS Call Drop Solution
SaicProMsSwitch=ON;
//Verifying VAMOS Call Drop Solution
SaicProMsSwitch=OFF;
SET GTRXDEV: TCHAJFLAG=YES;
SET FHO: OBJTYPE=CHN, TRXID=0, CHNO=1, HOMOD=VAMOSREUSE, SUBCHNO=0,
DESTTRXID=1, DESTCHNO=7, DESTSUBCHNO=0;
SaicProMsSwitch=ON;
ADD GMSSAICCAP: TAC="11111111", MuteSAICFlag=NO, ProSAICFlag=NOTINVOLVED;
ADD GMSSAICCAP: TAC="22222222", MuteSAICFlag=NOTINVOLVED,
ProSAICFlag=JUMP_ALPHA;
GBSS
191
//Deactivating VAMOS Call Drop Solution
SaicProMsSwitch=OFF;
GBSS
192
57 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF
hopping, baseband hopping)
This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-113701 Frequency
Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping).
Prerequisites
The BTS3900B does not support this feature.
Baseband hopping is mutually exclusive with the following features:
GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass
GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity
GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology)
l License
In baseband FH mode, all carriers in a baseband FH group in a cell must be in transmit
diversity mode, or none of the carriers can be in transmit diversity mode.
Context
FH can simplify frequency planning, reduce interference, improve voice quality, and increase
system capacity.
When the PS services use coding schemes of high rate such as CS3, CS4, and MCS5 through
MCS9, the application of FH will exert negative impact on the PS services. In this case, enabling
FH is not recommended.
When the cell activation state is Active, the FH feature can be configured quickly.
GBSS
57 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband
hopping)
193
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add a FH group. In
this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Hop Index,
Hop Mode, and Frequency.
NOTE
Set Hop Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband FH) or RF_FH(RF FH) as required.
If the BCCH participates in baseband FH, the cell must be configured with at least two FH
groups.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to set the FH type of the
cell. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index and
Frequency Hopping Mode.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In
this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP. In this step, set
Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.
NOTE
When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs
must be different.
l Procedure for Quick Activation
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP to quickly set
the frequency hopping of the cell. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index),
and then set Cell Index. Set Frequency Hopping Mode, and then set Frequency
Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX and TRXID LST.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP. In this step,
set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index. Set Frequency Hopping
Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping) and Frequency Hopping
Mode of BCCH TRX to Hop(Hop).
2. Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell to be verified. The call is initiated successfully
and the voice quality is good. In the Um interface CS tracing window, the Assignment
Command message is traced, and the value of the information element (IE) h:rf-
hopping-channel in the message is 1.
----End
Example
ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=0, HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH,
FREQ1=1, FREQ2=11;
SET GCELLHOPTP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH;
SET GTRXHOP: TRXID=0, HOPTYPE=BaseBand_FH;
SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=0, TRXMAIO=1;
GBSS
hopping)
194
SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH,
BCCHTRXHP=Hop, TRXIDLST="0";
GBSS
hopping)
195
58 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency
Hopping
BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping.
Prerequisites
The feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping) has been
configured before this feature is activated.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping
(RF hopping).
l License
Context
Frequency hopping (FH) can simplify frequency planning, reduce interference, improve voice
quality, and increase system capacity.
When PS services use higher order coding schemes such as CS3, CS4, and MCS-5 through
MCS-9, the application of FH has a negative impact on the PS services. In this case, enabling
FH is not recommended.
When the cell activation state is Active, BCCH carrier FH can be activated quickly.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell.
2. To configure more FH groups and include the BCCH frequencies to the FH groups,
run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP for each FH group you
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 58 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping
196
want to add. In this step, set Hop Mode to BaseBand_FH(BaseBand FH) and Cell
Index, Hop Index, and Frequency to appropriate values.
NOTE
To enable the BCCH TRX to participate in FH, at least two FH groups need to be configured
with one FH group containing the BCCH frequency.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to set the FH type of a cell
to baseband FH. In this step, set Cell Index and Hop Mode to appropriate values.
4. To configure more frequencies and set the FH type of the TRXs participating in FH
(including the BCCH TRX) to baseband FH, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GTRXHOP for each frequency you want to set. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop
Type to appropriate values.
5. To configure more channels and set the FH index and mobile allocation index offset
(MAIO) of the channels, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GTRXCHANHOP for each channel you want to set. In this step, set Channel Hop
Index and Channel MAIO to appropriate values.
NOTE
l When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs
must be different.
l Channel 0 on the BCCH TRX does not participate in FH, and therefore its FH index should
be set to 255.
NOTE
In addition to the preceding activation procedure, you can quickly activate this feature by performing
the following step:
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP to quickly set FH for a cell.
In this step, set Cell Index, Frequency Hopping Mode, Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH
TRX, and TRXID LST (which contains the BCCH TRX ID) to appropriate values.
set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, Frequency Hopping Mode to
BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping), and Frequency Hopping Mode of
BCCH TRX to Hop(Hop).
2. Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell to be verified. The call is initiated successfully
and the voice quality is good. In the Um interface CS tracing window, the Assignment
Command message is traced, and the value of the information element (IE) h:rf-
hopping-channel in the message is 1.
----End
Example
//Activating BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping
//Configuring FH groups and setting FREQ2 to the BCCH frequency
FREQ1=1, FREQ2=11, FREQ2=12;
FREQ1=1,FREQ3=12;
SET GCELLHOPTP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH;
GBSS
197
//Running the follow command for all TRXs participating in FH
SET GTRXHOP: TRXID=0, HOPTYPE=BaseBand_FH;
//Running the follow command to set the channels of all TRXs participating
in FH
SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=1;
//Verifying BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping
BCCHTRXHP=Hop, TRXIDLST="0";
GBSS
198
59 Configuring Antenna Frequency
Hopping
Antenna Frequency Hopping.
Prerequisites
The base station is a double-transceiver base station or a 3900 series base station.
There are at lease two antennas in a cell participating in antenna frequency hopping.
l License
Context
Antenna frequency hopping enables downlink data on each TRX to be randomly transmitted on
other TRXs. This improves receive quality of the MS from the BCCH TRX and transmit quality
of the BCCH TRX, thereby improving network performance.
If a cell supports both baseband frequency hopping and antenna frequency hopping, the TRX
involved in baseband frequency hopping must also participate in antenna frequency hopping.
When the cell is active, the antenna frequency hopping feature can be configured quickly.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANT. In this step, set Cell
Antenna Hopping to YES_HPANT(Yes).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 59 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping
199
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLHOPANTGRP to configure
antenna frequency hopping. In this step, set Index Type and Hop TRX Group
Index to appropriate values.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.
l Quick Configuration Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANTQUICKSETUP to
quickly configure antenna frequency hopping. In this step, set Index Type and Cell
Antenna Hopping to appropriate values.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOPANT to query Cell Antenna
Hopping.
Expected result: Cell Antenna Hopping is set to YES_HPANT(Yes).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANT. In this step, set Cell
Antenna Hopping to NO_HPANT(No).
NOTE
When the cell is active, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLHOPANTQUICKSETUP. In this step, set Cell Antenna Hopping to NO_HPANT(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Antenna Frequency Hopping
SET GCELLHOPANT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HPANTMODE=YES_HPANT;
ADD GCELLHOPANTGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPTRXINDEX=0, TRXID1=1,
TRXID2=2;
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
//Verifying Antenna Frequency Hopping
LST GCELLHOPANT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
//Deactivating Antenna Frequency Hopping
SET GCELLHOPANT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HPANTMODE=NO_HPANT;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 59 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping
200
60 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency
Multiplexing
BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing.
Prerequisites
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell or
GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell.
l License
Context
The BCCH dense frequency multiplexing technique is used in networks with limited frequency
resources. It helps to reduce the number of frequencies occupied by the BCCH TRXs so that
more frequencies can be used as TCHs, increasing the system capacity.
NOTE
If BCCH dense frequency multiplexing is applied with the increase of the cell load, the handover from a
non-BCCH TRX to the BCCH TRX will be triggered, leading to the increase on the handover of the entire
network.
Procedure
TIGHT BCCH Switch to ON(On).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 60 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing
201
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set Level
Thresh. for Assign BCCH Udr TBCCH and Quality Thresh. for Assign BCCH
Udr TBCCH based on the site requirements.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set Load
Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO to an appropriate value.
1. Make a call in the cell configured with this feature.
Expected result: The call is successfully set up and the voice quality is good.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT. In this step, set Object Type
to CELL(Cell) and Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified.
Expected result: The value of Sub Channel Status is Working.
TIGHT BCCH Switch to OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TIGHTBCCHSWITCH=ON;
//Deactivating BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TIGHTBCCHSWITCH=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 60 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing
202
61 Configuring IBCA
Interference Based Channel Allocation (IBCA).
Prerequisites
A built-in PCH and a pair of service processing boards are required. An IP interface
board is required to support inter-BSC IBCA.
The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:
GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network, GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF
hopping, baseband hopping), GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization,
GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.
If Soft-Synchronized Network is enabled, this feature depends on the following features:
GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP (when inter-BSC IBCA is supported).
This feature and the following features and functions are mutually exclusive:
GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, the very early assignment function in GBFD-110502
Assignment and Immediate Assignment, GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell,
GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing, GBFD-114151 DTM, GBFD-118001 BCCH
Dense Frequency Multiplexing, MRFD-211802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum
Sharing(GSM), and GBFD-115830 VAMOS.
If Soft-Synchronized Network is enabled, this feature and the feature GBFD-118601
Abis over IP are mutually exclusive.
l License
Two cells are configured: cell1 and cell2. Cell1 has at least two TRXs; cell2 has at least
three TRXs.
Context
When the network admits a new call, the interference between the established calls and the new
call is calculated. Based on the calculation result, the network assigns a channel with the
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 61 Configuring IBCA
203
minimum interference to the new call. This minimizes the overall interference in the network
and therefore enables a tighter frequency reuse pattern. In addition, this increases the network
capacity while ensuring the voice quality in the entire network.
NOTE
l In an IBCA-enabled cell, each timeslot and each frequency band can be configured with only one
mobile allocation (MA) group; for a co-BCCH cell, two MA groups can be configured (one for each
frequency band).
l A maximum of three MA groups can be configured for an IBCA-enabled cell; a maximum of 24 MA
groups can be configured for all the IBCA neighboring cells.
l The number of frequencies in each MA group in an IBCA-enabled cell cannot exceed 64.
l A maximum of 12 IBCA neighboring cells and 24 IBCA mobile allocation index offsets (MAIOs) can
be configured for an IBCA-enabled cell.
l The value calculated from Number of MAs for the Serving Cell x Number of MAIOs for the Serving
Cell x Number of MAs for All IBCA Neighboring Cells x Maximum Number of MAIOs for IBCA
Neighboring Cells cannot exceed 8192.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an XPUa or XPUb board to the
MPS or EPS. In this step, set Logical function type to MCP.
NOTE
A maximum of four MCP boards can be configured to share the IBCA calculation load and
improve the system reliability.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD twice to enable IBCA
for cell1 and cell2 respectively. In this step, set IBCA Allowed to YES(Yes).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set IBCA
Info Report Period Within BSC and IBCA Info Report Period Between BSC to
appropriate values.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLMAIOPLAN twice to configure
MAIOs for cell1 and cell2 respectively. In this step, set Cell Index or Cell Name, and
set Hop Index and the relevant MAIO parameters for cell1 and cell2 based on the
network plan.
NOTE
Each cell needs to be configured with more than two MAIOs, and MAIOs for cell1 should be
consistent with those for cell2.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL twice to configure cell1 and
cell2 as an IBCA neighboring cell of each other. In this step, set Neighboring Cell
Type to IBCANCELL(IBCA Neighboring Cell) and IBCA Dyn Measure
Neighbour Cell Flag to YES(Yes).
NOTE
To configure the handover-supporting IBCA function, set Neighboring Cell Type to
HANDOVERANDIBCANCELL(Handover and IBCA Neighboring Cell).
Verifying the IBCA algorithm
1. Initiate CS message tracing of a single user by referring to Tracing CS Domain
Messages of a Single Subscriber.
GBSS
204
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT twice for
cell1 and cell2 respectively. In this step, set Administrative State of the TCHs on
the same timeslot of all non-BCCH TRXs to Unlock(Unlock) and set
Administrative State of all other TCHs to Lock(Lock).
3. Use MS1 to make a call in cell1 and keep the call alive. Ten seconds later, use
MS2 to make a call in cell2 and keep the call alive.
4. In the Single User CS Trace tracing window, check the two calls. Record the
MAIO information element in the Channel Activation messages on TCHs.
5. Compare the MAIO for the call made by MS1 with that for the call made by MS2.
Expected result: The MAIOs in the two records are inconsistent, which indicates
that the IBCA algorithm has been enabled.
Verifying the IBCA handover
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL twice to configure cell1
and cell2 as an IBCA neighboring cell of each other. In this step, set Neighboring
Cell Type to HANDOVERANDIBCANCELL(Handover and IBCA
Neighboring Cell) and IBCA Dyn Measure Neighbour Cell Flag to YES
(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT twice for
cell1 and cell2 respectively. In this step, set Administrative State of the TCHs on
the same timeslot of all non-BCCH TRXs to Unlock(Unlock) and Administrative
State of all other TCHs to Lock(Lock).
3. Use MS1 to make a call in cell1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO
to hand over the call to cell2. In this step, set Object Type to CELL(Cell),
Handover Scope to OUTCELL(Outgoing cell), and Cell Index Type to
BYNAME(By name) or BYID(By index).
Messages of a Single Subscriber. Record the MAIO information element in the
Channel Activation message on the TCH for MS1 in cell2.
5. Keep the call of MS1 alive and use MS2 to make a call in cell1. Run the
BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to hand over the call in cell1 to cell2. In this
step, set Object Type to CELL(Cell), Handover Scope to OUTCELL(Outgoing
cell), and Cell Index Type to BYNAME(By name) or BYID(By index).
6. Initiate CS message tracing of a single user by referring to Single User CS Trace.
Record the MAIO information element in the Channel Activation message on the
TCH for MS2 in cell2.
7. Compare the MAIOs in the two records in 4 and 6.
Expected result: The MAIOs in the two records are inconsistent, which indicates
that an IBCA handover has been performed.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL to remove the neighbor cell
relations between cell1 and cell2. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By index)
and set Source Cell Index and Neighbor 2G Cell Index to appropriate values.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index Type
to BYID(By Index), Neighboring Cell Type to IBCANCELL(IBCA Neighboring
Cells), and Source Cell Index to an appropriate value.
Expected result: No queried items have desired results.
GBSS
205
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set IBCA
Allowed to NO(No).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set Index
Type to BYID(By Index) and Cell Index to an appropriate value.
Expected result: The value of IBCA Allowed is No.
----End
Example
//Activating IBCA
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=XPU, BRDTYPE=XPUa, LGCAPPTYPE=MCP, SN=0;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, IBCAALLOWED=YES;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, IBCAALLOWED=YES;
SET OTHSOFTPARA: IBCAINBSCINFORPTPRD=2000, IBCAOUTBSCINFORPTPRD=4000;
//Deactivating IBCA
RMV G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, NBR2GNCELLID=2;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, IBCAALLOWED=NO;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, IBCAALLOWED=NO;
GBSS
206
62 Configuring Soft-Synchronized
Network
Soft-Synchronized Network.
Prerequisites
The FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUa/GOUc/GOUd board is configured.
The BTS supports the feature Soft-Synchronized Network.
The feature GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP has been configured before
this feature is activated.
l License
The BSC initial configuration is complete. The BSC is configured with at least two
BTSs.
Each BTS is configured with at least two cells. In addition, the longitude, latitude, and
antenna azimuth of each cell are configured.
Context
The soft-synchronized network applies to the scenario of tight frequency reuse and requires the
cooperation of network planning and features such as IBCA. It can effectively improve the
performance of the KPIs associated with the wireless network. In addition, this feature can
convert an asynchronous network into a synchronous network. In cooperation with other
associated technologies, this technology eliminates random and unpredictable interference and
therefore increases the system capacity.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 62 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network
207
NOTE
l The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.
l This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-117002 IBCA to improve the frequency
utilization and increase the network capacity.
l This feature is applicable to the scenario where TDM transmission is used between the BSC and BTS,
that is, Abis TDM over E1/T1/STM-1. In a scenario where an IP network is used between the BSC and
BTS, including Abis IP over E1/T1/STM-1 and Abis IP over FE/GE, the Soft-Synchronized Network
feature is not supported.
Procedure
Configuring an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAISS. In this step, specify BTS Index
or BTS Name of the BTS to participate in the intra-BSC soft-synchronized task. To
configure more BTSs, run this command for each BTS you want to add. Site Sync
Zone of each BTS must be set to the same value.
NOTE
BTS Symbol Offset is optional. This parameter specifies the frame offset between BTSs and
is set as required.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG. In this step, set Reference BTS
Index to the index of the BTS that supports the soft-synchronized network. In addition,
set both Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time Adjustment
Switch to ON(ON) and Support BSC AISS to NO(NO).
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NCELL to add a pair of
neighboring cells in the BSC. In this step, set AISS Task Index to the index of the
soft-synchronized network task specified in Step 1. Then, set First Cell Index and
Second Cell Index to appropriate values.
NOTE
A pair of neighboring cells in the BSC are automatically generated based on certain rules. If
the neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements, reconfigure the neighboring
cells as required.
Configuring an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network
The configuration of the soft-synchronized network between BSC1 and BSC2 is used as
an example. Each BSC has only one BTS. IP-based inter-BSC interconnection is
configured.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAISS at BSC1 and BSC2 respectively.
In this step, specify BTS Index or BTS Name of the BTS to participate in the intra-
BSC soft-synchronized task. Site Sync Zone of each BTS must be set to the same
value.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG at BSC1. In this step, set
Reference BTS Index to the index of the BTS that supports the soft-synchronized
network. In addition, set Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time
Adjustment Switch to ON(ON), and set Support BSC AISS and Base BSC to YES
(YES).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG at BSC2. In this step, set
Reference BTS Index to the index of a BTS that supports the soft-synchronized
network. In addition, set Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time
GBSS
208
Adjustment Switch to ON(ON), Support BSC AISS to YES, Base BSC to NO, and
Control BSC DPC to the DPC of BSC1.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT2GCELL at BSC1 to configure a
cell under BSC2 as an external cell of BSC1.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL at BSC1 to configure the
external cell added in Step 4 as a neighboring cell of a cell under BSC1.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD EXTNCELL at BSC1 to add a pair of
neighboring cells between BSCs.
NOTE
A pair of neighboring cells between BSCs are automatically generated according to certain rules. If
the neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements, reconfigure the neighboring cells
as required. Steps 4 to 6 are performed to add a pair of optimal neighboring cells between BSCs.
Verifying the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST AISSCFG to query the information about
the soft-synchronized network.
NOTE
If you do not specify AISS Task Index, the information about all the soft-synchronized network
tasks is queried.
Expected result: Check whether AISS Task Index of the added intra-BSC soft-
synchronized network exists. If the index exists, the intra-BSC soft-synchronized
network is added successfully.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP NCELLTBL to query information about
neighboring cell pairs within a BSC.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP AISSRUNSTATE to query the BTS
synchronization information.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSYNCINFO to query the frame offset
in the synchronization between BTSs.
Verifying the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST AISSCFG to query the information about
the soft-synchronized network.
Expected result: The value of Support BSC AISS for BSC1 is YES and the value of
Control BSC DPC for BSC2 is the signaling point of the control BSC.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BSCSYNCINFO to query the information
about the synchronization between BSCs.
NOTE
l Set Adjacent BSC DPC to the signaling point of BSC1 to query the state of the local BSC.
l Set Adjacent BSC DPC to the signaling point of BSC2 to query the state of the
collaborative BSC.
Expected result: The value of BSC Sync State for BSC1 and BSC2 is Adjusted.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSYNCINFO to query the frame offset
in the synchronization between BTSs.
Expected result: The value of BTS status for the BTS is Synchronized.
GBSS
209
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV AISSCFG to remove a soft-synchronized
network task. In this step, specify BTS Index or BTS Name of the BTS involved in
the intra-BSC or inter-BSC soft-synchronized network.
----End
Example
//Activating Soft-Synchronized Network
SET BTSAISS: IDTYPE=BYIDX, BTSID=0, SYMOFFSET=12, SITESYNCZONE=1;
ADD AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0, GATHON=ON, ADTON=ON, BASEBTSID=0, REINITTBL=NO,
ISSPTBSCAISS=NO, ISBASICBSC=YES, GATHST=00&10, GATHET=08&50,
BSCGATHST=10&00, BSCGATHET=12&00;
//Deactivating Soft-Synchronized Network
RMV AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0;
GBSS
210
63 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization
This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-510401 BTS GPS
Synchronization.
Prerequisites
The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and BTS3900B/E do not support the feature.
In the case of the BTS3012/BTS3012AE, the DGPS board needs to be added.
In the case of the DBS3900/BTS3900/BTS3900A, the USCU board needs to be added.
l License
Context
Converting an asynchronous network into a synchronous network can effectively reduce the
interference, increase the network capacity, and improve the performance of the KPIs related to
the radio network.
The following procedure takes how to configure the GPS synchronization of the BTS3900 GSM
as an example.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBRD to add a USCU board. In this step,
set Board Type to USCU(USCU).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSUSCUBP. In this step, set GPS or
Glonass to GPS(GPS), GPS Antenna Delay to 800, and Antenna Power Supply
Switch to NOPOWER(No Power).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 63 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization
211
NOTE
GPS or Glonass needs to be set according to the type of the GPS satellite card. Antenna Power
Supply Switch is set to NOPOWER(No Power) only in the co-antenna scenario. GPS
Antenna Delay needs to be set according to the feeder length.
None.
----End
Example
ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, BT=USCU;
SET BTSUSCUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES,
GPSORGLONASS=GPS, ANTENNALONG=800, ANTENNAPOWERSWITCH=NOPOWER;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 63 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization
212
64 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet
Synchronous Ethernet.
Prerequisites
Impact on BSC6900 hardware: IP interface boards need to be used on the Abis interface.
Impact on BTS hardware: This feature applies to only the 3900 series base stations.
feature depends on the feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP.
l License
Context
This feature provides a solution for clock synchronization in the all-IP network. The clock of a
synchronous Ethernet can be obtained and recovered from the physical layer of the Ethernet.
The solution provided by this feature is easy to deploy, as it does not require additional BSC or
BTS hardware.
The clock synchronization technology adopted by this feature is based on the physical layer of
the Ethernet. By using this technology, the clock signals can be retrieved from the code flow of
the Ethernet link. With this feature, the data is transmitted at the physical layer by adopting the
highly precise clock. The reception end can retrieve and recover the clock directly from the data
flow. In this way, the accuracy of the clock is ensured. Another benefit of the feature is that it
does not require additional BTS hardware to achieve clock synchronization in the all-IP network.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the clock type of a BTS. In
this step, set Clock Type to SYNETH_CLK(SynEth Clock).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 64 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet
213
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSBRD to query the current clock source
configuration of the system.
Expected results: Selected Clock Source is SynEth Clock.
----End
Example
SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=SYNETH_CLK, TRANSTYPE=FE, PN=0;
DSP BTSBRD: INFOTYPE=BASEINFO, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 64 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet
214
65 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control
Algorithm
HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.
Prerequisites
This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of
Measurement Report.
l License
The BSC to which the test cell belongs is connected to the M2000, and cell-level
counters can be retrieved on the M2000.
Context
Power control is a process in which the MS or BTS uses certain rules to adjust and control the
transmit power as required, without affecting the speech quality. It reduces the interference in
the entire network and decreases power consumption. Power control is mainly applicable to the
network with tight frequency reuse as well as high traffic volume or strong interference. In the
GSM network, power control can be separately performed on the uplink and downlink. It can
also be performed on each MS.
HUAWEI III power control algorithm enhances and optimizes the GBFD-110703 Enhanced
Power Control Algorithm feature in terms of the filtering algorithm, interpolation of the
measurement report, power control decision algorithm, and flexibility of threshold
configuration.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 65 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm
215
Procedure
Power Control Switch to PWR3(Power controlIII).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, set Allow III
Power Control For AMR to ON(Allowed), set Allow III Power Control For Non-
AMR to ON(Allowed), and set III Power Control Optimized Enable to YES
(Yes). In addition, adjust Huawei III power control parameters or set them to their
default values.
NOTE
l Both Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power Control For Non-
AMR are set to ON(Allowed) by default.
l By default, PC Step Calculation Optimization is set to NO (No). It can be set to YES
(Yes) as required to optimize the results of power control.
YES(Yes).
1. Configure two cells, cell 0 and cell 1, on the BSC6900 and set the frequencies of the
BCCH TRXs of the two cells as non co-channel or adjacent-channel frequencies while
the frequencies of the non-BCCH TRXs as co-channel or adjacent-channel
frequencies.
2. Retrieve the following counters related to cell 0 on the M2000.
Table 65-1 Counters for verifying HUAWEI III power control
Measurement of Power
Control Messages in MR
per Cell
Average MS Power Level of Non-AMR Call
Average BTS Power Level of Non-AMR Call
Ratio of Maximum Downlink Power Duration (%)
Ratio of Maximum Uplink Power Duration (%)
Mean Strength of Downlink Signals
Mean Strength of Uplink Signals
Mean Quality of Downlink Signals
Mean Quality of Uplink Signals
Interference Band
Measurement per TRX
GBSS
216
Receive Quality
Measurement per TRX
Quality Rank 0)
Quality Rank 1)
Quality Rank 2)
Quality Rank 3)
Quality Rank 4)
Quality Rank 5)
Quality Rank 6)
Quality Rank 7)
Quality Rank 0)
Quality Rank 1)
Quality Rank 2)
Quality Rank 3)
GBSS
217
Quality Rank 4)
Quality Rank 5)
Quality Rank 6)
Quality Rank 7)
Quality Rank 0)
Quality Rank 1)
Quality Rank 2)
Quality Rank 3)
Quality Rank 4)
Quality Rank 5)
Quality Rank 6)
Quality Rank 7)
Quality Rank 0)
Quality Rank 1)
Quality Rank 2)
Quality Rank 3)
Quality Rank 4)
Quality Rank 5)
Quality Rank 6)
GBSS
218
Quality Rank 7)

Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1 to PWR2(Power control II).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting
of Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1.
Expected result: Power Control Switch is set to Power control II.
Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1 to PWR3(Power control III).
of Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1.
Expected result: Power Control Switch is set to Power control III.
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, set Allow III
Power Control For AMR to ON(Allowed), and set Allow III Power Control For
Non-AMR to ON(Allowed) for cell 0 and cell 1.
10. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWR3 to query the settings of
Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power Control For Non-
AMR for cell 0 and cell 1.
Expected result: Both Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power
Control For Non-AMR are set to Allowed.
13. Compare the measured counter results obtained from Step 12 and Step 6.
Expected result: For the counters related to power level, the power level obtained in
Step 12 is smaller than that obtained in Step 6. For the counters related to interference
band, the value of a counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 12 is larger than
that obtained in Step 6. For the counters related to receive quality, the value of a
counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 12 is larger than that obtained in
Step 6.
Power Control Switch to PWR2(Power control II).
of Power Control Switch.
Expected result: Power Control Switch is set to PWR2(Power control II).
----End
GBSS
219
66 Configuring Discontinuous
Transmission (DTX)-Downlink
Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink.
Prerequisites
l License
Idle channels are available in the test cell.
Context
DTX reduces data to be transmitted during inactive speech periods, thereby reducing system
interference and saving system resources. DTX also reduces BTS power consumption and
frequency interference on the radio interface.
CAUTION
DTX cannot be configured in multi-site cell mode.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set FR
Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes).
GBSS
66 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-
Downlink
220
NOTE
If half-rate calls are in progress, set HR Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set DL DTX
Strategy to BSC_STRATEGY(BSC Strategy).
1. Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully.
2. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain
Messages on the Abis Interface, and then check the message tracing results.
Expected result: A message of the Channel Activation type is traced. In the
information element (IE) channel-mode, the value of dtx-downlink is 1, indicating
that the BSC supports downlink DTX.
Use Downlink DTX to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRDLDTX=YES;
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, DLDTXPOLICY=BSC_STRATEGY;
//Deactivating Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRDLDTX=NO;
GBSS
66 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-
Downlink
221
67 Configuring Discontinuous
Transmission (DTX)-Uplink
Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink.
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on other features
l License
Idle channels are available in the test cell.
Context
License is required to activate DTX.
DTX reduces the data to be transmitted during inactive speech periods, thus reducing the system
interference and saving system resources. In addition, DTX reduces the workload of the TX
module of the MS, thus enabling the MS to enjoy a longer call duration and standby time.
CAUTION
DTX cannot be configured in multi-site cell mode.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 67 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink
222
Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use).
NOTE
If the HR service is processed currently, set HR Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use).
Messages on the Abis Interface.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to send system messages
to the test cell.
3. Check the results of message tracing over the Abis interface in the CS domain.
Expected results: A message of the BCCH Information type is traced. system-info-
type is system-information-3 and the value of dtx is 1. The system message is sent
correctly.
5. Check the results of message tracing over the Abis interface in the CS domain.
Expected results: A message of the Channel Activation type is traced. In the
information element channel-number, the value of channel-type is bm-acch. In the
information element channel-mode, the value of dtx-uplink is 1. This indicates that
the BSC supports uplink DTX.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to set the basic
parameters of a cell. In this step, set FR Uplink DTX to Shall_NOT_Use(Shall not
Use).
----End
Example
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRULDTX=Shall_Use;
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRULDTX=Shall_NOT_Use;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 67 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink
223
68 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier
Intelligent Shutdown
TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown.
Prerequisites
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping) when one frequency hopping
group is involved in baseband hopping.
GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping) when inter-module RF hopping is
applied.
GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.
GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping(in GBSS12.0, the GBFD-111602 TRX
Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown can be used together with the GBFD-113703
Antenna Frequency Hopping feature when DRRUs or DRFUs are used.).
GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing.
l License
Context
The TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function can be enabled during a specific
period. After this function is enabled, idle TRXs can be shut down to reduce power consumption
when estimated traffic load is light, and disabled TRXs can be switched on so that they are
available for use when estimated traffic load is heavy.
Generally, channel allocation measures are used together with this function. The channels on
the BCCH TRX are preferentially assigned so that the utilization of the non-BCCH TRX
channels is decreased and the overall power consumption of the BTS is reduced. In addition, the
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 68 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown
224
BTS allocates channels based on the priorities of TRXs. Channels on the TRXs with high
priorities are preferentially assigned to MSs. In this way, the BSC centralizes busy channels into
a few TRXs so that as many idle TRXs as possible can be shut down.
When the BCCH TRX participates in baseband FH, the cell TRX cannot be shut down. Thus,
the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown cannot be used.
When the BCCH TRX does not participate in baseband FH and all the TRXs (excluding the
BCCH TRX) in the cell are idle, the TRXs can be shut down. If one or more TRXs (excluding
the BCCH TRX) are not idle, the TRXs cannot be shut down.
Before configuring Allow Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier on the TRX, ensure that the TRX
meets the following conditions:
l The TRX is not on the BCCH.
l The PDCH is not available on the TRX.
l The antenna hopping is disabled for the TRX.
After confirming that all target TRXs are shutdown, wait for one minute, and then check whether
the power decreases.
Data Preparation
Parameter
Name Parameter ID Remarks
Data
Source
Allow Dynamic
Shutdown of TRX
by BSC
BSCDynSwitchT
rxPAAllow
This parameter specifies whether to
enable the TRX Intelligent Shutdown
feature. This parameter takes effect on
all BTSs under a BSC.
Networ
k
plannin
g
Time When the
Function Is
Enabled
StartTimeTAClo-
seTrxPA
Set this parameter based on the cell
traffic volume. You are advised to use
this feature during off-peak hours.
Networ
k
plannin
g
Time When the
Function Is
Disabled
EndTimeTAClo-
seTrxPA
Set this parameter based on the cell
traffic volume. You are advised to use
this feature during off-peak hours.
Networ
k
plannin
g
Allow Dynamic
Shutdown of TRX
DYNOpenTrxPo
wer
You are advised to set this parameter to
YES(Yes) for all cells.
Networ
k
plannin
g
Allow Dynamic
Shutdown of TRX
CPS This parameter specifies whether to
allow the BSC to enable or disable the
TRX power amplifier based on the
traffic volume.
Networ
k
plannin
g
GBSS
225
Parameter
Data
Source
TRX Power-on
Protection Time
ProtectTimeTrx-
PowerOn
This parameter is set to prevent the BSC
from frequently enabling or disabling
the TRX. After a TRX is powered on,
the BSC is not allowed to disable the
TRX within the period of time specified
by this parameter.
Networ
k
plannin
g
Reserve Idle
Channel Number
RsvIdleChanNu
m
This parameter specifies the number of
reserved idle channels. If this parameter
is set too small, the TRX will be
frequently enabled or disabled. If this
parameter is set too large, idle TRXs will
not be disabled in a timely manner.
Networ
k
plannin
g

Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set Allow
Dynamic Shutdown Trx by BSC to YES(Yes), and set Time When the Function
Is Enabled and Time When the Function Is Disabled according to the actual
condition.
Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier to YES(Yes) to enable the
TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function for the cell.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Allow
Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier to YES(Yes), therefore allowing the BSC6900
to shut down the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.
4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BSCDSTPADATE. In this step,
set the period in which the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function is
disabled. In the period of heavy traffic, this function needs to be disabled.
NOTE
l The BSC6900 MML command LST BSCDSTPADATE can be used to query the value of
Prohibit DynShutdown TRX DateRangeldx.
l The BSC6900 MML command RMV BSCDSTPADATE can be used to remove the period in
which the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function is disabled.
1. Wait for about five minutes. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP
GTRXSTAT to query the value of Close TRX Power.
Expected result: The value of Close TRX Power is Yes.
Dynamic Shutdown Trx by BSC to NO(No).
Allow Dynamic Shutdwn TRX to NO(No).
GBSS
226
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Allow Dynamic
Shutdown TRX to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Enabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for the
BSC
SET BSCDSTPA: BSCDynSwitchTrxPAAllow=YES, StartTimeTACloseTrxPA=19&00,
EndTimeTACloseTrxPA=24&00;
//Enabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for a
cell
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, DYNOpenTrxPower=YES;
//Enabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for a
TRX
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, CPS=YES;
//Setting the period during which the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent
Shutdown function is prohibited
ADD BSCDSTPADATE: DateRangeIndex=1, StartMonthDSTPA=JAN,
StartDayDSTPA=10, EndMonthDSTPA=FEB, EndDayDSTPA=10;
//Disabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for the
BSC
SET BSCDSTPA: BSCDynSwitchTrxPAAllow=NO;
//Disabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for a
cell
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, DYNOpenTrxPower=NO;
//Disabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for a
TRX
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, CPS=NO;
GBSS
227
69 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier
Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level
TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level.
Prerequisites
DRFU, RRU3004, and DTRU (type B) support this feature.
BTSs configured with multi-transceivers do not support this feature.
BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012, and BTS3012AE do not support this feature when
they use a non-optimized double-transceiver unit.
l License
Context
TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level is a function based on which the
PA is controlled on a timeslot basis. In this manner, the static power consumption of the PA is
0 in the timeslots when the TRX is has no data to transmit, and thus the static power consumption
of the PA is reduced.
TRX power consumption is a major part of the BTS power consumption, and PA power
consumption is a major part of TRX power consumption. According to network operation
experiences, TRXs do not transmit signals all the time. This function shuts down the PA of the
TRX when there is no data to be transmitted in certain timeslots, thus reducing the cost on power
greatly.
Data Preparation
GBSS
on Timeslot Level
228
Parameter
Name Parameter ID Remarks Data Source
Allow Turning
Off Time Slot
TsTurningOffEna-
ble
This parameter does not
depend on other parameters.
Network
planning

Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set Allow Turning
Off Time Slot to YES(Yes).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCDSTPA to check the value of Time Slot
Turning Off PA Enable. The expected result is Yes.
Dynamic Shutdown of TRX by BSC to NO(No).
----End
Example
SET BSCDSTPA: TsTurningOffEnable=YES;
LST BSCDSTPA:;
SET BSCDSTPA: TsTurningOffEnable=NO;
GBSS
on Timeslot Level
229
70 Configuring Intelligent Combiner
Bypass
Intelligent Combiner Bypass.
Prerequisites
Intelligent Combiner Bypass (ICB) is applicable to only the double-transceiver TRXs
and must be configured as combining output. The TRXs supporting ICB are the DTRU
(type B), , RRU3004, and DRFU.
(baseband hopping), GBFD-113701, Antenna Frequency Hoppingare or GBFD-510104
Multi-site Cell.
l License
Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment in the MML command SET
GCELLBASICPARA is set to Yes.
Context
The ICB can be enabled only when all the non-BCCH carriers are idle and there are idle channels
on the BCCH carrier in the cell.
The ICB function cannot be enabled on channels that are configured as static PDCHs. Neither
can the function be enabled on dynamic PDCHs (TCHs) that are converted to PDCHs.
The enabled ICB feature does not save energy in all cases. It is energy-saving only when the
output power of the TRX is 40 W and the static power level is 0, when the output power of the
TRX is 60 W and the static power level is 0, or when the output power of the TRX is 60 W and
the static power level is 1.
Data Preparation
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 70 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass
230
Parameter
Name
Parameter
ID Remarks Data Source
ICB Allowed ICBALLOW You can set this parameter to YES
(YES) only when the SNDMD for an
RF module is set to WBANDCOMB
(Wideband Combination).
Network
planning

Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, change
ICB Allowed to YES(YES).
None.
----End
Example
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, ICBALLOW=YES;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 70 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass
231
71 Configuring Active Backup Power
Control
Active Backup Power Control.
Prerequisites
The BTS must be configured with the battery and PMU.
l License
Huawei power backup device is needed, such as APM30.
Context
When the BTS external power supply fails, storage batteries are started to supply power. The
BTS shuts down some TRXs automatically under the control of a timer to save the backup power.
Meanwhile, the BTS gradually decreases the TRX transmit power with a certain step until the
entire BTS is powered off. When the BTS external power supply recovers, start the TRXs. Then,
the transmit power of all the TRXs recovers.
Considering the cell coverage, cell capacity, and backup power, this feature gradually decreases
cell coverage and hands over MSs at the cell edge to neighboring cells. This does not degrade
network performance.
NOTE
Using this feature decreases the system capacity.
Operators can choose any of the following modes:
l Coverage preferred
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 71 Configuring Active Backup Power Control
232
Shut down some TRXs and then gradually reduce the transmit power of the remaining
TRXs.
l Capacity preferred
Gradually reduce the transmit power of all TRXs and then shut down some of the TRXs.
l Backup power preferred
Shut down some TRXs and at the same time reduce the transmit power of the remaining
TRXs.
Procedure
1. Coverage preferred
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR to set parameters related to
hierarchical backup power reduction of a BTS. In this step, set Backup Power Saving
Method to BYPWR(Reduce Backup Power) and Backup Power Saving Policy to
BYCOVER(Cover Priority), and set Drop Power Start Time[T1], Shutdown TRX
Start Time[T2], Drop Power Time Interval[T3], Drop Power Step, and Max Drop
Power Threshold to appropriate values.
2. Capacity preferred
BYCAP(Capability Priority), and set Drop Power Start Time[T1], Shutdown
TRX Start Time[T2], Drop Power Time Interval[T3], Drop Power Step, and Max
Drop Power Threshold to appropriate values.
3. Backup power preferred
BYSAVING(Saving Priority), and set Drop Power Start Time[T1], Shutdown
TRX Start Time[T2], Drop Power Time Interval[T3], Drop Power Step, and Max
Drop Power Threshold to appropriate values.
1. Before the feature is activated:
a. Shut down the mains power supply of the BTS locally. The BTS reports
ALM-25622 Mains Input Out of Range, and the battery starts to supply power
b. When the BTS reports ALM-21807 OML Fault, the entire BTS is powered off.
c. Measure the difference between the time the BTS reporting ALM-25622 Mains
Input Out of Range and the time the BTS reporting ALM-21807 OML
Fault. That is, measure the lasting duration.
2. After the feature is activated, perform the same operations as that are performed before
the feature is activated at the same time of a different day.
3. Compare the lasting duration before and after the feature is activated. If the lasting
duration after feature activation is greater than that before feature activation, this
feature takes effect.
NOTE
The methods of deactivating this feature in GUL modes are the same.
GBSS
233
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR. In this step, set Backup
Power Saving Method to BYTRX(Turn off TRX).
----End
Example
//Enabling Active Backup Power Control
SET BTSBAKPWR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BAKPWRSAVMETHOD=BYPWR;
//Disabling Active Backup Power Control
SET BTSBAKPWR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BAKPWRSAVMETHOD=BYTRX;
GBSS
234
72 Configuring Power Optimization Based
on Channel Type
Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.
Prerequisites
Currently, only double-transceiver TRXs support this feature.
(baseband hopping), GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping, or GBFD-510104
Multi-site Cell.
Context
The power consumption optimization based on channel type has two functions: dynamic voltage
adjustment and dynamic PDCH voltage adjustment. With the dynamic voltage adjustment
function, different working voltages are provided for the TRX power amplifiers according to
the applied modulation scheme. If all channels on a TRX are configured as TCHs and the TRX
works in GMSK mode, the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in GMSK
mode. If a channel on the TRX is configured as dynamic or static PDCH and the TRX works in
8PSK mode; the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in 8PSK mode. The
BTS provides the TRX with appropriate working voltage, reducing the power consumption.
Data Preparation
Parameter
GPRS GPRS Set this parameter based on the
current network status.
Network
planning
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 72 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
235
Parameter
EDGE EDGE Set this parameter based on the
current network status.
Network
planning
PDCH Power
Saving Enable
PDCHPWRSAV
EN
Set this parameter to YES(Yes)
only for carriers with dynamic
PDCHs.
Network
planning
Adjust Voltage BTSadjust The recommended value is YES
(Yes).
Network
planning

Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set PDCH
Power Saving Enable to YES(Yes).
Adjust Voltage to YES(Yes).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query the value of PDCH
Power Saving Enable.
Expected result: The value of PDCH Power Saving Enable is YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBASICPARA to query the value
of Adjust Voltage.
Expected result: The value of Adjust Voltage is Yes.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set PDCH
Power Saving Enable to NO(No).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to set Adjust
Voltage to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Enabling GPRS and EDGE
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES;
//Enabling the PDCH power optimization function
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, PDCHPWRSAVEN=YES;
//Enabling the dynamic voltage adjustment function
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, BTSadjust=YES;
//Disabling the PDCH power optimization function
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, PDCHPWRSAVEN=NO;
GBSS
236
//Disabling the dynamic voltage adjustment function
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, BTSadjust=NO;
GBSS
237
73 Configuring PSU Smart Control
PSU Smart Control.
Prerequisites
The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012 (DTRU/QTRU), BTS3900B, and BTS3900E
do not support this feature.
The BTS is configured with storage batteries, and no alarm about broken battery loop,
AC overvoltage, or AC undervoltage is generated.
The BTS must be configured with the PSU.
l License
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PSU
Turning Off Enable to YES(YES).
This feature does not need to be verified.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PSU
Turning Off Enable to NO(NO).
----End
Example
//Activating PSU Smart Control
SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, PSUTURNINGOFFENABLE=YES;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 73 Configuring PSU Smart Control
238
//Deactivating PSU Smart Control
SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, PSUTURNINGOFFENABLE=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 73 Configuring PSU Smart Control
239
74 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power
Consumption Optimization
Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization.
Prerequisites
BTS3900B does not support this feature.
Context
The Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization feature aims to reduce the transmit
power of the non-BCCH timeslots of the BCCH TRX, reducing the power consumption of the
BTS.
NOTE
After this feature is enabled, the accuracy of measuring the receive levels of neighboring cells may be affected.
Therefore, it is recommended that this feature be enabled when the traffic is light, for example, at night.
Data Preparation
Parameter
Power Derating
Enabled
MAINBCCHPW
RDTEN
To use the BCCH Power
Consumption Optimization
function, set this parameter to
YES(Yes).
Network
planning
GBSS
74 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption
Optimization
240
Parameter
Power Derating
Start Time
MAIN-
BCCHPWRDTS
TIME
Set this parameter during off-
peak hours.
Network
planning
Power Derating
End Time
MAINBCCHPW
RDTETIME
Set this parameter during off-
peak hours.
Network
planning
Power Derating
Range
MAIN-
BCCHPWRDTR
ANGE
This parameter does not affect
cell reselection and handover
measurement.
Network
planning
Power Derating
Active Channel
Enabled
MAIN-
BCCHPWDTAC
TCHEN
This parameter does not affect
cell reselection and handover
measurement.
Network
planning

Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set Power
Derating Enabled to YES(Yes), and set other parameters such as Power Derating
Start Time, Power Derating End Time, and Power Derating Range.
WARNING
l When the power of the non-BCCH timeslots of the BCCH TRX is reduced, the
downlink receive level of the cell detected by the MS camping on the neighboring
cells may be inaccurate and the handover of the MS to the cell may fail. Therefore,
perform this operation with caution.
l When Power Derating Enabled is set to YES(Yes) and the current time is between
Power Derating Start Time and Power Derating End Time, the BTS reduces
the transmit power of idle channels in non-BCCH timeslots on a BCCH TRX by
Power Derating Range.
l When Power Derating Enabled is set to YES(Yes), the BTS also reduces the
power of occupied channels on a BCCH TRX. If power control is applied to the
occupied channel and the reduction degree in power control is smaller than the
value of Power Derating Range, then degree in power control is used in power
reduction; otherwise, the reduction range depends on Power Derating Range.
2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step,
set Power Derating Active Channel Enabled to YES(Yes) so that the BSC6900 can
reduce the transmit power of the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT to query the value of
Power Derating Enabled.
Expected result: The value of Power Derating Enabled is Yes.
GBSS
Optimization
241
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set Power
Derating Enabled to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Enabling the Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization function
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, MAINBCCHPWRDTEN=YES;
//Disabling the Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization function
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, MAINBCCHPWRDTEN=NO;
GBSS
Optimization
242
75 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off
Dynamic Cell Power Off.
Prerequisites
BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.
You are advised to use this feature together with GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier
Intelligent Shutdown and GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power
Sharing(Dual PA power sharing).
l License
The BTS of the specified cell supports this feature.
The specified cell has a co-coverage cell.
Context
In a co-BSC multiband network topology, when the traffic volume is low, a fully covered
network can carry all the traffic on the existing network. In such a case, all network equipment
of the other frequency band can be disabled to reduce the network power consumption.
Data Preparation
Parameter
Data
Source
Enable
Turning Off
Cell
TURNOFFENAB
LE
To enable the Dynamic Cell Power Off
feature, set this parameter to ENABLE
(Enable).
Network
planning
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 75 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off
243
Parameter
Data
Source
Same
Coverage Cell
No
SAMECVGCEL
LID
This parameter specifies the ID or name of
co-coverage cells.
Network
planning
Same
Coverage Cell
Load
Threshold
SAMECVGCEL
LLOADTHRD
The value of this parameter is obtained
based on the historical traffic statistics.
Network
planning
Dyn. Turning
On Cell Load
Threshold
TURNONCELL-
LOADTHRD
based on the historical traffic statistics.
Network
planning
Dyn. Turning
Off Cell Busy
Channel Num.
TURNOFFCELL
CHANNUM
A small value of this parameter decreases
the number of handovers in a cell, but leads
to delayed cell shutdown and decreases the
gain obtained from the function. You are
advised to use the default value.
Network
planning
Dyn. Turning
Off Cell
Protection
Time
PROTECTTIME A larger value of this parameter prevents
ping-pong handovers in a cell, but shortens
the cell shutdown duration and decreases
the gain obtained from this function. You
are advised to use the default value.
Network
planning
Same
Coverage Cell
Load Stat.
Time
SAMECVGCEL
LLOADSTATT
M
A larger value of this parameter prevents
ping-pong handovers in a cell, but shortens
the cell shutdown duration and decreases
the gain obtained from this function. You
are advised to use the default value.
Network
planning
Dyn. Turning
Off Cell Start
Time
TURNOFFCELL
STRTIME
according to the historical traffic statistics.
Set this parameter to a time point in the
period when the traffic volume is lower
than TURNONCELLLOADTHRD.
Network
planning
Dyn. Turning
Off Cell Stop
Time
TURNOFFCELL
STPTIME
according to the historical traffic statistics.
Set this parameter to a time point in the
period when the traffic volume is lower
than TURNONCELLLOADTHRD
Network
planning

Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, set
Enable Turning Off Cell to ENABLE(Enable) and the parameters related to the
time of dynamic cell power off and co-coverage cell to appropriate values.
GBSS
244
NOTE
l When activating the dynamic cell power off feature, you must configure a co-coverage cell.
l If the co-coverage cell does not support certain services in the cell, the related services
cannot be processed in the co-coverage cell after the dynamic cell power off feature is
deactivated.
NOTE
The cell to be verified has a co-coverage cell and the co-coverage cell works properly. There is no
call access request in the cell to be verified. The traffic of the co-coverage cell is lower than Same
Coverage Cell Load Threshold.
It is recommended that Same Coverage Cell Load Threshold be set to a value close to the maximum
value 100 so that the conditions for this feature can be easily met. After the verification, this parameter
must be reset to an appropriate value based on the network plan.
Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, Enable Turning Off Cell to
ENABLE(Enable), and Same Coverage Cell Index Type to the index of the co-
coverage cell. In addition, set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning
Off Cell Stop Time to appropriate values so that the current time is within the time
period specified by the two parameters.
2. Wait for about five minutes, and then run the BSC6900 MML command DSP
GCELLSTAT to query the status of the cell to be verified.
Expected result: Cell Dynamic Switch is set to Yes, which indicates that the dynamic
cell power off feature has been activated.
Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time to ensure
that the current time is beyond the time period specified by the two parameters.
4. Wait for about one minute, and then run the BSC6900 MML command DSP
GCELLSTAT to query the status of the cell to be verified.
Expected result: The value of Cell Dynamic Switch is No. This indicates that the cell
is enabled.
Enable Turning Off Cell to DISABLE(Disable).
----End
Example
//Activating Dynamic Cell Power Off
SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=ENABLE,
SAMECVGCELLIDTYPE=BYID, SAMECVGCELLID=1, TURNOFFCELLSTRTIME=23&33,
TURNOFFCELLSTPTIME=05&33;
//Deactivating Dynamic Cell Power Off
SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=DISABLE;
GBSS
245
76 Configuring TRX Working Voltage
Adjustment
TRX Working Voltage Adjustment.
Prerequisites
Double- and multi-carrier RF modules support this feature.
l License
Context
Data Preparation
Parameter
Name
Parameter
Adjust Voltage BTSadjust You are advised to set this parameter
to YES(Yes) for all cells configured
with multicarrier RF modules.
Network
planning

Procedure
Adjust Voltage to YES(Yes).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 76 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
246
1. Measure the input current and voltage of the TRX board using a clamp meter and
voltmeter, and compare the power consumption before and after enabling the TRX
working voltage adjustment function. It is proven that after the function is enabled,
the power consumption decreases.
Adjust Voltage to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSadjust=YES;
//Deactivating TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSadjust=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 76 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
247
77 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent
Voltage Adjustment
This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier
Intelligent Voltage Adjustment.
Prerequisites
BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012/AE(DTRU), DBS3900(RRU3004), BTS3900/A/L
(DRFU), and BTS3900B do not support the feature.
l License
Context
Data Preparation
Parameter
Name
Parameter
PA Intelligent
Adjust Voltage
PaAdjVol You are advised to set this parameter
to YES(Yes) for all cells configured
with multicarrier RF modules.
Network
planning

Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PA
Intelligent Adjust Voltage to YES(YES).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 77 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment
248
None.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PA
Intelligent Adjust Voltage to NO(NO).
----End
Example
SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PaAdjVol=YES;
SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PaAdjVol=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 77 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment
249
Flex Abis.
Prerequisites
For a BTS3900B or BTS3X series base station which does not support Flex Abis,
If a BTS3X series base station is a root node in a chain or tree topology, none of the
base stations in the chain or tree support Flex Abis.
If a BTS3X series base station is a lower-level base station of BTSs that support Flex
Abis, Flex Abis can be enabled on the upper-level BTSs only when the following
conditions are met:
Flex Abis Mode for the BTS is set to SEMI_ABIS(Semisolid Abis).
Flex Abis Mode for its upper-level BTSs is set to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis).
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and
OML on A-bis Interface, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/
T1, GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization, or GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass.
l License
The configuration on the BTS is complete. For details, see Configuring a BTS.
Context
Flex Abis enables the sharing of the Abis transmission resources among different BTSs, cells,
and services and therefore improves the resource utilization. Especially for multi-cell large
capacity BTSs, cascaded BTSs, and the cells configured with the EDGE function, the dynamic
Abis resource allocation can greatly improve resource utilization.
Before Flex Abis is introduced, there is one-to-one mapping between the Um interface resources
and the Abis interface transmission resources. After Flex Abis is enabled in the BSC, the Abis
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 78 Configuring Flex Abis
250
interface transmission resources work in resource pool mode to improve the utilization of the
transmission resources.
If a ring topology needs to be configured, only BTS ring topology I is supported. When both
Huawei I BTS ring topology and Flex Abis are applied, the following conditions must be met:
l Flex Abis must be configured on all BTSs. In addition, the BTSs support only the
configuration of one E1 for the forward link and one E1 for the reverse link.
l No BTS can be configured with Abis bypass.
l No BTS can be configured with 16 kbit/s LPAD signaling links.
l No BTS can be configured with Abis timeslot self-detection and self-healing functions.
Before deploying Flex Abis, collect the information specified in Table 78-1.
GBSS
251
Table 78-1 Data preparation
Parameter
Flex Abis Mode FLEXABISMO
DE
Configuration principles for
cascaded BTSs
l To enable Flex Abis for a
cascaded BTS on a link, set
Flex Abis Mode to
FLEX_ABIS for its upper-
level BTSs.
l If Flex Abis Mode is set to
SEMI_ABIS for a cascaded
BTS on a link, set Flex Abis
Mode to SEMI_ABIS for all
its lower-level BTSs.
l Use the E1 port of the primary
cabinet group to connect the
primary cabinet group of the
level-1 BTS to a BSC interface
board. Use the internal
connections of the primary
cabinet group to connect the
secondary cabinet group to a
BSC interface board.
Alternatively, use the E1 port
of the secondary cabinet group
to connect the secondary
cabinet group to a BSC
interface board.
l Use only the E1 ports of the
primary cabinet groups to
connect cascaded BTSs. Use
the internal connections of the
primary cabinet group of a
lower-level BTS to connect the
BTS to an upper-level BTS.
Alternatively, use the E1 port
of the secondary cabinet to
connect the BTS to a BSC
interface board. Note that
secondary cabinet groups
belonging to the same BTS
cannot be cascaded.
l One BTS can only have one
upper-level BTS.
Configuration principles for other
BTSs
Users are allowed to run the
BSC6900 MML command SET
Network
planning
GBSS
252
Parameter
BTSFORBIDTSto disable certain
timeslots except timeslots in fixed
allocation mode, such as signaling
timeslots and monitoring timeslots
on E1 links for a Flex Abis-enabled
BTS. Certain timeslots need to be
disabled in certain transmission
modes, such as satellite mode or
when only some timeslots on an E1
link can be used.
Multiplexing
Mode
MPMODE If this parameter is set to a large
value, the RSLs will become
congested. Therefore, set this
parameter to MODE5_1 or
MODE6_1 only when the traffic
on a BTS is light.
Network
planning
Transmission
Resource
Preempting
Support
ENPREEMPTT
RANSADMT
To enable CS services to preempt
the Abis transmission resources
occupied by PS services when all
Abis transmission resources are
occupied, set this parameter to
ON.
The setting of this parameter is
effective for all BTSs under the
BSC.
Network
planning
PCU Support
PREEMPT_ABI
S_LINK
Message
PCUPREEMPT
FLAG
If an external PCU is used, and if a
quick release of Abis links
occupied by PS services is
required, set this parameter to
Yes.
In this way, after CS services
preempt Abis transmission
resources, the BSC sends the PCU
messages indicating Abis link
preemption, instructing the PCU to
release the Abis links, which in
turn speeds up the Abis link
release.
Network
planning
Congestion
remain ratio
TDMCONGTH Set this parameter to a value
smaller than that of Congestion
clear remain ratio to prevent
ping-pong handovers when
transmission links are congested.
Network
planning
GBSS
253
Parameter
Congestion clear
remain ratio
TDMCONGCL
RTH
Set this parameter to a value larger
than that of Congestion remain
ratio to prevent ping-pong
handovers when transmission
links are congested.
Network
planning
TRM Load
Threshold switch
LOADTHSW l If this parameter is set to ON,
load control is enabled when
transmission links are
congested. In this case, set
TRM load threshold index to
specify the threshold used for
load control.
Network
planning
TRM load
threshold index
TRMLOADTHI
NDEX
The value of this parameter must
be unique.
Network
planning
LDR First LDRFST If this parameter is set to any value
other than CLOSE, the value must
be different from the values of
LDR Second, LDR Third, and
LDR Fourth.
Network
planning
LDR Second LDRSND If this parameter is set to any value
LDR First, LDR Third, and LDR
Fourth.
Network
planning
LDR Third LSRTRD If this parameter is set to any value
LDR First, LDR Second, and
LDR Fourth.
Network
planning
LDR Fourth LDRFOUH If this parameter is set to any value
LDR First, LDR Second, and
LDR Third.
Network
planning

Procedure
GBSS
254
CAUTION
This operation will cause the BTS to be out-of-service. Therefore, perform this
operation during off-peak hours.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS to enable flex Abis. In this step, set
Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) and set BTS Multiplexing Mode to an
appropriate value.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSFLEXABISPARA. In this step, set
TCHH Function Switch, Fix Abis Prior Choose Load Thred, Flex Abis Prior
Choose Load Thred, and other parameters to appropriate values.
CAUTION
The transmission resources on the Abis interface may become insufficient before the
TCHF resources become insufficient. To solve this problem, set the following
parameters to enable the TCHH allocation based on the traffic load on the Abis
interface: TCHH Function Switch, Fix Abis Prior Choose Load Thred, and Flex
Abis Prior Choose Load Thred.
When TCHH Function Switch is set to YES(YES), the system allocates TCHHs
preferentially if the fixed Abis channel seizure ratio exceeds Fix Abis Prior Choose
Load Thred and the flex Abis channel seizure ratio exceeds Flex Abis Prior Choose
Load Thred.
4. Optional: If an external PCU is used and the PCU supports preempting Abis
transmission resources,Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
BTSFLEXABISPARA. In this step, set PCU Support PREEMPT_ABIS_LINK
Message to YES(YES).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to enable the preemption of
PS secondary link resources of local BTS and lower-level BTS by CS services. In this
step, set Sublink Resources Preemption Switch to YES(YES) and Low-level
Sublink Resource Preempt Switch to YES(YES).
If there are lower-level BTSs, you are advised to set both Sublink Resources
Preemption Switch and Low-level Sublink Resource Preempt Switch to YES
(YES). In this manner, the access success rate of the CS services is increased if
the Abis transmission resources are insufficient.
If there are no lower-level BTSs, you are advised to set Sublink Resources
Preemption Switch to YES(YES). In this manner, the access success rate of the
CS services is increased if the Abis transmission resources are insufficient.
NOTE
When all the Abis transmission resources are occupied, the new CS services need to request
transmission resources. In this case, the CS services need to preempt the resources of the PS services
so that the resources are preferentially allocated to the CS services.
NOTE
CS services can preempt the resources occupied by PCUs when PCU Support
PREEMPT_ABIS_LINK Message is set to YES.
6. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set
Transmission Resource Preempting Support to ON(On).
GBSS
255
If Transmission Resource Preempting Support is set to ON(On) and all Abis
transmission resources are occupied, new CS services require more Abis transmission
resources. In this case, the CS services can preempt the Abis transmission resources
occupied by PS services so that the requirements for CS services can be preferentially
met. The setting of this parameter is effective for all BTSs under the BSC.
7. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMLOADTH. In this step, set
Transport Type to TDM, and set TRM load threshold index, Congestion remain
ratio, and Congestion clear remain ratio to appropriate values.
This step is mandatory if the control over transmission resource congestion is required.
8. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCABISPRIMAP. In this step,
specify the BTS to be configured. Set Carrier Type to TDM, and set TRM Load
Threshold switch and TRM load threshold index to appropriate values.
This step is mandatory if the control over transmission resource congestion is required.
NOTE
TRM load threshold index must be set to the value specified by TRM load threshold index in
ADD TRMLOADTH.
9. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LDR. In this step, set LDR
First, LDR Second, LDR Third, and LDR Fourth to appropriate values.
The setting of this parameter is effective for all BTSs under the BSC. This step is
mandatory if the control over transmission resource congestion is required.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSPORTTS. In this step, set BTS In Port
NO. to the number of the port that the base station is connected to, Port Direction to
the same direction as the base station, and TS Type to ALL(ALL).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSFORBIDTS to block flex timeslots. In
this step, set Start Timeslot No., Start Sub Timeslot No., End Timeslot NO., and
End Sub Timeslot NO. according to the timeslot No. and sub-timeslot No. of Flex
timeslots to ensure that only two contiguous 8 kbit/s sub-timeslots are used for Flex
Abis.
NOTE
Do not block any timeslot other than Flex Abis timeslots. Timeslots are blocked in unit of 16 kbit/
s subtimeslots, and reserve only one 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot for services.
3. Run the MML command DEA GCELL. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of
the cell to be blocked. Repeat this step until there is only one cell under the BTS.
4. Run the MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, set Channel
No. to the number of the channel to be blocked, and Administrative State to Lock
(Lock). Repeat this step until the cell under the BTS has only one BCCH, one SDCCH,
and two TCHs.
5. Use the test MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell, and keep the call alive.
Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ABISTS to query the timeslot state. In this
step, specify Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No., and set State to OCCUPIED
(OCCUPIED). Check that the Flex Abis timeslot corresponding to the TCH occupied
by the call is the timeslot that is unblocked.
6. End the call and block the occupied TCH by performing the previous steps. Then,
only one unblocked TCH is available.
7. Use the test MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell, and keep the call alive.
Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ABISTS to check the state of timeslots. In
GBSS
256
this step, specify Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No., and set State to OCCUPIED
(OCCUPIED). Check that the call initiated by the MS is carried on a new TCH whose
Flex Abis timeslot is unblocked.
8. Hang up the call.
NOTE
This operation will cause the BTS to be out-of-service. Therefore, perform this operation during
off-peak hours.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Flex Abis Mode to
FIX_16K_ABIS(Fix Abis).
----End
Example
//Activating Flex Abis
MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, NEWNAME="bts-3900",
FLEXABISMODE=FLEX_ABIS, MPMODE=MODE4_1;
SET BTSFLEXABISPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ABISRESADJTCHHFUNSW=YES;
//Deactivating Flex Abis
MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, NEWNAME="bts-3900",
FLEXABISMODE=FIX_16K_ABIS;
GBSS
257
79 Configuring BTS Local Switch
BTS Local Switch.
Prerequisites
BTS local switching applies only to BTSs using double-transceiver units and 3900 series
base stations in TDM or IP transmission mode.
In Abis over TDM transmission mode, this feature depends on the feature
GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.
In Abis over IP transmission mode, this feature depends on the features GBFD-118601
Abis over IP and GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP,
GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization,
GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis, GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-115601
Automatic Level Control (ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC),
GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115701 TFO, GBFD-115703
Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC), GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss
Concealment (EPLC), GBFD-115711 EVAD, GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate
Threshold Adaptive Adjustment, GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis.
l License
The BSC works in either BM/TC separated mode or BM/TC combined mode, and the
TDM transmission mode is applied over the Ater and A interfaces.
At sites where BTS312s and BTS3012s combine into groups, BSS local switching is
enabled only when both the BTS software and the TRX software support it.
If the calling MS and the called MS are registered on two different MSCs, BSS local
switching is not supported regardless of whether the two MSCs are connected to the
same MGW or different MGWs.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 79 Configuring BTS Local Switch
258
In High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) transmission mode, BSS local switching is
not supported.
Context
BTS local switching applies only to BTSs using double-transceiver units and 3900 series base
stations in TDM or IP transmission mode.
When a BTS uses the TDM transmission mode, the BTS must be enabled with Flex Abis or
SemiSolid mode.
When a BTS uses the IP transmission mode, BTS local switching is classified into the local
switching under a BTS and the local switching between IP BTSs in a local switching area. The
local switching under a BTS is considered as a special case of the local switching between IP
BTSs in a local switching area. Local switching area refers to the area where the BTSs are in IP
transmission mode and are connected to the same BSC.
BTS local switching saves transmission resources on the Abis and Ater interfaces and reduces
the TC processing delay during a call.
If the MSC is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable in BTS local
switching mode: MSC playing the announcement during a call, DTMF number receiving during
a call, speech service and then fax service, and separate billing of BSS local switching.
Procedure
TDM transmission
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSSLS. In this step, set BSS Local
Switching General Strategy to BTSPRIORITY(BTS Priority) or BTSONLY
(BTS Only) and set Options for BTS Local Switch and Avoid Number for
BTS to appropriate values.
If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to ABISCONGESTS(Start When
Abis Congests), you need to specify Abis Jam Rate for BTS Local Switch.
If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix
Number), you need to specify Prefix Number for BTS.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE to determine whether BSS
local switching is performed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC.
If the BSC6900 is expected to perform BSS local switching independently
based on network planning, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local
Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).
If the MSC is expected to be involved in BSS local switching based on network
planning, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to BASIC
(Basic Function) or ENHANCED(Enhanced Function) and then set related
parameters on the MSC side.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Flex Abis
Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) or SEMI_ABIS(Semisolid Abis).
NOTE
1. Before performing this step, run the MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS
if it has been activated.
2. After performing this step, run the MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.
GBSS
259
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLSW. In this step, set Support BTS
Local Switch to YES(Yes).
IP transmission
Switching General Strategy to BTSPRIORITY(BTS Priority) or BTSONLY
(BTS Only) and set Options for BTS Local Switch and Avoid Number for
BTS to appropriate values.
If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to ABISCONGESTS(Start When
Abis Congests), you need to specify Abis Jam Rate for BTS Local Switch.
If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix
Number), you need to specify Prefix Number for BTS.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE to determine whether BSS
local switching is performed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC.
If the BSC6900 is expected to perform BSS local switching independently
based on network planning, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local
Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).
If the MSC is expected to be involved in BSS local switching based on network
planning, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to BASIC
(Basic Function) or ENHANCED(Enhanced Function) and then set related
parameters on the MSC side.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLSW. In this step, set Support BTS
Local Switch to YES(Yes). If the cross-BTS local switching function is enabled,
Region Information must be specified.
NOTE
XPUs where control-plane services of BTSs under the same local switching area are located
must be managed by the same MPU.
l Run the BSC6900MML command LST BTS to query the mapping relationship between the
BTS and the XPU.
l Run the BSC6900MML command LST BRD to query the mapping relationship between
the XPU and the MPU.
If you need to configure BTS 1 and BTS 2 under the same local switching area, but the XPUs
where the contror-plane services for BTS 1 and BTS 2 are located are managed by different
MPUs, perform the following operations:
1. Configure region information about BTS 1.
2. Deactivate BTS 2.
3. Configure region information about BTS 2 to be the same as that of BTS 1.
4. Activate BTS 2.
1. Calling and called MSs start a conversation under the BTS enabled with the local
switching function.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES to query call resources used by
an MS.
NOTE
If BTS local switching is enabled successfully, no TC Resource Info and Abis Chno Ts Info is
displayed.
GBSS
260
Switching General Strategy to NEITHERSTART(Neither Start) or BSCONLY
(BSC Only).
----End
Example
//Activating BTS Local Switch over TDM transmission
SET BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=BTSONLY, BtsLsStartMode=PREFIXNUMBER,
MsisdnPrfxList2StartBtsLs1="139", MsisdnSegList2AvoidBtsLs1="138";
MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, BSSLSMSCCOOP=NONSUPPORT;
MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, FLEXABISMODE=FLEX_ABIS;
SET BTSLSW: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ISSUPPORTBTSLSWITCH=YES;
//Verifying BTS Local Switch
DSP CALLRES: USERIDTYPE=BYMSISDN, MSISDN="13988888888";
//Deactivating BTS Local Switch
SET BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=BSCONLY;
GBSS
261
80 Configuring Abis Transmission
Optimization
Abis Transmission Optimization.
Prerequisites
An Abis interface processing board PEUa or POUc is configured.
In BM/TC separated scenarios, a DPUc board is configured for processing HDLC
frames in the subrack where the PEUa board is located.
The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch,
GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface, or GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.
l License
The BTS software version supports this function.
Context
Abis transmission optimization allows multiple links to be multiplexed onto a channel composed
of several timeslots, enabling more efficient use of transmission resources.
CAUTION
l HDLC does not support bypass or Flex Abis.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 80 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization
262
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a BTS. In this step, set BTS
Index to 1, BTS Type to BTS3012, Service Type to HDLC, Abis ByPass Mode to
FALSE, and Config Ring to NO.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCABINET to add a cabinet to a BTS.
In this step, set BTS Name to the BTS name specified in Step 1, Cabinet No. to 0,
and Cabinet Type to the BTS type specified in Step 1.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTRXBRD to add a TRX board to the
BTS. In this step, set Board Type to TRU, Subrack No. to 0, and Slot No. to 0.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a GSM cell. In this step, set
Cell Index to 1, Cell Name to gcell-1, Freq. Band to GSM900, MCC to 502,
MNC to 85, Cell LAC to H'0185, Cell CI to 2, Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell,
Start Flex MAIO Switch to OFF, and Operator Name to 46000.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLFREQ to add a frequency to the
cell. In this step, set Cell Index to the cell index specified in Step 4 and Frequency
1 to 21.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLOSPMAP to add the mapping
between the cell and the Originating Signaling Point (OSP). In this step, set Cell
Index to the cell index specified in Step 4 and OSP Code to the Originating Signaling
Point Code (OPC) of the cell.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GTRX to add a carrier frequency. In this
step, set Cell Index to the cell index specified in Step 4, TRX ID to 1, and
Frequency to the frequency specified in Step 5.
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CELLBIND2BTS to bind the cell to the
BTS. In this step, set Cell Index to the cell index specified in Step 4 and BTS
Index to the BTS index specified in Step 1.
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD to bind the logical
carrier frequency to the physical TRX board. In this step, set TRX ID to the TRX ID
specified in Step 7, TRX Board to TRU, TRX Board Pass No. to 0, Subrack No.
to 1, and Slot No. to 0.
10. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set channel information
about the TRX. In this step, set TRX ID to the TRX ID specified in Step 7, Channel
No. to 0, Channel Type to MBCCH, and Timeslot Priority to 1.
11. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set channel information
about the TRX. In this step, set TRX ID to the TRX ID specified in Step 7, Channel
No. to 1, Channel Type to SDCCH8, and Timeslot Priority to 2.
12. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to set TRX attributes. In this
step, set TRX ID to the TRX ID specified in Step 7 and Power Level to 7.
13. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection
between the BTS and the BSC6900. In this step, set BTS Index to the BTS index
specified in Step 1, BTS In Port No. to 0, Dest Node Type to BSC, Subrack No. to
the number of the subrack where the BSC interface board is located, Slot No. to the
number of the slot where the BSC interface board is located, and Port No. to 0.
14. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS. In this step, set
BTS Index to the BTS index specified in Step 1.
GBSS
263
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT.
Expected result: The value of Cell Initialized is Yes and the value of Channel
Fault is No.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS. In this step, set BTS Index to the BTS
index specified in Step 1 in the activation procedure.
----End
Example
//Activating Abis Transmission Optimization
ADD BTS: BTSID=1, BTSNAME="BTS-1", BTSTYPE=BTS3012, SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT,
SERVICEMODE=HDLC, FLEXABISMODE=FIX_16K_ABIS, ABISBYPASSMODE=FALSE,
ISCONFIGEDRING=NO, MPMODE=MODE4_1;
ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYNAME ,BTSNAME="BTS-1", CN=0, TYPE=BTS3012;
ADD BTSTRXBRD: IDTYPE=BYNAME ,BTSNAME="BTS-1",BT=TRU ,SRN=1, SN=0;
ADD GCELL: CELLID=1, CELLNAME="gcell-1", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="502",
MNC="85", LAC=H'0185, CI=2, IUOTP=Normal_cell, OPNAME="46000";
ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, FREQ1=21;
ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, OPC=H'B85;
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXID=1, FREQ=41;
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1;
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2;
ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1,BTSID=1;
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=1, TRXTP=TRU, TRXPN=0, SRN=1, SN=0;
PN=0;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1, POWL=7;
//Verifying Abis Transmission Optimization
DSP BTSSTAT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSIDLST=1;
//Deactivating Abis Transmission Optimization
RMV BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;
GBSS
264
81 Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger
HR Distribution
Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution.
Prerequisites
The feature GBFD-113402 Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR has been
In Abis over TDM transmission mode, the feature GBFD-117301 Flex Abis has also
been configured before this feature is activated.
l License
l Dependencies on Running Environment
This feature does not have any special requirements for the running environment.
l Requirements for Transmission Networking
This feature is applicable to the following scenarios:
The Abis interface uses IP over E1 transmission.
The Abis interface uses IP over Ethernet transmission.
The Abis interface uses TDM transmission and the feature GBFD-117301 Flex Abis
has been configured.
l Requirements for Other NEs and Third-Party Devices
Both the MSC and MSs support HR speech versions.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 81 Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution
265
Context
Table 81-1 Data Preparation
Parameter Name Parameter
ID
Parameter Settings Data Source
LDR First LDRFST If this parameter is set to
CSPH, this feature will be
activated.
If this parameter is set to
CLOSE, this feature will be
deactivated.
Network planning
TRM load threshold
index
TRMLOA
DTHINDE
X
The value of this parameter
must be unique.
Network planning
Transport Type TRANST This parameter must be set to
the actual type of transmission
used by the Abis interface.
Network planning
Threshold type THTYPE This parameter can be set to
Percentage or Band Width.
Internal planning

Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LDR. In this step, query the LDR
configuration.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LDR. In this step, set LDR First to CSPH
and LDR Second, LDR Third, or LDR Fourth to a value except CSPH.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMLOADTH. In this step, set TRM load
threshold index, Transport Type, and Threshold type to appropriate values
according to threshold types.
4. In IP transmission mode, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPPATH. In this
step, set the IP path-related parameters to appropriate values. For example, set TRM
load threshold index to the same value as that set in Step 3.
5. In TDM transmission mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
BSCABISPRIMAP. In this step, configure the Abis priority mapping on the BSC
side. For example, set TRM load threshold index to the same value as that set in
Step 3.
This feature can be enabled only when congestion occurs on the Abis interface. Therefore,
this feature cannot be verified when the TRM load threshold is within a normal range.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LDR. In this step, query the LDR
configuration.
GBSS
266
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LDR. In this step, change the value of LDR
First, LDR Second, LDR Third, or LDR Fourth from CSPH to CLOSE.
----End
Example
//Activating Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution
//Querying the LDR configuration
LST LDR:;
//The result is as follows:
%%LST LDR:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.
List LDR
--------
LDR First LDR Second LDR Third LDR Fourth
PS Downspeeding AMRC CS Preference TCHH CS TCHF-TCHH HO
(Number of results = 1)
--- END
//Setting "LDR First" to "CS Preference TCHH" and "LDR Third" to "PS
Downspeeding" to ensure the LDR-related parameters are set to different
values
SET LDR: LDRFST=CSPH, LSRTRD=PSDOWN;
//Enabling the Abis interface to use IP transmission
ADD TRMLOADTH: TRMLOADTHINDEX=10, TRANST=IP, THTYPE=PERCENTAGE;
MOD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=1, ITFT=ABIS, TRMLOADTHINDEX=10;
//Enabling the Abis interface to use TDM transmission
ADD TRMLOADTH: TRMLOADTHINDEX=11, TRANST=TDM;
SET BSCABISPRIMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TRANSTYPE=TDM, LOADTHSW=ON,
TRMLOADTHINDEX=11;
//Deactivating Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution
//Querying the LDR configuration
LST LDR:;
//The result is as follows:
%%LST LDR:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.
List LDR
--------
LDR First LDR Second LDR Third LDR Fourth
CS Preference TCHH AMRC PS Downspeeding CS TCHF-TCHH HO
(Number of results = 1)
--- END
//Setting "CS Preference TCHH" to "CLOSE"
SET LDR: LDRFST=CLOSE;
GBSS
267
82 Configuring Flex Ater
Flex Ater.
Prerequisites
l License
The TC subrack is located separately from the BSC.
The Ater interface uses the TDM transmission mode.
Context
With this feature, the Ater resources are classified into 16 kbit/s timeslots and 8 kbit/s timeslots.
The BSC allocates the Ater resources according to the channel type during the call establishment.
If TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface, 16 kbit/s timeslots are used on the Ater interface.
If TCHHs are allocated on the Um interface, 8 kbit/s timeslots are used on the Ater interface.
Therefore, the Ater resources are fully utilized.
This feature effectively reduces the transmission investment on the Ater interface in remote TC
networking.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA with Switch of 8K on
Ater set to YES(Yes).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 82 Configuring Flex Ater
268
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ATERTS with BM/TC config flag set to
BM or TC and Ater connection path index to the number of an Ater connection path.
Expected result: The number of occupied 16 kbit/s resources is equal to that of full-
rate calls. In addition, the number of occupied 8 kbit/s resources is equal to that of
half-rate calls. In this case, Flex Ater is enabled.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA with Switch of 8K on
Ater set to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Flex Ater
SET OTHSOFTPARA: Ater8KSw=YES;
//Deactivating Flex Ater
SET OTHSOFTPARA: Ater8KSw=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 82 Configuring Flex Ater
269
83 Configuring BSC Local Switch
BSC Local Switch.
Prerequisites
When the Abis interface is in TDM transmission mode, this feature cannot be used
together with the feature GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization,
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118602 A over
IP, and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.
When the Abis interface is in IP transmission mode, this feature cannot be used together
with the feature GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization, GBFD-118602 A
over IP, and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.
l License
The BSC works in basic module (BM)/transcoder (TC) separate mode and TDM
transmission mode is applied over the Ater interface.
With BSC Local Switch, neither the base station serving the calling MS nor that serving
the called MS uses Abis Transmission Optimization.
In sites with a combined BTS cabinet group, BSS local switching can be enabled only
when both the BTS software and the TRX software support it.
Context
With this feature, the BSC performs a voice loopback within the BSC if the calling MS and
called MS are located under the same BSC. Voice signals are no longer transmitted on the Ater
or A interface, therefore releasing transmission resources on the Ater interface and the transcoder
(TC) coding resources.
This feature helps save local or remote transmission resources on the Ater interface.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 83 Configuring BSC Local Switch
270
If the MSC is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable in the BSC Local
Switch mode: MSC playing the announcement during a call, DTMF number receiving during a
call, speech service first and then fax service, and independent billing of BSS local switching.
The BSS local switching is not supported as follow: The BSC is configured the MSC Pool
function. The calling MS and the called MS are registered on more different MGWs, and the
MGW is in IP transmission mode. The BTS is in High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC)
transmission mode.
Procedure
1. Run the SET BSSLS command. In this step, set BSS Local Switching General
Strategy to BSCPRIORITY(BSC Priority) or BSCONLY(BSC Only), and specify
Options for BSC Local Switch and Avoid Number for BTS.
NOTE
l If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to ATERCONGESTS(Start When Ater
Congests), you need to specify Ater Jam Rate for BSC Local Switch.
l If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix
Number), you need to specify Prefix Number for BSC.
2. Run the MOD GCNNODE command to configure whether BSS local switching is
performed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC.
NOTE
l If only the BSC performs BSS local switching as selected by the network plan, you need
to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).
l If both the BSC and the MSC perform BSS local switching as selected by the network plan,
you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to BASIC(Basic Function) or
ENHANCED(Enhanced Function), and then set related parameters on the MSC side to
support BSS local switching.
3. Run the SET BTSLSW command. In this step, set Support BTS Local Switch to
YES(Yes).
1. Ensure that the calling and called MSs are controlled by the same BSC.
2. Run the DSP CALLRES command to query call resources of an MS.
Expected result: If BSC Local Switch is enabled successfully, information about A
interface resources of the TC subrack and information about Abis interface resources
of the BM subrack are displayed in the result.
1. Run the SET BSSLS command. In this step, set BSS Local Switching General
Strategy to NEITHERSTART(Neither Start) or BTSONLY(BTS Only).
----End
Example
//Activating BSC Local Switch
SET BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=BSCONLY, BscLsStartMode=PREFIXNUMBER,
MsisdnPrfxList2StartBscLs1="139";
MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, BSSLSMSCCOOP=NONSUPPORT;
SET BTSLSW: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ISSUPPORTBTSLSWITCH=YES;
GBSS
271
//Deactivating BSC Local Switch
SET BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=NEITHERSTART;
GBSS
272
84 Configuring Ater Compression
Transmission
Ater Compression Transmission.
Prerequisites
The POUc board is in position.
When the Abis interface uses TDM transmission, the DPUc board is configured.
This feature cannot be used together with GBFD-116901 Flex Ater.
l License
The BSC initial configuration is complete. The BM/TC subracks are in separated
configuration mode, and the TC subrack is configured remotely.
Context
When the BM/TC subracks are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack is configured
remotely, the compressed IP transmission mode over the Ater interface can be adopted to
improve the transmission efficiency over the Ater interface and reduce the transmission cost.
The Ater Compression Transmission feature is based on IP over PPP over STM-1 technology,
where the IP packets of speech data are encapsulated using the PPP and then transmitted over
the channelized STM-1.
The compressed IP transmission mode over the Ater interface does not support IP over FE/GE,
but only supports IP over E1 for transmitting the user plane data. The configuration on the
signaling plane is similar to that in Ater over TDM mode.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 84 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission
273
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a POUc board to the BM
subrack. Then, repeat the operation to add a POUc board to the TC subrack.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC with Service Mode set to
SEPARATE(Separate) and Ater Interface Transfer Mode to IP(IP).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH to add an Ater
connection path between the MPS and the TCS.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML to add an Ater OML between
the MPS and the main TCS.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL to add an Ater signaling link
between the MPS/EPS and the TCS.
6. Configure the physical layer and data link layer for the POUc board by referring to
Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUc Board.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE with Adjacent Node Type set
to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC) to add an adjacent node.
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE with Adjacent Node Type set
to TC(Ater Interface on TC) to add an adjacent node.
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path to the BM
subrack. Then, run the command again to add an IP path to the TC subrack. To add
more IP paths, run this command repeatedly.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP E1T1 to check the setting of Port State.
2. Verify the links at the physical layer.
Do as follows when the links at the physical layer are configured as PPP links:
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK to query the settings of
Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address set to
the same value as Local IP address in the DSP PPPLNK command and
Destination IP address set to the same value as Peer IP address in the DSP
PPPLNK command.
Expected result: The statistics on PING packets can be received, which
indicates that the MLPPP link is functional.
Do as follows when the links at the physical layer are configured as MLPPP links:
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPGRP to query the settings of
Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.
b. Run the MML command DSP MPLNK to query the settings of Link state
and LCP negotiated state.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address set to
the same value as Local IP address in the DSP MPGRP command and
Destination IP address set to the same value as Peer IP address in the DSP
MPGRP command.
Expected result: The statistics on PING packets can be received, which
indicates that the MLPPP link is functional.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPD link
is functional.
GBSS
274
Expected result: UsageStatus is set to Normal, which indicates that the LAPD link
is functional.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the state of an adjacent
node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth.
Expected result: Operation state is Available, and the related bandwidth is greater
than 0. That is, the adjacent node is functional.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to check whether the IP path is
available.
Expected result: Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater
than 0. That is, the IP path is functional.
6. Make a call. The call is set up successfully. When the call is set up, run the
BSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHN to query the usage of the Ater interface
resources.
Expected result: The UDP usage on the BM side and the TC side are the same.
----End
Example
/*Activating the feature Ater Compression Transmission*/
//Adding a POUc board
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=POUc, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=16, RED=NO,
ISTCBRD=NO, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0;
ADD BRD: SRN=3, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=POUc, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=16, RED=NO,
ISTCBRD=YES;
//Setting the transmission mode over the Ater interface
SET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, ATERTRANSMODE=IP;
//Adding an Ater connection path
ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=0, BMSRN=0, BMSN=16, BMPN=0, TCSRN=3, TCSN=16,
TCPN=0;
TCPN=1;
TCPN=2;
TCPN=3;
//Adding an Ater OML
ADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=0, ATERPIDX=0,
TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-
1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&T
S22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;
//Adding an Ater signaling link
ADD ATERCONSL: ATERIDX=2,
TNMODE=TRRS;
//Adding an Ater PPP link to the BM subrack
ADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=16, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6,
TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS1
GBSS
275
BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.1", MASK="255.255.255.0",
PEERIP="1.1.1.2", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable, PPPMUX=Disable,
AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF;
//Adding an Ater PPP link to the TC subrack
BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.2", MASK="255.255.255.0",
PEERIP="1.1.1.1", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable, PPPMUX=Disable,
AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF;
//Adding an Ater adjacent node to the BM subrack
ADD ADJNODE: ANI=0, NAME="adjnode0", NODET=BSC, BSCID=0;
//Adding an Ater adjacent node to the TC subrack
ADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="adjnode1", NODET=TC;
//Adding an Ater IP path to the BM subrack
ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.2",
PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.1", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL,
PATHCHK=DISABLED;
//Adding an Ater IP path to the TC subrack
PATHCHK=DISABLED;
GBSS
276
85 Configuring Ring Topology
Ring Topology.
Prerequisites
This feature cannot be enabled when a DXX device is used.
Reverse and forward links can be connected to the same Abis interface board or different
Abis interface boards in the same BM subrack, but cannot be connected to different
subracks.
OML on A-bis Interface, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/
T1, GBFD-113728 OML Backup, and GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass.
GBFD-117301 Flex Abis cannot be used together with BTS ring topology II.
l License
BTS ring topology I
When this feature is simultaneously enabled with Flex Abis, Flex Abis must be
configured on all BTSs, and only a single E1 link can be configured on the forward
and reverse links.
BTS ring topology II
Only a single E1 link can be configured on the forward and reverse links.
HDLC ring topology (only BTS ring topology II is supported)
Hybrid networking of HDLC and TDM is not supported. Secondary link is not
supported.
The cabinets of the BTS30 or BTS312 cannot be used in cabinet groups.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 85 Configuring Ring Topology
277
The configuration of exclusive timeslots is supported, but the configuration of
monitoring timeslots is not supported.
Local switching is not supported.
The conversion of the bearing modes, that is, the conversion from the HDLC ring
topology to the TDM ring topology, is not supported.
Timeslots cannot be manually allocated.
Context
A ring topology is a special type of chain topology. In a ring topology, BTSs connect to each
other to form a common chain first, and then the lowest-level BTS is connected to the BSC
through a transmission link, thereby forming a ring. If the transmission link is disconnected at
a point of the ring, the topology of BTSs that precede the breakpoint remains unchanged. BTSs
that follow the breakpoint form a new chain in the reverse direction.
Compared with a common chain topology, the ring topology has the following advantage: When
a transmission link is disconnected at a point, the ring automatically breaks into two chains. In
this way, BTSs that precede and follow the breakpoint can work normally, improving system
robustness.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS. In this step, set Config Ring to YES
(Yes).
2. Configure data for base station equipment by referring to Configuring the Equipment
Data.
3. Configure the logical data for the base station by referring to Configuring the Logical
Data.
4. Configure the transmission data for the base station by referring to TDM/HDLC.
NOTE
In the forward direction, a BTS in a ring connects to an upper-level BTS or BSC through port
0, and it connects to a lower-level BTS or BSC through port 1.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRINGATTR to configure the attributes
of the ring.
To enable BTS ring topology I, set Configure Ring II to NO(No), and set Ring
I Wait Time Before Switch and Ring I Try Rotating Duration Time based on
your individual needs.
To enable BTS ring topology II, set Configure Ring II to YES(Yes), and set Ring
II Wait Time Before Switch, Ring II Try Rotating Duration Time, Ring II
Rotating Penalty Time, T200, T203, andN200 based on your individual needs.
6. Configuring BTS clock by referring to Configuring a Clock for a BTS.
7. Activate the base station configuration by referring to Activating the BTS
Configuration.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRINGPARA.
Expected result: The parameter settings in the query results are consistent with the
configured values.
GBSS
278
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config Ring to NO
(No).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSCONNECT to remove a reverse ring
connection.
----End
Example
//Activating Ring Topology
ADD BTS: BTSID=0, BTSNAME="3900", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM,
SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, ISCONFIGEDRING=YES,
SRANMODE=SUPPORT;
ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=0, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6,
DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0;
SET BTSRINGATTR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, FASTCNETFLAG=YES, BREAKTIME=0,
BUILDTIME=60, ESTTIME=0, T200=12, T203=1, N200=3;
//Verifying Ring Topology
DSP BTSRINGPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
//Deactivating Ring Topology
MOD BTS:IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ISCONFIGEDRING=NO;
RMV BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6;
GBSS
279
86 Configuring TRX Cooperation
TRX Cooperation.
Prerequisites
l License
The cell supports TRX cooperation.
At least two TRXs in the same band are configured in the cell.
The cell supports BCCH TRX cooperation.
The cell supports baseband FH TRX cooperation.
The cell supports switchback of BCCH TRX cooperation.
The cell supports switchback of baseband FH TRX cooperation.
Context
TRX cooperation enables the BSC to automatically designate an available TRX in the cell to
replace a faulty BCCH TRX or baseband FH TRX. This ensures that the cell can work properly
when faults occur on some TRXs in the cell. There are two types of TRX cooperation: BCCH
TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation.
l BCCH TRX cooperation enables the BSC to use the TRX cooperation algorithm to select
an available TRX as the new BCCH TRX when the original BCCH TRX is faulty. This
ensures that the cell can work properly. When the fault on the original BCCH TRX is
rectified, the BSC can switch the BCCH back to the original TRX.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 86 Configuring TRX Cooperation
280
l Baseband FH TRX cooperation enables the BSC to remove a TRX involved in baseband
FH from the FH group when the TRX is faulty in a cell, whereas other TRXs in the FH
group remain in baseband FH.
TRX cooperation is specific to each cell. That is, you can separately enable or disable the TRX
cooperation function for each cell.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set TRX
Aiding Function Control to AllowReImmed(Allowed & Recover Immediately)
and Switchback Policy of Baseband FH Mutual Aid to PART(Part).
Verifying BCCH TRX cooperation and switchback of BCCH TRX cooperation
1. Power off the BCCH TRX for the cell. In this way, the BCCH TRX becomes faulty,
and therefore BCCH TRX cooperation is triggered.
2. Wait for about 15 minutes for cell initialization, and then run the BSC6900 MML
command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status. Verify that Channel Type
of channel 0 of a TRX (not the initially configured BCCH TRX) is set to Main
BCCH.
3. Use an MS to access the cell enabled with the BCCH TRX cooperation function and
make a call. Verify that the call is set up successfully and the voice quality is clear.
4. Power on the TRX mentioned in Step 1 to enable switchback of BCCH TRX
cooperation.
5. Wait about 15 minutes for cell initialization, and then run the BSC6900 MML
command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status. Verify that Channel Type
of channel 0 of the initially configured BCCH TRX is set to Main BCCH.
6. Use an MS to access the cell enabled with the switchback of BCCH TRX cooperation
function and make a call. Verify that the call is set up successfully and the voice quality
is clear.
Verifying baseband FH TRX cooperation and switchback of baseband FH TRX cooperation
set Frequency Hopping Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping)
and Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX to NO_Hop(No hop).
NOTE
l There are at least two operational TRXs in a baseband FH group to ensure the baseband
FH when a TRX in the same group is faulty.
l Operations such as performing a level-4 reset of a base station, adding a base station after
removing it, activating a base station, and deactivating a base station clear the base station
state recorded at the BSC. As a result, the cell participating in baseband FH TRX
cooperation returns to the initial state.
2. Initiate Abis-interface CS message tracing by referring to Tracing CS Domain
Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box, click the
OML tab. Then, power off a TRX in the baseband FH group to enable baseband FH
TRX cooperation.
3. Wait 15 minutes, and then check that the IE "arfcnLst" in the Set Channel Attributes
message of the faulty TRX contains only one frequency whereas "arfcnLst" in the Set
GBSS
281
Channel Attributes message of other TRXs in the same baseband FH group contains
multiple frequencies except the frequency of the faulty TRX.
4. Initiate A-interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages on the A
Interface. In the A Interface Trace dialog box, click the BSSAP tab, and set related
parameters to start the tracing task. Initiate Abis-interface CS message tracing by
referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Abis Interface
CS Trace dialog box, click the RSL tab, and set related parameters to start the tracing
task. Use an MS to access the test cell and then originate a call. Verify that the voice
is clear during the call and that the messages traced over the Abis and A interfaces are
correct. Ensure that the field h in the IE "hopping-channel" of the ASSIGNMENT
COMMAND message is 1.
5. Power on the TRX mentioned in Step 2 to enable switchback of baseband FH TRX
cooperation.
6. Wait 15 minutes, and then verify that the IE "arfcnLst" in the Set Channel Attributes
message of the fault-rectified TRX contains all frequencies in the baseband FH group.
7. Use an MS to access the test cell and then originate a call. Verify that the voice is clear
during the call and that the messages traced over the Abis and A interfaces are correct.
Ensure that h in the IE "hopping-channel" of the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND
message is 1.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set TRX
Aiding Function Control to TRXAid_NotAllow(TRX Aiding Not Allowed).
----End
Example
//Activating TRX Cooperation
SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXAIDSWITCH=AllowReImmed,
BHPREPOLICY=PART;
//Verifying TRX Cooperation
Verifying BCCH TRX cooperation and switchback of BCCH TRX cooperation
Verifying baseband FH TRX cooperation and switchback of baseband FH TRX
cooperation
BCCHTRXHP=NO_Hop;
//Deactivating TRX Cooperation
SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXAIDSWITCH=TRXAid_NotAllow;
GBSS
282
87 Configuring MSC Pool
MSC Pool.
Prerequisites
l License
Two MSs are available, and they are registered at the HLR.
The MSCs and the MGWs are fully interconnected, and the MSC pool function is
configured on the MSC side.
The interconnection data between the BSC6900 and the MSC is negotiated.
An original signaling point (OSP) and at least two destination signaling points (DSPs)
are configured. For details, see Configuring the OPC and DPC.
The transmission over the A interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the A
Interface (over TDM) or Configuring the Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP).
Context
An MSC pool consists of multiple MSCs processing traffic from one MSC pool area. A
BSC6900 belonging to an MSC pool area is connected to each MSC in the MSC pool. All MSCs
in the MSC pool share load and resources for equal distribution of traffic in the MSC pool,
reducing inter-MSC handovers and providing disaster-tolerant redundancy capabilities.
One BSC6900 can be connected to a maximum of 32 MSCs.
When the MSC does not support the function A Interface Circuits Managed by the MGW or the
function is disabled, DPCs in an MSC pool are configured for different DPC groups.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 87 Configuring MSC Pool
283
NOTE
This section uses the configuration of two DSPs whose DPX Index are set to 0 and 1 as an example.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNOPERATOR to add a GSM operator.
In this step, set Operator Type, Operator Index, Operator Name, MCC, and
MNC to appropriate values; set MSC Pool Function Enabled to YES(Yes); and set
Length of NRI in TMSI and MSC NULL-NRI Value based on the data negotiated
with the MSC.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node for the first
DSP. In this step, set DSP index to 0, set Operator Name to the value set in Step
1, set CN Node Index and DPC Group Index appropriately, and set MSC
Administrable State, MSC ID, and MSC Available Capability<K User
number> based on the data negotiated with the MSC.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node for the second
DSP. In this step, set DSP index to 1, set Operator Name to the value set in Step
1, set CN Node Index and DPC Group Index appropriately, and set MSC
Administrable State, MSC ID, and MSC Available Capability<K User
number> based on the data negotiated with the MSC.
NOTE
Repeat the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE if there are more than two DSPs.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRIMSCMAP to add the mapping between
an NRI and an MSC. In this step, set NRI Value based on the data negotiated with
the MSC. Ensure that the NRI value is the same as that on the MSC side.
1. Enable the TMSI reallocation function on the MSC side.
2. On the LMT, initiate A-interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages
on the A Interface. In this step, set Trace Type to BSSAP and DPC(Hex) to the DSP
of MSC1.
3. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the cell where
MS1 camps on. Then, click Submit. The A Interface Trace message window is
displayed.
NOTE
Initiate A-interface message tracing with the DSP of MSC2 by using the method described in Step
2 and Step 3.
4. Power on MS1. Use MS1 to initiate a location update procedure on the MSC1 side.
The CN assigns a TMSI to MS1.
5. Power on MS2. Use MS2 to initiate a location update procedure on the MSC2 side.
The CN assigns a TMSI to MS2.
NOTE
To enable the MS to initiate a location update at a specific MSC, run the BSC6900 MML command
MOD GCNNODE to set MSC Administrable State for all other MSCs to UNAVAIL
(Unavailable). After the location update, set the parameter to NORMAL(Normal).
6. Move MS1 to the coverage area of MSC2. Then, use MS1 to originate a call and check
the A interface message tracing.
GBSS
284
Expected result: MS1 sets up the call through MSC1, and the registered MSC of MS1
remains unchanged.
7. Move MS2 to the coverage area of MSC1. Then, use MS2 to originate a call and check
the A interface message tracing.
Expected result: MS2 sets up the call through MSC2, and the registered MSC of MS2
remains unchanged.
NOTE
In the TMSI reallocation procedure, the MSC assigns the TMSI that contains NRI (configured by
the CN) to the MS. With this information, the BSC6900 can allocate the service to an appropriate
MSC when the MS originates a call service. Note that the mapping between the NRI and the MSC
on the BSC6900 side must be consistent with the mapping between the NRI and the MSC on the
CN side. You can use the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRIMSCMAP to configure the mapping
on the BSC6900 side.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set MSC
Pool Function Enabled to NO(No).
----End
Example
/*Activating MSC Pool*/
//Adding a GSM operator and enabling the MSC pool function
ADD GCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=PRIM, OPINDEX=0, OPNAME="op1", MCC="460",
MNC="188",
MSCPOOLALLOW=YES, MSCNRILEN=3, MSCNULLNRI=0, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;
//Adding a CN node
ADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, DPX=0, DPCGIDX=1, OPNAME="op1", MSCCAP=1800,
CNID=0, DFDPC=YES, ATransMode=TDM;
ADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1, DPX=0, DPCGIDX=1, OPNAME="op1", MSCCAP=1800,
CNID=1, DFDPC=NO, ATransMode=TDM;
//Adding an NRI-to-MSC mapping
ADD NRIMSCMAP: NRI=10, CNNODEIDX=0;
ADD NRIMSCMAP: NRI=11, CNNODEIDX=1;
/*Deactivating MSC Pool*/
//Disabling the MSC pool function
MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, MSCPOOLALLOW=NO;
GBSS
285
88 Configuring the SGSN Pool
About This Chapter
SGSN Pool.
88.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP)
SGSN Pool.
88.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR)
SGSN Pool.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 88 Configuring the SGSN Pool
286
88.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP)
SGSN Pool.
Prerequisites
The DPUd/XPUa/FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/GOUd board is configured. For details, see
Configuring a Board.
None
l License
The basic data of the BSC is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.
The communication between the BSC and the SGSN is normal.
The BSC supports SGSN Pool.
The interface board is configured with a device IP address or port IP address.
Context
SGSN Pool enables multiple SGSNs to form an SGSN pool. The SGSNs in an SGSN pool share
load and resources. Configuring SGSN Pool can expand network capacity, reduce investment
in equipment, implement redundancy, and improve network reliability. In addition, it reduces
the number of inter-SGSN cell reselections, which improves network performance.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set Allow
SGSN Pool to YES(Yes); specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value.
2. Configure the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/
GOUd Board.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPCUTYPE to set the type of the packet
control unit (PCU). In this step, set PCU Type to INNER(Built-in PCU).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE to add an SGSN node. In this
step, set Operator Name and SGSN Node ID.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRISGSNMAP to configure the mapping
between the network resource identifier (NRI) and the SGSN.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE to add a network service entity (NSE).
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLLOCAL to add a network service
virtual link (NSVL) on the BSC6900 side. If the NSE is in static configuration mode,
GBSS
287
run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLREMOTE to add an NSVL on the
SGSN side.
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC. In this step, set NSE
Identifier. The mapping between CELL_1 and the first SGSN is complete.
9. Repeat Step 2 through Step 8 to add mapping between CELL_1 and other SGSNs in
the SGSN pool.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to query the state of a PTP BSSGP
virtual connection (PTP BVC) and then record the state.
2. Trace PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in CELL_1 by referring to Tracing PTP
messages on the Gb interface, and check the FLOW CONTROL BVC messages sent
from the BSC to the SGSN through all functional PTP BVCs. If these messages are
correct, SGSN Pool is enabled and functional.
3. Ensure that the MS acessses the network in cell 1. Use the MS to perform PS services.
The MS can perform attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally.
According to the traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS
services are carried on one PTP BVC.
4. Block the PTP BVC carrying services discussed in step 3. Then ensure the MS acessses
the network in cell 1 and use the MS to perform PS services. The MS can perform
attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally. According to the
traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS services are carried
on another PTP BVC.
SGSN Pool to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Enable SGSN Pool and specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value:
SGSNPOOLALLOW=YES, SGSNNRILEN=1, SGSNNULLNRI=1;
//Configure SGSN Pool (IP transmission mode is used on the Gb
interface):
SET BSCPCUTYPE: TYPE=INNER;
ADD SGSNNODE: OPNAME="abc", CNID=1;
ADD NRISGSNMAP: NRI=1, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1;
ADD NSE: NSEI=1, SRN=1, SN=1, PT=GB_OVER_IP, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1;
ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=1, NSEI=1, IP="131.131.131.132", UDPPN=1355,
SRN=1, SN=1;
ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=3;
//Query the state of a PTP BVC:
DSP PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2;
//Deactivate SGSN Pool:
MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=1, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;
88.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR)
SGSN Pool.
GBSS
288
Prerequisites
The DPUd/XPUa/PEUa board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.
l License
The basic data of the BSC is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.
The communication between the BSC and the SGSN is normal.
The BSC supports SGSN Pool.
Context
The SGSNs in an SGSN pool share load and resources in the pool. Configuring SGSN Pool can
expand network capacity, reduce investment in equipment, implement redundancy, and improve
network reliability. In addition, it reduces the number of inter-SGSN cell reselections, which
improves network performance.
Procedure
SGSN Pool to YES(Yes); specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPCUTYPE to set the type of the packet
control unit (PCU). In this step, set PCU Type to INNER(Built-in PCU).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE to add an SGSN node. In this
step, set Operator Name and SGSN Node ID.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRISGSNMAP to configure the mapping
between the network resource identifier (NRI) and the SGSN.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE to add a network service entity (NSE).
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BC to add a bearer channel (BC).
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVC to add a network service virtual
connection (NSVC).
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC. In this step, set NSE
Identifier. The mapping between CELL_1 and the first SGSN is complete.
9. Repeat Step 2 through Step 8 to add mapping between CELL_1 and other SGSNs in
the SGSN pool.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to query the state of a PTP BSSGP
virtual connection (PTP BVC) and then record the state.
2. Trace PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in CELL_1 by referring to Tracing PTP
messages on the Gb interface, and check the FLOW CONTROL BVC messages sent
GBSS
289
from the BSC to the SGSN through all functional PTP BVCs. If these messages are
correct, SGSN Pool is enabled and functional.
3. Ensure that the MS accesses the network in cell 1. Use the MS to perform PS services.
The MS can perform attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally.
According to the traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS
services are carried on one PTP BVC.
4. Block the PTP BVC carrying services discussed in step 3. Then ensure the MS accesses
the network in cell 1 and use the MS to perform PS services. The MS can perform
attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally. According to the
traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS services are carried
on another PTP BVC.
SGSN Pool to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Enable SGSN Pool and specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value:
MOD GCNOPERATOR: SGSNPOOLALLOW=YES, SGSNNRILEN=1, SGSNNULLNRI=1;
//Configure SGSN Pool (FR transmission mode is used on the Gb
interface):
SET BSCPCUTYPE: TYPE=INNER;
ADD SGSNNODE: OPNAME="abc", CNID=1;
ADD NRISGSNMAP: NRI=1, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1;
ADD NSE: NSEI=1, SRN=1, SN=1, PT=GB_OVER_FR, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1;
ADD BC: SRN=1, SN=1, PN=1, BCID=1; ADD NSVC: NSVCIDX=1, NSVCI=1, NSEI=1,
SRN=1, SN=1, BCID=1, DLCI=20;
//Query the state of a PTP BVC:
DSP PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2;
//Deactivate SGSN Pool:
MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=1, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;
GBSS
290
89 Configuring Abis Bypass
Abis Bypass.
Prerequisites
The BTS3006C and BTS3002E in TDM transmission mode are configured with the
DMCM board that supports Abis Bypass.
The BTS3012 (DTRU/QTRU) and BTS3012AE (DTRU/QTRU) in TDM transmission
mode are configured with the DABB board that supports Abis Bypass.
OML on A-bis Interface, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118401 Abis
Transmission Optimization, GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch, GBFD-117801 Ring
Topology, or GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.
l License
l Others
The physical transmission link is connected to the GTMU.
In Abis IP over E1 transmission mode, the BTS uses the logical IP address for
communication.
In Abis IP over E1 transmission mode, the local and peer IP addresses for the PPP links
or MLPPP link groups over the port connecting the BTS and the BSC or connecting the
BTS and the upper-level BTSs must be set to 0.0.0.0, as shown in Figure 89-1.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 89 Configuring Abis Bypass
291
Figure 89-1 IP address planned for links in IP over E1 transmission mode

Context
Abis bypass is applicable to GBSS chain topologies. When power supply to a BTS fails, this
function makes the BTS bypassed to function only as the path so that signals of lower-level
BTSs can be transmitted to the BSC6900. After power supply is restored, the BTS and lower-
level BTSs in the chain topology automatically reset and restore.
To enable the Abis bypass function for cascaded BTSs, you only need to set Abis ByPass
Mode to TRUE(Support) for each cascaded BTS.
A maximum of five levels of cascaded BTSs support Abis bypass.
For BTS3900 series, this function is effective only after DIP switches are set properly.
l When the Abis interface uses the TDM transmission mode, DIP switches S4 and S5 are
required for supporting this function.
l When the Abis interface uses the IP over E1 transmission mode, only DIP switch S4 is
required for supporting this function.
Table 89-1 and Table 89-2 describe the bits of DIP switches.
Table 89-1 Meanings of bits on DIP switch S4
DIP Switch Bit Status of S4 Remarks
BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4
S4 ON ON ON ON Abis Bypass
is supported.
OFF OFF OFF OFF Abis bypass
is not
supported.
Other Prerequisites Unavailable
GBSS
292

Table 89-2 Meanings of bits on DIP switch S5
DIP Switch Bit Status of S5 Remarks
BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4
S5 ON ON ON ON Abis bypass
is not
supported.
OFF ON ON OFF The first-
level BTSs
support Abis
bypass.
ON OFF ON OFF The second-
level BTSs
support Abis
bypass.
OFF OFF ON OFF The third-
level BTSs
support Abis
bypass.
ON ON OFF OFF The fourth-
level BTSs
support Abis
bypass.
OFF ON OFF OFF The fifth-
level BTSs
support Abis
bypass.
Others Unavailable

Assuming that the Abis Bypass function is activated when the Abis interface uses the IP over
E1 transmission mode:
l When an upper-level BTS experiences a power failure, call drops or mute occur in lower-
level BTSs and last for approximate 5s. As shown in Figure 89-1, when BTS1 is powered
off, the PPP or MP link between BTS1 and BTS2 is interrupted. BTS2 renegotiates with
the BSC about reestablishing a PPP or an MP link. After the negotiation is complete and
OML is reestablished, the services in the lower-level BTSs recover.
l When the upper-level BTS is powered on again, the services in lower-level BTSs are
interrupted. As shown in Figure 89-1, when BTS1 is powered on again, the PPP or MP
link between BTS2 and BSC is interrupted. BTS2 renegotiates with BTS1 about
reestablishing a PPP or an MP link. After the negotiation is complete and OML is
reestablished, the services in the lower-level BTSs recover. The laboratory test data shows
GBSS
293
that the adjacent lower-level BTS is affected for 4 to 15 minutes. The impact duration
increases by 1 or 2 minutes for a BTS of a higher level.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add an upper-level BTS. In this step,
set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE(Support).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a lower-level BTS. In this step,
set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE(Support).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection for
the lower-level BTS. Repeat this step for each cascaded BTS you want to add,
including:
Set Dest Node Type to BTS.
Set Dest Father BTS Port No. to the number of the port that connects the lower-
level BTS to the upper-level BTS.
NOTE
A BTS connects to an upper-level BTS or BSC through port 0, and it connects to a lower-level
BTS through port 2.
4. In Abis IP over E1 transmission mode, if the type of links carried on the E1/T1 link
is PPP:
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK command to add PPP links.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSPPPLNK command to add BTS
PPP links.
NOTE
Local IP Address and Peer IP address for PPP links over the port connecting the BTS and
the BSC or connecting the BTS and the upper-level BTSs must be set to 0.0.0.0.
5. In Abis IP over E1 transmission mode, if the type of links carried on the E1/T1 link
is MLPPP link group:
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP command to add MLPPP link
groups.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK command to add MLPPP links.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSMPGRP command to add BTS
MLPPP link groups.
NOTE
Local IP Address and Peer IP Address for MLPPP link groups over the port connecting the
BTS and the BSC or connecting the BTS and the upper-level BTSs must be set to 0.0.0.0.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSMPLNK command to add BTS PPP
links.
1. Power off the upper-level BTS.
2. On the LMT, click Device Maintenance and enter the lower-level BTS maintenance
page. Select a BTS that is configured with GPS clock synchronization. Then, right-
click the GTMU board and choose Query Board Information from the shortcut
menu. In the displayed dialog box, click Basic Information. If basic information
about the GTMU board is displayed and the OML Faulty message is not displayed,
the Abis bypass function has been enabled.
GBSS
294
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Abis ByPass Mode
to FALSE(Not Support).
NOTE
Before performing this step, run the MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS if it has
been activated.
----End
Example
//The following uses the Abis over TDM transmission mode as an example.
//Activating Abis Bypass
ADD BTS: BTSID=0, BTSNAME="3900", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM,
SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, ABISBYPASSMODE=TRUE,
SRANMODE=SUPPORT;
ADD BTS: BTSID=1, BTSNAME="3900-1", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM,
SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, ABISBYPASSMODE=TRUE,
SRANMODE=SUPPORT;
ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BTS,
UPBTSIDTYPE=BYID, UPBTSID=0, FPN=2;
//Deactivating Abis Bypass
MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ABISBYPASSMODE=FALSE;
GBSS
295
90 Configuring Robust Air Interface
Signalling
Robust Air Interface Signalling.
Prerequisites
RRU3004, DRFU, RRU3008 V1/V2, RRU3908 V1/V2, and MRFU V1/V2 have
supported uplink and downlink SACCH retransmission since GBSS12.0.
BTS3900B, BTS3900E, BTS3012, and BTS3006C/02E (DTRU/DDRM) have
supported uplink and downlink SACCH retransmission since GBSS13.0.
RRU3926/RRU3929/RRU3942, MRFUe, MRFd, and RRU3928 have supported uplink
and downlink SACCH retransmission since GBSS13.0.
BTS312 and QTRU do not support this feature.
Except BTS312 and QTRU, all other RF modules including BTS3900B/E support
downlink FACCH retransmission.
l License
The MS supports this feature.
Context
When the radio quality is poor, by retransmitting FACCH or SACCH frames, the anti-
interference capability of the FACCH or SACCH is improved, thereby increasing the possibility
that the MS and BSC receive signaling messages successfully.
The robust air interface signaling function includes retransmission of downlink FACCH frames
and retransmission of uplink/downlink SACCH frames.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 90 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling
296
Procedure
ECSC to YES(Yes), Repeated Downlink FACCH to YES(Yes) , Repeated
Downlink FACCH Threshold to 5, and Repeated SACCH to YES(Yes).
1. Verify Repeated Downlink FACCH.
a. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell. On the main page of the BSC6900 Web
LMT, click Trace. In the Trace Navigation Tree, choose Trace > GSM Services
> Abis Interface CS Trace. For details, see LMT User Guide.
b. During immediate assignment, the BSC6900 decodes the Channel Activation
message. You can obtain MS's capability for supporting this feature in the bit
information for repeate-acch of the IE "ms-capability".
c. Use the MS to initiate a new call in the cell. On the main page of the BSC6900
Web LMT, click Trace. In the Trace Navigation Tree, choose Trace > GSM
Services > BTS Signaling Trace. In the displayed dialog box, select LAPDm.
For details, see LMT User Guide.
d. The BSC6900 compares the receive quality in the downlink measurement report
with the value specified by Repeated Downlink FACCH Downlink Quality
Threshold. If the receive quality is lower than the value of this parameter, the
BSC6900 retransmits FACCH frames to the BTS which then transmits the frames
to the MS. The displayed downlink LAPDm Trace message contains the IE
"lapdm-dl-repeat-facch".
2. Verify Repeated SACCH.
a. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell. On the main page of the BSC6900 Web
LMT, click Trace. In the Trace Navigation Tree, choose Trace > GSM Services
> BTS Signaling Trace. In the displayed dialog box, select LAPDm. For details,
see LMT User Guide.
Expected result: If the BSC6900 or MS cannot decode SACCH frames correctly,
the displayed downlink LAPDm Trace message contains the IE "lapdm-dl-
repeat-sacch".
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC with Repeated
Downlink FACCH and Repeated SACCH set to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Robust Air Interface Signalling
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ECSC=YES, REPEATDLFASET=YES,
REPEATDLFATHRED=5, REPEATSASET=YES;
//Deactivating Robust Air Interface Signalling
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REPEATDLFASET=NO,
REPEATSASET=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 90 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling
297
91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup
About This Chapter
Abis Transmission Backup.
91.1 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Ring Topology)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the ring topology function in the
optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.
91.2 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Dual-Logical BTS)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the dual-logical BTS function in
the optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 91 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup
298
91.1 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Ring
Topology)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the ring topology function in the
optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.
Prerequisites
Resources are available for terrestrial transmission and satellite transmission.
The BTS supports the Ring I topology.
This feature depends on the feature GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis
Interface and GBFD-117801 Ring Topology.
l License
Context
When a disaster-caused failure occurs in the active SDH transmission link over the TDM-based
Abis interface, the GBSS automatically switches transmission link to a backup satellite
transmission link. In this manner, the normal operation of the network is ensured.
With Abis transmission backup enabled, the transmission mode in the forward link is different
from that in the reverse link. That is, the forward link uses terrestrial transmission and the reverse
link uses satellite transmission, as shown in Figure 91-1.
Figure 91-1 Network topology when Abis transmission backup is enabled

Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the target BTS.
GBSS
299
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config ring to
YES.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRINGATTR. In this step, set
Configure Ring II to NO(No) and Ring I Wait Time Before Switch and Ring I Try
Rotating Duration Time to appropriate values.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a reverse ring
connection.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set Transmission
Mode to TER_AND_SAT_TRANS(Terrestrial and Satellite).
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the target BTS.
1. (Optional) Use the MS to make a call.
NOTE
Before verification, ensure that the MS can make a call through terrestrial transmission in a non-
ring topology network.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTS to query the value of Config Ring.
Expected result: The value of Config Ring is YES.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query the value of
Transmission Mode.
Expected result: The value of Transmission Mode is TER_AND_SAT_TRANS.
4. Interrupt the terrestrial transmission between the BTS and the BSC. For example,
remove the E1 cable from port 0 on the BTS.
Expected result: The BTS is reset. Five minutes later, the MS can make a call.
Mode to TER_TRANS(Terrestrial Transmission) or SAT_TRANS(Satellite
Transmission).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSCONNECT to remove a reverse ring
connection.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config Ring to NO
(No).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the target BTS.
----End
Example
/*Activating Abis Transmission Backup (Ring Topology)*/
//Deactivating the target BTS
//Enabling ring topology for a BTS
MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ISCONFIGEDRING=YES;
SET BTSRINGATTR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, FASTCNETFLAG=NO, WTBS=90, TBS=90;
//Adding a reverse ring connection
PN=1;
//Setting BTS transmission mode
GBSS
300
SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TransMode=TER_AND_SAT_TRANS;
/*Deacting Abis Transmission Backup (Ring Topology)*/
//Setting BTS transmission mode
SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TransMode=TER_TRANS;
//Removing a reverse ring connection
RMV BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, INPN=1;
//Disabling ring topology for a BTS
MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ISCONFIGEDRING=NO;
//Activating the target BTS
91.2 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup (Dual-Logical
BTS)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the dual-logical BTS function in
the optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.
Prerequisites
Link resources are required for terrestrial and satellite transmission modes.
An interface board for TDM transmission is required on the BSC side.
BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, and BTS3900AL must be configured with GTMUa
or GTMUb boards to support this feature.
The terrestrial BTS occupies port 0 on the physical BTS as the main port, and the satellite
BTS occupies port 1 on the physical BTS as the main port.
This feature depends on the GBFD-117301 Flex Abis feature.
This feature cannot be used together with the features GBFD-118601 Abis over IP,
GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization,
GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-117801 Ring Topology, and MRFD-210205 Chain
Topology.
l License
Context
The dual-logical BTS solution provides two logical BTSs for a physical BTS. One logical BTS
uses satellite transmission, and the other uses TDM terrestrial transmission. If the TDM
terrestrial transmission is faulty, the system automatically switches over the transmission link
to the backup satellite transmission. The satellite station begins to process services to ensure
normal network communication.
The requirements for naming the two logical BTSs are as follows:
GBSS
301
l The type of a BTS (a terrestrial BTS or a satellite BTS) must be identified.
l The mapping between two logical BTSs and a physical BTS must be identified.
For example, two logical BTSs in site A can be named as terrestrial BTS A and satellite BTS
A.
Procedure
1. Configure the terrestrial BTS.
a. Configuring the Equipment Data
b. Configuring the Logical Data
c. Configuring the Transmission Data
d. Configuring a Clock for a BTS
e. Activating the BTS Configuration
2. Configure the satellite BTS.
NOTE
The configuration data about boards, RXU, cells, and TRXs of the satellite BTS must be
consistent with that of the terrestrial BTS.
a. Configuring the Equipment Data
b. Configuring the Logical Data
c. Configuring the Transmission Data
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set BTS
Port Detection Sequence to CUSTOMIZDE(Customized Sequence),
Number of Customized Detection Types to 2, Preferential Customized
Detection Type to TDME1_1(TDM E1 1 Port), and Subsidiary Customized
Detection Type to TDME1_O(TDM E1 0 Port).
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set
Transmission Mode to SAT_TRANS(Satellite Transmission).
f. Configuring a Clock for a BTS
g. Activating the BTS Configuration
1. Use an MS to process a call.
NOTE
Ensure that the MS processes a call properly in terrestrial transmission mode and non-ring topology
mode.
2. Remove the E1 cable from port 0 of the BTS to disconnect the terrestrial link between
the BTS and the BSC.
Expected result: The original call is interrupted and the BTS resets. The MS can
process a call 10 minutes later.
None
----End
GBSS
302
Example
/*Activating Abis Transmission Backup (Dual-Logical BTS)*/
//Configuring the terrestrial BTS:
ADD BTS: BTSID=9, BTSNAME="BTS3900_Terrestrial", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM,
BTSDESC="BTS3900_Terrestrial",
SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, SRANMODE=SUPPORT;
ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRANMODE=SUPPORT,
TYPE=BTS3900;
ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRN=11, SN=0, BT=FMU;
ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0,
HSN=6, HPN=0;
HSN=6, HPN=1;
HSN=6, HPN=2;
ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0,
SRN=4, SN=0, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 0",
RXUCHAINNO=0, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO;
ADD GCELL:CELLID=5,CELLNAME="cell-11", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460",
MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=1;
MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=2;
MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=3;
ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=5, FREQ1=513,FREQ2=515;
ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=5,BTSID=9;
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=5,TRXID=9, FREQ=513, ISMAINBCCH=YES;
ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=5,TRXID=10, FREQ=515, ISMAINBCCH=NO;
ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=9, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME,
RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 0";
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=9, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1;
GBSS
303
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=9, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=10,RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=14,RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC;
ACT BTS:IDTYPE=BYID,BTSID=9;
//Configuring the satellite BTS:
ADD BTS: BTSID=10, BTSNAME="BTS3900_Satellite", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM,
BTSDESC="BTS3900_Satellite",
SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, MAINPORTNO=1, SRANMODE=SUPPORT;
ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CN=0, SRANMODE=SUPPORT,
TYPE=BTS3900;
ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CN=0, SRN=11, SN=0, BT=FMU;
HSN=6, HPN=0;
HSN=6, HPN=1;
HSN=6, HPN=2;
SRN=4, SN=0, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 0",
ADD GCELL: CELLID=8, CELLNAME="cell-Satellite 1", TYPE=DCS1800,
MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=4;
MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=5;
MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=6;
RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 0";
GBSS
304
SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, SENDSAMBE=NO, ISSUPERBTS=YES,
PROBESEQ=CUSTOMIZDE, PRIVATEPROBENUM=2,
PRIVATEPROBEFST=TDME1_1, PRIVATEPROBESND=TDME1_O;
SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, TransMode=SAT_TRANS;
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,BTSID=10;
GBSS
305
92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy
BSC Node Redundancy.
Prerequisites
This feature requires IP interface boards because the A, Gb, Abis, and Iur interfaces use
IP transmission mode.
The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support this feature.
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118602 A over
IP, GBFD-115301 Local Multiple Signaling Points, and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/
T1
The feature WOFD-231100 BSC Redundancy Management - GBSS requires support
from the M2000.
l License
l IP transmission mode is used between the BSC and the CN and between the BSC and the
BTS.
l A BTS is connected to the two BSCs in a BSC node redundancy group through routers
because the Abis interface does not support direct connections when BSC node redundancy
is enabled.
l A single-homing BTS under two BSCs in a BSC node redundancy group is configured only
under one of these BSCs. A dual-homing BTS is configured for these BSCs with one as
primary-homing and the other as secondary-homing.
l A BSC node redundancy group consists of two BSCs. Initial configuration is complete for
BTSs and cells under the two BSCs and for originating point codes (OPCs) of the two
BSCs. The BTSs and cells work properly, and the connection between the two BSCs is
normal.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 92 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy
306
Context
BSC node redundancy allows two BSCs to form a BSC node redundancy group in an all-IP
network. In a BSC node redundancy group, the secondary BSC takes over voice and data services
from the primary BSC when the primary BSC is faulty or when the transmission over the A
interface is faulty. This improves the BSC reliability.
The BSC Node Redundancy feature has the following advantages:
l High equipment reliability. The BSC in a BSC node redundancy group uses 1+1 load
sharing mode. In this manner, a faulty BSC node does not decrease the system capacity,
ensuring the equipment reliability.
l High transmission reliability. Both BSCs in a BSC node redundancy group establish
connections to the CN through their A interfaces using IP transmission. If the transmission
over the A interface for a single BSC is faulty, backup transmission over the A interface is
provided to ensure high transmission reliability.
The following figures show the A and Iur interface networking in the BSC node redundancy
scenario.
l Figure 92-1 shows the A over IP networking.
Figure 92-1 A over IP networking

l Inter-BSC transmission and networking: An IP router is used for the transmission over the
Iur interface. A direct route between the BSCs and multiple alternative routes are required
GBSS
307
to improve the reliability for inter-BSC fault detection. Data on each alternative route is
forwarded by the access router for each MSC that is connected to the BSC node redundancy
group. See Figure 92-2.
Figure 92-2 Inter-BSC transmission and networking

GBSS
308
NOTE
l The cell broadcast center (CBC) service does not support BSC node redundancy.
l Service migration for BSC node redundancy is supported only when the BSC is faulty or all signaling links
over the A interface are faulty.
l Calls may be interrupted for 10 to 20 minutes during service migration for BSC recovery or disaster
redundancy recover.
l When BSC node redundancy is enabled, each BSC in a BSC node redundancy group can only be connected
to an MSC or a single MSC pool through cross connections.
l Both BSCs in a BSC node redundancy group support only built-in PCUs to implement disaster redundancy
for PS services.
l BSC node redundancy is not triggered if the transmission over the Abis interface is faulty.
BSC node redundancy can work in two modes:
l Active/standby mode
In this mode, all dual-homing BTSs take the same BSC (BSC1) as the primary-homing
BSC (BSC1) and the same BSC (BSC2) as the secondary-homing BSC. If BSC1 is
faulty or the transmission over the A interface is faulty, BSC2 takes over services of
the dual-homing BTSs under BSC1.
BSC1 is configured with primary-homing signaling points and BSC2 is configured with
secondary-homing signaling points. The signaling points configured on BSC1 and
BSC2 must be the same.
If there are single-homing BTSs under BSC1 or BSC2, configure single-homing
signaling points in the same way as that for configuring common signaling points.
l Load sharing mode
In this mode, some dual-homing BTSs take BSC1 as the primary-homing BSC and some
dual-homing BTSs take BSC2 as the secondary-homing BSC. If a BSC is faulty or the
transmission over the A interface is faulty, another BSC takes over services of the dual-
homing BTSs under the faulty BSC.
BSC1 and BSC2 are configured with both primary-homing signaling points and
secondary-homing signaling points. The primary-homing signaling points configured
on BSC1 must be the same as the secondary-homing signaling points configured on
BSC2. Similarly, primary-homing signaling points configured on BSC2 must be the
same as the secondary-homing signaling points configured on BSC1.
If there are single-homing BTSs under BSC1 or BSC2, configure single-homing
signaling points in the same way as that for configuring common signaling points.
NOTE
If the ESN of BSC1 is ESN1 and the ESN of BSC2 is ESN2:
l Active/standby mode: License1 is generated when the order of BSC1 is bound to ESN1 and ESN2.
License2 is generated when the order of BSC2 is bound to ESN1 and ESN2. A license file is generated
when license1 and license2 are combined together. The license file is loaded on both BSC1 and
BSC2.
l Load sharing mode: License1 is generated when the order of BSC1 is bound to ESN1. License2 is
generated when the order of BSC2 is bound to ESN2. License1 is loaded on BSC1 and license2 is
loaded on BSC2.
Data configuration for BSC node redundancy consists of the following steps: Configuring the
signaling point and signaling link over the A interface, configuring homing attributes for BTSs,
configuring the link between BSCs, and configuring BSC node redundancy. This section uses
the BSC node redundancy in active/standby mode as an example. BSC node redundancy in load
sharing mode can be configured in a similar way.
GBSS
309
Procedure
1. Configure BSC1 data.
a. Configure the signaling point and signaling link over the A interface.
NOTE
To add BSCs that work in BSC node redundancy, configure BSCs as dual-homing signaling
points. The following steps show how to configure a BSC as a dual-homing signaling point.
To configure multiple BSCs as dual-homing signaling points, repeat the following steps.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC on BSC1. In this step, set
OSP name, OSP index, Network ID, OSP code bits, Signal point data
format, and OSP code to appropriate values, and set The host type of
signalling point to PRIMHOST(PRIMHOST).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC on BSC1 to configure a
Destination Signaling Point (DSP) for the primary-homing signaling point.
In this step, set DSP name, DSP index, OSP index, Signal point data
format, DSP code, DSP type, and DSP bear type to appropriate values.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE on BSC1 to configure an
M3UA local entity for the primary-homing signaling point. In this step, set
OSP index to the OSP index of the primary-homing signaling point.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE on BSC1 to configure an
M3UA destination entity for the primary-homing signaling point. In this
step, set DSP index to the DSP index of the primary-homing signaling
point.
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS on BSC1 to configure
an M3UA link set for the primary-homing signaling point. In this step, set
Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. of the primary-
homing signaling point.
f. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT on BSC1 to configure an
M3UA route for the primary-homing signaling point. In this step, set
Destination entity No. and Signalling link set index to these of the
primary-homing signaling point.
g. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK on BSC1 to configure
a Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) link for the primary-
homing signaling point. In this step, set First local IP address, First
destination IP address, and Destination SCTP port No. to appropriate
values.
h. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK on BSC1 to configure
an M3UA link for the primary-homing signaling point. In this step, set
SCTP link No. to the SCTP link No. of the primary-homing signaling
point.
b. Configure homing attributes for BTSs
GBSS
310
NOTE
l The configuration data for a dual-homing BTS on BSC1 must be consistent with that on
BSC2.
l The settings of the parameters HostType, Peer BTS ID, Peer BSC IP, and Peer BSC
Mask must be negotiated between BSC1 and BSC2.
l To configure multiple BTSs as dual-homing BTSs under BSC1 and BSC2, repeat the
following steps.
a. Add a BTS under BSC1. For details, see Configuring a BTS in BSC6900
GSM Initial Configuration Guide.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP on BSC1. In this step, set
HostType to PRIMHOST(Primary Host), and set Peer BTS ID, Peer
BSC IP, Peer BSC ID, and Peer BSC Mask to appropriate values.
c. Configure links between BSCs
NOTE
When configuring a link between BSCs, ensure that First local IP address/Second local IP
address for BSC1 is the same as First destination IP address/Second destination IP
address for BSC2, and First local IP address/Second local IP address for BSC2 is the same
as First destination IP address/Second destination IP address for BSC1. In addition, Local
SCTP port No./Destination SCTP port No. for BSC1 is the same as Destination SCTP port
No./Local SCTP port No. for BSC2. It is recommended that you configure multiple links
between BSCs.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK on BSC1. In this step,
set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD) and Application
type to BBAP(BBAP).
b. Optional: If an intermediate device is used between BSC1 and BSC2, run
the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT on BSC1 to configure the IP
route from BSC1 to the intermediate device.
d. Configure BSC node redundancy.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GBSCREDGRP on BSC1 to
configure BSC node redundancy. In this step, set Local BSC ID to the same
as Peer BSC ID on BSC2, and set Peer BSC ID to the same as Local BSC
ID on BSC2.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY on BSC1. In this step, set ReHost
Type to an appropriate value.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GBSCREDGRP on BSC1 to
activate BSC node redundancy.
2. Configure BSC2 data.
a. Configure the signaling point and signaling link over the A interface.
NOTE
To add BSCs that work in BSC node redundancy, configure BSCs as dual-homing signaling
points. The following steps show how to configure a BSC as a dual-homing signaling point.
To configure multiple BSCs as dual-homing signaling points, repeat the following steps.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC on BSC2. In this step, set
OSP name, OSP index, Network ID, OSP code bits, Signal point data
format, and OSP code to appropriate values, and set The host type of
signalling point to SLAVEHOST(SLAVEHOST).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC on BSC2 to configure a
Destination Signaling Point (DSP) for the secondary-homing signaling
GBSS
311
point. In this step, set DSP name, DSP index, OSP index, Signal point
data format, DSP code, DSP type, and DSP bear type to appropriate
values.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE on BSC2 to configure an
M3UA local entity for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this step,
set OSP index to the OSP index of the secondary-homing signaling point.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE on BSC2 to configure an
M3UA destination entity for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this
step, set DSP index to the DSP index of the secondary-homing signaling
point.
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS on BSC2 to configure
an M3UA link set for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this step,
set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. of the secondary-
homing signaling point.
f. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT on BSC2 to configure an
M3UA route for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this step, set
Destination entity No. and Signalling link set index to these of the
secondary-homing signaling point.
g. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK on BSC2 to configure
an SCTP link for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this step, set
First local IP address, First destination IP address, and Destination
SCTP port No. to appropriate values.
h. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK on BSC2 to configure
an M3UA link for the secondary-homing signaling point. In this step, set
SCTP link No. to the SCTP link No. of the secondary-homing signaling
point.
b. Configure homing attributes for BTSs
NOTE
l The configuration data for a dual-homing BTS on BSC1 must be consistent with that on
BSC2.
l The settings of the parameters HostType, Peer BTS ID, Peer BSC IP, and Peer BSC
Mask must be negotiated between BSC1 and BSC2.
l To configure multiple BTSs as dual-homing BTSs under BSC1 and BSC2, repeat the
following steps.
a. Add a BTS under BSC2. For details, see Configuring a BTS in BSC6900
GSM Initial Configuration Guide.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP on BSC2. In this step, set
HostType to SLAVEHOST(Slave Host), and set Peer BTS ID, Peer BSC
IP, Peer BSC ID, and Peer BSC Mask to appropriate values.
c. Configure links between BSCs
NOTE
When configuring a link between BSCs, ensure that First local IP address/Second local IP
address for BSC1 is the same as First destination IP address/Second destination IP
address for BSC2, and First local IP address/Second local IP address for BSC2 is the same
as First destination IP address/Second destination IP address for BSC1. In addition, Local
SCTP port No./Destination SCTP port No. for BSC1 is the same as Destination SCTP port
No./Local SCTP port No. for BSC2. It is recommended that you configure multiple links
between BSCs.
GBSS
312
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK on BSC2. In this step,
set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD) and Application
type to BBAP(BBAP).
b. Optional: If an intermediate device is used between BSC1 and BSC2, run
the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT on BSC2 to configure the IP
route from BSC2 to the intermediate device.
d. Configure BSC node redundancy.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GBSCREDGRP on BSC2 to
configure BSC node redundancy. In this step, set Local BSC ID to the same
as Peer BSC ID on BSC1, and set Peer BSC ID to the same as Local BSC
ID on BSC1.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY on BSC2. In this step, set ReHost
Type to an appropriate value.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GBSCREDGRP on BSC2 to
activate BSC node redundancy.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC1 to query the homing
attribute of the dual-homing BTS.
Expected result: The value of Hosted is Yes.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC2 to query the homing
attribute of the dual-homing BTS.
Expected result: The value of Hosted is No.
3. Shut down the power supply for BSC1, wait for 15 minutes, and then run the
BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC2 to query the homing attribute
of the dual-homing BTS.
Expected result: The value of Hosted is Yes.
4. Turn on the power switch for BSC1. After BSC1 starts, run the BSC6900 MML
command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC1 and BSC2 respectively.
Expected result: The value of Hosted is Yes on BSC1 and is No on BSC2.
----End
Example
/*Activating BSC Node Redundancy*/
/*Configuring BSC1 data*/
//Configuring the signaling point and signaling link over the A
interface//
ADD OPC: NAME="A", SPX=0, NI=NATB, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=2730,
HOSTTYPE=PRIMHOST;
ADD N7DPC: NAME="A to MSC", DPX=0, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=4369, DPCT=A,
BEARTYPE=M3UA;
ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";
ADD M3DE: DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";
ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";
ADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="0";
GBSS
313
LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, LANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;
ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=1, NAME="0";
//Configuring BTS homing attribute//
SET BTSIP:BTSID=72, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="172.18.125.124",
BTSIP="166.253.121.10", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=PRIMHOST,
PEERBTSID=172, PEERBSCIP="172.18.125.69", PEERBSCMASK="255.255.255.255",
PEERBSCID=1, CFGFLAG=NULL, BTSGWIPSWITCH=OFF;
//Configuring a link between BSCs//
ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=CLIENT, APP=BBAP, LOCPN=5000,
LOCIP1="172.18.125.68", PEERIP1="172.18.125.69",
PEERPN=58000, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE,
SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;
//Configuring BSC node redundancy//
SET GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0, LocalBSCID=0, PeerBSCID=1;
SET GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY: REHOSTTYPE=REHOSTDELAY;
ACT GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0;
/*Configuring BSC2 data*/
//Configuring the signaling point and signaling link over the A
interface//
ADD OPC: NAME="A", SPX=0, NI=NATB, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=2730,
HOSTTYPE=SLAVEHOST;
ADD N7DPC: NAME="A to MSC", DPX=0, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=4369, DPCT=A,
BEARTYPE=M3UA;
ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";
ADD M3DE: DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";
ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0";
ADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="0";
LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, LANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;
ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=1, NAME="0";
//Configuring BTS homing attribute//
SET BTSIP:BTSID=172, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="172.18.125.69",
BTSIP="166.253.121.10", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=SLAVEHOST,
PEERBTSID=72, PEERBSCIP="172.18.125.124", PEERBSCMASK="255.255.255.255",
PEERBSCID=0, CFGFLAG=NULL, BTSGWIPSWITCH=OFF;
//Configuring a link between BSCs//
ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=CLIENT, APP=BBAP, LOCPN=58000,
LOCIP1="172.18.125.69", PEERIP1="172.18.125.68",
PEERPN=5000, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE,
SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;
//Configuring BSC node redundancy//
SET GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0, LocalBSCID=1, PeerBSCID=0;
SET GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY: REHOSTTYPE=REHOSTDELAY;
ACT GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0;
GBSS
314
93 Configuring TC Pool
About This Chapter
TC Pool. The A interface boards of the BSC that supports the TC Pool feature can use only TDM
transmission. The Ater interface boards can use TDM transmission or IP transmission.
93.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM)
TC Pool in Ater over TDM transmission mode.
93.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP)
TC Pool in Ater over IP transmission mode.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 93 Configuring TC Pool
315
93.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM)
TC Pool in Ater over TDM transmission mode.
Prerequisites
The EIUa/OIUa board is configured, and there are idle ports on the configured EIUa/
OIUa board.
This feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-118602 A over IP and
l License
Network Topology
At least two BSCs are configured in the network. The BM/TC subracks of the two
BSCs are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack of the two BSCs is
configured remotely.
The configuration of the clock source is the same for the two BSCs. For details on
the configuration of the clock source, see Configuring the Clocks.
Initial Data Preparation
The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.
The EIUa/OIUa board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.
The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.
Context
l To synchronize the frequency of the GSM network, the main BSC and sub-BSCs in a TC
pool should use the same clock source. In addition, a BSC can be connected to only one
TC pool. One TC pool supports a maximum of 16 BSCs.
l All TCSs in a TC pool are configured and controlled on the main BSC. The sub-BSC is
only configured with the BM subrack. The main BSC and sub-BSCs are connected to the
TCS over the Ater interface, and the TCS is connected to the MSC over the A interface.
l The settings of TC CRC Allow must be the same on the main BSC and sub-BSCs.
l If TFO Switch of the sub-BSCs is set to ENABLE(Enable), the TFO setting is effective
only when TFO Option Switch of each TCS is set to ON(On) on the main BSC. For details
on the setting of TFO, see 117 Configuring TFO.
Procedure
1. Configure the Ater interface link for the main BSC.
GBSS
316
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In this
step, set Service mode to SEPARATE(Separate), set Is Support Tc Pool to
YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to YES(Yes), and set Ater Interface Transfer
Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH for the main BSC
to add an Ater connection path between the BM subrack and TC subrack.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML for the main BSC to add
the OML on the Ater interface between the main BSC and the TCS.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONSL for the main BSC to
add a signaling link on the Ater interface between the BM subrack of the main
BSC and TC subrack.
2. Configure the A interface link for the main BSC.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add an
E1/T1 link on the A interface. In this step, set BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAIN
BSC).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the main BSC to add
an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSP
index, and Signalling link set name.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the main BSC to add
an MTP3 signaling link.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the main BSC to add an
MTP3 signaling route.
NOTE
The TCSs are configured on the main BSC. When you add MTP3 links to the main BSC,
MTP2 links are automatically added to the main BSC.
3. Configure the Ater interface link for the sub-BSC.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In this
YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to NO(No), and set Ater Interface Transfer
Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID and ID of a BSC in TC
Pool.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the sub-BSC to add
an Ater connection path on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to
CFGBM(BM).
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the main BSC to add
an Ater connection path on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to
CFGTC(TC), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specified
in 3.1.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the sub-BSC to add an
Ater signaling link on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to
CFGBM(BM).
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the main BSC to add an
Ater signaling link on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGTC
(TC), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specified in
3.1.
4. Configure the A interface link for the sub-BSC.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add an A
interface E1/T1 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUB
GBSS
317
BSC), and set ID of slave BSC in TC Pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specified
in 3.1.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the sub-BSC to add an
MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSP
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the sub-BSC to add
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the sub-BSC to add an
NOTE
The MTP2 links cannot be automatically added with the addition of the MTP3 links,
because the sub-BSC is not configured with the TCS.
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK for the main BSC to add
an MTP2 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set Application Type to MTP2
(MTP2), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specified in
3.1. In addition, specify Semipermanent Link Rate.
Subsequent procedures: You also need to configure BTS data for the TC pool
networking. For details on how to configure the BTS data, see Configuring a BTS.
1. In a cell under the main BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC
Group No to those of the main BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC
Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to
MAINBSC(MAIN BSC).
Expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the main BSC works properly.
3. In a cell under a sub-BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.
Group No to those of the sub-BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC
Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to SUBBSC
(SUB BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.
Expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the sub-BSC works properly.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In this step,
set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In this step,
----End
Example
l Configuration on the main BSC
//Setting the TC Pool and the transmission mode on the Ater interface
SET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, IsSupportTcPool=YES,
IsMainBSC=YES, TCPOOLID=0,ATERTRANSMODE=TDM;
//Configuring the Ater conpath or the Ater OML
ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=1, BMSRN=0, BMSN=14, BMPN=1, TCSRN=3,
TCSN=14, TCPN=1;
GBSS
318
TSMASK=TS1-0&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-0&TS10-0&T
S11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&
TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0
&TS31-0;
ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0
&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-
0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30
-0&TS31-0;
//Configuring the A E1/T1 on the main BSC
ADD AE1T1: SRN=3, SN=16, PN=0, DPCGIDX=0, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC,
ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=1, LNKSLSMASK=B0001, EMERGENCY=OFF,
NAME="BM1";
TCMODE=SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL, ATERIDX=1,
-0&TS31-0, ASRN=3, ASN=16, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0,
ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&
1&TS31-1, LKTATE=64K, NAME="BM1";
ADD MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="BM1";
//Configuring the Ater E1T1 on the TC side for the sub-BSC
ADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=1, SRN=3, SN=20, PN=0;
//Configuring the Ater RSL on the TC side for the sub-BSC
ADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=2,
-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS;
//Configuring the A E1/T1 for the sub-BSC
BSCFLAG=SUBBSC, SUBBSCTID=1, STCIC=0;
//congfiguring the semilink for the sub-BSC
ADD SEMILINK: IDX=0, APPTYPE=MTP2, LNKRATE=64K, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=2,
INMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&T
&TS31-1, OUTSRN=3, OUTSN=3, OUTPN=16,
OUTMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&
1&TS31-1;
l Configuration on the sub-BSC
//Setting the TC Pool and the transmission on the Ater interface
IsMainBSC=NO, BSCTID=1, TCPOOLID=0, ATERTRANSMODE=TDM;
//Configuring the Ater E1/T1 on the BM side for the sub-BSC
ADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=2, SRN=0, SN=16, PN=0;
//Configuring the Ater RSL on the BM side for the sub-BSC
ADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=2,
//Configuring the MTP3 links for the sub-BSC
ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DPX=2, NAME="BM2";
GBSS
319
TCMODE=SEPERATE_SUBORDINATE, ATERIDX=1,
93.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP)
TC Pool in Ater over IP transmission mode.
Prerequisites
The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured, and there are idle ports on the configured
EIUa/OIUa/POUc board.
This feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-118602 A over IP and
l License
Network Topology
At least two BSCs are configured in the network. The BM/TC subracks of the two
BSCs are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack of the two BSCs is
configured remotely.
The configuration of the clock source is the same for the two BSCs. For details on
the configuration of the clock source, see Configuring the Clocks.
Initial Data Preparation
The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.
Context
l To synchronize the frequency of the GSM network, the main BSC and sub-BSCs in a TC
pool should use the same clock source. In addition, a BSC can be connected to only one
TC pool. One TC pool supports a maximum of 16 BSCs.
l All TCSs in a TC pool are configured and controlled on the main BSC. The sub-BSC is
only configured with the BM subrack. The main BSC and sub-BSCs are connected to the
TCS over the Ater interface, and the TCS is connected to the MSC over the A interface.
l The settings of TC CRC Allow must be the same on the main BSC and sub-BSCs.
GBSS
320
l If TFO Switch of the sub-BSCs is set to ENABLE(Enable), the TFO setting is effective
only when TFO Option Switch of each TCS is set to ON(On) on the main BSC. For details
on the setting of TFO, see 117 Configuring TFO.
Procedure
1. Configure the Ater interface link for the main BSC.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In this
YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to YES(Yes), and set Ater Interface Transfer
Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH for the main BSC
to add an Ater connection path between the BM subrack and TC subrack.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML for the main BSC to add
the OML on the Ater interface between the main BSC and the TCS.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONSL for the main BSC to
add a signaling link on the Ater interface between the BM subrack of the main
BSC and TC subrack.
e. Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MLPPP link
group).
Add PPP link data.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the main BSC.
In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IP
interface board in the BM subrack.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the main BSC.
interface board in the TC subrack.
NOTE
You can perform the preceding operation to add only one PPP link at a time. If
multiple PPP links are to be added, you need to perform the preceding operation
repeatedly.
Add MLPPP group data.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the main BSC.
interface board in the BM subrack.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the main BSC.
interface board in the TC subrack.
NOTE
You can perform the preceding operation to add only one MLPPP group at a time.
If multiple MLPPP groups are to be added, you need to perform the preceding
operation repeatedly.
f. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the main BSC to add
an Ater interface adjacent node on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent Node
Type to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID.
GBSS
321
g. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the main BSC to add
an Ater interface adjacent node on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent Node
Type to TC(Ater Interface on TC).
h. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the main BSC. In this
step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacent node on the BM side. In
addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER Interface).
i. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the main BSC. In this
step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacent node on the TC side. In
addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER Interface).
2. Configure the A interface link for the main BSC.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add an
E1/T1 link on the A interface. In this step, set BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAIN
BSC).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the main BSC to add
an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSP
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the main BSC to add
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the main BSC to add an
NOTE
The TCSs are configured on the main BSC. When you add MTP3 links to the main BSC,
MTP2 links are automatically added to the main BSC.
3. Configure the Ater interface link for the sub-BSC.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In this
YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to NO(No), and set Ater Interface Transfer
Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID and ID of a BSC in TC
Pool.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the sub-BSC to add
an E1/T1 link on the Ater interface on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC
config flag to CFGBM(BM).
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the main BSC to add
an E1/T1 link on the Ater interface on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config
flag to CFGTC(TC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the sub-BSC to add an
Ater signaling link on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to
CFGBM(BM).
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the main BSC to add an
Ater signaling link on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGTC
(TC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.
f. Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MLPPP link
group).
Add PPP link data.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the sub-BSC to
add a PPP link on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No. to the number
of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.
GBSS
322
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the main BSC
to add a PPP link on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No. to the number
of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TCS.
Add MLPPP group data.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the sub-BSC to
add an MLPPP group on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No. to the
number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the main BSC to
add an MLPPP group on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No. to the
number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TCS.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK for the sub-BSC to
add an MLPPP link on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No. to the
number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK for the main BSC to
add an MLPPP link on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No. to the number
of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TC subrack.
g. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the sub-BSC to add an
Ater interface adjacent node on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent Node
Type to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID.
h. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the main BSC to add
an Ater interface adjacent node on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent Node
Type to TC(Ater Interface on TC).
i. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the sub-BSC to add an
IP path on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the
adjacent node on the BM side. In addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER
Interface).
j. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the main BSC to add an
IP path on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacent
node on the TC side. In addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER
Interface).
4. Configure the A interface link for the sub-BSC.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add an A
interface E1/T1 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUB
BSC). In addition, specify ID of slave BSC in TC Pool.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the sub-BSC to add an
MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSP
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the sub-BSC to add
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the sub-BSC to add an
NOTE
The MTP2 links cannot be automatically added with the addition of the MTP3 links,
because the sub-BSC is not configured with the TCS.
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK for the main BSC to add
an MTP2 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set Application Type to MTP2
GBSS
323
(MTP2). In addition, specify Semipermanent Link Rate and BSC ID in the
TC pool.
Subsequent procedures: You also need to configure BTS data for the TC pool
networking. For details on how to configure the BTS data, see Configuring a BTS.
1. In a cell under the main BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.
Group No to those of the main BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC
Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to
MAINBSC(MAIN BSC).
Expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the main BSC works properly.
3. In a cell under a sub-BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.
Group No to those of the sub-BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC
Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to SUBBSC
(SUB BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.
Expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the sub-BSC works properly.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In this step,
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In this step,
----End
Example
l Configuration on the main BSC
//Setting the TC Pool and the transmission mode on the Ater interface
IsMainBSC=YES, TCPOOLID=0,ATERTRANSMODE=IP;
//Configuring the Ater conpath on the main BSC
ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=1, BMSRN=0, BMSN=14, BMPN=1, TCSRN=3,
TCSN=14, TCPN=1;
//Configuring the Ater OML on the main BSC
TSMASK=TS1-0&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-0&TS10-0&T
&TS31-0;
//Configuring the Ater CONSL ont the main BSC
-0&TS31-0;
//Configuring the Ater PPPlink on the BM side for the main BSC
TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1
-1&TS31-1, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.1", MASK="255.255.255.0",
PEERIP="1.1.1.2", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable,
PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF;
GBSS
324
//Configuring the Ater PPPlink on the TC side for the main BSC
//Configuring the Adjnode ong the BM side for the main BSC
ADD ADJNODE: ANI=0, NAME="adjnode0", NODET=BSC, BSCID=0;
//Configuring the Adjnode ong the TC side for the main BSC
//Configuring the Ater IPPATH on the BM side for the main BSC
PATHCHK=DISABLED;
//Configuring the Ater IPPATH on the TC side for the main BSC
PATHCHK=DISABLED;
//Configuring the A E1/T1 on the main BSC
//Configuring the MTP3 links on the main BSC
ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=1, LNKSLSMASK=B0001, EMERGENCY=OFF,
NAME="BM1";
//Configuring the MTP3 link on the main BSC
TCMODE=SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL, ATERIDX=1,
//Configuring the MTP3 route on the main BSC
//Configuring the Ater E1/T1 on the TC side for the sub-BSC
ADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=1, SRN=3, SN=20, PN=0;
//Configuring the Ater RSL on the TC side for the sub-BSC
ADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=2,
//Configuring the Ater PPPLink on the TC side for sub-BSC
//Configuring the adjnode on the TC side for the sub-BSC
//Configuring the Ater IPPATH on the TC side for the sub-BSC
PATHCHK=DISABLED;
//Configuring the A E1/T1 on the sub-BSC
GBSS
325
BSCFLAG=SUBBSC, SUBBSCTID=1, STCIC=0;
//Configuring the semilink for the sub-BSC
ADD SEMILINK: IDX=0, APPTYPE=MTP2, LNKRATE=64K, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=2,
INMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&T
&TS31-1, OUTSRN=3, OUTSN=3, OUTPN=16,
OUTMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&
1&TS31-1;
l Configuration on the sub-BSC
//Setting the TC Pool and the transmission on the Ater interface
IsMainBSC=NO, BSCTID=1, TCPOOLID=0, ATERTRANSMODE=TDM;
//Configuring the Ater E1/T1 on the BM side for the sub-BSC
ADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=2, SRN=0, SN=16, PN=0;
//Configuring the Ater RSL on the BM side for the sub-BSC
ADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=2,
//Configuring the Ater PPPLink on the BM side for the sub-BSC
//Configuring the adjnode on the BM side for the sub-BSC
ADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="adjnode1", NODET=BSC;
//Configuring the Ater IPPATH on the BM side for the sub-BSC
PATHCHK=DISABLED;
//Configuring the MTP3 links on the sub-BSC
ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DPX=2, NAME="BM2";
//Configuring the MTP3 link on the sub-BSC
TCMODE=SEPERATE_SUBORDINATE, ATERIDX=1,
//Configuring the MTP3 route on the sub-BSC
GBSS
326
94 Configuring OML Backup
OML Backup. When the operation and maintenance link (OML) backup function of the BTS is
enabled, the BTS automatically switches to anther port to set up an OML if the established OML
is disconnected, thereby reducing service interruption duration.
Prerequisites
The BTS3900B, BTS3900E, and BTS3X series base station do not support this feature.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-117801 Ring Topology,
GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over
E1/T1, or GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization.
When this feature is enabled simultaneously with the GBFD-113801 TRX Mutual Aid
feature:
The value of Flex Abis Mode of the BTS must be set to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis).
TRX mutual aid is triggered by the active link. The static PDTCH on the active link
is unavailable due to transmission faults. Therefore, you are advised to change the
static PDTCH to dynamic PDTCH.
l License
This feature cannot be used together with the OML timeslot automatic detection.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 94 Configuring OML Backup
327
CAUTION
l The BTS in TDM or HDLC transmission mode supports this feature. The BTS in IP
transmission mode does not support this feature.
l OMLs on ports 0 and 1 of the BTS main cabinet group support this feature. OMLs on other
ports of the main cabinet group and OMLs of the main and extension cabinet groups do not
support this feature.
l The active and standby OMLs between the BSC and the BTS must not be carried by the same
E1/T1 cable, including the same E1/T1 cable of an upper-level BTS. When the upper-level
BTS is connected to the BSC by using only one E1/T1 cable and the lower-level BTS requires
the OML backup function, a secondary link must be added to directly connect the upper-
level BTS or lower-level BTS to the BSC.
Context
l If the OML between the BSC and the BTS fails, the BTS cannot work. The OML Backup
feature allows a pair of OMLs to be configured on two independent E1 cables (one for
each). When the active OML is faulty, the BTS uses the standby OML. This prevents the
BTS and cells from being out of service due to transmission failures or port failures.
l When this feature is used, one OML is configured on ports 0 and 1 of the BTS, respectively.
After the BTS is reset, it attempts to establish OMLs on the two ports in turn. If the BTS
establishes an OML on a port, it always uses the OML on this port unless the BTS is reset
or the OML is disconnected. When the established OML is broken, the BTS attempts to
establish an OML on another port. If the OML is established successfully, the BSC triggers
an OML switchover procedure.
l After the OML switchover, the RSL, TCH, idle timeslot, and monitoring timeslot are not
switched over. That is, for ports 0 and 1, if the transmission link or port where the active
OML is located is faulty, all TRX channels, idle timeslots, and monitoring timeslots
configured on this port become unavailable. The TRX channels, idle timeslots, and
monitoring timeslots on a normal port, however, are still available. Therefore, cells under
the BTS continue to provide services.
Procedure
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLBACKUP. In this step, set
Configure Backup OML to YES(Yes) and set Wait Time before OML Switch and
Try Switching Duration Time to appropriate values.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOMLBACKUP to query the value of
Configure Backup OML.
Expected result: Configure Backup OML is set to YES, and other parameters are
set based on configurations.
GBSS
328
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLBACKUP. In this step, set
Configure Backup OML to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating OML Backup
SET BTSOMLBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, OMLBKUP=YES, WTBS=30, TBS=30;
//Verifying OML Backup
LST BTSOMLBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
//Deactivating OML Backup
SET BTSOMLBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, OMLBKUP=NO;
GBSS
329
95 Configuring Adaptive Transmission
Link Blocking
Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking.
Prerequisites
The BSC6900 has been configured with an POUc, OIUa, or EIUa board that supports
TDM transmission.
l License
Context
The transmission quality, especially the quality of microwave transmission, is vulnerable to bad
weather, leading to degraded service quality and increased call drop rate. To prevent this
problem, the BSC monitors transmission quality in real time. The BSC automatically blocks an
E1 link if the transmission quality of the E1 link is lower than the specified threshold. After
being blocked, the E1 link carries no service. After the transmission quality of the E1 link
becomes desirable, the BSC unblocks the link. After being unblocked, the E1 link carries
services.
WARNING
This feature blocks an E1/T1 adaptively, leading to service interruption on the E1/T1.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 95 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking
330
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET E1T1 with High BER Auto Isolation
Switch set to ON(ON) and High BER Auto Isolation Threshold set to O1E3_R5E4
(OCCUR:1E3, RECOVERY:5E4) on the POUc/OIUa/EIUa board.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSE1T1BER with BER OOS Switch set
to ON(ON) and BER OOS Threshold set to O1E3_R5E4(OCCUR:1E3,
RECOVERY:5E4).
NOTE
Step 1 and Step 2 uses an example for your reference only. Set High BER Auto Isolation
Threshold and BER OOS Threshold based on the field configuration.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST E1T1 to query High BER Auto Isolation
Switch and High BER Auto Isolation Threshold.
Expected result: High BER Auto Isolation Switch is ON(ON) and High BER Auto
Isolation Threshold is the same as that set in the activation procedure.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSE1T1BER to query BER OOS
Switch and BER OOS Threshold.
Expected result: BER OOS Switch is ON(ON) and BER OOS Threshold is the same
as that set in the activation procedure.
3. Use the MS to make a call and wait for BER.
Expected result: The BER is higher than 1E-3.
4. Log in to the LMT or M2000 to view the alarms reported in real time.
Expected result: An ALM-21207 E1/T1 Excessive Bit Error Rate alarm is reported
with the cause value of BER within one minute exceeds the allowed limit. After 10
seconds the alarm is reported, ongoing services are interrupted.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET E1T1 with High BER Auto Isolation
Switch set to OFF(OFF).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSE1T1BER with BER OOS Switch set
to OFF(OFF).
----End
Example
//Configuring the switch and threshold for blocking an E1 link when the
BER exceeds the specified threshold for BSC
SET E1T1: SRN=0, SN=14, BT=OIUa, PS=SINGLE, PN=3, BERAUTOISOSW=ON,
BERAUTOISOTHRD=O1E3_R5E4;
//Configuring the switch and threshold for blocking an E1 link when the
BER exceeds the specified threshold for BTS
SET BTSE1T1BER: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BEROOSSwitch=ON,
BEROOSTHD=O1E3_R5E4;
//Turning off the switch for blocking an E1 link when the BER exceeds the
specified threshold for BSC
GBSS
331
SET E1T1: SRN=0, SN=14, BT=OIUa, PS=SINGLE, PN=3, BERAUTOISOSW=OFF;
//Turning off the switch for blocking an E1 link when the BER exceeds the
specified threshold for BTS
SET BTSE1T1BER: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BEROOSSwitch=OFF;
GBSS
332
96 Configuring Automatic Frequency
Correction (AFC)
Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC).
Prerequisites
Only the RRU3008 and RRU3908 support the AFC function for downlink.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115821 EICC,
GBFD-115830 VAMOS, or GBFD-115832 VAMOS Call Drop Solution.
l License
Context
AFC is a frequency correction algorithm used on the base station side for fast-moving MSs. It
ensures reliability of radio links carrying high-quality speech services for MSs moving at 500
km/h and also ensures service continuity.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT.
If... Then...
The AFC function needs to be enabled
in the uplink
Set UL Frequency Adjust Switch to
YES(Yes).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 96 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)
333
If... Then...
The AFC function needs to be enabled
in the downlink
Set both UL Frequency Adjust
Switch and DL Frequency Adjust
Switch to YES(Yes).

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT.
If... Then...
The value of UL Frequency Adjust
Switch is YES(Yes)
The AFC function is enabled in the
uplink.
The values of both UL Frequency
Adjust Switch and DL Frequency
Adjust Switch are YES(Yes)
The AFC function is enabled in the
downlink.

2. Make a call in a fast-moving vehicle. On the LMT, click Trace. In the navigation tree,
choose Trace > GSM Services > Abis Interface CS Trace. In the displayed dialog
box, click RSL in the Trace Type area. Then, check the value of Uplink Receive
Quality in the measurement report. If the AFC function has been activated, the value
of Uplink Receive Quality decreases.
NOTE
Uplink Receive Quality is specified by the "rxquel-ul" field in the measurement report. The
value ranges from 0 to 7. A small value indicates good quality, for example, 0 indicates that
the quality is the best. A large value indicates poor quality, for example, 7 indicates that the
quality is the worst.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set UL
Frequency Adjust Switch and DL Frequency Adjust Switch to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES;
//Verifying Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)
LST GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CELLID=0;
//Deactivating Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=NO, DLFREQADJ=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 96 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)
334
97 Configuring Fast Move Handover
Fast Move Handover.
Prerequisites
feature depends on the feature GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover.
l License
Context
Handovers along railway lines need to be completed quickly because users move fast from the
coverage of one cell to that of another cell. To reduce failures, a second handover must be
initiated quickly upon a handover failure (for example, interference occurs abruptly on the radio
interface). The fast move handover algorithm, which is optimized on the basis of the current
algorithm, can trigger better cell handover within a short period.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Quick
Handover Enable to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST. In this step, set Quick
Move Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, Quick Handover
Down Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time,
Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number,
Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore Measurement Report
Number, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS, Handover Direction
Forecast Enable, Handover Direction Forecast Statistic Times, Frequency Shift
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 97 Configuring Fast Move Handover
335
Handover Statistic Time, and Frequency Shift Handover Duration to appropriate
values.
NOTE
You can run the BSC6900 MML command LST G2GNCELL to query information about the
neighboring cells of this cell.
If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, run the BSC6900 MML command
MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time, and
Quick Handover Punish Value to appropriate values.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set UL
Frequency Adjust Switch and UL Frequency Adjust Value to appropriate values.
1. Move the MS away from the serving cell until the frequency offset in the measurement
report, CH RQD, or HO DETECT message is a negative value and the moving speed
of the MS is greater than Quick Move Speed Threshold. When the frequency offset
information fails to be reported or the frequency offset information is invalid, the
uplink level in the serving cell is lower than Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, the
downlink level in the serving cell is lower than Quick Handover Down Trigger
Level, and the path loss of configured chain neighboring cells is lower than the
specified threshold of the path loss of the serving cell.
2. On the LMT, trace BSSAP messages over the A interface.
Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Performed message to the MSC with the
handover cause value "better-cell".
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Quick
Handover Enable set to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Fast Move Handover
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, QUICKHOEN=YES;
MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, MSLEVSTRQPBGT=YES;
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FREQADJ=YES, FREQADJVALUE=255;
//Deactivating Fast Move Handover
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, QUICKHOEN=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 97 Configuring Fast Move Handover
336
98 Configuring Chain Cell Handover
Chain Cell Handover.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
This feature enables fast-moving MSs to move in chain cells by predicting the moving direction
and thereby increases the handover success rate and improves service quality.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL to add a neighboring cell. In
this step, set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes). If a cell has been added as a
neighboring cell, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step,
set Neighboring Cell Type to HANDOVERNCELL(Handover Neighboring
cell) and Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST G2GNCELL to query the value of Chain
Neighbor Cell.
Expected result: The value of Chain Neighbor Cell is YES(Yes).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 98 Configuring Chain Cell Handover
337
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Chain
Neighbor Cell to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Chain Cell Handover
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, ISCHAINNCELL=YES;
//Verifying Chain Cell Handover
LST G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542;
//Deactivating Chain Cell Handover
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 98 Configuring Chain Cell Handover
338
99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell
Multi-Site Cell.
Prerequisites
The base station must be DBS3900.
Table 99-1 shows the hardware for supporting this feature.
Table 99-1 Dependencies on hardware
TRX/Subsite x
Subsite
GTMU Type RF Module CPRI Rate (Gbit/
s)
O6*12
O8*9
O9*8
O10*6
GTMUb RRU3004
RRU3008 V1
RRU3908 V1
Equal to or greater
than 1.25
O6*6 GTMU and
GTMUb
All types of RRUs Equal to or greater
than 1.25

NOTE
Oa*b indicates a TRXs/subsites x b subsites. For example, O8*30 indicates 8 TRXs/subsites x 30
subsites.
This feature cannot be used together with any of the followings: GBFD-115830
VAMOS, GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown, GBFD-111604
Intelligent Combiner Bypass, GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel
Type, GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation, GBFD-118701
RAN Sharing, GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity, GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT
(Power Boost Technology), GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping,
GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network, GBFD-114001 Extended Cell,
MRFD-211801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing(GSM), GBFD-118104 Enhanced
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 99 Configuring Multi-Site Cell
339
EDGE Coverage, GBFD-119308 Intermodulation Testing, GBFD-118106 Dynamic
Power Sharing (The multi-site cell feature cannot be used together with dual-PA power
sharing), and GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping) (The
multi-site cell feature cannot be used together with cross-module RF hopping)
l License
Context
The multi-site cell feature enables multiple subsites to be configured as one logical cell. Such
cell is also called a cascaded cell. A subsite is defined as an area physically covered by multiple
RRUs that are served by one BBU. In coverage scenarios such as high-speed railways, tunnels,
or indoor space, the use of cascaded cells can reduce handovers, increase coverage efficiency,
and therefore improve user experience.
l In a multi-site cell, only one primary subsite can be configured.
l A TRX board bound with carriers can be added only to the primary subsite. TRX boards
that are not bound with any carriers can be added only to the secondary subsite.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSLOCGRP to add the primary subsite
with Location Group No. set to the desired one and Is Main Local Group set to
YES(YES).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSLOCGRP to add the secondary subsite
with Location Group No. set to a desired one and Is Main Local Group set to NO
(NO).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP to add an RXU to the
primary subsite after specifying Location Group No., Cabinet No., Subrack No.,
and Slot No..
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP to add an RXU to the
secondary subsite after specifying Location Group No., Cabinet No., Subrack
No., and Slot No..
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP to bind a carrier in
the primary subsite to an idle channel on the TRX board in the secondary subsite after
specifying Main Location Group No., Sub-Location Group No., TRX ID, Cabinet
No., Subrack No., Slot No., and Sub-Location Group TRX Board Pass No..
NOTE
l This configuration takes effect only when the carriers in the primary subsite and those in
the secondary subsite are the same.
l All the subsites under a BTS or cell will be deleted when the BTS or cell is deleted.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Directly Magnifier
BTS Flag set to YES(Yes).
7. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT.
GBSS
340
If... Then...
Only the power amplifier for the carriers
under the operating subsite needs to be
started,
Set Location Group Power Switch to
OnlyCurPwrLoc(Only Current
Working Location TRXes be Turned
On).
The power amplifier for carriers under
all subsites needs to be started,
Set Location Group Power Switch to
ALLPwrLoc(All Location TRXes be
Turned On).

1. Start CS single user tracing on the LMT. For details, see Tracing CS Domain Messages
of a Single Subscriber in the BSC6900 LMT User Guide.
2. Use the MS to call a phone in the test subsite.
3. Check the result of CS single user tracing.
The expected result: The location group no carried in the Channel Activation
message is the test location group number.
----End
Example
ADD BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=0, ISMAINLOCGRP=YES;
ADD BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1, ISMAINLOCGRP=NO;
ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=0, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=0;
ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1;
ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, MAINLOCGRPNO=0, SLAVELOCGRPNO=1,
TRXID=1, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1, TRXPN=0;
ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, MAINLOCGRPNO=0, SLAVELOCGRPNO=1,
TRXID=2, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1, TRXPN=1;
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DIRMAGANSITEFLAG=YES;
GBSS
341
100 Configuring Satellite Transmission
over Abis Interface
Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface.
Prerequisites
This feature cannot be used with the following feature: GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.
l License
The cell to be verified is in the normal state and has idle channels.
To ensure the normal processing of PS services in satellite transmission mode, the GPRS
parameters related to a PS cell need to be set as follows: T3168 is set to 1000ms, T3192
to 1000ms, and BS_CV_MAX to 15.
Context
Using satellite transmission over Abis interface enables operators to deploy BTSs in areas that
are difficult to reach through conventional terrestrial transmission, therefore solving the
communication problem in these areas. Satellite transmission over Abis interface has a longer
delay in information exchanges than terrestrial transmission.
Procedure
Mode to SAT_TRANS(Satellite Transmission).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 100 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface
342
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLAPDWS. In this step, set
RSL LAPD Window Size to an appropriate value based on the actual delay.
NOTE
RSL LAPD Window Size is set to 48 by default and can be flexibly configured by operators
based on the actual delay. A longer delay requires a larger value.
4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR. In this step,
set T200 SDCCH to 100, T200 SACCH SDCCH to 100, and T200 SDCCH
SAPI3 to 200. Operators can adjust the settings of these parameters based on the actual
delay over the Abis interface. A longer delay requires a larger value.
5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step,
set MS MAX Retrans to an appropriate value.
NOTE
Adjusting MS MAX Retrans to a larger value increases the radio access rate and adjusting
MS MAX Retrans to a smaller value lightens the load of the RACH and SDCCH.
7. Configuring a Clock for a BTS.
NOTE
If the BTS has a difficulty in using the original clock, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to INT_CLK(Internal Clock).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GCELLSTAT to query the status of the cell.
Expected result: Cell Service State is set to Yes.
2. Use the MS to initiate a call.
3. Initiate CS domain message tracing on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS
Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In this step, click RSL under Trace Type.
Expected result: Complete signaling procedure of the mobile-originated call is traced.
4. Connect the MS to the network through dial-up and then enable the MS to perform a
PING service. The service succeeds.
Mode to TER_TRANS(Terrestrial Transmission).
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR. In this step,
set T200 SDCCH to 60, T200 SACCH SDCCH to 60, and T200 SDCCH SAPI3 to
60. Adjust settings of these parameters based on the actual delay over the Abis
interface. A longer delay requires a larger value.
4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step,
set MS MAX Retrans to 2_Times(2_Times). Adjust MS MAX Retrans to an
appropriate value.
set T3168 to 500ms, T3192 to 500ms, and BS_CV_MAX to 10.
----End
GBSS
343
Example
/*Activating Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface*/
//Deactivating a BTS
//Setting a transmission mode
SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TransMode=SAT_TRANS;
//Setting a clock mode
SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=INT_CLK, TRANSTYPE=E1, PN=0;
//Activating the BTS
/*Deactivating Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface*/
//Deactivating the BTS
//Setting a transmission mode
SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TransMode=TER_TRANS;
GBSS
344
over A Interface
Satellite Transmission over A Interface.
Prerequisites
The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured.
l License
The initial configuration of the BSC is complete. The cell to be verified is in the normal
state and has idle channels.
Context
Satellite transmission can be applied on the A interface in situations where terrestrial
transmission cannot be established between the BSC and MSC (for example, in sites where an
emergency situation occurs temporarily or in scenarios where satellite works as a backup
transmission means).
If satellite transmission is applied over the A interface, you are advised to configure satellite
transmission over the Ater interface.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 to add an E1/T1 link on the A
interface.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 101 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface
345
NOTE
An EIUa board provides 32 E1s/T1s. Each E1 has thirty-two 64 kbit/s timeslots. Each T1 has
twenty-five 64 kbit/s timeslots. Each timeslot corresponds to a CIC.
For example, if Start CIC of the first E1/T1 is 0, then Start CIC of the second E1/T1 must
belong to a CIC group that is different from the CIC group of Start CIC of the first configured
E1/T1. Here, if E1 is used, Start CIC of the second E1 must be greater than 31. If T1 is used,
Start CIC of the second T1 must be greater than 24.
When the MSC Pool feature is enabled, the Start CIC of the E1s/T1s that have the same pair
of originating and destination signaling points must be unique.
set on the A interface.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK with Satellite flag set to YES
(YES) to add an MTP3 signaling link on the A interface.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route on the A
interface.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MTP3LNK to query the status of the MTP3
signaling link.
Expected result: UsageStatus is set to Normal.
3. Trace the messages on the A interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the A
Interface. In this step, click BSSAP under Trace Type. Trace the CS domain messages
on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis
Interface. In this step, click RSL under Trace Type.
Expected result: Complete signaling procedure of the mobile-originated call can be
seen.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK to remove the MTP3 signaling
link.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK with Satellite flag set to NO
(NO) to add an MTP3 signaling link on the A interface.
----End
Example
/*Activating the feature Satellite Transmission over A Interface*/
//Configuring the A interface E1/T1
//Configuring an MTP3 link set over the A interface
ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=0, NAME="SATTRAN";
//Configuring an MTP3 link over the A interface
ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=TOGETHER, ASRN=0,
ASN=16, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1,
LKTATE=64K, STFLG=YES NAME="0";
//Configuring an MTP3 route over the A interface
ADD MTP3RT: DPX=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="SAT";
/*Deactivating the feature Satellite Transmission over A Interface*/
//Removing an MTP3 link with Satellite flag set to YES(YES)
//Adding an MTP3 link with Satellite flag set to NO(NO)
ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=TOGETHER, ASRN=0,
GBSS
346
ASN=16, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1,
LKTATE=64K, STFLG=NO NAME="1";
GBSS
347
over Ater Interface
Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface.
Prerequisites
The EIUa/OIUa board is configured.
l License
The initial configuration of the BSC is complete. The cell to be verified is in the normal
state and has idle channels.
Context
In BM/TC separated mode with the TC configured remotely, satellite transmission over Ater
interface can be used when installing transmission lines is geographically impossible.
If satellite transmission is applied over the A interface, you are advised to configure satellite
transmission over the Ater interface.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH to add an Ater
connection path between the MPS and the TCS.
NOTE
If the TC pool feature is supported, the command only applies to the main BSC. The sub-BSC
needs to be configured through the ADD ATERE1T1 command.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 102 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface
348
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML to add an Ater OML.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PBE1T1 with Transmission Mode set to
SATEL(Satellite Transmission) to add an E1/T1 link on the Pb interface.
NOTE
needs to be configured through the ADD ATERSL command.
4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD ATERCONSL with Window
Size set to an appropriate value according to the actual delay.
NOTE
needs to be configured through the MOD ATERSL command.
The longer the delay in satellite transmission, the larger the value to be set.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ATERSL to query the status of the Ater
signaling link.
Expected result: UsageStatus is set to Normal.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD ATERSL with Transmission Mode set to
TRRS(Terrestrial Transmission).
----End
Example
/*Activating the feature Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface*/
//Adding an Ater connection path
TCPN=0;
//Adding an Ater OML
//Adding an Ater signaling link with Transmission Mode set to SATEL
(Satellite Transmission)
TNMODE=SATEL;
/*Deactivating the feature Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface*/
//Modifying the transmission mode of the Ater signaling link
MOD ATERCONSL: ATERSLID=0, TNMODE=TRRS;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 102 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface
349
over Gb Interface
Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.
Prerequisites
The DPUb board is configured.
l License
Procedure
1. The procedure for configuring the satellite transmission on the Gb interface is the
same as the procedure for configuring the terrestrial transmission on the Gb interface.
For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb
Interface (over IP).
1. After an NSE is added, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SIGBVC to query
the state of an SIG BSSGP virtual connection (SIG BVC) by checking the setting of
SIG BVC State.
Expected result: If SIG BVC State is set to Normal, it indicates that the SIG BVC
works properly.
2. After a PTP BVC is added, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to query
the state of the PTP BVC by checking the setting of Service State.
Expected result: If Manage State is set to Unblock and Service State is set to
Normal, it indicates that the PTP BVC works properly.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 103 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface
350
----End
Example
For configurations, see the typical script example of the Gb interface configuration in the Initial
Configuration.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 103 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface
351
104 Configuring Local Multiple
Signaling Points
Local Multiple Signaling Points.
Prerequisites
l Other prerequisites
Multiple OSPs are configured.
Multiple DSPs are configured.
The route, link set, and link data are configured. The Operation State of the link is
Available.
Context
The local multiple signaling point feature enables one physical BSC to serve as multiple logical
BSCs so that each logical BSC can exchange signaling with the MSC. The traffic load is
distributed to each logical BSC. Therefore, the impact on the paging traffic of the BSC is reduced.
CAUTION
The original intra-BSC handover or intra-BSC directed retry may be converted into outgoing
BSC handover or outgoing BSC directed retry after local multiple signaling points are
configured. As a result, the signaling load on the A interface and the call establishment time are
increased.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 104 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points
352
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC repeatedly to add the OSPs. The
parameters Network ID and OSP code bits of the multiple OSPs must be consistent.
OSP Codes must be different among the OSPs. In addition, OSP Codes must be
different from DSP Codes.
NOTE
l The OSP code of OSPs must be different from each other. They must also be different from the
DSP code of DSPs with the same Network ID.
l The OSP code bits of systems with the same Network ID must be the same.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC repeatedly to add the desired DSPs.
In this step, the OSP index and DSP type specified in Step 1 must be set.
NOTE
After the DSP is configured, the connection from a logical BSC to the MSC is configured. Take the
establishment of the connections from two logical BSCs to the same MSC as an example. First, you need
to add two OSPs with different OSP codes. Then, add two DSPs with identical DSP code, which is the
signaling code of the MSC. In this manner, the connections from two logical BSCs to the same MSC are
established.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC to configure the OSP of the logical
BSC. In this step, set Network ID, OSP code bits, and OSP code according to
network planning. The OSP codes of multiple logical BSCs must be different.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to configure the logical link
between the OSP and DSP.
NOTE
If multiple logical BSCs need to be connected to the same DPC, the OSP index needs to be set to
the OSP index of the logical BSC set in Step 1. The DSP bear type needs to set according to network
planning. In the case of ATM/TDM transmission, select MTP3(MTP3); in the case of IP
transmission, select M3UA(M3UA); in the case of co-transmission, select MTP3_M3UA(MTP3
and M3UA).
3. Configure the transmission link between OSP and DSP. If the bear type is MTP3, then
the MTP3 link set, MTP3 link, and MTP3 route need to be configured. If the bear type
is M3UA, then the M3UA link set, M3UA link, M3UA route, M3UA local entity, and
M3UA destination entity need to be configured. The following takes the MTP3 bear
type as an example.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to configure the link set between
the OSP and DSP. In this step, set DSP index to that configured in Step 2.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to configure the physical link
between the OSP and DSP. In this step, set the Signaling link set index as specified
in Step 4.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to configure the route from the
OSP to the DSP. The route from the OSP to the DSP can be set up either in direct
connection or transfer manner.
GBSS
353
NOTE
In direct connection manner, the DSP index in this command must be the same as the DSP index
corresponding to the link set configured in Step 4. If a signaling transfer point is used, the DSP
index in this command must be different from the DSP index corresponding to the link set configured
in Step 4 and the DSP corresponding to the link set must provide the signaling link transfer
functionality.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to query the status of the DSP
configured in Step 2.
Expected result: The value of SCCP DSP state is Accessible.
NOTE
You are advised to remove traffic data and then DPCs and OPCs.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove a DPC.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV OPC to remove an OPC.
----End
Example
//Adding an OPC
ADD OPC: NAME="opc1", SPX=0, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT16, SPDF=WNF, SPC=111;
//Adding a DPC
ADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc1", DPX=1, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=222, DPCT=A,
BEARTYPE=MTP3;
//Removing a DPC
RMV N7DPC: DPX=1;
//Removing an OPC
RMV OPC: SPX=0;
GBSS
354
105 Configuring Semi-Permanent
Connection
Semi-Permanent Connection.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
After a semi-permanent connection is configured, the information received by the E1 timeslot
at the receiving end is exchanged to an E1 timeslot at the transmitting end by the internal timeslot
switching function of the BSC. In this way, the collected information is transparently transmitted
in the BSC.
Huawei BSS supports two types of semi-permanent connection:
l Semi-permanent link
The input and output of a semi-permanent link are located at the BSC interface board. In
this case, the BSC performs timeslot switching between the input timeslot and the output
timeslot.
l Monitoring timeslot
One end of the channel associated with a monitoring timeslot is a BTS port, and the other
end of the channel is a BSC interface board. In this case, the BTS and the BSC together
perform timeslot switching.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 105 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection
355
Procedure
Activating a semi-permanent link
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK to add a semi-permanent
link in the BSC. In this step, set Application Type to OTHER(OTHER) and
Semipermanent Link Rate to an appropriate value as required.
NOTE
In BSC Start Timeslot No. and Out BSC Start Timeslot No. need to be set based on network
planning. Ensure that the associated timeslots are not occupied.
Activating a monitoring timeslot
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSMONITORTS to add a monitoring
timeslot. In this step, set Time Slot Rate to an appropriate value based on the site
requirements.
NOTE
If the transmission mode of a BTS is IP over FE/GE, the BTS does not monitoring timeslots.
Verifying a semipermanent link
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SEMILINK to query the state of a semi-
permanent link.
Expected result: The value of State is OK.
Verifying a monitoring timeslot
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSMONITORTS to query the state of
a monitoring timeslot.
Expected result: The information about the monitoring timeslot is displayed.
Deactivating a semi-permanent link
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SEMILINK to remove a semi-
permanent link.
Deactivating a monitoring timeslot
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSMONITORTS to remove a
monitoring timeslot from a BTS.
----End
Example
//Activating a semi-permanent link
ADD SEMILINK: IDX=0, APPTYPE=OTHER, LNKRATE=16K, INSRN=1, INSN=14,
INPN=0, INTSN=10, OUTSRN=1, OUTSN=14, OUTPN=2, OUTTSN=20;
//Activating a monitoring timeslot
ADD BTSMONITORTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TSRATE=16K, BSCSRN=0, BSCSN=26,
BSCPN=6, BSCTS=10, BSCSUBTS=6, STPN=7, STCN=0, STSRN=0, STSN=6, STTS=10,
STSUBTS=2;
//Verifying a semipermanent link
DSP SEMILINK: IDX=0;
//Verifying a monitoring timeslot
LST BTSMONITORTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TSIDX=0;
GBSS
356
//Deactivating a semi-permanent link
RMV SEMILINK: IDX=0;
//Deactivating a monitoring timeslot
RMV BTSMONITORTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TSIDX=0;
GBSS
357
106 Configuring End-to-End MS
Signaling Tracing
End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.
Prerequisites
This feature requires support from the MSC and M2000.
l License
This feature requires support from the MSC.
The M2000 feature WOFD-190600 GBSS Enhanced Subscriber Tracing and
WOFD-191400 G&U CS Subscriber Tracing have been enalbed.
Context
The end-to-end MS signaling tracing function creates or removes a user tracing task in the HLR.
The HLR sends a tracing activation message to the MSC or VLR where the MS is located. When
the traced MS requests services, the MSC instructs the BSC to start user tracing. After the MS
moves to another MSC and initiates location update, the HLR sends a new tracing activation
message to the new VLR. The original user tracing task ends.
By using the end-to-end MS signaling tracing function, the system can collect information about
a specified MS when required. This function occupies a small number of system resources. By
recording the signaling about an MS, this function helps to identify the NE where the fault occurs,
facilitating fault handling.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 106 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing
358
Procedure
End-to-end User Tracing Function to YES(Yes).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OTHSOFTPARA to check the value of
Support End-to-end User Tracing Function.
Expected result: Support End-to-end User Tracing Function is set to YES(Yes).
2. On the M2000, choose Monitor > Signaling Trace > Signaling Trace
Management from the main menu. In the navigation tree, double-click 2G End-to-
End User Trace.
Expected result: A 2G End-to-End User Trace dialog box is displayed.
3. In the 2G End-to-End User Trace window, select User ID type from the drop-down
list and enter the user ID. Then click OK.
Expected result: The M2000 generates a report on the end-to-end MS signaling
tracing.
End-to-end User Tracing Function to NO(No).
----End
Example
/*Activating End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing*/
//Enabling the end-to-end MS signaling tracing function
SET OTHSOFTPARA: End2EndTraceState=YES, AInterMsgTrace=YES,
SENDBSSINVOKETRACE=YES;
/*Deactivating End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing*/
//Disabling the end-to-end MS signaling tracing function
SET OTHSOFTPARA: End2EndTraceState=NO, AInterMsgTrace=NO,
SENDBSSINVOKETRACE=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 106 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing
359
107 Configuring Active Power Control
Active Power Control.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
Active Power Control enables the immediate performance of power control after an MS
successfully gains access to the network or a handover is successfully performed in the BSC. In
such a case, the BSC can control the uplink and downlink power promptly. Therefore, both the
BTS and the MS transmit signals at a proper power. With the active power control, the system
interference is decreased, the QoS is ensured, and the power consumption of the MS or BTS is
decreased.
Procedure
Power Forecast Allowed to YES(Yes).
PC Allowed to YES(Yes), and set DL PC Allowed to YES(Yes).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step,
specify TRX ID and Channel No., and then set Administrative State to Lock
(Lock) to block all TCHs on the BCCH TRX of cell 0 except SDCCH.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 107 Configuring Active Power Control
360
2. Perform the single user CS trace by referring toTracing CS Domain Messages of a
Single Subscriber in cell 0.
3. Make a call.
4. Check the result in Single User CS Trace window.
Expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good. The
TCH occupied by the call is on a non-BCCH TRX, and the Measurement Result
message regarding the call is present before the Channel Activation message is
delivered. In this case, the values of the fields bs power and ms power in the Channel
Activation message are not the maximum (the maximum power level of the 900M cell
is 5 and that of the 1800M cell is 0).
Power Forecast Allowed to NO(No).
of Power Forecast Allowed.
Expected result: Power Forecast Allowed is set to NO.
----End
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 107 Configuring Active Power Control
361
108 Configuring Ciphering
A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm and GBFD-113503 A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm.
Prerequisites
l License
The MSC and the MS supports ciphering.
Context
There are eight ciphering algorithms specified in the GSM protocols: A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3,
A5/4, A5/5, A5/6, and A5/7. In A5/0, ciphering is not supported. In A5/1, A5/2, and A5/3, safety
of CS and PS data of a user transmitted over the air interface is guaranteed.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface
Tag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.
Encryption Algorithm to A5/0 and A5/3.
NOTE
l This procedure takes A5/3 as an example. The configuration procedures of other ciphering
algorithms are similar as this procedure.
l A5/0 in the Encryption Algorithm drop-down list must be selected.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 108 Configuring Ciphering
362
NOTE
The verification procedures take A5/3 as an example.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Cell
Index to the index of the test cell and Encryption Algorithm to A5/0 and A5/3.
3. Double-click A Interface Trace on the LMT to create a trace task. On the Basic tab
page, specify the DPC of the test cell in the DPC(HEX) text box. Click BSSAP in
the Trace Type area. Specify the ID of the test cell in the Cell ID (cell1,
cell2, ...cell16): text box in the BSSAP tab page. Then, click Submit.
4. After opening the A interface tracing window, use the MS to initiate a call in the test
cell.
Expected result: The call is set up, and the IE chosen-encryption-algorithm in the
Cipher Mode Complete message is gsm-a5-3.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Cell
Index to the index of the test cell and Encryption Algorithm to A5/0.
----End
Example
//Setting Interface Tags
SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus,
AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;
//Setting ciphering algorithms
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
ENCRY=A5/0-1&A5/1-0&A5/2-0&A5/3-1&A5/4-0&A5/5-0&A5/6-0&A5/7-0;
//Setting Encryption Algorithm to A5/0
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
ENCRY=A5/0-1&A5/1-0&A5/2-0&A5/3-0&A5/4-0&A5/5-0&A5/6-0&A5/7-0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 108 Configuring Ciphering
363
109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow
Optimization
This section describes how to activate, verify, deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113521
A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization.
Prerequisites
None
l License
The A5/1 encryption algorithm has been enabled. For details, see 108 Configuring
Ciphering.
The MSC and MSs support encryption.
Context
Based on features related to transmission over the Um interface, the A5/1 Encryption Flow
Optimization feature provides an optimized encryption procedure, enhancing network
transmission security. This feature provides several security functions, which can be enabled as
required.
Procedure
Activating SDCCH fast handover
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with SDCCH HO
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 109 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization
364
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with SD Quick HO set to ON
(On).
Activating TCH scheduled handover
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Intracell HO
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with TCH Time Handover
Switch set to ON(On) and TCH Time Handover Period set to a required value.
Activating Flex Training Sequence Code (TSC)
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Flex TSC Switch set to
ON(On).
Activating dummy bit randomization
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Dummy Bit
Randomization Switch set to ON(On).
Activating the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis, or 5ter after
encryption
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Stop Send SI 5/5bis/5ter
after Encrypt set to ON(On).
Verifying SDCCH fast handover
1. Use an MS to initiate a call and trace BSSAP messages over the A interface by
referring to Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface.
Expected result: The Handover Performed message is displayed.
Verifying TCH scheduled handover
1. Use an MS to initiate a call and trace BSSAP messages over the A interface by
referring to Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface.
Expected result: The call is initiated successfully and the Handover Performed
message can be observed after the call lasts for a period specified by TCH Time
Handover Period.
Verifying Flex TSC
1. Use an MS to initiate a call, Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Um Interface,
and record the TSC value in a Assignment Command message.
2. Terminate the call.
3. Use an MS to initiate a call again, Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Um
Interface, and record the TSC value in a Assignment Command message.
4. Compare the two TSC values.
Expected result: The two TSC values are different.
Verifying dummy bit randomization
1. Use an MS to initiate multiple calls, Tracing LAPDm Messages Through BTS
Signaling Trace, and select the TRX carrying the SDCCH on the LAPDm tab.
Then, enter the number of the timeslot or sub-timeslot to be traced.
Expected result: When a call is assigned to the traced SDCCH, the lapdm-rr-frame
information element contained in the MailBox Trace message shows that not all
dummy bits are 2B. This indicates that dummy bits are randomized.
Verifying the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis, or 5ter after
encryption
GBSS
365
1. Use an MS to initiate a call, and use a drive test device to trace messages over the
Um interface.
Expected result: System information 5, 5bis, or 5ter is not found in the messages
transmitted over the Um interface.
Deactivating SDCCH fast handover
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with SD Quick HO set to
OFF(Off).
Deactivating TCH scheduled handover
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with TCH Time Handover
Switch set to OFF(Off).
Deactivating Flex TSC
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Flex TSC Switch set to
OFF(Off).
Deactivating dummy bit randomization
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Dummy Bit
Randomization Switch set to OFF(Off).
Deactivating the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis, or 5ter after
encryption
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with Stop Send SI 5/5bis/5ter
after Encrypt set to OFF(Off).
----End
Example
/*Activating A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization*/
//Activating SDCCH fast handover
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SIGCHANHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDFASTHOSWITCH=ON;
//Activating TCH scheduled handover
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTRACELLHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHTIMEHOSWITCH=ON,
TCHTIMEHOPERIOD=60;
//Activating Flex TSC
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FLEXTSCSWITCH=ON;
//Activating dummy bit randomization
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DUMMYBITRANDSWITCH=ON;
//Activating the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis,
or 5ter after encryption
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STOPSI5SWITCH=ON;
/*Deactivating A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization*/
//Deactivating SDCCH fast handover
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDFASTHOSWITCH=OFF;
//Deactivating TCH scheduled handover
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHTIMEHOSWITCH=OFF;
//Deactivating Flex TSC
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FLEXTSCSWITCH=OFF;
//Deactivating dummy bit randomization
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DUMMYBITRANDSWITCH=OFF;
//Deactivating the function of stopping sending system information 5,
5bis, or 5ter after encryption
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STOPSI5SWITCH=OFF;
GBSS
366
110 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate
(EFR)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113301
Enhanced Full Rate (EFR).
Prerequisites
l License
l Others
The MS is supported the EFR.
Context
The EFR is used to improve voice quality.
NOTE
In A over IP mode, EFR and E-Coder cannot be enabled forcibly as the current speech version.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, select
the FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER 2) check box under the parameter Speech
Version for the specified cell.
2. Optional: To enable EFR forcibly as the current speech version, run the BSC6900
MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Allow Forced EFR in Cell to
YES(Yes).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 110 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR)
367
3. To further improve voice quality by enabling the E-Coder function, run the
BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, specify the subrack number
and slot number based on actual configuration of the DPU board and set Coding
Mode to ECODEC(Enhanced code mode).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCACCESS to query the setting
of Speech Version in the cell.
Expected result: The activated speech versions are in the USED state.
The feature does not need to be deactivated. At least one speech version must be configured
for the BSC6900. Therefore, the deactivation procedure is unnecessary. However, you can
run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS to modify the speech
version.
----End
Example
//Activating EFR
SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER2-1;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 110 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR)
368
111 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113401 Half
Rate Speech (HR).
Prerequisites
l License
Context
This feature enables the operator to expand the network capacity and improve the frequency
usage without increasing the hardware investment. In addition, a higher traffic volume can be
carried on an E1.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML Command SET GCELLCCACCESS with Speech
Version of a cell to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1), HALF_RATE_VER1
(Half-rate VER 1),HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3), and
HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER 2). HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER
2) of Speech Version is reserved for compliance with protocols. Currently, no service
uses HR speech version 2.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCACCESS to view the setting of
Speech Version of a specified cell.
Expected result: The activated speech versions are labeled USED.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 111 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)
369
At least one speech version must be configured for the BSC6900. Therefore, the
deactivation procedure is unnecessary. However, you can run the BSC6900 MML
command SET GCELLCCACCESS to modify the speech version.
----End
Example
//Activating half rate speech (HR)
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 111 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)
370
112 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment
Between FR and HR
Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR.
Prerequisites
The feature GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech has been configured before this feature is
activated.
l License
The cell is not a concentric cell and works properly.
The CN, cell, and MS all support this feature.
Context
With this feature, full-rate channels (TCHFs) and half-rate channels (TCHHs) are dynamically
converted to meet the requirements of calls in a cell. This prevents the situation in which one
type of channel is congested whereas the other type of channel is idle.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV for each TRX you want to
configure. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow of a TRX to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD to set the threshold for
dynamic adjustment between TCHHs and TCHFs.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 112 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR
371
NOTE
For non-AMR calls in a common cell, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to an appropriate
value based on the actual requirement. For non-AMR calls in a concentric cell whose Load of
UL-OL Cells Rate Select Allowed is enabled, set Tch Traffic Busy Overlay Threshold and
Tch Traffic Busy Underlay Threshold to appropriate values. For AMR calls in common cells
and concentric cells, set AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold to an appropriate value
based on the actual requirement.
In channel assignment algorithms, the BSC6900 determines whether to assign TCHHs or
TCHFs based on the traffic volume of the network. If the channel seizure ratio exceeds TCH
Traffic Busy Threshold, the network is busy. If the network is busy, TCHHs are assigned
preferentially. If the network is not busy, TCHFs are assigned preferentially.
The following procedure takes the non-AMR calls in a common cell as an example.
1. Monitor channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status.
Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 to ensure that new calls are preferentially assigned
TCHHs.
3. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell.
Expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication is normal.
A TCHF is converted into two TCHHs and are occupied by MSs.
Expected result: The TCHHs are not converted into a TCHF.
Administrative State to Lock(Lock) to block all TCHFs in the cell.
Traffic Busy Threshold to 100 to ensure that new calls are preferentially assigned
TCHFs.
NOTE
In Step 6, if the calling party and the called party camp on the same cell, reserve a TCHF to
ensure successful setup of the call.
7. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell.
Expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication is normal.
The MS occupies a TCHF.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV for each TRX you want to
configure. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to NO(No).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query the setting of TCH
Rate Adjust Allow.
Expected result: The value of TCH Rate Adjust Allow is NO.
----End
Example
//Activating Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHBUSYTHRES=50;
GBSS
372
//Deactivating Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=NO;
GBSS
373
113 Configuring the Cell Broadcast
About This Chapter
Through the cell broadcast service, the mobile operator can broadcast specified short messages
in the cells controlled by one or more BTSs in the mobile network. All the MSs in the cells can
receive the short messages.
113.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)
Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23).
113.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast
Simplified Cell Broadcast.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 113 Configuring the Cell Broadcast
374
113.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast
(TS23)
Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23).
Prerequisites
An XPUa/XPUb board is configured.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell
Broadcast.
l License
The Cell Broadcast Center (CBC) works properly.
The hardware and software of the CBC and the corresponding networking equipment
are installed.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR to modify the attributes
for a GSM operator. In this step, set Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSTANDARD
(SupportStandard CB).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD XPUVLAN to add the VLAN attributes of
the XPU board. In this step, specify IP Address as required and set the VLAN
attributes at the BSC6900 that is connected to the CBC.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET XPUPORT to set the attributes of ports on
the XPU board. In this step, set Panel Port Switch to OPEN(Open).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCBSADDR to add CBC information. In
this step, specify CBC INDEX, and set OP INDEX SET to the index of the operator
to which the cell to be verified belongs, Subrack No., Slot No., CPU NO, and BSC
IP to those of the XPU board added by running the ADD XPUVLAN command. In
addition, specify BSC Port, Mask, and CBC Port, and set BSC GateWay IP to the
gateway IP address of the lab, CBC IP to the IP address of the CBC, and If CB Shake
Hand to YES(Yes).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set TRX and channel
attributes. In this step, specify Channel No., and set TRX ID to the index of the BCCH
TRX in the cell to be verified and Channel Type to BCCH_CBCH(BCCH
+CBCH) or SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH).
GBSS
375
NOTE
If Channel Type is set to SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH), set TRX ID to the index of any
TRX and Channel No. to a value within the range 0 to 3.
6. Add the settings of the BSC, cell, area, channel, and user on the CBC side, and divide
cells into different cell groups. In addition, send cell broadcast messages to the cells.
1. Connect an Ethernet cable to the port whose Panel Port Switch is set to OPEN
(Open). Then, Ensure that the IP address of this port can be pinged.
Expected result: The IP address can be pinged. The port works properly.
2. Use an MS enabled with the CBC function to access the network in different cells,
and initiate message tracing on the BSC-CBC(Cb interface) and Abis interfaces.
Expected result:
In the initial phase of connection, the messages CBCH Query and CBCH Query
Response are traced on the BSC-CBC interface.
When system information messages are sent, messages Write/Replace Message and
Report are traced on the BSC-CBC interface.
The SMS Broadcast Command message is traced on the Abis interface.
The MS properly receives the cell broadcast messages sent from the CBC.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set
Support Cell Broadcast to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV XPUVLAN. In this step, remove the VLAN
attributes of the XPU board add in step2.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCBSADDR. In this step, remove CBC
information add in step4.
----End
Example
/*Activating Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)*/
//Enabling cell broadcast
MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SpprtCB=SPPRTSTANDARD;
//Setting the VLAN attributes of the XPU board
ADD XPUVLAN: SRN=0, SN=0, SSN=1, MAC=0, IP="10.161.72.185",
NETMASK="255.255.255.0";
//Setting attributes of the port on the XPU board
SET XPUPORT: SRN=0, SN=0, PortSwitch=OPEN;
//Adding CBC information
ADD GCBSADDR: CBCINDEX=0,
OPINDEXSET=OPINDEX0-1&OPINDEX1-0&OPINDEX2-0&OPINDEX3-0, SRN=0, SN=0,
CPUN=1, BSCIP="10.161.72.185", BSCPORT=5000, BSCGATEWAYIP="19.168.6.1",
CBCIP="19.168.6.20", MASK="255.255.255.0", CBCPORT=6000;
//Setting TRX parameters
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=BCCH_CBCH;
/*Deactivating Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)*/
//Disabling cell broadcast
MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SpprtCB=NOTSPPRTBC;
//Remove the VLAN attributes of the XPU board
RMV XPUVLAN: SRN=0, SN=0, SSN=1;
//Remove CBC information
RMV GCBSADDR: CBCINDEX=0;
GBSS
376
113.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast
Simplified Cell Broadcast.
Prerequisites
The XPUa/XPUb board is configured.
This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-113601 Short Message Service
Cell Broadcast (TS23).
l License
Context
The simplified cell broadcast feature provides the simple cell broadcast services without the
CBC system.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR with Support Cell
Broadcast set to SPPRTSIMPLE(SupportSimple CB) to modify the attributes of
a GSM operator.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN. In this step, specify Channel
No., and set TRX ID to the index of the BCCH TRX in the cell to be verified and
Channel Type to BCCH_CBCH(BCCH+CBCH) or SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH
+CBCH).
NOTE
If Channel Type is set to SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH), set TRX ID to the index of any
TRX and Channel No. to a value within the range 0 to 3.
3. Send cell broadcast messages.
Sending a specified message without any restrictions
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSBC. In this step, set Cell
Index to the index of the cell to be verified and set Support Cell Broadcast
Name to YES(Yes). In addition, specify Chan ID, Geography Scope,
Broadcast Interval, Coding Scheme, and Broadcast Content.
Sending a specified message at a specified time and with a specified number of
transmissions
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GSMSCB. In this step, set Cell
Index List to the index of the cell to be verified, Geography Scope to
LAC_CI(CELL IMME), Code to 1, and Update to 0. In addition, specify
Repeat and Broadcast Interval, set Start Time and End Time to the
GBSS
377
specified time, and set Chan ID, Coding Scheme, and Content of
Message as required.
NOTE
l Start Time set through the ADD GSMSCB command must be later than the real time of
the OMU.
l When Repeat is set to 60, the interval from Start Time to End Time must be greater than
one hour to ensure that the simple broadcast message can be successfully transmitted for
60 times.
1. Create an Abis interface signaling tracing task on the LMT. Set the same channel on
the MS side as the channel specified by Chan ID in Step 3 (the setting procedure
depends on the MS brand).
Expected result: The SMS Broadcast Command message can be traced on the Abis
interface. The MS can receive the Content of Message specified in Step 3.
NOTE
Content of Message set through the SET GCELLSBC command can be received at any time.
Content of Message set through the ADD GSMSCB command can be received only within
the specified time period.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR with Support Cell
Broadcast set to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB).
----End
Example
//Supporting Simple Cell Broadcast
MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SpprtCB=SPPRTSIMPLE;
//Setting TRX and channel attributes
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=BCCH_CBCH;//
//Sending cell broadcast messages.
SET GCELLSBC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPORTCELLBROADCAST=YES, GS=LAC_CI,
CHANID=0, SCHEME=ENGLISH, BROADCASTCONTENT="Happy", BROADCASTINTERVAL=60;
//Not supporting Cell Broadcast
MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SpprtCB=NOTSPPRTBC;
GBSS
378
114 Configuring Automatic Level
Control (ALC)
Automatic Level Control (ALC).
Prerequisites
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115701 TFO or GBFD-115702
TrFO.
l License
TDM transmission is used over the A interface.
Context
The ALC feature adjusts the gains of uplink and downlink digital speech signals and changes
the amplitude of digital speech signals at an interval of 20 ms. This retains the speech signal
level in the entire network in a stable state and ensures that the speech quality is not affected by
the volume fluctuation of both parties.
Procedure
If the fixed level mode is required, perform the following operations:
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch to
ON(On), ALC Mode to FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed level mode), and ALC Fix Target
Level to its recommended value for the DPU board.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 114 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)
379
NOTE
If DSP No. is not specified, the attributes of all the DSPs are set, it can be set as required.
To increase the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Target Level to a greater value. Its maximum
value is -4. To decrease the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Target Level to a smaller value. Its
minimum value is -23.
If the fixed gain mode is required, perform the following operations:
ON(On), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to its
recommended value for the DPU board.
NOTE
To increase the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Gain to 12. To decrease the acoustic volume, set
ALC Fix Gain to 3.
If the adaptive mode is required, perform the following operations:
ON(On) and ALC Mode to ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode) on the DPU board. In
addition, set ALC Max Target Level and ALC Min Target Level to their
recommended values.
The following takes the fixed gain mode as an example to describe the verification
operations.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch of
all the DSPs on the tested DPU board to ON(On), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed
gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to 0.
2. Run the BSC6900MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all the
parameters set in Step 1 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous
commands are executed successfully.
3. In the same cell, use MS1 to call MS2 with a normal voice. Then, hang up the phone.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch of
all the DSPs on the tested DPU board to ON(On), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed
gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to 12.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all the
parameters set in Step 4 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous
6. Use MS1 to call MS2 again. Speak with a normal volume on MS1.
Expected result: The volume of the heard voice increases, compared with the volume
heard in Step 3.
NOTE
The previous steps are performed when ALC Mode is set to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain
mode). Similar verification steps are required when ALC Mode is set to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed
gain mode) or ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch to
OFF(Off) for the DPU board.
----End
GBSS
380
Example
//Activating ALC when the fixed level mode is used
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AlcEnFlag=ON, AlcAdaptMode=FIXEDLEVEL,
AlcFixLev=-18;
//Activating ALC when the fixed gain mode is used
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AlcEnFlag=ON, AlcAdaptMode=FIXEDGAIN,
AlcFixGain=0;
//Activating ALC when the adaptive mode is used)
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AlcEnFlag=ON, AlcAdaptMode=ADAPTIVE,
AlcMaxLev=-4, AlcMinLev=-23;
//Deactivating ALC
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AlcEnFlag=OFF;
GBSS
381
115 Configuring Acoustic Echo
Cancellation (AEC)
Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC).
Prerequisites
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115701 TFO or GBFD-115702
TrFO.
l License
Context
The AEC helps reduce the acoustic echo caused by the terminal, improving the speech quality.
Acoustic echo is generated when the MS speaker is not completely isolated from the MS receiver.
After the voice of one party (Party A) reaches the MS, some voice is transmitted back to Party
A through the receiver. Then, Party A can hear his/her own voice. The phenomena is known as
acoustic echo. AEC is a feature with which acoustic echoes can be pre-assessed and eliminated
by means of the analysis on forward and backward voice signals.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with AEC Switch set to ON
(On) and other parameters set to their default values for the DPU board.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 115 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)
382
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with AEC Switch set to OFF
(Off) and other parameters set to their default values for the DPU board.
2. Use one test MS (MS 1) to make a call to another test MS (MS 2). Check that acoustic
echo occurs, and then hand off the call.
NOTE
The echo is easily generated when a common MS enabled with the handsfree function is placed
in a sealing box.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with AEC Switch of the DPU
board on the test BSC set to ON(On) and other parameters set to their default values.
4. Run the MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all the parameters set in
step Step 3 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous commands are
executed successfully.
5. Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 again, and check whether acoustic echoes are reduced.
If the echoes are reduced, finish the verification.
If the echoes are not reduced, hand off the call and then run the BSC6900 MML
command SET TCPARA with AEC Echo Return Loss set to a smaller value within
the valid range. If AEC Echo Return Loss is already set to the smallest value, set
AEC Echo Path Delay to a greater value. Repeat step Step 5 to check whether the
echoes are reduced.
NOTE
l The acoustic echo is generated between MSs. The echo generated between an MS and a fixed-
line phone is termed the electric echo. The electric echo problem is solved by the CN side.
l When satellite transmission on the Abis or Ater interface is required, AEC Path Delay must be
set, so as to eliminate the extra delay caused by satellite transmission.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with AEC Switch set to OFF
(Off) for the DPU board.
----End
Example
//Activating AEC
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AecEnFlag=ON;
//Deactivating AEC
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AecEnFlag=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 115 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)
383
116 Configuring Automatic Noise
Restraint (ANR)
Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR).
Prerequisites
When a call uses the Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR) feature, ALC is mutually exclusive
to features GBFD-115701 TFO and GBFD-115702 TrFO.
l License
Context
ANR reduces the background noise on the uplink speech signals and improves the signal-to-
noise ratio (SNR) and speech intelligibility. In this way, the other party of the call can clearly
hear the voice.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with ANR Switch set to UPLINK
(On for uplink) or DOWNLINK(On for dnlink), Noise Suppression Algorithm
Switch to MODE1(Optimized version), and Noise Attenuation Mode, Noise
Suppression Mode, and Transparent Transmit Thresh of Noise Lev set to
appropriate values for the DPU board.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 116 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)
384
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with ANR Switch for all the DSPs
on the DPU board to be tested set to OFF(Off).
2. Ensure that two test MSs (MS 1 and MS 2) are in the same cell. Use MS 1 to make a
call to MS 2 in a noisy environment. Check that great background noises can be heard
through the MS 2, and then hand off the call.
on the DPU board to be tested set to UPLINK(On for uplink) or DOWNLINK(On
for dnlink).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all the
parameters set in step Step 3 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous
5. Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 again. Speak at the normal volume on MS 1, and
check that the background noises heard through MS 2 are reduced.
on the DPU board to be tested set to OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating ANR
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AnrEnFlag=UPLINK, AnrMode=MODE1,
AnrNseReductMode=RELATIVELEVEL, AnrNseReductLev=RELATIVE_2,
AnrByPassNseLev=-43;
//Deactivating ANR
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AnrEnFlag=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 116 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)
385
117 Configuring TFO
TFO.
Prerequisites
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level
Control (ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), GBFD-115603
Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation
(ANC), GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC),
GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment, GBFD-117702
BTS Local Switch, GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch, GBFD-115702 TrFO, or
GBFD-118602 A over IP.
l License
TDM transmission is used over the A interface.
Context
TFO solves the problem of speech signal damage in repeated encoding and decoding by
canceling one encoding and decoding process to improve the signal quality.
To enable TFO for calls using the AMR speech version, the BSC version and BTS version must
meet the mapping relationship in the following table.
BSC Version BTS Version Support TFO for Calls Using
AMR
GBSS8.1 GBSS8.1 Support
GBSS8.1 GBSS9.0 and later Not support
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 117 Configuring TFO
386
GBSS9.0 and later GBSS8.1 Not support
GBSS9.0 and later GBSS9.0 and later Support

To enable TFO for calls using the non-AMR speech version, there is no requirements for the
mapping between the BSC version and BTS version.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFO
Switch to ENABLE(Enable).
2. Configure the speech version by performing the following operations:
For non-AMR services:
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step,
set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1),
FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER 2), or HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-
rate VER 1).
For AMR services:
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A
Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus, set Um Interface Tag to
GSM_PHASE_2Plus , set Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus .
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step,
set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1) and
FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3), or FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-
rate VER 1) and HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3).
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set
AMR ACS[F] to 4_75KBIT/S, 5_90KBIT/S, 7_40KBIT/S, and
12_2KBIT/S, or set AMR ACS[H] to 4_75KBIT/S, 5_90KBIT/S,
7_40KBIT/S.
NOTE
The following describes how to verify the TFO function for non-AMR services.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD with TCH Traffic Busy
Threshold set to 100 to ensure that new calls are preferentially assigned full-rate
TCHs.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, only set
Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1).
NOTE
Only FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1) is selected, two test MSs use the same FR
coding scheme. This ensures the implementation of TFO.
Switch of the test cell to DISABLE(Disable).
4. Use MS1 and MS2 to access the network from the test cell, and use MS1 to call MS2.
GBSS
387
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES. In this step, set User Identity
Type to BYMSISDN(By MSISDN) and MSISDN to the ISDNs of MS1 and MS2.
Check whether the value of Tfo State is TFO not start in the Query Result area.
Switch of the test cell to ENABLE(Enable).
8. Use MS1 to call MS2 again.
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES. In this step, set User Identity
Type to BYMSISDN(By MSISDN) and MSISDN to the ISDNs of MS1 and MS2.
Check whether the value of Tfo State is TFO start in the Query Result area. If the
value of Tfo State is TFO start and the speech quality improves, TFO has been
enabled.
NOTE
Ensure that an inter-BSC or inter-cell handover is not performed during the call when verifying
TFO. This is because the DSP CALLRES command cannot be executed after such a handover.
Switch of the test cell to DISABLE(Disable).
----End
Example
//Activating TFO
/*Activating TFO for non-AMR services*/
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NBAMRTFOSWITCH=ENABLE;
/*Activating TFO for AMR services*/
SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NBAMRTFOSWITCH=ENABLE;
SET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACTCDSETF=4_75KBIT/S-1&5_15KBIT/
S-0&5_90KBIT/S-1&6_70KBIT/S-0&7_40KBIT/S-1&7_95KBIT/S-0&10_2KBIT/
S-0&12_2KBIT/S-1;
//Deactivating TFO
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NBAMRTFOSWITCH=DISABLE;
GBSS
388
118 Configuring Automatic Noise
Compensation (ANC)
Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC).
Prerequisites
The DPUa, DPUb, or DPUc board starts normally.
When a call uses the Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) feature, ALC is mutually
exclusive to features GBFD-115701 TFO and GBFD-115702 TrFO.
l License
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANC Switch to
ON(On), and set ANC Target SNR and ANC Max Gain to the recommended values
for the DPU board.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set Subrack No. and
Slot No. to those of the DPU board, and set ANC Switch to OFF(Off).
2. Place MS1 in a noisy place, and then use MS2 to call MS1.
Expected result: MS2 cannot hear the voice of MS1 clearly.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set Subrack No. and
Slot No. to those of the DPU board. Then, set ANC Switch to ON(On), and set ANC
Target SNR and ANC Max Gain to the recommended values.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 118 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)
389
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to check the values of ANC
Switch, ANC Target SNR, and ANC Max Gain.
Expected result: The value of ANC Switch is ON, which indicates that the ANC
feature is enabled.
5. Use MS2 to call MS1 again.
Expected result: The voice of MS1 is clearer.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANC Switch to
OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating ANC
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AncEnFlag=ON, AncSnrGateRS=12, AncMaxGain=6;
//Deactivating ANC
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AncEnFlag=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 118 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)
390
119 Configuring Enhancement Packet
Loss Concealment (EPLC)
Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).
Prerequisites
The following feature has been configured before this feature is activated:
GBFD-115501 AMR FR, GBFD-115502 AMR HR, or GBFD-113301 Enhanced Full
Rate.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115701 TFO,
GBFD-115702 TrFO, GBFD-118602 A over IP, GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch or
GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch.
l License
Context
With EPLC, frames of lost packets can be recovered and compensated. To a certain extent, this
helps solve the problem of speech frame loss in a poor transmission or radio environment, thereby
improving the network performance.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set EPLC Switch to
ON(On) and retain the default values of other parameters.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCACCESS to query the value of
Speech Version.
GBSS
119 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment
(EPLC)
391
Expected result: At least one of Full-rate VER 2, Full-rate VER 3, and Half-rate
VER 3 is selected for Speech Version.
OFF(Off) and retain the default values of other parameters.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to query the configuration
information about the TC.
Expected result: The value of EPLC Switch is Off.
4. Use an MS to perform speech services in a poor radio environment where the uplink
receive quality is in the range of 4-7 and record the average MOS of the voice quality.
ON(On) and retain the default values of other parameters.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to query the configuration
information about the TC.
Expected result: The value of EPLC Switch is On.
7. Use an MS to perform speech services in a poor radio environment where the uplink
receive quality is in the range of 4-7 and record the average MOS of the voice quality.
8. Compare the MOSs recorded in Step 4 and Step 7.
Expected result: The MOS recorded in Step 7 is greater than that recorded in Step
4.
OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating EPLC
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, EPLCSwitch=ON;
//Deactivating EPLC
SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, EPLCSwitch=OFF;
GBSS
119 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment
(EPLC)
392
120 Configuring EVAD
EVAD, namely enhanced voice activity detection.
Prerequisites
The DPUc, DPUa, or DPUf board is configured and functional.
This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-
Downlink and GBFD-115501 AMR FR/GBFD-115502 AMR HR/GBFD-113301
Enhanced Full Rate.
This feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-118602 A over IP, GBFD-118622
A IP over E1/T1, GBFD-115701 TFO, GBFD-115702 TrFO, GBFD-117701 BSC Local
Switch, and GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch.
l License
Context
The enhanced VAD technology improves the encoding effect of music and prevents damage to
music by the traditional VAD algorithm.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA, in this step, set EVAD Switch
to ON(On) on the DPUc, DPUa, or DPUf board.
1. Use a UE to initiate and set up a call.
2. Have the called UE play the ring back tone (RBT).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 120 Configuring EVAD
393
Expected result: The music received by the UE is smooth and with a good voice
quality.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with EVAD Switch to OFF
(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating EVAD
SET TCPARA: SRN=0, SN=10, EVADEnFlag=ON;
//Deactivating EVAD
SET TCPARA: SRN=0, SN=10, EVADEnFlag=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 120 Configuring EVAD
394
121 Configuring Voice Quality Index
(VQI)
Voice Quality Index (VQI).
Prerequisites
The feature GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) has been configured
before this feature is activated.
l License
The cell is configured with neighboring cells.
The BTS of the cell supports downlink VQI.
Context
The VQI establishes the mapping between radio network performance and voice quality. The
VQI value, which helps learn the voice quality, is calculated based on the radio quality
parameters for the uplink and downlink speech signals. The MOS analysis method is applied in
VQI to measure the voice quality. The MOS is used to assess the quality of middle-rate and low-
rate voice coding. The MOS value ranges from 1 to 5.
Based on the MOS analysis method, Huawei further divides the voice quality into 11 levels. The
VQI is obtained through the analysis of the BER, FER, LFE, and CODE of the uplink and
downlink speech signals. In this manner, the voice quality is quantified to facilitate voice
problem identification and network optimization.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 121 Configuring Voice Quality Index (VQI)
395
Procedure
Activating downlink VQI
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Report
Downlink VQI Allowed to ENABLE(Enable).
NOTE
VQI is recorded in a measurement report if only Report Downlink VQI Allowed is set to
ENABLE(Enable) and a voice service is processed. The downlink VQI value is 255 when the
MS does not support enhanced measurement reports or Measurement Report Type is not set
to EnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement Report).
Activating uplink VQI
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHBASIC. In this step, set
Voice quality report switch to YES(Report).
Verifying downlink VQI
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Cell
Index to the index of the cell to be verified and Report Downlink VQI
Allowed to ENABLE(Enable). Perform a voice service test and check the
downlink VQI value in the measurement reports.
Expected result: The downlink VQI value is not reported.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step,
set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified and Measurement Report
Type to EnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement Report).
NOTE
You need to configure a neighboring GSM cell if no enhanced measurement report is obtained
when enhanced measurement reports are configured and the MS in a voice service supports
enhanced measurement reports.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set
Speech Version to one that matches the channel type. Speech versions are
FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1), FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER
2), FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3), HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rate
VER 1), HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER 2), and HALF_RATE_VER3
(Half-rate VER 3). Perform a voice service test and check the downlink VQI value
in the measurement reports.
Expected result: The downlink VQI value is reported.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, set
MR.Preprocessing to BTS_Preprocessing(BTS preprocessing) and Sent
Freq.of preprocessed MR to an appropriate value based on the site requirements.
Perform a voice service test and check the downlink VQI value in the preprocessed
measurement reports.
Expected result: The downlink VQI value is reported.
Verifying uplink VQI
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, initiate CS domain message tracing of a single subscriber
by referring to Tracing CS domain messages of a single subscriber. Perform a voice
service test, and check the uplink VQI value in the measurement reports.
Expected result: The uplink VQI value is reported.
GBSS
396
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, set
MR.Preprocessing to BTS_Preprocessing(BTS preprocessing) and Sent
Freq.of preprocessed MR to an appropriate value based on the site requirements.
Perform a voice service test and check the uplink VQI value in the preprocessed
measurement reports.
Expected result: The uplink VQI value is reported.
Deactivating downlink VQI
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Report
Downlink VQI Allowed to DISABLE(Disable).
Deactivating uplink VQI
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHBASIC. In this step, set
Voice quality report switch to NO(Not report).
----End
Example
//Activating downlink VQI
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RPTDLVQIALLOWED=ENABLE;
//Activating uplink VQI
SET GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RPTVOICE=YES;
//Verifying downlink VQI
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, RPTDLVQIALLOWED=ENABLE;
SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MEASURETYPE=EnhMeasReport;
BTSMESRPTPREPROC=BTS_Preprocessing, MRPREPROCFREQ=Once_ps;
//Deactivating downlink VQI
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RPTDLVQIALLOWED=DISABLE;
//Deactivating uplink VQI
SET GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RPTVOICE=NO;
GBSS
397
122 Configuring Enhanced Measurement
Report
Enhanced Measurement Report.
Prerequisites
l License
The MS supports enhanced measurement report (EMR).
The test cell is configured with neighboring cells and supports the EMR feature.
Context
EMR is a new downlink measurement report available from 3GPP R99. Measurement results,
such as Bit Error Probability (BEP) and Frame Erase Ratio (FER), are added to an EMR. This
improves the performance of power control algorithms and handover algorithms. This feature
brings the following benefits:
l This feature improves the capability of voice quality monitoring and the performance of
power control algorithms and handover algorithms.
l As many as 15 3G neighboring cells can be configured with EMR. This provides a better
performance of interoperability between the GSM, WCDMA, and TD-SCDMA systems.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 122 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report
398
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step, set
Measurement Report Type of cell0 to EnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement
Report).
Assume that cell0 and cell1 are neighboring 2G cells of each other.
1. Use an MS to make a call in cell0.
2. Check whether the RSL message traced on the Abis interface of cell0 contains the
EMR information element (IE).
Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the voice quality is good. The
RSL message traced on the Abis interface of cell0 contains the EMR IE(In an original
measurement report, the EMR IE is enhanced-measurement-report-struct. In a
preprocessed measurement report, the EMR IE is pre-proc-emr).
NOTE
A common MR is reported if the MS does not support EMR.
Measurement Report Type of cell0 to ComMeasReport(Common Measurement
Report).
----End
Example
//Activating Enhanced Measurement Report
SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, MEASURETYPE=EnhMeasReport;
//Deactivating Enhanced Measurement Report
SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, MEASURETYPE=ComMeasReport;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 122 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report
399
123 Configuring BTS power lift for
handover
BTS power lift for handover.
Prerequisites
None
The feature GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover or GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II
Handover has been configured before this feature is activated.
l License
Context
The BTS power lift for handover function determines whether the BTS of the serving cell
transmits signals at the maximum power during a handover. After the function is enabled, the
BTS adjusts its transmit power to the maximum value before the BSC sends a handover
command to the MS. This ensures that the handover can be performed successfully.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHBASIC. In this step, set Power
Boost before HO Enabled or Not to YES(StartUp).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHBASIC.
Expected result: Power Boost before HO Enabled or Not is set to StartUp.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 123 Configuring BTS power lift for handover
400
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHBASIC. In this step, set Power
Boost before HO Enabled or Not to NO(Not StartUp).
----End
Example
SET GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPOWERBOOST=YES;
//Verification Procedure
LST GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LstFormat=VERTICAL;
//Deactivation Procedure
SET GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPOWERBOOST=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 123 Configuring BTS power lift for handover
401
124 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR
Adaptation
Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation.
Prerequisites
l License
The test cell is enabled with the HR function. In addition, the test cell is configured with
TCHFs and TCHHs and these channels are available.
Context
Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation is a feature based on which dynamic adjustment of TCHH/TCHF
resources is performed on the call that is established.
l When TCH resources are sufficient, the call that occupies a TCHH and whose transmission
quality is bad is handed over a TCHF to improve voice quality.
l When TCH resources are insufficient, the call that occupies a TCHF and whose
transmission quality is good is handed over a TCHH to increase cell capacity.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Intracell HO
Allowed set to YES(Yes), Current HO Control Algorithm set to
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 124 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation
402
HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II), and AMR F-H Ho Allowed and
Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed set to YES(Yes).
2. Configure conversion between FR calls and HR calls.
Adjusting FR calls to HR calls
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS with Speech
Version set to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1),
FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER 2), FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate
VER 3), HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rate VER 1), HALF_RATE_VER3
(Half-rate VER 3), FULL_RATE_VER5(Full-rate VER 5).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with AMR F-
H Ho Qual. Threshold set to 7, Non-AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold set
to 255, and Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold set to 0.
Adjusting HR calls to FR calls
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS with Speech
Version set to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1),
FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER 2), FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate
VER 3), HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rate VER 1), HALF_RATE_VER3
(Half-rate VER 3), FULL_RATE_VER5(Full-rate VER 5)Select All.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD with AMR
TCH/H Prior Allowed set to ON(On), AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load
Threshold set to 0, and TCH Traffic Busy Threshold set to 0.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with AMR H-
F Traffic Threshold set to 100, AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold set to 0,
AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold set to 0, and AMR H-F Ho ATCB
Threshold set to 255.
Adjusting FR calls to HR calls
1. Trace the BSSAP messages on the A interface and RSL messages on the Abis interface
by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages
on the Abis Interface.
2. Make a call in the cell where the BSSAP message tracing task on the A interface and
RSL message tracing task on the Abis interface are started.
Abis interface.
speech version FAMR is used when the call is set up. During the call, the speech
version switches to HAMR. Handover Detection and Handover Complete messages
are traced on the Abis interface.
Adjusting HR calls to FR calls
1. Trace the BSSAP messages on the A interface and RSL messages on the Abis interface
by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages
on the Abis Interface.
2. Make a call in the cell where the BSSAP message tracing task on the A interface and
RSL message tracing task on the Abis interface are started.
Abis interface.
GBSS
403
speech version HAMR is used when the call is set up. During the call, the speech
version switches to FAMR. Handover Detection and Handover Complete messages
are traced on the Abis interface.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with AMR F-H Ho
Allowed set to NO(No).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to check the setting of
AMR F-H Ho Allowed.
Expected result: AMR F-H Ho Allowed is set to No.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Non-AMR F-H
Ho Allowed set to NO(No).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to check the setting of
Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed.
Expected result: Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed is set to No.
----End
Example
//Activating Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation
AMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES;
//Deactivating Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation
AMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=NO, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=NO;
GBSS
404
125 Configuring Um Interface Speech
Frame Repairing
Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing.
Prerequisites
The GRFU and GRRU support this feature.
The MRFU V2 and MRRU V2 that are configured with less than five carriers support
this feature.
l License
Context
Currently, the speech services using EFR and AMR-NB account for the largest proportion of
speech services in live networks. When the bit error rate (BER) is high and the C/I is low, the
channel decoding may fail. As a result, the erroneous results of channel decoding will be
discarded, which greatly degrades the voice quality.
To solve the preceding problem, Huawei develops a technique based on the characteristics of
EFR and AMR-NB speech frames to repair the erroneous speech frames over the Um interface.
This technique increases the success rate of voice decoding, thus improving the voice quality
under low C/I. After this feature is applied, the mean opinion score (MOS) can be increased by
0.1 to 0.2 under low C/I.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set Um
Interface Speech Frame Repair Switch to YES(Yes), and then set Speech Frame
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 125 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing
405
Classification Threshold, BQ Speech Frame Repair BER Threshold, and GQ
Speech Frame Repair BER Threshold as required.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC to query the parameters
related to the Um interface speech frame repairing feature.
Expected result:
The value of Um Interface Speech Frame Repair Switch is YES(Yes).
The values of Speech Frame Classification Threshold, BQ Speech Frame
Repair BER Threshold, and GQ Speech Frame Repair BER Threshold are the
same as those set in the activation procedure.
2. When making calls in an area of the network with severe frame loss, run the
BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with FER Report Enable set to YES
(Yes) to allow the BTS to report the Frame Erase Ratio (FER).
3. Query FER-related counters reported by the BTS on the M2000. To do so, choose
Performance > Query Result on the menu bar. In the displayed window, click New
Query. The Query Result window is displayed. Navigate to BSC6900 GSM > MR
Measurement > FER Measurement per TRX. Then, check the value of the counter
EFR Average FER.
Expected result: After the Um interface speech frame repairing feature is enabled, the
value of EFR Average FER decreases and the speech quality is improved.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC with Um Interface
Speech Frame Repair Switch set to NO(No).
----End
Example
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UMSFRSWITCH=YES,
UMSFRLLRFACTOR=4, UMSFRLLRTHRESH=60, UMSFRBERTHRESH=50;
LST GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FERRPTEN=YES;
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UMSFRSWITCH=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 125 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing
406
126 Configuring AMR
AMR FR and GBFD-115502 AMR HR.
Prerequisites
l License
The MS, BTS, and MSC support the AMR function.
Context
The adaptive multi rate (AMR) is a speech encoding and decoding algorithm, which can be
adjusted between full-rate speech version 3 and half-rate speech version 3 specified by the
protocol. With AMR, the BTS and the MS can evaluate the interference on the radio network
according to the measurements such as receive level, receive quality, and carrier-to-interference
(C/I) ratio, and then adjust the voice encoding rate accordingly. In this way, both the anti-
interference capability of the radio communications system and the voice quality are improved.
NOTE
l The AMR HR supports the 7.95 kbit/s coding scheme only when Service Mode of the Abis interface
is IP or HDLC in BM/TC combined or A over IP mode.
l If a BTS supports AMR but its software version does not, then AMR cannot be configured. In this case,
a BTS software version that supports AMR must be obtained.
Procedure
1. Set basic AMR parameters.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 126 Configuring AMR
407
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC with A Interface Tag set
to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step,
select the FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3) and FULL_RATE_VER1
(Full-rate VER 1)check box in the Speech Version parameter for the cell.
NOTE
If the cell supports half-rate services, select the HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER
3) check box simultaneously.
c. To further improve voice quality by enabling the E-Coder function, run the
BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, specify the subrack
number and slot number based on actual configuration of the DPU board and set
Coding Mode to ECODEC(Enhanced code mode).
2. Set AMR call processing parameters.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC with AFR Radio
Link Timeout and AFR SACCH Multi-Frames set to appropriate values.
NOTE
If the cell supports half-rate services, set AHR Radio Link Timeout and AHR SACCH
Multi-Frames to appropriate values simultaneously.
b. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR to set
AMR call control parameters related to full-rate and half-rate channels.
NOTE
l AMR ACS[F] and AMR ACS[H] can be set to one to four coding rates respectively.
In A over IP mode, their settings must be consistent with those on the CN side.
l You can select different algorithms according to the setting of AMR Rate
Adjustment Switch.
l By setting AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes), you can
enable the adaptive adjustment function of AMR downlink thresholds.
3. To set parameters for AMR intra-cell handover between TCHF and TCHH, see
Activating the AMR handover algorithm in 7 Configuring HUAWEI I
Handover and Activating the algorithm for the handover between TCHF and
TCHH in 189 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover.
4. Optional: Set AMR power control parameters.
When Huawei II power control algorithm is used, run the BSC6900 MML
command SET GCELLPWR2 to set AMR power control parameters such as
AMR PC Interval.
When Huawei III power control algorithm is used, run the BSC6900 MML
command SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, set Allow III Power Control For
AMR to ON(Allowed) and set other AMR power control parameters based on
network conditions.
5. Set AMR channel management parameters.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD with AMR TCH/
H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold set to
appropriate values.
1. Start a call between two MSs.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES.
GBSS
408
Expected result: In the displayed information, Speech version = Full-rate VER 3.
At least one speech version must be configured for the BSC6900. Therefore, the
deactivation procedure is unnecessary. However, you can run the BSC6900 MML
command SET GCELLCCACCESS to modify the speech version.
----End
Example
SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2;
1-0&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-0&HALF_RATE_VER5-0;
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AFRSAMULFRM=48, AHRSAMULFRM=32,
AFRDSBLCNT=64_Times, AHRDSBLCNT=52_Times;
SET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, RATECTRLSW=ALG1,
ACTCDSETF=4_75KBIT/S-1&5_15KBIT/S-1&5_90KBIT/S-1&6_70KBIT/S-1,
ACTCDSETH=4_75KBIT/S-1&5_15KBIT/S-1&5_90KBIT/S-1&6_70KBIT/S-1,
AMRDADTHAW=YES;
SET GCELLPWR2: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRPCADJPERIOD=3;
SET GCELLCHMGAD IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=ON,
AMRTCHHPRIORLOAD=55;
GBSS
409
127 Configuring AMR Coding Rate
Threshold Adaptive Adjustment
AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.
Prerequisites
The BTS supports AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.
An MOS tester and a vehicle for drive test are ready.
This feature depends on the feature GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report
(EMR).
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115702 TrFO.
l License
The test cell is configured with neighboring cells.
Context
NOTE
BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012, and BTS3012AE do not support this feature when they use a non-
optimized DTRU.
This feature sets the target voice quality of the network and adjusts the coding rate threshold
adaptively so that a proper coding rate is selected for the AMR speech service and therefore to
gain optimal AMR voice quality.
AMR coding rate threshold adaptive adjustment, which is uplink/downlink specific, brings the
following benefits:
l A proper coding rate is selected for the AMR speech service.
GBSS
127 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive
Adjustment
410
l Optimal AMR voice quality is gained.
Procedure
l Activate AMR uplink adaptive threshold adjustment.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR with AMR Uplink
Adaptive Threshold Allowed set to YES(Yes).
l Verify AMR uplink adaptive threshold adjustment.
Select a BTS that provides continuous cell coverage. In the coverage area of the test cell,
select a test path where the downlink level ranges from -50 dBm to -110 dBm and is equally
distributed along the test path.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS with Speech
Version set to at least FULL_RATE_VER1(FULL-RATE VER
1),FULL_RATE_VER3(FULL-RATE VER 3) and HALF_RATE_VER3
(HALF-RATE VER 3).
3. Connect the MOS tester to the test MS, use the test MS to make a call, and then perform
a drive test on the test path.
NOTE
The recommended test scheme is as follows: The distance of the test path is 1 km to 2 km, the moving
speed of the vehicle for the drive test is 20 km/h, and the drive test is performed three times (three
come-and-goes). Record the MOSs and calculate the average MOS.
Adaptive Threshold Allowed set to NO(No).
5. Repeat Step 3.
6. Compared the data recorded in Step 3 and Step 5 to find the difference in voice quality
when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) and when it is
set to NO(No).
Expected result: The MOS when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set
to YES(Yes) is higher than the MOS when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold
Allowed is set to NO(No).
l Deactivate AMR uplink adaptive threshold adjustment.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAMR to view the value of AMR
Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed.
Expected result: AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to No.
l Activate AMR downlink adaptive threshold adjustment.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR with AMR Downlink
Adaptive Threshold Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Is RATSCCH Function
Enabled to ENABLE(Enable).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS with
Measurement Report Type to EnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement
Report).
l Verify AMR downlink adaptive threshold adjustment.
GBSS
Adjustment
411
Select a BTS that provides continuous cell coverage. In the coverage area of the test cell,
select a test path where the downlink level ranges from -50 dBm to -110 dBm and is equally
distributed.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS with Speech
Version set to at least FULL_RATE_VER1(FULL-RATE VER
1),FULL_RATE_VER3(FULL-RATE VER 3) and HALF_RATE_VER3
(HALF-RATE VER 3).
3. Connect the MOS tester to the test MS, use the test MS to make a call, and then perform
a drive test on the test path.
NOTE
The recommended test scheme is as follows: The distance of the test path is 1 km to 2 km, the moving
speed of the vehicle for the drive test is 20 km/h, and the drive test is performed three times (three
come-and-goes). Record the MOSs and calculate the average MOS.
5. Repeat Step 3.
6. Compared the data recorded in Step 3 and Step 5 to find the difference in voice quality
when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) and when
it is set to NO(No).
Expected result: The MOS when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is
set to YES(Yes) is higher than the MOS when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold
Allowed is set to NO(No).
l Deactivate AMR downlink adaptive threshold adjustment.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAMR to view the value of AMR
Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed.
Expected result: AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to No.
----End
Example
//Activating AMR uplink adaptive threshold adjustment
SET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRUADTHAW=YES;
//Deactivating AMR uplink adaptive threshold adjustment
SET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRUADTHAW=NO;
//Activating AMR downlink adaptive threshold adjustment
SET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRDADTHAW=YES;
//Deactivating AMR downlink adaptive threshold adjustment
SET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRDADTHAW=NO;
GBSS
Adjustment
412
128 Configuring WB AMR
WB AMR.
Prerequisites
The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012, and BTS3012AE do not support this feature
when they use a non-optimized DTRU.
l License
The MS, MGW, and MSC server support this feature.
Context
l WB AMR is a coding scheme that can significantly improve speech quality. Using WB
AMR, the sampling rate is increased to 16 kHz and the speech frequency range is extended
to 0.05-7 kHz. WB AMR provides clear and loud voice and high-quality speech compared
with the narrow band AMR with the sampling rate of 8 kHz and the speech frequency range
between 200 Hz and 3400 Hz.
l WB AMR adopts the Guassian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK) mode and supports the
rates of 6.60 kbit/s, 8.85 kbit/s, and 12.65 kbit/s on full-rate TCHs.
Procedure
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS to set the access
control parameters for the cell.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 128 Configuring WB AMR
413
NOTE
Select the FULL_RATE_VER5(Full-rate VER 5) check box under the parameter Speech
Version while retaining the default speech versions.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR to set the call control
AMR parameters for the cell. The call control AMR parameters are AMR UL Coding
Rate adj.th1[WB], AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2[WB], AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.hyst1[WB], AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1[WB], AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.th1[WB], AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2[WB], AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.hyst1[WB], and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2[WB].
NOTE
When transmission quality over the Um interface is good, the value of the coding rate
adjustment threshold should be relatively low. In this way, a rate can be easily increased to
improve speech quality. If the value of the coding rate adjustment threshold is high, a low rate
coding mode should be used to improve robustness over the Um interface.
Reducing the coding rate hysteresis leads to more frequent rate adjustments.
1. Use two MSs supporting WB AMR to call each other.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES to verify that the value of
Channel Service Type is AMR_WB.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, clear the
FULL_RATE_VER5(Full-rate VER 5) check box under the parameter Speech
Version.
----End
Example
//Activating WB AMR
//Verifying WB AMR
DSP CALLRES: USERIDTYPE=BYMSISDN, MSISDN="13818889988";
//Deactivating WB AMR
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 128 Configuring WB AMR
414
129 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)
Streaming QoS(GBR).
Prerequisites
A built-in PCU, a packet service processing board, and a Gb interface board are
configured.
The feature GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS has been configured before
l License
The MSs and SGSN support the PFM procedure and R99 QoS.
The cell is configured with static PDCHs.
Context
In the case of streaming services, the BSC allocates radio blocks to users based on their QoS
attribute GBR and ensures that the data transmission rates meet the requirements of streaming
services. If streaming services support resource preemption, high-priority streaming services
can preempt radio blocks of low-priority streaming services when radio resources are
insufficient. This ensures that higher-priority services preferentially use radio resources. If
streaming services do not support resource preemption, the GBR is decreased when radio
resources are insufficient; when radio resources become sufficient, the GBR is restored to the
negotiated values. When the BSC needs to decrease or restore the GBR, it requests the SGSN
to modify the GBR through a PFM procedure.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 129 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)
415
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set
Support GBR QoS to YES(Support). To enable streaming services to preempt
PDCHs, set Preempt Switch of Streaming Resource to ON(ON).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support to YES
(Support).
3. On the SGSN side, enable the network service entity (NSE) to support Packet Flow
Context (PFC). To enable streaming services to preempt PDCHs, configure the NSE
to carry the ARP information element.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIGBVC to ensure that
the NSE on the CN side is consistent with that on the NE side.
1. Initiate Um interface PS message tracing and check the PSI13 message.
Expected result: The value of pfc-feature-mode in the PSI13 message is 1. This
indicates that the BSC supports PDC.
2. Initiate Gb interface PTP tracing. Perform PDP context activation on an MS whose
registered traffic class is streaming.
Expected result: Signaling messages such as CREATE BSS PFC and CREATE BSS
PFC ACK are traced. This indicates that the PDP context is activated.
3. Use an MS whose registered traffic class is streaming and an MS whose registered
traffic class is interactive or background to perform PS services. The MSs share the
same channel group.
Expected result: The BSC allocates resources to the MS whose registered traffic class
is streaming based on the registered GBR. The other MSs share the remaining
resources.
4. Use multiple MSs whose registered traffic class is streaming to perform PS services.
Expected result: If the MSs have the same priority, the BSS allocates resources to the
MS that is the first to access the network. If the MSs have different priorities and
support resource preemption, a high-priority MS can preempt resources of a low-
priority MS.
NOTE
The information element ARP of CREATE BSS PFC of the Gb interface specifies information such
as the priority of streaming services and whether streaming services can preempt resources and be
preempted.
Support GBR QoS to NO(Not Support) and Preempt Switch of Streaming
Resource to OFF(OFF).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support to NO
(No Support).
Expected result: The value of pfc-feature-mode in the PSI13 message is 0.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIGBVC.
----End
Example
//Activating Streaming QoS(GBR)
SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=YES,
OccupyStreamingSwitch=ON;
GBSS
416
MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=YES;
RST SIGBVC: NSEI=1;
//Deactivating Streaming QoS(GBR)
SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=NO,
OccupyStreamingSwitch=OFF;
MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=NO;
RST SIGBVC: NSEI=1;
GBSS
417
130 Configuring QoS ARP&THP
QoS ARP&THP.
Prerequisites
configured.
The feature GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS has been configured before
l License
Context
The BSC allocates radio resources to the MS according the allocation/retention priority (ARP)
and traffic handle priority (THP) in the QoS attributes. The higher-priority users enjoy more
radio resources and wider radio bandwidth. The BSC maps the R97/R98 QoS to the R99 QoS
according to the 3GPP specifications.
With this feature, the operator allocates radio resources according to service types and user
priority. As a result, the user with a higher priority can seize more bandwidth and enjoy higher
data rate and services of better quality.
Interactive services: The BSS allocates radio resources to users according to the ARP and THP
in the QoS attributes. If the ARPs of users are the same, users with a higher THP are allocated
more radio resources. If the THPs of users are the same, users with a higher ARP are allocated
more radio resources.
Background services: The BSS allocates radio resources to users according to the ARP of QoS.
Users with a higher ARP are allocated more radio resources.
The BSS allocates radio resources to services that do not support QoS in the way it allocates
radio resources to best effort services.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 130 Configuring QoS ARP&THP
418
Procedure
Support QoS Optimize to YES(Support).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support to YES
(Support).
3. Configure the NSE to support PFC on the SGSN side.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset SIGBVC to ensure that
the NSE on the CN side is consistent with that on the NE side.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set the values
of THP1ARP1PRIWEIGHT, THP1ARP2PRIWEIGHT,
THP1ARP3PRIWEIGHT, THP2ARP1PRIWEIGHT,
THP3ARP3PRIWEIGHT, BKGARP1PRIWEIGHT, BKGARP2PRIWEIGHT,
BKGARP3PRIWEIGHT, BEARP1PRIWEIGHT, BEARP2PRIWEIGHT, and
BEARP3PRIWEIGHT according to the weight of bandwidths occupied by users
with different priorities.
NOTE
To verify this feature, you can run the command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block idle channels
in the cells so that as many MSs as possible are multiplexed on the same channel group.
To query the channel number of each MS, initiate PS message tracing of a single user by referring to
Tracing PS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Perform PS download services to check the data
rate of each MS.
1. Use the MSs whose registered traffic classes are interactive or background to perform
PS services and ensure that the MSs share the same channel group.
Expected result: When the same coding scheme is used, the ratio of the transmission
rate of the MSs is similar to the ratio of the weight of THP or ARP.
Support QoS Optimize to NO(Not Support).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support to NO
(Not Support).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIGBVC.
----End
Example
//Activating QoS ARP/THP
SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QOSOPT=YES;
RST SIGBVC: NSEI=1;
SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, THP1ARP1PRIWEIGHT=10,
THP1ARP2PRIWEIGHT=6, THP1ARP3PRIWEIGHT=4, THP2ARP1PRIWEIGHT=8,
THP2ARP2PRIWEIGHT=4, THP2ARP3PRIWEIGHT=3, THP3ARP1PRIWEIGHT=6,
THP3ARP2PRIWEIGHT=3, THP3ARP3PRIWEIGHT=2, BKGARP1PRIWEIGHT=4,
BKGARP2PRIWEIGHT=2, BKGARP3PRIWEIGHT=1, BEARP1PRIWEIGHT=8,
BEARP2PRIWEIGHT=4, BEARP3PRIWEIGHT=2;
GBSS
419
//Deactivating QoS ARP/THP
SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QOSOPT=NO;
MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=NO;
RST SIGBVC: NSEI=1;
GBSS
420
131 Configuring PS Active Package
Management
PS Active Package Management.
Prerequisites
Embedded PCU should be used, the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is
required.
feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS.
l License
Context
Active queue management (AQM) is an algorithm used to maintain the buffer queue length
within an appropriate range by discarding data packets in the buffer queue actively. It increases
data throughput and reduces service delay at the price of buffer utilization.
AQM is applicable to scenarios in which bandwidth is limited and congestion may occur.
AQM not only ensures high link utilization but also reduces the delay of services that require
low transfer delay. It also enhances fair utilization of bandwidth among services and increases
data throughput.
AQM is applicable to interactive services, background services, and BE services (namely,
services without QoS requirements). It is not applicable to conversational services or streaming
services.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 131 Configuring PS Active Package Management
421
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set AQM
Switch to OPEN(Open). Set AQM Congestion Threshold, AQM Target
Threshold, AQM Maximum Threshold, AQM Packet Discard Initial Interval,
AQM Packet Discard Interval Lower Threshold, AQM Packet Discard Interval
Upper Threshold, and AQM N Update Interval according to actual network
conditions. It is advised that these values be set to recommended values.
1. Use an MS to download a large-sized file (about 2 MB) through FTP. After the
download is started, use the MS to download a small-sized file (about 200 KB) through
FTP.
2. View the result of downloading the small-sized file.
The expected result: When AQM Switch is set to OPEN(Open), the time required to
download the small-sized file is reduced, and the rate for downloading the large-sized
file is decreased.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set AQM
Switch to CLOSE(Close).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA and view the value of
AQM Switch.
The expected result: The value of AQM Switch is Close.
----End
Example
//Activation Procedure
SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: AqmMinTh=256, AqmTarTh=384, AqmMaxTh=1024,
AqmSwitch=OPEN, AqmNinit=20, AqmNLowerBound=10, AqmNUpBound=20, AqmM=20;
SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: AqmSwitch=CLOSE;
LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 131 Configuring PS Active Package Management
422
132 Configuring PoC QoS
PoC QoS.
Prerequisites
Embedded PCU should be used,the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is
required.
feature depends on the following features GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR).
l License
The MS and the CN support PoC service.
Context
The push to talk over cellular (PoC) service is a type of group call service implemented on the
GSM network. The PoC service adopts the packet switching technology and it is carried on the
GPRS/EGPRS networks.
Huawei GBSS equipment can correctly distinguish PoC services from other services and apply
QoS mechanisms for the PoC services. The QoS mechanisms consist of GBR, reduced data
transmission delay, and uplink/downlink balanced channel allocation method.
Procedure
POC Support to Support(Support). Set Min. GBR for POC Service, Max. GBR
for POC Service, and Transmission Delay of POC Service according to actual
situations.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 132 Configuring PoC QoS
423
1. Set the registration type of the MS to streaming service. Ensure that the GBR value
is between the values of Min. GBR for POC Service and Max. GBR for POC
Service. The transfer delay must be smaller than Transmission Delay of POC
Service.
2. Use the MS to perform PoC service.
The expected result: The PoC result runs properly.
3. Use the MS whose registration type is streaming service and the MSs of other types
to perform Ping service. The MSs share the same channel group.
The expected result: The Ping delay is smaller after PoC QoS is activated.
Support GBR QoS to NO(Not Support).
----End
Example
SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, POCGBRMIN=6,
POCGBRMAX=16, POCDELAY=650, PocSup=Support;
SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, PocSup=NotSupport;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 132 Configuring PoC QoS
424
133 Configuring NC2
This section describes how to configure, verify, and deactivate the optional feature
GBFD-116201 Network Control Mode 2 (NC2).
Prerequisites
Embedded PCU should be used,the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is
required.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-114151 DTM.
l License
The test cell has a neighboring cell.
The serving cell works properly.
This feature should be supported by the MS.
Context
With this feature, an MS in a cell with poor signal quality, heavy load, or low signal level can
reselect a neighboring cell with good signal quality, light load, or high signal level.
Compared with the MS-controlled cell reselection, the network-controlled cell reselection
considers factors such as the service type of the MS, and receive level, traffic load, and signal
level of neighboring cells so that the MS can reselect a better cell.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set the
parameters as follows:
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 133 Configuring NC2
425
Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).
Set Support NC2 to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set Network
Control Mode to NC2(NC2).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set the
thresholds at cell reselection.
1. Use the MS to perform GPRS services on the GSM serving cell. On the LMT, trace
PS messages on the Um interface by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on
the Um Interface.
2. Move the MS, increase the power of the target cell so that the level of the target cell
is higher than that of the serving cell, or increase the number of MSs in the serving
cell.
3. Check the messages traced over the Um interface. If the following messages are traced,
the NC2 is enabled.
The Packet Measurement Report message that the MS sends to the BSC.
The Packet Cell Change Order message that the BSC sends to the MS.
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to NO(No).
----End
Example
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES;
SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2;
SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINACCRXLEV=50;
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 133 Configuring NC2
426
134 Configuring Network Assisted Cell
Change (NACC)
Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) and GBFD-119801 Packet SI Status(PSI).
Prerequisites
configured.
The feature GBFD-114101 GPRS has been configured before this feature is activated.
l License
The MS and Core Network (CN) must support this feature.
The test cell is a GSM cell and has a neighboring GSM cell.
The cell supports the GRPS service or EDGE service.
The serving cell support NACC.
The network control modes of the serving cell is set to NC0 or NC1.
The MS detects signal strength deterioration in the serving cell and detects a neighboring
cell with better signal strength.
Context
NACC can be configured to accelerate the cell reselection of an MS and shorten the period of
service disruption caused by cell reselection.
The BSC sends the system information on the neighboring cells to the MS that works in packet
transfer mode so that the MS can initiate packet access after cell reselection. After receiving the
system information on neighboring cells on the PACCH, the MS that is in packet transfer mode
can keep these information for 30 seconds, during which it can attempt to access the neighboring
cell according to the system information.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 134 Configuring Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)
427
Procedure
Activating Intra-BSC NACC
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set
Network Control Mode to NC0(NC0) or NC1(NC1).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS
to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NACC to YES
(Yes).
NOTE
To further improve the performance of PS services, the parameter PACKET SI can be set
to YES(Yes).
Activating Inter-BSC NACC
Network Control Mode to NC0(NC0) or NC1(NC1).
to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NACC to YES
(Yes).
NOTE
To further improve the performance of PS services, the parameter PACKET SI can be set
to YES(Yes).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set RIM Support to
YES(Support).
NOTE
l Both the serving cell and the target cell support RIM.
l RIM Support in the NSE assigned to the serving cell and target cell is set to Yes.
l RIM Support in the NSE assigned to the SGSN is set to Yes.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to activate RIM.
NOTE
Perform this operation when the traffic is light because it affects the services of all cells
under the NSE.
1. Use the MS to initiate GPRS services, and monitor the signaling over the Um interface.
Ensure that the MS is in the serving cell.
2. Move the MS or increase the power of the target cell to make the receive level of the
target cell higher than that of the serving cell.
3. Trace the signaling on the Um interface by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages
on the Um Interface.
After detecting signal strength deterioration in the serving cell and an external
neighboring cell with better signal strength, the MS sends the PACKET CELL
CHANGE NOTIFICATION message to the BSC. Then, the BSC responds with the
PACKET NEIGHBOUR CELL DATA message, which contains the SI1, SI3, and
SI13 system information about the target cell. In addition, the BSC sends the
PACKET CELL CHANGE CONTINUE message to the MS, instructing the MS to
proceed with the cell reselection procedure.
GBSS
428
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set Support
NACC to NO(No) and ACKET SI to NO(No).
Expected result: The value of Support NACC is NO(No) and that of PACKET SI
is NO(No). The cell supports neither NACC nor PACKET SI STATUS.
----End
Example
//Activating Intra-BSC Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=YES,
PKTSI=YES;
//Activating Inter-BSC Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=YES,
PKTSI=YES;
MOD NSE: NSEI=0, RIMSUP=YES;
RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;
//Deactivating Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=NO,
PKTSI=NO;
GBSS
429
135 Configuring GPRS
GPRS.
Prerequisites
A built-in PCU is configured. A packet switched (PS) service processing board and the
Gb interface board are used.
l License
This feature should be supported by the Core Network(CN) and Mobile Station (MS).
If external PCU is used, the Pb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the
Pb Interface.
If built-in PCU is used, the Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the
Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP).
The BTS transmission mode is configured. For details, see Configuring the
Transmission Data.
Context
This feature implements mainly three functions: managing radio links and resources, controlling
MS access, and providing routing functions for packet data transmission.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set the parameters as
follows:
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 135 Configuring GPRS
430
If external PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsExtPcu(Support as external
Pcu), and then run the PCU set attr command on the PCU maintenance console
to support GPRS.
If built-in PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in
PCU).
2. Optional: If built-in PCU is used, if Configuring CS3/CS4, run the BSC6900 MML
command SET GCELLPSCS with both Downlink Fixed CS Type and Uplink
Fixed CS Type set to UNFIXED(UNFIXED).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set Channel Type to
PDTCH(PDTCH) for at least one channel.
4. Do the following operations according to the BTS works:
If the BTS works in TDM transmission mode, configure idle timeslots for the BTS
by referring to Configuring the BTS Timeslots.
If the BTS works in IP transmission mode, configure the IPPATH by Run the
BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH. It is recommended that IP path ID be
set to QoS(QoS), BE(BE), AF11(AF11), AF12(AF12), AF13(AF13), AF21
(AF21), AF22(AF22), or AF23(AF23).
l Optional: Verification Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCS with Uplink Fixed CS
Type and Downlink Fixed CS Type set to CS3(CS3) or CS4(CS4).
NOTE
This operation affects the ongoing services of the cells. Therefore, perform the operation in
low traffic hours.
2. Use an MS to perform PING services. On the BSC6900 LMT, trace PS messages on
the Um interface by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.
You can view that the CS3 or CS4 coding scheme is used in the uplink and downlink.
CAUTION
After the verification is complete, set Uplink Fixed CS Type and Downlink Fixed
CS Type to UNFIXED(UNFIXED) according to the activation procedure.
1. Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data.
Expected result: The MS downloads or uploads data successfully.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set GPRS to NO(Not
support).
----End
Example
/*Activating GPRS*/
//External PCU command
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsExtPcu;
PCU SET ATTR 0 460009162963A 1 02187 1 yes 2 255 true Cell-0
//Built-in PCU command
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu;
GBSS
431
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=PDTCH;
//(Optional)Built-in PCU command
SET GCELLPSCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPFIXCS=UNFIXED, DNFIXCS=UNFIXED;
//(Optional)Verification procedure
SET GCELLPSCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPFIXCS=CS3, DNFIXCS=CS4;
//Deactivating GPRS
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=NO;
GBSS
432
136 Configuring Network Operation
Mode I
Network Operation Mode I.
Prerequisites
A built-in PCU, a packet service processing board, and a Gb interface board are required.
l License
The Gs interface (the interface between MSC/VLR and SGSN) is configured between
the MSC and SGSN. If a cell is configured with MOCN, the Gs interface must be
available on the MSC and the SGSN of all operators.
Context
The combination of Network Operation Mode I and Gs interface supports coordinated paging
and CS paging in packet transfer mode.
Procedure
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).
Operation Mode to NMOI(Network Operation Mode I).
1. Use a MS to perform a ping service.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 136 Configuring Network Operation Mode I
433
2. Use another MS to call the MS processing the ping service.
Expected result: The call is successfully established and the voice quality is good.
Operation Mode to NMOII(Network Operation Mode II).
----End
Example
//Activating Network Operation Mode I
SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NMO=NMOI;
//Deactivating Network Operation Mode I
SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NMO=NMOII;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 136 Configuring Network Operation Mode I
434
137 Configuring CS-3/CS-4
CS-3/CS-4.
Prerequisites
The DPU board that supports the built-in PCU is installed.
This feature depends on GBFD-114101 GPRS.
l License
The MS supports only GPRS.
The signal quality on the Um interface is high.
If the BTS works in TDM mode, there must be sufficient free timeslots. If the BTS
works in IP mode, there must be sufficient IP paths.
The configuration of the Gb interface is complete. For details, see Configuring the Gb
Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP).
Context
This feature allows the BSS to use high coding schemes when the signal quality on the Um
interface is high and the Abis transmission resources are sufficient, thereby increasing the GPRS
data rate.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCS with both Uplink Fixed CS
Type and Downlink Fixed CS Type set to UNFIXED(UNFIXED).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 137 Configuring CS-3/CS-4
435
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCS with Uplink Fixed CS
Type and Downlink Fixed CS Type set to CS3(CS3) or CS4(CS4).
NOTE
This operation affects the ongoing services of the cells. Therefore, perform the operation in
low traffic hours.
2. Use an MS to perform PING services. On the BSC6900 LMT, trace PS messages on
the Um interface by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.
You can view that the CS3 or CS4 coding scheme is used in the uplink and downlink.
CAUTION
After the verification is complete, set Uplink Fixed CS Type and Downlink Fixed
CS Type to UNFIXED(UNFIXED) according to the activation procedure.
----End
Example
SET GCELLPSCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPFIXCS=UNFIXED, DNFIXCS=UNFIXED;
SET GCELLPSCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPFIXCS=CS3, DNFIXCS=CS4;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 137 Configuring CS-3/CS-4
436
138 Configuring EGPRS
EGPRS.
Prerequisites
The external PCU is installed if the external PCU is used.
A packet processing board and a Gb interface board are required if the built-in PCU is
used.
This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS.
l License
This feature should be supported by the GPRS Support Node (GGSN/SGSN) and the
Mobile Station (MS).
If external PCU is used, the Pb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the
Pb Interface.
If built-in PCU is used, the Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the
Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP).
The BTS transmission mode is configured. For details, see Configuring the
Transmission Data.
Context
Provides high-speed PS services, increases packet capacity, and reduces the delay of PS services
and the congestion rate, improving the service quality and enhancing the user experience.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 138 Configuring EGPRS
437
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set the parameters as
follows:
If external PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsExtPcu(Support as external
Pcu) and EDGE to YES(Yes).
If built-in PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in
PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes).
2. Do the following operations according to the BTS works:
If the BTS works in TDM transmission mode, configure idle timeslots for the BTS
by referring to Configuring the BTS Timeslots.
If the BTS works in IP transmission mode, configure the IPPATH by running the
ADD IPPATH command. It is recommended that IP path type be set to QoS
(QoS), BE(BE), AF11(AF11), AF12(AF12), AF13(AF13), AF21(AF21), AF22
(AF22), or AF23(AF23).
3. Optional: If built-in PCU is used, configuring dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS
coding, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step,
set Support EGPRS Uplink MCS Dynamic Adjust to 2(According to uplink
quality measurements reported by BTS).
In the case that the external PCU is used, use an MS to perform PING services. Then,
start the message tracing over the Um interface on the PCU maintenance console. The
result shows that the coding schemes MCS1 to MCS9 that are supported by EGPRS are
used.
In the case that the built-in PCU is used, use an MS to perform PING services. Then,
start the task Um Interface PS Trace on the LMT. The result shows that the coding
schemes MCS1 to MCS9 that are supported by EGPRS are used.
Optional: verification procedure of configuring dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS
coding
Route downlink BTS signals to the shielding cabinet.
After combining the uplink signals and interference source signals, route the combined
signals to the receive end of the TRX.
Set the interference source frequency to the uplink frequency of the TRX, set the
transmit power, and then put the MS in the shielding cabinet.
Use the MS to load files through FTP.
Initiate the PS domain message tracing over the Um interface on the BSC6900 LMT
by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. Trace the result of
uplink MCS coding adjustment.
The expected result: When the interference source power increases, the rate of uplink
EGPRS coding scheme decreases.
In the case that the external PCU is used, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsExtPcu(Support as external
Pcu) and EDGE to NO(No).
In the case that the built-in PCU is used, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in
PCU) and EDGE to NO(No).
GBSS
438
Optional: If built-in PCU is used, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step, set Support EGPRS Uplink MCS Dynamic
Adjust to 1(According to downlink quality measurements reported by MS).
----End
Example
//Activating EGPRS
//(Optional)Activating Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding
SET GCELLEGPRSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ADJUSTULMCSTYPE=2;
//Deactivating EGPRS
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=NO;
//(Optional)Deactivating Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding
GBSS
439
139 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access
11-Bit EGPRS Access, GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF and the basic feature
GBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS.
Prerequisites
Built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Processing board and Gb interface board are
required.
feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114201 EGPRS.
l License
Context
The extended uplink TBF can shorten the transmission delay and reduce the MS power
consumption. The 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH can improve the access performance of
the EDGE MS. The BTS takes over the packet and immediate assignments. This can improve
the access performance of the MS and shorten the access delay.
For PCU commands, see the Manual of Commands related to the PCU.
NOTE
l In external PCU mode, the PCU supports the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS and
the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS by default.
l In external PCU mode, if you need to disable the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS,
run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo> g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 0 command. If you need to disable
the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS, run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>
g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 0 command. After running the command, you should reset the cell.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 139 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access
440
Procedure
1. Configure the extended uplink TBF.
In external PCU mode, run the PCU add privateoptpara command on the PCU
maintenance terminal to set the duration of the inactive period timer to a value
greater than 0.
In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Inactive Period of
Extended Uplink TBF to a value greater than 0.
NOTE
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set
EXT_UTBF_NODATA to NOTSEND to reduce the MS power consumption.
2. Configure the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH.
In external PCU mode, run the PCU ADD EGPRSPara command on the PCU
maintenance terminal to configure the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the
CCCH for the cell.
GCELLPSBASE on the LMT. In this step, set Support 11BIT EGPRS Access
to YES(Yes).
BSCPSSOFTPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Force MS Two-phase
Access to Close(Close).
3. Configure the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS.
In external PCU mode, run the PCU CfgPara ADD allrppu
g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal to
configure the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS. After running the
command, you should reset the cell.
GCELLPSOTHERPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Move Packet
Assignment Down to BTS to YES(Yes).
1. Verify the extended uplink TBF.
Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA to check
whether Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF is greater than 0. Use the MS to
perform PS services. After transmitting the uplink data to the BSC, the MS does not
release the uplink TBF immediately. Instead, it releases the uplink TBF after the
duration equal to Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF.
2. Verify the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH.
Use the MS that supports 11-bit EGPRS to perform PS services. If the value of random
access for a channel request is 11-bit, the MS has accessed the network.
3. Verify the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS.
Use the MS to make a dial-up connection to the network and then to perform the ping
function. Enabling Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS can reduce the ping delay
by 30 to 50 ms, which depends on the transmission over the Abis interface.
GBSS
441
1. Deactivate the extended uplink TBF.
In external PCU mode, run the PCU set privateoptpara command on the PCU
maintenance terminal to set the duration of the inactive period timer to 0.
GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Inactive Period of
Extended Uplink TBF to 0.
2. Deactivate the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH.
In external PCU mode, run the PCU set egprspara command on the PCU
maintenance terminal to configure the cell not to support the function of 11-bit
EGPRS access on the CCCH.
GCELLPSBASE on the LMT. In this step, set Support 11BIT EGPRS Access
to NO(No).
3. Deactivate the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS.
In external PCU mode, run the PCU CfgPara SET allrppu
g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal to
configure the cell not to support the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS.
After running the command, reset the cell.
GCELLPSOTHERPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Move Packet
Assignment Down to BTS to NO(No).
----End
Example
/*Activating the extended uplink TBF*/
//External PCU mode, set the duration of the inactive period timer to a
value greater than 0
PCU ADD PrivateOptPara 11 0 120 2000 2400
//Built-in PCU mode, set the duration of the inactive period timer to a
value greater than 0
SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPEXTTBFINACTDELAY=2000;
SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EXTUTBFNODATA=NOTSEND;
/*Activating the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH*/
//External PCU mode
PCU ADD EGPRSPara 11 la 8 yes unfixed mcs2 unfixed mcs6
//Built-in PCU mode
SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EGPRS11BITCHANREQ=YES;
//Closing the Force MS Two-phase Access
SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: Force2Phase=Close;
/*Activating the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS*/
//External PCU mode
PCU CfgPara ADD allrppu g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1
//Built-in PCU mode
SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PACKASSDLSHIFT=YES;
/*Deactivating the extended uplink TBF*/
//External PCU mode, set the duration of the inactive period timer to 0
PCU SET PrivateOptPara 11 0 120 0 2400
//Built-in PCU mode, set the duration of the inactive period timer to 0
SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPEXTTBFINACTDELAY=0;
/*Deactivating the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH*/
//External PCU mode
GBSS
442
PCU SET EGPRSPara 11 la 8 no unfixed mcs2 unfixed mcs6
//Built-in PCU mode
SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EGPRS11BITCHANREQ=NO;
/*Deactivating the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS*/
//External PCU mode
PCU CfgPara SET allrppu g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 0
//Built-in PCU mode
SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PACKASSDLSHIFT=NO;
GBSS
443
140 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting
the Uplink MCS Coding
Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding.
Prerequisites
required.
l License
The cell is configured with EGPRS, and the uplink coding scheme of the cell can be
changed.
Context
With this feature, the BSC dynamically adjusts the coding scheme adopted by the PDCH based
on the uplink measurement report from the BTS. In this manner, the PDCH coding scheme can
quickly adapt to the changes in the radio condition and thus the uplink throughput is increased.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step, set
Support EGPRS Uplink MCS Dynamic Adjust to 2(According to uplink quality
measurements reported by BTS).
1. Route downlink BTS signals to the shielding cabinet.
GBSS
140 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS
Coding
444
2. After combining the uplink signals and interference source signals, route the combined
signals to the receive end of the TRX.
3. Set the interference source frequency to the uplink frequency of the TRX, set the
transmit power, and then put the MS in the shielding cabinet.
4. Use the MS to load files through FTP.
5. Initiate the PS domain message tracing over the Um interface on the BSC6900 LMT
by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. Trace the result of
uplink MCS coding adjustment.
The expected result: When the interference source power increases, the rate of uplink
EGPRS coding scheme decreases.
NOTE
The interference source power cannot be too great. Otherwise, the PS services may fail.
Support EGPRS Uplink MCS Dynamic Adjust to 1(According to downlink
quality measurements reported by MS)
----End
Example
//Activating Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding
//Deactivating Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding
GBSS
140 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS
Coding
445
141 Configuring Packet Channel
Dispatching
About This Chapter
Packet Channel Dispatching.
Prerequisites
required.
l License
An MS (GSM MS) that supports only voice service is available.
An MS (GPRS MS) that supports only GPRS service is available.
Context
l The GPRS system uses only the GMSK modulation scheme whereas the EGPRS system
uses the GMSK and 8PSK modulation schemes. When EGPRS downlink services and
GPRS uplink services use the same packet channel, the EGPRS downlink data blocks with
the USF should be used to schedule the GPRS uplink services. In this case, the EGPRS
downlink data blocks can use only the GMSK modulation scheme. This greatly affects the
downlink throughput of the EGPRS MS. With this feature, the operator can separate the
EGPRS service from the GPRS service, thus effectively increasing the downlink
throughput of the EGPRS MS.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 141 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching
446
l This feature reduces the probability that the EGPRS service and the GPRS service use the
same channel, thus increasing the EGPRS service rate, improving the entire network
performance, and enhancing the user experience.
141.1 Configuring EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature EGPRS Special Channel
Be Used by Only EGPRS Service.
141.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred Channel
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate EGPRS Preferred Channel.
141.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G Up Scenario
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate channel multiplexing in the E
(EGPRS) Down G (GPRS) Up scenario.
GBSS
447
141.1 Configuring EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only
EGPRS Service
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature EGPRS Special Channel
Be Used by Only EGPRS Service.
Procedure
1. Configure an EGPRS TRX for the cell.
2. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu
(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes) to enable the EGPRS function.
3. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID, Channel No.,
Channel Type, and Timeslot Priority.
The expected result: The values of Channel Type of six channels are PDTCH
(PDTCH), and the values of Timeslot Priority are EGPRSSPECH(EGPRS Special
Channel).
NOTE
An GPRS MS(class10)that supports GPRS service and an EGPRS MS(class10) that supports EGPRS
service are available.
1. Monitor the channels used by the MSs.
2. Attach the GPRS MS to the EGPRS network.
3. Attach the EGPRS MS to the EGPRS network and initiate the PDP activation.
The expected result:
The GPRS MS cannot be attached to the EGPRS network.
The EGPRS MS can be attached to the EGPRS network and the PDP activation
successes.
1. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set Channel Type to PDTCH
(PDTCH) and PDCH Channel Priority Type to any value except EGPRSSPECH
(EGPRS Special Channel).
----End
Example
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH;
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;
GBSS
448
141.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred Channel
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate EGPRS Preferred Channel.
Procedure
1. Configure two EGPRS TRXs for the cell.
2. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu
(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes) to enable the EGPRS function.
3. Run the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command. In this step, set TRX ID,
Channel No., and Administrative State.
The expected result: The values of all Administrative State for all the TCHs on the
BCCH TRX are Lock(Lock).
4. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set Channel Type and PDCH
Channel Priority Type.
The expected result: The values of Channel Type are PDTCH(PDTCH). PDCH
Channel Priority Type of four channels is EGPRSPRICH(EGPRS Priority
Channel) and PDCH Channel Priority Type of the other four channels is GPRS
(GPRS Channel).
NOTE
The GPRS MS1 (class10), MS2 (class10), and EGPRS MS1 (class10) are attached to the GPRS cell.
1. Record the process of configuring devices.
2. EGPRS MS1 activates PDP and starts DL FTP.
3. GPRS MS1 activates PDP and starts DL FTP.
4. GPRS MS2 activates PDP and starts DL FTP.
5. EGPRS MS1 stops DL FTP and releases PDCH.
6. EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP again after a period of time.
7. Use a drive test tool to record the channels used by the MSs.
After EGPRS MS1 activates PDP for the first time, it starts DL FTP and uses the EGPRS
preferred channel.
After GPRS MS2 starts DL FTP, it shares packet channels with GPRS MS1. The system
does notallocate the EGPRS preferred channel to GPRS MS2.
After EGPRS MS1 stops DL FTP and releases PDCH, GPRS MS2 or GPRS MS1 is
swiched to the correct channel instead of sharing the PDCH with GPRS MS1. The
correct channel is the EGPRS preferred channel used by EGPRS MS1.
GBSS
449
After EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP again, GPRS MS2 or GPRS MS1 is switched out of
the EGPRS preferred channel and then shares the PDCH with GPRS MS1 or GPRS
MS2.
The EGPRS preferred channel is allocated to EGPRS MS1 again, and EGPRS MS1
starts DL FTP on the EGPRS preferred channel.
1. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID to the index of the
EGPRS-capable TRX, Channel Type to TCHFR(TCH Full Rate), and PDCH
Channel Priority Type to any value except EGPRSPRICH(EGPRS Priority
Channel).
----End
Example
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH;
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=4, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS;
SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Ulock;
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH;
141.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G
Up Scenario
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate channel multiplexing in the E
(EGPRS) Down G (GPRS) Up scenario.
GBSS
450
Procedure
1. Configure an EGPRS TRX for the cell.
2. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID, Channel No.,
Channel Type, and Timeslot Priority.
The expected result: The values of Channel Type are PDTCH(PDTCH), and the
values of Timeslot Priority of at least two channels are EGPRSNORCH(EGPRS
Normal Channel).
3. Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Allow E Down G Up
NOTE
Two GPRS MSs (class 8) and one EGPRS MS (class10) are available.
1. Attach GPRS MS1 to the GPRS network and initiate the PDP activation. GPRS MS1
starts UL FTP and uses an uplink channel. The uplink channels are not used.
2. Attach EGPRS MS1 to the EGPRS network and initiate the PDP activation. EGPRS
MS1 starts DL FTP and does not share the channel with GPRS MS1.
3. Attach GPRS MS2 to the GPRS network and initiate the DPD activation. EGPRS MS1
starts UL FTP and share the uplink channel with GPRS MS1.
4. Record the channels used by each MS.
After EGPRS MS1 accesses the cell and starts DL FTP, the uplink channel of GPRS
MS1 does not share the channel with the downlink channel of EGPRS MS1.
After GPRS MS2 accesses the cell and starts DL FTP, the uplink channel of GPRS MS2
does not share the channel with the downlink channel of EGPRS MS1.
1. Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Allow E Down G Up
Switch to OPEN(Open).
----End
Example
SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: FORBIDEDGU=CLOSE;
SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: FORBIDEDGU=OPEN;
GBSS
451
142 Configuring BSS Paging
Coordination
BSS Paging Coordination.
Prerequisites
required.
None
l License
The Gs interface does not exist.
Context
In the case the Gs interface between the MSC/VLR and SGSN is not configured and the MS is
in packet transfer mode, the network can send CS paging messages for a user on the PACCH to
enable the user in packet transfer mode to respond to the CS paging.
Procedure
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set BSS
Paging Co-ordination to YES(YES).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 142 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination
452
1. Use one test MS to perform the PING service.
2. Use a second MS to call the test MS.
The expected result: The call is set up successfully and the conversation is proper.
NOTE
After a CS paging is initiated, a CS call is set up successfully but the ongoing PS service is
interrupted.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set BSS
Paging Co-ordination to NO(NO).
----End
Example
SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BSSPAGINGCOORDINATION=YES;
SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BSSPAGINGCOORDINATION=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 142 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination
453
143 Configuring PS Handover
PS Handover.
Prerequisites
The BSC is configured with a built-in PCU, a packet service processing board, and a
Gb interface board.
The feature GBFD-114101 GPRS has been configured before this feature is activated.
l License
The MS supports PS handover. To support inter-RAT PS handover between GSM and
UMTS, the MS must be a multi-mode MS.
The CN supports PS handover.
The SGSN supports PS handover.
A neighboring GSM or UMTS cell has been configured.
Context
After an NSE is configured to support PS handover, all cells under this NSE support PS handover.
l Intra-RAT PS handover allows an MS performing a PS service to be handed over from a
GSM cell to another GSM cell under the same BSC or different BSCs.
l Inter-RAT incoming PS handover allows an MS performing a PS service to be handed over
from a UMTS cell to a GSM cell.
l Inter-RAT outgoing PS handover allows an MS performing a PS service to be handed over
from a GSM cell to a UMTS cell.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 143 Configuring PS Handover
454
Procedure
Activate PFC at an NSE by performing the following operations:
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support to
YES(Support).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step,
set Support GBR QoS to YES(Support).
Activate PS handover at the NSE by performing the following operation:
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PS Handover
Support to YES(Support).
Activate inter-RAT incoming PS handover in a cell by performing the following
operation:
to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In Inter-RAT
Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).
Activate inter-RAT outgoing PS handover in a cell by performing the following
operation:
to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Out Inter-RAT
Inter-Cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).
Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIG BVC.
NOTE
Perform this operation when the traffic is light because it affects the services of all cells under
the NSE.
NOTE
The verification procedure must be performed immediately after the activation procedure. Otherwise,
some messages will not be traced successfully.
Verify that the NSE supports PS handover by performing the following operations:
1. Initiate Gb-interface signaling tracing of the NSE on the BSC6900 LMT by
referring to Tracing SIG Messages on the Gb Interface.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIG BVC.
Expected result: In the BVC-RESET message, the value of PS Handover contained in
Extended Feature Bitmap is 1.
Verify that a cell supports intra-RAT PS handover by performing the following
operations:
1. Initiate Gb-interface PTP message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to
Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.
2. When the handover requirement for the cell level is met, initiate a PS handover
request.
Expected result: The PS Handover Required message contains the information element
(IE) "Target RNC Identifier."
Verify that a cell supports inter-RAT incoming PS handover by performing the
following operations:
GBSS
455
1. Enable the MS to camp on a UMTS cell and upload and download files. Initiate
Gb-interface PTP message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing
PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.
2. Move the MS away from the UMTS cell or increase the number of MSs that upload
and download files in the UMTS cell.
3. Check the PTP messages traced on the Gb interface of the target GSM cell.
Expected result: The PS Handover Request message carries the IE "Source RNC
Identifier." In addition, the PS Handover Request Ack message from the BSC can
be viewed.
Verify that a cell supports inter-RAT outgoing PS handover by performing the following
operations:
1. Enable the MS to camp on a GSM cell and upload and download files. Initiate Gb-
interface PTP message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing PTP
Messages on the Gb Interface.
2. Move the MS away from the UMTS cell or increase the number of MSs that upload
and download files in the UMTS cell.
3. Check the PTP messages traced on the Gb interface of the target UMTS cell.
Expected result: The PS Handover Required message contains the IE "Target RNC
Identifier."
Deactivate inter-RAT incoming PS handover in a cell by performing the following
operation:
to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In Inter-RAT
Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).
Deactivate the inter-RAT outgoing PS handover in a cell by performing the following
operation:
to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Out Inter-RAT
Inter-Cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).
Deactivate PS handover at the NSE by performing the following operation:
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PS Handover
Support to NO(No Support).
Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIG BVC.
----End
Example
//Activating PFC at an NSE
SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=YES;
//Activating PS handover at the NSE
MOD NSE: NSEI=0, PSHOSUP=YES;
//Activating inter-RAT incoming PS handover in a cell
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu,
SPTINTERRATINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;
//Activating inter-RAT outgoing PS handover in a cell
SPTINTERRATOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;
GBSS
456
//Resetting the SIG BVC
RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;
//Deactivating inter-RAT incoming PS handover in a cell
SPTINTERRATINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;
//Deactivating inter-RAT outgoing PS handover in a cell
SPTINTERRATOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;
//Deactivating PS handover at the NSE
MOD NSE: NSEI=0, PSHOSUP=NO;
//Resetting the SIG BVC
RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;
GBSS
457
144 Configuring Early TBF
Establishment
Early TBF Establishment.
Prerequisites
configured.
The feature GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF has been configured before this
feature is activated.
l License
The MS supports Early TBF Establishment.
Context
Early TBF establishment described in 3GPP TS 44.060 (Release 7) is an enhancement of the
extended uplink TBF function. If the MS supports Early TBF Establishment, the TBF can be
allocated before the MS transmits data, thereby reducing the service access delay.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set Early
TBF Establishment to ON.
1. Use the MS to perform downloading services.
2. Initiate PS domain message tracing over the Um interface on the LMT by referring to
Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface, and trace dummy control blocks.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 144 Configuring Early TBF Establishment
458
Expected result: The value of the field EARLY_TBF_ESTABLISHMENT contained
in the message PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK is 1. After the BSC assigns
channel resources to the MS in the PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT message, the
MS sends multiple UPLINK DUMMY CONTROL BLOCK messages.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set Early
TBF Establishment to OFF.
----End
Example
//Activating Early TBF Establishment
SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EarlyTBFEst=ON;
//Deactivating Early TBF Establishment
SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EarlyTBFEst=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 144 Configuring Early TBF Establishment
459
145 Configuring PS Power Control
PS Power Control.
Prerequisites
feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS.
This feature cannot be enabled together with the feature GBFD-118104 Enhanced
EDGE Coverage.
l License
Context
l Only PS downlink power control needs to be activated.
l Activating PS power control enables the transmit power of the TRX to be controlled.
l In situations that a good link quality can be obtained without the need of maximum transmit
power, PS power control helps to reduce the transmit power, reducing the entire network
interference and increasing the system capacity.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSPWPARA to activate the PS
power control. In this step, set Support PS Downlink Power Control to YES(Yes)
and PC_MEAS_CHAN to BCCH(BCCH).
Then, set the following parameters according to the network plan:
Code Scheme Statistics Threshold
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 145 Configuring PS Power Control
460
Code Scheme Stable Threshold
Downlink Power Control Start Threshold
P0
Target CIR Position
Target CIR Offset
Max Power Control Fall Step
Power Control Precision
Dummy Power Reduce Granularity
USF Dummy Power Control Factor
Uplink Fixed MCS Type and Downlink Fixed MCS Type to MCS9(MCS9).
2. Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to perform GPRS services.
3. Trace the signaling over the Um interface on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to
Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. The information elements P0 and
PR_MODE are carried in the messages PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT,
IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT, PACKET DOWNLINK ASSIGNMENT, DTM
ASSIGNMENT COMMAND, and PACKET TIMESLOT RECONFIG.
NOTE
Take the message PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT as an example. The value of is-p0 is
1, and p0 and pr-mode are carried in the message. (When PS power control is not activated,
the value of is-p0 is 0.)
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSPWPARA. In this step, set
Support PS Downlink Power Control to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating PS Power Control
SET GCELLPSPWPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPSDLPC=YES, PCMEASCHAN=BCCH;
MCSSTATTHR=10, MCSSTABTHR=8, DLPCSTARTTHR=MCS9, DLPCINITPR=DB0,
TGTCIRPOS=3, TGTCIROFFSET=2, MAXPCSTEP=1, PSPCPRES=0.6dB, DummyPRGran=15,
USFDummyPCFactor=3;
//Deactivating PS Power Control
SET GCELLPSPWPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPSDLPC=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 145 Configuring PS Power Control
461
146 Configuring PDCH Dynamic
Adjustment with Two Thresholds
PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds.
Prerequisites
required.
l License
The cell is configured with dynamic TCHFs.
Context
With this feature, the conversion between PDCH and TCH can be dynamically performed
according to the traffic load in the cell. This feature effectively increases the channel usage,
reduces the possibility of CS services preempting the radio resources of PS services, and
therefore improves the CS access performance and PS retainability performance.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set Uplink
Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion, Downlink Multiplex
Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion, Upper Threshold for CS Idle
Channel Rate, Lower Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate, Inter_Cell PS
Resource Preempt Allowed, and Inter_Cell PS Resource Preempted Allowed to
GBSS
146 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two
Thresholds
462
appropriate values. The value of Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate must
be less than 100.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PS Service
Guaranteed Rate to an appropriate value.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA. In this step,
set bit 18 of Cell ReservedParameter 4 to 1.
NOTE
The following configuration is temporarily implemented to quickly bring this feature into effect. For
a commercial network, it is recommended that the configuration be implemented as planned. Restore
to the original configuration after the verification.
1. Configure sufficient idle timeslots.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLPSCHM. In this step, set Upper
Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate to a small value (for example, 20), Lower
Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate to a small value (for example, 5), Maximum
Rate Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell to 100, and Reservation Threshold of Dynamic
Channel Conversion to 0.
3. Configure one static PDCH and multiple TCHFs. Ensure that at least 4 PDCHs can
be generated through channel conversion after PS services are initiated, and that the
proportion of idle TCHs is greater than the value of Upper Threshold for CS Idle
Channel Rate.
4. Use two MSs to process PS services (data downloading). When the proportion of idle
TCHs to all TCHs is greater than the value of Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel
Rate, TCHF-to-PDCH conversion is triggered.
5. Use more MSs to process PS services (data downloading). When the proportion of
idle TCHs to all TCHs is greater than the value of Lower Threshold for CS Idle
Channel Rate and the average downlink load of PDCHs in the cell is greater than the
value of Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion, TCHF-
to-PDCH conversion is triggered.
6. Initiate CS services to occupy more TCHs. When the proportion of idle TCHs to all
TCHs is less than the value of Lower Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate, idle
PDCHs are converted to TCHs.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set Downlink
Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion to the value before this
feature is activated and Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate to 100.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PS Service
Guaranteed Rate to the value before this feature is activated.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA. In this step,
set bit 18 of Cell ReservedParameter 4 to 0.
----End
Example
//Activating PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds
SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPDYNCHNTRANLEV=20,
DWNDYNCHNTRANLEV=20, CHIDLHIGHTHR=20, CHIDLLOWTHR=10, PSRESPREEMPT=YES,
PSRESPREEMPTED=YES;
SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PDCHGBR=64K;
SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CellPSReservePara4=262144;
GBSS
Thresholds
463
//Deactivating PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds
SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DWNDYNCHNTRANLEV=10,
CHIDLHIGHTHR=100;
SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PDCHGBR=32K;
SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CellPSReservePara4=0;
GBSS
Thresholds
464
147 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing
Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User
Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User.
Prerequisites
A built-in PCU, packet service processing board, and Gb interface board have been
configured.
The feature GBFD-114201 EGPRS has been configured before this feature is activated.
l License
The Gb interface has been configured. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface
(over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP).
Context
This feature controls the proportion of Um interface resources allocated to GPRS users and
EGPRS users by adjusting GPRS/EGPRS timeslot multiplexing priority parameter settings,
thereby increasing the network throughput.
Procedure
MAC Scheduling Type to PFSCHEDULE(Proportion Fair Scheduling).
2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In
this step, set Priority Weight of EGPRS Users to an appropriate value based on the
network plan.
GBSS
147 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/
EGPRS User
465
NOTE
The default value of Priority Weight of EGPRS Users is 1. If this parameter is set to another
value, EGPRS and GPRS users are multiplexed based on their priorities.
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In
this step, set Downlink Minimum Guaranteed Rate to an appropriate value based
on the network plan.
Priority Weight of EGPRS Users to the minimum value, 1.
2. Use two MSs, one supporting EGPRS and the other supporting GPRS, to download
data through FTP simultaneously. Check the downloading rates of the two MSs.
Priority Weight of EGPRS Users to the maximum value, 3. Then, check the
downloading rates of the two MSs. The expected result is that the downloading rate
of the EGPRS MS increases whereas the downloading rate of the GPRS MS decreases.
Priority Weight of EGPRS Users to the default value 1 or set MAC Scheduling
Type to a value other than PFSCHEDULE.
----End
Example
SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MACSCHEDULETYPE=PFSCHEDULE;
SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsPriWeight=2;
SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DLMINGUARANTEERATE=12;
SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
MACSCHEDULETYPE=CIRSCHEDULE,
GBSS
147 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/
EGPRS User
466
148 Configuring EDA
Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA).
Prerequisites
required.
l License
This feature is supported by MS.
Context
Generally, the GPRS/EGPRS traffic is higher in downlink than in uplink. In some specific
situations (for example, sending large size email through the GPRS/EGPRS network), however,
the requirement on uplink bandwidth is stricter. The EDA feature can allocate three or more
timeslots for an MS in the uplink. If the high multislot class is supported, five timeslots can be
allocated to the MS of high multislot class 34 in the uplink, thus meeting the requirement for
higher bandwidth in the uplink.
The use of the EDA feature needs the support from the MS. In the radio access capability reported
to the network, the MS indicates whether it supports GPRS uplink EDA or EGRPS uplink EDA.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set
Support EDA to SUPPORT(Support).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 148 Configuring EDA
467
1. Start the Gb Interface PTP Trace window on the LMT and use the MS to dial a number
(activate PDP context).
The expected result: Check in the ACTIVE PDP CONTEXT ACCEPT message that
the value of gprs-extended-dynamic-allocation-capability is 1or the value of egprs-
extended-dynamic-alloccation is 1.
Support EDA to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA to check the value of
Support EDA.
The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Not Support.
4. Use the MS to perform FTP uploading services.
5. Record the uploading speed and the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS.
NOTE
If the cell has only one MS, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to check number
of PDCHs with the Number of Uplink TBFs (GPRS) or Number of Uplink TBFs
(EGPRS) being 1 and record the result.
Support EDA to SUPPORT(Support).
Support EDA.
The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Support.
8. Use the MS to perform FTP uploading services.
9. Record the uploading speed and the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS.
NOTE
If the cell has only one MS, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to check number
of PDCHs with the Number of Uplink TBFs (GPRS) or Number of Uplink TBFs
(EGPRS) being 1 and record the result.
10. Compare the results obtained in Step 5 and Step 9.
The expected result: As recorded in Step 9, the number of PDCHs occupied by the
MS is greater than or equal to 3, and the uploading speed is improved to a great extent
than that recorded in Step 5.
Support EDA to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).
Support EDA.
The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Not Support.
----End
Example
SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=SUPPORT;
SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=NOTSUPPORT;
LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:;
GBSS
468
DSP PDCH: IDXTYPE=BYCELL, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;
SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=SUPPORT;
LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:;
SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=NOTSUPPORT;
LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:;
GBSS
469
149 Configuring MS High Multislot
Classes
MS High Multislot Classes.
Prerequisites
required.
This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-119401 Extended Dynamic
Allocation (EDA) when more than two timeslots are required on the uplink.
l License
This feature is supported by MS.
Context
The function of MS High Multislot Classes enables the allocation of a maximum of five uplink/
downlink timeslots to an MS, thus increasing the uplink/downlink throughput of an MS.
Procedure
Support High Multislot Class to SUPPORT(Support).
1. Start the tracing of the messages in the PS domain on the Um interface. For details,
see Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 149 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes
470
2. Use the MS to download data in the test cell.
3. Double-click the Packet Downlink Assignment message in the traced messages, and
query the value of the timeslot-allocation information element (IE). Verify that the
number of 1s in the value of the IE in the corresponding binary bitmap reaches the
maximum number of downlink timeslots in the high multislot capability.
Support High Multislot Class to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
Example
\\Activation Procedure
SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTDL5TS=SUPPORT;
\\Deactivation Procedure
SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTDL5TS=NOTSUPPORT;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 149 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes
471
150 Configuring DTM
DTM.
Prerequisites
configured.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-114001 Extended Cell or
GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2).
l License
If the network operation mode II or III is configured, BSS paging coordination must be
configured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transfer mode.
For details on how to configure BSS paging coordination, see 142 Configuring BSS
Paging Coordination.
Early Classmark Sending Control (ECSC) must be configured so that the MS can
automatically send the classmark control message to the network as early as possible
after the immediate assignment.
NOTE
ECSC can be configured by running the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC.
The MSC and MS support DTM.
The MSC must support the COMMON ID message.
Context
DTM allows simultaneous transfer of CS services and PS services. That is, a subscriber can send
photos or browse websites during a voice call. In a 3G network, the speech and data services are
processed in parallel. In this sense, DTM enables the GSM subscribers to enjoy the services
similar to those provided by the 3G network. In addition, the 2G network can complement the
3G network in terms of coverage.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 150 Configuring DTM
472
Procedure
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT
(Support).
1. Use the MS to make a CS call.
2. Initiate the single-user CS signaling tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing CS
Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber.
3. Use the MS to perform PS data downloading services.
4. Check the single-user CS signaling tracing result.
Expected result: PS downloading services are performed successfully while the CS
call is not affected.
NOTE
One of the following messages is traced: DTM Request, DTM Assignment Command, or
Packet Assignment.
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and SUPPORT DTM to
UNSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
Example
//Activating DTM
SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT;
//Deactivating DTM
SUPPORTDTM=UNSUPPORT;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 150 Configuring DTM
473
151 Configuring Class11 DTM
Class11 DTM.
Prerequisites
configured.
Features GBFD-114151 DTM and GBFD-119401 EDA have been configured before
l License
configured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transfer mode.
For details on how to configure BSS paging coordination, see 142 Configuring BSS
Paging Coordination.
NOTE
ECSC can be configured by running the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC.
DTM should be supported by the MSC. Class11 DTM should be supported by the MS.
Context
Based on common DTM, Class 11 DTM doubles the bandwidth for the uplink PS services of
the MS. When an MS using Class11 DTM provides mainly uplink service, the channel
assignment of Speech + 1Downlink + 2Uplink is supported. That is, two uplink PDCHs and one
downlink PDCH are assigned to the MS.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 151 Configuring Class11 DTM
474
Procedure
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT
(Support), and Support Class11 DTM to SUPPORT(Support).
1. Make a CS call.
3. Initiate the single-user PS signaling tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing PS
4. Use the MS to perform PS data uploading services.
6. Check the single-user PS signaling tracing result.
Expected result:
PS services are performed successfully while the CS call is not affected.
NOTE
One of the following messages is traced in the single-user CS signaling tracing: DTM Request,
DTM Assignment Command, or Packet Assignment.
Single-user PS signaling tracing result shows that two uplink PDCHs are occupied by service
messages.
(Support), and Support Class11 DTM to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
Example
//Activating Class11 DTM
SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, CLASS11DTM=SUPPORT;
//Deactivating Class11 DTM
SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, CLASS11DTM=UNSUPPORT;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 151 Configuring Class11 DTM
475
152 Configuring HMC DTM
HMC DTM.
Prerequisites
required.
feature depends on the following features: GBFD-114151 DTM, GBFD-119401 EDA,
GBFD-119402 MS High multislot classes.
l License
configured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transmission
mode.
DTM should be supported by the MSC. DTM HMC should be supported by the MS.
Context
Based on common DTM, HMC DTM improves the bandwidth of the uplink and downlink PS
services of the MS. The MS can occupy a maximum of three uplink and downlink PDCHs
respectively during a call. The following channel assignments are supported: Speech +
3Downlink + 1Uplink, Speech + 2Downlink + 2Uplink, and Speech + 1Downlink + 3Uplink.
The DTM multislot classes defined in 3GPP specifications are classes 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 3133,
36-38, and 4144. The class 31-33 are called HMC DTM. For an MS of DTM multislot class
32-33, the Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA) function must be used if the MS requires more
than or equal to three channels in the uplink.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 152 Configuring HMC DTM
476
Procedure
(Support), and Support HMC DTM to SUPPORT(Support).
1. Make a CS call.
3. Initiate the single-user PS signaling tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing PS
4. Use the MS to perform PS data downloading services.
6. Check the single-user PS signaling tracing result.
Expected result:
PS services are performed successfully while the CS call is not affected.
NOTE
One of the following messages is traced in the single-user CS signaling tracing: DTM Request,
DTM Assignment Command, or Packet Assignment.
Single-user PS signaling tracing result shows that three PDCHs are occupied by service
messages.
(Support), and Support HMC DTM to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
Example
SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, HMCDTM=SUPPORT;
SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, HMCDTM=UNSUPPORT;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 152 Configuring HMC DTM
477
153 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit
Switched Data
This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature 14.4 kbit/s
Circuit Switched Data.
Prerequisites
BTS3012/AE/3006C/3002E does not support this feature when using non optimised
DTRU.
The BTS3900B/E does not support the feature.
l License
14.4kbit/s Circuit Switched Data of single-timeslot mode should be supported by the
MSC.
Context
Huawei GSM BSS supports the transfer of PS services on individual speech channels with a
high rate of 14.4 kbit/s for transparent data services.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, select
NT14_5K and T14_4K in the Data Service Allowed parameter.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT to check the value of
Data service allowed.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 153 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data
478
Expected result: The values of both T14_4K and NT14_5K in the Data service
allowed parameter are USED.
2. Use an MS to initiate a 14.4 kbit/s circuit switched data service. Then, trace the
signaling on the A interface.
Expected result: The service has been initiated. After the signaling on the A interface
is parsed, the value of Channel Type in the Assignment Request message is as
follows:
non-transparent data service
Figure 153-1 Non-transparent data service
transparent data service
Figure 153-2 Transparent data service
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, deselect
NT14_5K and T14_4K in the Data Service Allowed parameter.
----End
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 153 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data
479
154 Configuring High Speed Circuit
Switched Data
High Speed Circuit Switched Data.
Prerequisites
BTS3900E supports this feature.
The following TRX modules support this feature: GRFU V2, MRFU V2, GRFU V2a,
MRFU V2a, MRFUd, MRFUe, RRU3008 V2, RRU3908 V2, RRU3928, RRU3929,
RRU3942, and RRU3926.
This feature is incompatible with the following features: GBFD-117002 IBCA,
GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO.
l License
The license of this feature has been activated.
The MS and the CN must support this feature.
The feature works in a BM/TC combined mode.
Dual-timeslot extension cells do not support multislot HSCSD. CS domain data services
can only use a single timeslot.
Context
With this feature, a maximum of four TCHs can be combined to form a channel group. The data
rate of such a channel group reaches up to 57.6 kbps, improving user experience.
Procedure
ECSC to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set Data
Service Allowed to Choose All, and set Maximum Number of HSCSD Channels
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 154 Configuring High Speed Circuit Switched Data
480
and HSCSD Channel Scanning Period to appropriate values based on the network
plan.HSCSD Channel Scanning Period can be set to the default value.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set HSCSD
Traffic Busy Threshold to an appropriate value based on the network plan or the
default value.
5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step,
set the following reserved parameters to appropriate values:
Bit 13 of Reserved parameter 4: Specifies whether to change the primary channel
when a single channel is upgraded to multiple channels or multiple channels are
degraded to a single channel after the MS initiates HSCSD user rate speedup or
slowdown. If bit 13 is set to 1, the primary channel is not changed. If bit 13 is set
to 0, the primary channel is changed.
Bit 14 of Reserved parameter 4: Specifies whether to allow a call to preempt the
secondary channel for HSCSD services. If bit 14 is set to 1, the call can preempt
the secondary channel. If bit 14 is set to 0, the call cannot preempt the secondary
channel.
Bit 1 of Reserved parameter 10: Specifies whether to allow HSCSD channel
integration. If bit 1 is set to 1, HSCSD channel integration is not allowed. If bit 1
is set to 0, HSCSD channel integration is allowed.
NOTE
The cell to be verified is in the normal state and has at least 2 consecutive idle TCHF channels.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set
Maximum Number of HSCSD Channels to NOT_SUPPORT(Not Support).
2. Use a test MS to establish CS-based data services at a rate of 28.8 kbps.
3. Initiate A interface message tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing Messages on
the A Interface, and select BSSAP in the Trace Type area.
CS-based data services fail to be established. The Assignment Failure message is
traced on the A interface.
Maximum Number of HSCSD Channels to TWO_CHANNELS(Two
Channels).
5. Use a test MS to establish CS-based data services at a rate of 28.8 kbps.
6. Initiate A interface message tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing Messages on
the A Interface, and select BSSAP in the Trace Type area.
CS-based data services are established.
7. Monitor the channel state in the cell. The services occupy two consecutive channels.
Maximum Number of HSCSD Channels to NOT_SUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
Example
//Activating High Speed Circuit Switched Data
GBSS
481
//Enabling ECSC
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, ECSC=YES;
//Setting the data service, the maximum number of channels allowed for an
MS and the channel dynamic adjustment period
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2,
DATATRAFFSET=NT14_5K-1&NT12K-1&NT6K-1&T14_4K-1&T9_6K-1&T4_8K-1&T2_4K-1&T1
_2K-1&T600_BITS-1&T1200_75-1, HSCSDTRAFFSET=TWO_CHANNELS,
HSCSDSCANPER=4500;
//Setting HSCSD traffic busy threshold
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, HSCSDBUSYTHRES=80;
//Setting interface tag
//Setting that the primary channel is changed:
SET OTHSOFTPARA: BSCRESERVEDPARA4=57343;
//Setting that a call cannot preempt the secondary channel for HSCSD
services:
SET OTHSOFTPARA: BSCRESERVEDPARA4=49151;
//Setting that HSCSD channel integration is allowed:
SET GCELLOPTREV: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CELLOPTRSVPARA10=65533;
//Deactivating High Speed Circuit Switched Data
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, HSCSDTRAFFSET=NOT_SUPPORT;
GBSS
482
155 Configuring Resource Reservation
Resource Reservation.
Prerequisites
The license for this feature is activated.
Context
With the resource reservation feature, the system reserves a certain number of TCHFs for high-
priority users to ensure their QoS.
l Channel resources are reserved for high-priority users, therefore ensuring the QoS of the
VIP users and improving user experience.
l Resource reservation provides a segmentation function for operators. Using this function,
operators can provide different levels of services for users with different priorities. In this
way, the operation revenue is increased.
This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level
Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP) to better guarantee the benefits of users and improve the
user satisfaction.
Procedure
Grade Access Allow to YES(Yes), and set Highest Priority and Reserved Channel
Number to proper values.
Highest Priority to 7 and Reserved Channel Number to 1.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 155 Configuring Resource Reservation
483
2. Block the TCHs in cell 0 and reserve only one idle TCH.
3. Start Trace BSSAP Message on the A Interface of cell 0 on the LMT.
4. Use MS 1 to make a common call in cell 0. Then, check the priority delivered by the
CN in the assignment request.
Expected result: If the priority is greater than 7, the call fails. Otherwise, the call can
be established and a TCHF is assigned during the assignment procedure.
5. Use MS 1 to make an emergency call in cell 0. Then, check the priority delivered by
the CN in the assignment request.
Expected result: If the priority is greater than 7, the call fails. Otherwise, the call can
be established and a TCHF is assigned during the assignment procedure.
Grade Access Allow to NO(No).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCHMGBASIC to query the value
of Grade Access Allow.
Expected result: The value of Grade Access Allow is NO(No).
----End
Example
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GRADEACCALLOW=YES, HPRIOR=7,
REVCHANNUM=1;
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GRADEACCALLOW=YES, HPRIOR=7,
REVCHANNUM=1;
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GRADEACCALLOW=NO;
LST GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CELLID=0, LstFormat=VERTICAL;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 155 Configuring Resource Reservation
484
156 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level
Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP)
Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP).
Prerequisites
l License
The MSC, HLR, and MS support eMLPP.
Context
The eMLPP service offers a segmentation function. Using this feature, operators can provide
differentiated services for subscribers of different priorities. The eMLPP function ensures the
speech quality of high-priority MSs when the network traffic is heavy.
The MS needs to support eMLPP so that it can initiate calls of different priorities. This feature
ensures the service quality of high-priority calls by using methods such as preemption, queuing,
direct retry, and forced handovers.
eMLPP involves two mechanisms: preemption and queuing.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCBASIC to query the value of A
Interface Tag.
GBSS
156 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and
Preemption (eMLPP)
485
NOTE
If the value of A Interface Tag is not GSM_PHASE_2Plus, run the BSC6900 MML command
SET BSCBASIC to set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set
Preemption Allowed to YES(Yes) to allow high-priority MSs to preempt resources
for low-priority MSs when there is no resource available for high-priority MSs.
EMLPP as required.
NOTE
Service preemption is used as an example to describe the verification procedure. Assume that in Step 3,
Allow EMLPP is set to YES(Yes).
1. Prepare three test MSs (MS1, MS2, and MS3), and assign the highest priority for MS1
and the lowest priority for MS3 on the HLR side.
2. Configure data on the MSC side. Ensure that the resources for low-priority MSs can
be preempted by high-priority MSs.
3. On the BSC6900 LMT, initiate CS message tracing of a single user by referring to
Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Set Trace Object Symbol
Type to IMSI and enter the IMSI of the MS to be traced.
4. Use MS2 and MS3 to make PSTN calls in the test cell.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block
remaining idle TCHs in the cell.
6. Check the measurement reports sent by MSs on TCHs and determine the numbers of
the TCHs occupied by MS2 and MS3, as shown in Figure 156-1.
Figure 156-1 Single User CS Trace dialog box

7. Use MS1 to make a PSTN call in the cell.
8. If no neighboring relationship is correctly configured, view the measurement reports
sent by MS1 and check whether MS1 has preempted the TCH used by MS2 or MS3.
GBSS
Preemption (eMLPP)
486
The call of MS3 is released. MS1 and MS2 continue their calls properly. Check the
measurement reports sent by MS1. The number of the TCH occupied by MS1 is the
same as that of the TCH occupied by MS3 in step 6. This indicates that MS1 occupies
the TCH of MS3.
9. If neighboring relationship is correctly configured, view the measurement reports sent
by MS1 to check whether MS1 has preempted the TCH used by MS2 or MS3 and
check whether the preempted MS has been handed over to a neighboring cell to
continue the call properly.
MS1, MS2, and MS3 make calls properly. MS1 preempts the TCH of MS3, and MS3
has been handed over to a neighboring cell. Check the measurement reports sent by
MS3. The number of the TCH occupied by MS3 is a TCH number of the neighboring
cell.
Preemption Allowed to NO(No).
Tag to its original value in the activation procedure.
----End
GBSS
Preemption (eMLPP)
487
157 Configuring Flow Control Based on
Cell Priority
Flow Control Based on Cell Priority.
Prerequisites
The feature GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control has been configured before this feature
is activated.
The two features are recommended working together: GBFD-115002 Flow Control
Based on Cell Priority and GBFD-115003 Flow control based on User priority. The
former one controls uplink flow and the latter one controls downlink flow.
Context
This feature is enabled when the BSC is congested to ensure the calls in VIP cells and the paging
to VIP MSs. This feature has no impact on the BSC operation or the high-priority call continuity
success rate.
This feature is applied to scenarios where traffic intensity becomes extremely great in case of
natural disasters. When the GSM network is congested due to an unexpected traffic peak, VIP
cells are created by splitting up existing cells or adding base stations. Special Location Area
Codes (LACs) are assigned to the VIP cells, and roaming areas are specified for the special
LACs at the CN. Only VIP MSs are allowed to camp on VIP cells, which avoids that a large
number of common MSs camp on VIP cells and then VIP cells become congested again. The
CN does not impose roaming area limitation on a common cell. In this case, a large number of
users may camp on a common cell. Then, congestion may occur to this common cell. As a result,
services provided by the cell are affected.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 157 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority
488
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL or MOD GCELL. In this step, set
VIP Cell to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA. In this step, set Support
Priority Based Flow Control to YES(Yes), and set VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIP
Access CPU Rate, and VIP Priority.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELL to query the value of VIP Cell.
Expected result: The value of VIP Cell to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCFCPARA to query the values of
Support Priority Based Flow Control, VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIP Access CPU
Rate, and VIP Priority.
Expected result: The value of Support Priority Based Flow Control is YES(Yes).
The parameters VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIP Access CPU Rate, and VIP
Priority are set to some values.
3. When service congestion occurs in the BSC, check whether the call setup success rate
of a VIP cell and the call setup success rate of VIP users are affected.
Expected result: Ongoing services in the VIP cell and ongoing VIP services are
normal. In addition, call setup success rates of new services in the VIP cell and new
VIP services increase.
Priority Based Flow Control is NO(No).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set VIP Cell to NO
(No).
----End
Example
//Setting a VIP cell
ADD GCELL: CELLID=0, CELLNAME="cell", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="460", MNC="188",
LAC=10, CI=1, IUOTP=Normal_cell, FLEXMAIO=OFF, VIPCELL=YES;
//Enabling the Flow Control Based on Cell Priority function
SET BSCFCPARA: PRIFCEN=YES, VIPSHAREINCPURATE=50, VIPACCESSCPURATE=80,
VIPPRIORITY=LEVEL0;
//Disabling the Flow Control Based on Cell Priority function
SET BSCFCPARA: PRIFCEN=NO;
//Changing a cell from VIP to non-VIP
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VIPCELL=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 157 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority
489
158 Configuring Flow Control Based on
User Priority
Flow Control Based on User Priority.
Prerequisites
The feature GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control has been configured before this feature
is activated.
The two features are recommended working together: GBFD-115002 Flow Control
Based on Cell Priority and GBFD-115003 Flow control based on User priority. The
former one controls uplink flow and the latter one controls downlink flow.
l License
The paging messages sent by the core network carries eMLPP information.
Context
With this feature, user signaling is differentiated based on user priority to ensure that services
of high-priority users are not affected while signaling of low-priority users may be discarded.
Procedure
Priority Based Flow Control to YES(Yes) and VIP Priority to an appropriate value
based on the flow control imposed on calls of different priorities.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 158 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority
490
NOTE
Flow control is not performed on users whose priority is higher than VIP Priority.
1. Initiate a large number of calls to make the traffic volume exceeds the system
specification.
2. Deliver short message paging to high-priority users and speech paging to other users
at the core network side.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PAGINGNUM to query the number of
discarded paging messages.
Expected result: Paging messages for short message services are not discarded and
those for speech services are discarded.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA with Support Priority
Based Flow Control set to NO(No).
5. Repeat Step 2.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PAGINGNUM to query the number of
discarded paging messages.
Expected result: Paging messages for short message services are discarded and those
for speech services are not discarded.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA with Support Priority
Based Flow Control set to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Flow Control Based on User Priority
SET BSCFCPARA: PRIFCEN=YES, VIPPRIORITY=LEVEL0;
//Deactivating Flow Control Based on User Priority
SET BSCFCPARA: PRIFCEN=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 158 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority
491
159 Configuring PS Service in Priority
PS Service in Priority.
Prerequisites
configured.
l License
The MS and SGSN support this feature.
Context
Using different resource scheduling policies on the Um interface, this feature makes it possible
to provide differentiated services for PS users of different priorities. This ensures better
experience for high-priority users.
Procedure
1. Run the MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support
PS Service in Priority to SUPPORT(Support), MAC Scheduling Type to
PFSCHEDULE(Proportion Fair Scheduling), and Downlink Minimum
Guaranteed Rate and Rate Filter Time Window to appropriate values based on the
site requirements.
Assume that in the registration information, Traffic class is set to the same value:
INTERACT for MS1 and MS2, and all other information is the same for both MSs except
the values of Traffic handling priority and Allocation/Retention priority.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 159 Configuring PS Service in Priority
492
1. When the Um interface quality is the same for MS1 and MS2, use the two MSs to
perform EDGE download services with the same coding scheme and either of them
occupies four PDCHs. Observe the download rate.
Expected result: The ratio of MS1 download rate to MS2 download rate is consistent
with the ratio of MS1 THP-ARP priority weight to MS2 THP-ARP priority weight.
NOTE
THP-ARP priority weight can be configured in the MML command SET GCELLPSCHM.
1. Run the MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support
PS Service in Priority to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
Example
//Activating PS Service in Priority
SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, PSDIFSERVICESUP=SUPPORT,
MACSCHEDULETYPE=PFSCHEDULE, DLMINGUARANTEERATE=10, RATEFILTERTIMEWIN=50;
//Deactivating PS Service in Priority
SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024,
PSDIFSERVICESUP=NOTSUPPORT;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 159 Configuring PS Service in Priority
493
160 Configuring Network Support SAIC
Network Support SAIC.
Prerequisites
l License
The MS supports Single Antenna Interference Cancellation (SAIC).
Context
SAIC is a technique that restraints both intra-frequency and inter-frequency interference when
the MS receives signals through a single antenna. SAIC aims to minimize the impact of
interference on the receive quality of downlink signals through signaling processing.
The SAIC-capable MS has a greater capability of bearing interference than the SAIC-incapable
MS. Therefore, the power control policy can be adjusted for the SAIC-capable MS to reduce the
transmit power of the BTS, reducing interference in the entire network.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set SAIC
2. Set power control adjustment.
When Huawei II power control algorithm is used:
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 160 Configuring Network Support SAIC
494
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR2. In this step, set
Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC to 1.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set
Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC PC Adjust to ON(On).
When Huawei III power control algorithm is used:
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, set
Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC to 3.
1. On the BSC6900 LMT, initiate A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing
Messages on the A Interface. Use the MS to make a CS voice call. Check the value
of Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance in the information element (IE)
classmark-information-type3 of the Classmark Update message. This value indicates
the SAIC capability of the MS.
Expected result: The value of Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance is Support
SAIC.
2. On the BSC6900 LMT, initiate Abis interface RSL message tracing by referring to
Tracing CS Domain RSL Messages on the Abis Interface. Check the value of the user-
defined IE MS Capability in the channel activation command sent from the
BSC6900 to the BTS during the assignment request process.
Expected result: The value of SAIC support capability is 1. This indicates that the MS
supports SAIC.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set SAIC
Allowed to NO(No).
2. When Huawei II power control algorithm is used, Run the BSC6900 MML
command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC
PC Adjust to OFF(Off).
----End
Example
//Activating Network Support SAIC
SET GCELLPWRBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SAICALLOWED=YES;
SET GCELLPWR2: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SAICTHREDAPDTVALUE=1;
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSSAICPCADJSWITCH=ON;
//Deactivating Network Support SAIC
SET GCELLPWRBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SAICALLOWED=NO;
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSSAICPCADJSWITCH=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 160 Configuring Network Support SAIC
495
161 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID
+ TA)
NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).
Prerequisites
l License
This feature requires support from the CN.
The MSC supports the LCS.
The test cell is operational, and idle channels are available in the test cell.
Context
The LCS is used to provide a series of specific services based on the location of the MS. For
example, the LCS can locate the MS that initiates an emergency call or provide the information
on the MS location for other value added services (VAS). LCS can be categorized into three
types: NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), and simple mode LCS
(cell ID + TA). In the NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC provides the cell ID and TA of
an MS for the MSC, and then the MSC calculates the MS location. In the BSS-based LCS (cell
ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends
the location information to the MSC. In the simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates
the MS location based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information to
the MS through single user trace messages.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 161 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)
496
Procedure
l Activation Procedure(NSS-based LCS in idle mode (cell ID + TA))
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET AITFOTHPARA. In this step, set Add TA
to A Interface EST IND to OPEN(Open).
l Activation Procedure(NSS-based LCS in dedicated mode (cell ID + TA))
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC, In this setp, set SMLC
Mode to INNER(Inner).
to A Interface EST IND to OPEN(Open).
l Verification Procedure(NSS-based LCS in idle mode (cell ID + TA))
1. Initiate A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages on the A
Interface. Select the BSSAP check box in the Trace Type area.
2. Use an MS to originate a call and keep the call alive.
3. Check the APDU information element (IE) in the CM Service Request message traced
on the A interface.
The APDU IE carries timing advance (TA) information of the MS.
l Verification Procedure(NSS-based LCS in dedicated mode (cell ID + TA))
1. Initiate A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages on the A
Interface. Select the BSSAP check box in the Trace Type area.
3. Check the APDU information element (IE) in the CM Service Request message traced
on the A interface.
The APDU IE carries timing advance (TA) information of the MS.
l Deactivation Procedure(NSS-based LCS in idle mode (cell ID + TA))
to A Interface EST IND to CLOSE(Close).
l Deactivation Procedure(NSS-based LCS in dedicated mode (cell ID + TA))
to A Interface EST IND to CLOSE(Close).
----End
Example
//Activating NSS-based LCS in idle mode (cell ID + TA)
SET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG=OPEN;
//Activating NSS-based LCS in dedicated mode (cell ID + TA)
ADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=0, OPNAME="0", SMLCMode=INNER;
SET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG=OPEN;
//Deactivating NSS-based LCS in idle mode (cell ID + TA)
SET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG=CLOSE;
//Deactivating NSS-based LCS in dedicated mode (cell ID + TA)
SET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG=CLOSE;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 161 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)
497
162 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID
+ TA)
BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).
Prerequisites
l License
The CN must support this feature.
Context
LCS is used to locate an MS with precision of a certain level and provide a series of specific
services based on the location of the MS. For example, LCS can locate an MS that initiates an
emergency call or provide information about the MS location for other value added services
(VASs). LCS can be categorized into three types: NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), BSS-based
LCS (cell ID + TA), and simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA). In the NSS-based LCS (cell ID +
TA), the BSC provides the cell ID and TA of an MS for the MSC, and then the MSC calculates
the MS location. In the BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location
based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information to the MSC. In the
simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location based on the cell ID and
TA of the MS and sends the location information to the MS through single user trace messages.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 162 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)
498
Procedure
1. Run the ADD GEXTSMLC command to add settings of the SMLC to the test cell.
In this step, set SMLC Mode to INNER(Inner).
NOTE
Run the LST GCELL to obtain Operator Name.
2. Run the SET GCELLLCS command to configure the LCS parameters of a cell.
1. Enable an Tracing Messages on the A Interface task, and select BSSAP in the test
cell.
2. Use an MS to initiate a call and hold on after the call is established successfully.
3. Check that the Perform Location Request message and Perform Location
Response message are traced over the A interface after the MSC is triggered on the
MSC side to request location information query. Check that the correct MS location
can be displayed on the MSC.
1. Run the MOD GEXTSMLC command to add settings of the SMLC to the test cell.
In this step, set SMLC Mode to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
Example
ADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=INNER;
SET GCELLLCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NSLATI=North_latitude;
MOD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=NOTSUPPORT;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 162 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)
499
163 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (Cell
ID + TA)
Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA).
Prerequisites
l License
Context
The LCS is used to provide a series of specific services based on the location of the MS. For
example, the LCS can locate the MS that initiates an emergency call or provide the information
on the MS location for other value added services (VAS). LCS can be categorized into three
types: NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), and simple mode LCS
(cell ID + TA). In the NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC provides the cell ID and TA of
an MS for the MSC, and then the MSC calculates the MS location. In the BSS-based LCS (cell
ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends
the location information to the MSC. In the simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates
the MS location based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information to
the MS through single user trace messages.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 163 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)
500
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC to add SMLC configurations
to the operator of the test cell. In this step, set SMLC Mode to INNER(Inner).
NOTE
To obtain the operator of a cell, run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELL. Operator
Name in the returned result specifies the operator.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLLCS to configure the LCS
parameters of the test cell.
3. After the preceding configurations are complete, log out of the LMT and then log in
to it again.
Messages of a Single Subscriber. In this step, select the Location Flag check box.
3. Check the traced messages.
Verify that the MS location information sent to the MS is correct.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXTSMLC to modify the SMLC
configurations for the operator of the test cell. In this step, set SMLC Mode to
NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
Example
//Activating Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)
ADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=INNER;
SET GCELLLCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, NSLATI=North_latitude;
//Deactivating Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)
MOD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=NOTSUPPORT;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 163 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)
501
164 Configuring Lb Interface
Lb Interface.
Prerequisites
l License
The MSC supports the location service.
The MS supports the assisted GPS (AGPS) location service when the AGPS positioning
method is used.
The operator is configured. Assume that the operator name is op1.
Context
The BSC6900 supports four types of location services:
l NSS-Based LCS (Cell ID + TA)
l BSS-Based LCS (Cell ID + TA)
l Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)
l LCS based on an external Serving Mobile Location Center (SMLC) which is connected to
the BSC6900 through the Lb interface
The first three types of LCS adopt a built-in SMLC, that is, positioning is performed by the BSS
internal algorithm. The last type of LCS adopts an external SMLC, that is, positioning is
performed by a third-party network element. LCS based on a built-in SMLC and that based on
an external SMLC cannot be used together. This feature is the last type of LCS.
The Lb interface is a standard interface between BSC and SMLC. The main function of the
SMLC is to locate an MS based on the measurement results reported by the MS.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 164 Configuring Lb Interface
502
Huawei BSS equipment supports the standard Lb interface, and therefore can be interconnected
with the SMLC of other vendors. Figure 164-1 shows the position of the SMLC in the network.
Figure 164-1 Position of the SMLC in the network

Generally, one BSC is connected to only one SMLC. When the BSS Sharing feature is enabled,
one BSC can be interconnected with four SMLCs of four different operators.
A BSC can be connected to an SMLC in the following ways:
l By adding an Lb interface board
TDM or IP transport can be used over the Lb interface.
l Without adding an Lb interface board
In BM/TC separated configuration mode, if TDM transport is used over the Lb interface,
the Lb interface must be configured on the Ater interface board of the BM subrack or
on the A interface board of the TC subrack.
In BM/TC combined configuration mode, if TDM transport is used over the Lb
interface, the Lb interface must be configured on the A interface board.
If IP transport is used over the Lb interface, the Lb interface must be configured on the
A or Abis interface board of the BM subrack.
To connect the BSC6900 to an SMLC, data needs to be negotiated and planned for the Lb
interface. Table 164-1 and Table 164-2 provide Lb interface configuration examples.
Table 164-1 Lb interface configuration example (TDM transport)
Parameters Configuration Data Source
OSP Code 1 Negotiated with the peer end
DSP Code 2 Negotiated with the peer end
Network ID NATB(NATB) Negotiated with the peer end
OSP code bits BIT14 Negotiated with the peer end
SS7 protocol type ITUT(ITUT) Negotiated with the peer end
Signalling link code 0 Negotiated with the peer end
Link rate type 64K(64Kbit/s) Negotiated with the peer end
GBSS
503
Parameters Configuration Data Source
Link timeslot (A interface
timeslot mask or A interface
timeslot mask)
TS16(Timeslot 16) Negotiated with the peer end
Test Code Length 10 Negotiated with the peer end
Test Code 170 Negotiated with the peer end

Table 164-2 Lb interface configuration example (IP transport)
Parameter Configuration Data Source
OSP Code 1 Negotiated with the peer end
DSP Code 2 Negotiated with the peer end
Network ID NATB(NATB) Negotiated with the peer end
OSP code bits BIT14 Negotiated with the peer end
SS7 protocol type ITUT(ITUT) Negotiated with the peer end
Local entity type M3UA_IPSP(M3UA IPSP) Negotiated with the peer end
Destination Entity Type M3UA_IPSP(M3UA IPSP) Negotiated with the peer end
Traffic mode M3UA_OVERRIDE_MOD
(Active/Standby Mode)
Negotiated with the peer end
Work mode M3UA_IPSP(M3UA IPSP) Negotiated with the peer end

In multiple local signaling points scenarios, configure the Lb interface according to the following
operations. Specifically, establish the relationship between the signaling points and the SMLCs
and configure related link and route information for the signaling points and the SMLCs.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure (Adding an Lb interface board)
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an interface board. In this step,
set Board Class to INT, and set Subrack No., Slot No., Board Type, and other
parameters to appropriate values.
2. Select one of the following activation procedures based on the transport technology
adopted over the Lb interface:
l Activation Procedure (BM/TC Separated Configuration, Lb over TDM, and Lb Interface
Configured on an Ater Interface Board of the BM Subrack)
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add a DSP. In this step, set DSP
name, DSP index, and OSP index according to the actual situation, set DSP code to
the signaling point code of the SMLC, DSP type to LB(LB), and DSP bear type to
MTP3(MTP3).
GBSS
504
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC to add an SMLC. In this step,
set SMLC Index and Operator Name according to the actual situation; set SMLC
Mode to OUTER(Outer) and DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1.
NOTE
Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXTSMLC to query the value of SMLC Mode for the
target SMLC.
If the BSC6900 has the SMLC function, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXTSMLC.
In this step, set SMLC Index and Operator Name, and set SMLC Mode to OUTER(Outer).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 to add an E1/T1 over the Ater
interface. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGBM(BM); set Ater connection
path index to a value that is not in use; set Subrack No., Slot No, and Port No
according to the actual cable connection over the Lb interface.
set. In this step, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signalling
link set index to a value that is not in use.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 signaling link.
In this step, set Signalling link set index to the index added in Step 4, TC mode to
SEPERATE_BSC_INTERFACE(BSC Interface), Ater connection path index to
the index added in Step 3, Signalling link code and MTP2 link No. to values that
are not in use, and Ater Mask to the negotiated value.
step, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signalling link set
index to the index added in Step 4.
l Activation Procedure (Lb over TDM and Lb Interface Configured on A Interface Board)
name, DSP index, and OSP index according to the actual situation; set DSP code to
MTP3(MTP3).
NOTE
target SMLC.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 to add an E1/T1 link to the target
port on the A interface board. In this step, set Subrack No., Slot No, and Port No to
the port that the link is connected. Then, set other parameters to appropriate values.
set. In this step, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signalling
link set index to a value that is not in use.
In this step, set TC mode to SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL(Principal BSC) or
TOGETHER(BSC/TC Together). Then set other parameters based on the
negotiation or the transmission configuration.
GBSS
505
NOTE
l In BM/TC separated configuration mode, set TC mode to SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL
(Principal BSC); set Ater connection path index to the value that is in use; set Signalling link
code and MTP2 link No. to values that are not in use; set A interface subrack No., A interface
slot No., and A interface port No. according to the actual cable connection over the Lb interface;
set Ater Mask and A interface timeslot mask to the values negotiated with the SMLC.
l In BM/TC combined configuration mode, set TC mode to TOGETHER(BSC/TC
Together); set Signalling link code and MTP2 link No. to the values that are not in use; set A
interface subrack No., A interface slot No., and A interface port No. based on the actual cable
connection over the Lb interface; set A interface timeslot mask to the negotiated value.
index to the index added in Step 4.
l Activation Procedure (Lb over IP)
name, DSP index, and OSP index according to the actual situation; set DSP code to
M3UA(M3UA).
NOTE
target SMLC.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE to add an M3UA local entity. In this
step, set Local entity No. to a value that is not in use; set OSP index and Local entity
type based on the network plan.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE to add an M3UA destination entity.
In this step, set Destination entity No. to a value that is not in use; set Local entity
No. and DSP index to the values specified in Step 3 and Step 1 respectively; set
Destination entity type to an appropriate value.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link. In this
step, set Subrack No., Slot No., SCTP link No., and Logic Port Flag based on the
network plan; set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD) and
Application type to M3UA(M3UA); set First local IP address, First destination
IP address, and Destination SCTP port No. to the values negotiated with the
engineers of the SMLC.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS to add an M3UA link set. In this
step, set Signalling link set index to a value that is not in use. In this step:
If Local entity type is set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP) in Step 3, set Work
mode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP).
If Local entity type is set to M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP) in Step 3 and
Destination entity type is set to M3UA_SP(M3UA SP) in Step 4, set Work
mode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP). Otherwise, set Work
mode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP).
GBSS
506
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route. In this step,
set Destination entity No. and Signalling link set index to the values specified in
Step 4 and Step 6 respectively.
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK to add an M3UA link. In this step,
set Signalling link set index to the value specified in Step 6; set SCTP link No. to
the value specified in Step 5; set Signaling link ID, Subrack No., Slot No., and
M3UA Signaling link name according to the actual situation.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXTSMLC to query the value of SMLC
Mode.
Expected result: The value of SMLC Mode is OUTER(Outer).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC. In this step, set DSP index to DSP
index of the SMLC.
Expected result: The value of SCCP DSP state is Accessible. The value of MTP3
DSP state is Available or the value of M3UA DSP state is Available.
3. Initiate a location service on the LCS client side, as shown in Figure 164-1.
Expected result: The target MS is located.
1. Run the MOD GEXTSMLC command. In this step, set SMLC Mode to
NOTSUPPORT.
----End
Example
/*Activation procedure (BM/TC separated configuration, Lb over TDM, and
Lb interface configured on an Ater interface board)*/
//Adding a DPC
ADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc1", DPX=2, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=111, DPCT=LB,
BEARTYPE=MTP3;
//Adding an SMLC
ADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=0, OPNAME="op1", SMLCMode=OUTER, DPX=2;
//Adding an E1/T1 link over the Ater Interface
ADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=0, SRN=0, SN=10, PN=12;//Adding an
MTP3 signaling link set
ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=2, NAME="MTP3LKS";
//Adding an MTP3 signaling link
MTP2LNKN=2, LKTATE=64K, NAME="MTP3LNK";
ADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="LT";
/*Activation procedure (Lb over TDM and Lb interface configured on an A
interface board)*/
//Adding a DPC
BEARTYPE=MTP3;
//Adding an SMLC
//Configuring the A interface E1/T1
GBSS
507
ADD AE1T1: SRN=0, SN=10, PN=14, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLNULL,
BSCFLAG=MAINBSC;
//Adding an MTP3 signaling link set
//Adding an MTP3 signaling link
ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=0, TCMODE=TOGETHER, ASRN=0, ASN=10,
MTP2LNKN=0, APN=14,
ATSMASK=TS1-0&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11
-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-1&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&
TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0,
LKTATE=64K, NAME="MTP3LNK";
ADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="LT";
/*Activation procedure (Lb over IP)*/
//Adding a DPC
BEARTYPE=M3UA;
//Adding an SMLC
//Adding an M3UA local entity
ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_ASP, NAME="m3ualocal";
//Adding an M3UA destination entity
ADD M3DE: DENO=1, LENO=0, DPX=2, ENTITYT=M3UA_SGP, NAME="m3uaaim";
//Adding an SCTP link
LOCIP1="10.20.30.40", PEERIP1="10.20.30.50", PEERPN=1024, LOGPORTFLAG=NO,
VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;
//Adding an M3UA link set
ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=1, NAME="m3uaidx";
//Adding an M3UA route
ADD M3RT: DENO=1, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="m3uarot";
//Adding an M3UA link
ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=1, SRN=0, SN=10, SCTPLNKN=1, NAME="m3ua";
//Disabling the SMLC mode
MOD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=0, SMLCMode=NOTSUPPORT;
GBSS
508
165 Configuring Abis over IP
Abis over IP.
Prerequisites
The BSC configured with the built-in PCU, that means the DPUd or DPUg board is
configured.
The FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa, GOUc, or GOUd board is in position.
The BTS supports IP transmission.
This feature cannot be used with the features GBFD-117801 Ring Topology, GBFD-
117301 Flex Abis, GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on
Abis Interface, MRFD-210206 Tree Topology, MRFD-210205 Chain Topology,
GBFD-113729 Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking and GBFD-119301 Voice Fault
Diagnosis together.
l License
l Initial Data Preparation
When device IP is used in transmission, the BTS is configured with a static route to the
device IP of the local BSC.
When IP fault detection based on BFD is configured, the device connected to the BSC
supports BFD.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 165 Configuring Abis over IP
509
Context
NOTE
The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support Abis over IP.
When the layer 2 networking is used on the Abis interface, the BSC and BTS automatically performs the
Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) on links. In this case, the BTS is not allowed to use the device
IP address in communication.
With this feature, the BSC is connected to the BTS through a LAN or WAN, depending on the
location of the BSC and the BTS. This feature provides FE and GE interfaces and supports the
IPv4 protocol.
BFD applies to the following scenarios:When the BSC is connected to a peer device (such as a
BTS, MGW, or SGSN) through a router, BFD detects whether the router is available. When the
BSC is connected to a peer device (such as a BTS, MGW, or SGSN) directly, BFD detects
whether the peer device is available.With BFD, IP route reselection is triggered when the
gateway or the peer entity is faulty, thus avoiding continuous packet loss or call drop.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa,
GOUc, or GOUd board.
Data.
Data.
4. Configure the transmission data for the base station by referring to Configuring the
Transmission Data.
5. Configuring BTS/NodeB clock by referring to Configuring the BTS Clock.
6. Activate the base station configuration by referring to Activating the BTS
Configuration.
7. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command STR IPCHK. In this step, set the
parameters Check type, Check mode, Peer IP address, and Multi hop BFD detect
local ip based on the actual networking.
NOTE
l BFD requires support from both the local and peer devices and takes effect only when BFD
is enabled for both the local and peer devices. Otherwise, services may fail.
l If the Ethernet ports work in active/standby mode, set Check mode to
CHECK_ON_PRIMARY_PORT; if the Ethernet port works in independent mode, set
Check mode to CHECK_ON_INDEPENDENT_PORT.
l If Check type is set to SBFD, the single hop BFD is enabled. In this case, set Peer IP
address to an IP address that is on the same network segment as the local IP address.
l If Check type is set to MBFD, the multi-hop BFD is enabled. In this case, set Multi hop
BFD detect local ip to the device IP or port IP if the local board, and set Peer IP
address to an IP address that is on a different network segment from the local IP address.
1. Verifying data at the physical layer and the data link layer.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHPORT with subrack number, slot
number, and port number are those of the peer interface board connected to the
GBSS
510
BTS. Check Port state and Link Availability Status in the command execution
result.
The expected result: The value of Port state is Activated and Link Availability
Status is Available.
2. Verifying the control plane on the Abis interface
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the state of an
adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth
by checking related parameters, for example, Operation state.
The expected result: The value of Operation state is Available and the related
bandwidth is greater than 0.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPD
link is functional.
The expected result: The value of Usage status is Normal.
3. Verifying the user plane on the Abis interface
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to check whether the IP path
is available.
The expected result: The value of Operation state is Available and the available
bandwidth is greater than 0.
4. Optional: Verifying the BFD
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHK to query the value of Check
state.
The expected result: The value of Check state is UP or DOWN.
----End
Example
For configurations, see the typical script examples provided in section Configuring Transmission
Data of Chapter Configuring GSM BTS and Cell Data in the BSC6900 GSM Initial
Configuration.
GBSS
511
166 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1
Abis IP over E1/T1.
Prerequisites
The PEUa/POUc board is in position.
The BTS supports IP transmission.
This feature cannot be used with the features GBFD-117801 Ring Topology, GBFD-
117301 Flex Abis, GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface and
GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis together.
l License
Context
NOTE
The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support Abis over IP.
A license is required to implement Abis over IP.
When TDM transmission is used over the Abis interface, the IP over E1/T1 scheme can be used
to carry traffic and signaling data.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a PEUa/POUc board.
Data.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 166 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1
512
Data.
4. Configure the transmission data for the base station by referring to Configuring the
Transmission Data.
5. Configuring BTS/NodeB clock by referring toConfiguring the BTS Clock.
6. Activate the base station configuration by referring toActivating the BTS
Configuration.
1. Verify data at the physical layer and the data link layer.
a. Run the MML command DSP E1T1 to check the setting of Port State.
b. If the PPP link is used, run the MML command DSP PPPLNK to query Link
State, Local IP Address, and Peer IP Address. If the link state is normal and
the values of Local IP Address and Peer IP Address are consistent with data
configurations, proceed to the following steps. Otherwise, the transmission link
is faulty. Locate and rectify the fault.
c. If the MLPPP link is used, run the MML command DSP MPGRP to query Link
State, Local IP Address, and Peer IP Address, and run the DSP MPLNK
command to query Link State and LCP Negotiation State. If the link state is
normal, the value of LCP Negotiation State is Connect available, and the
values of Local IP Address and Peer IP Address are consistent with data
configurations, proceed to the following steps. Otherwise, the transmission link
is faulty. Locate and rectify the fault.
d. If the PPP link is used, run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source
IP address set to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP PPPLNK
command and Destination IP address set to the same value as Peer IP
address in the DSP PPPLNK command. If the statistics on PING packets can
be received, the PPP link is normal.
e. If the MLPPP link is used, run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with
Source IP address set to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP
MPGRP command and Destination IP address et to the same value as Peer IP
address in the DSP MPGRP command. If the statistics on PING packets can be
received, the MLPPP link is normal.
2. Verifying the control plane on the Abis interface
a. Run the MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPD link is
normal. If Usage status is set to NORMAL(NORMAL), the LAPD link is
functional.
b. Run the MML command DSP ADJNODE to obtain the state of an adjacent node,
the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth by checking
related parameters, for example, Operation state. If Operation state is
Available and the related bandwidth is greater than 0, the adjacent node is
normal.
3. Verifying the user plane on the Abis interface
a. Run the MML command DSP IPPATH check whether the IP path is available.
If Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater than 0,
the IP path is functional.
GBSS
513
----End
Example
For configurations, see the typical script examples provided in section Configuring the
Transmission Data of Chapter Configuring the BTS in the BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration.
GBSS
514
167 Configuring Abis MUX
Abis MUX.
Prerequisites
The FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUa/GOUc/GOUd/PEUa/POUc board is configured. The BTS
supports UDP multiplexing.
This feature depends on the feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis
IP over E1/T1.
l License
Context
Abis MUX is used to save the bandwidth and multiplex the packets. The BSC and the BTS serve
as transmitting end and receiving end of each other. When Abis MUX is applied, the transmitting
end multiplexes the UDP packets that meet the multiplexing requirements. Multiple UDP
packets are multiplexed into one IP/UDP header at the transmitting end and then demultiplexed
at the receiving end to reconstruct the original data in the IP/UDP packets. Thus, the transmission
efficiency is improved and the bandwidth is saved.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX with IP MUX Type set to
ABISMUX and Adjacent node ID, IP path ID, and IS QOSPATH set to appropriate
values. Exectution of this command aims to add an IP MUX pipe to enable the
multiplexing of IP packets.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 167 Configuring Abis MUX
515
NOTE
The BSC can assign a value to IP MUX Index by default. This parameter can be set to an
appropriate value according to the actual situation.
When IS QOSPATH is set to YES(YES), you can specify the PHB type of the IPMUX to be
enabled by setting PHB.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSABISMUXFLOW with Service
Type set to an appropriate value if required to add the ABIS-MUX flow on the BTS.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPMUX to display the application of Abix
MUX.
The expected result: IPMUX Status is set to Enable.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPMUX to disable Abis MUX.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSABISMUXFLOW to disable Abis
MUX on the BTS.
----End
Example
//Activating Abis MUX
ADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=ABISMUX, ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO,IPMUXINDEX=0;
ADD BTSABISMUXFLOW: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SRVTYPE=CSVOICE;
//Deactivating Abis MUX
RMV IPMUX: IPMUXINDEX=0;
RMV BTSABISMUXFLOW: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SRVTYPE=CSVOICE;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 167 Configuring Abis MUX
516
168 Configuring Abis IPHC
Abis IPHC.
Prerequisites
BTS3012 series are configured with the DPTU board.
The feature GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1 has been configured before this feature
is activated.
l License
Context
In IP over E1/T1 mode, typical small packets (for example, speech data) of standard IP packets
over the Abis interface only account for 50% to 60% of the payload, which indicates low
transmission efficiency. This feature can compress IP or UDP headers to increase the payload
and save IP transmission resources.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the specified base station.
In this step, set BTS Index and BTS Name to appropriate values.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD PPPLNK or MOD MPGRP. In this step,
set Subrack No. and Slot No. to the subrack number and slot number of the POUc
and set Head compress to UDP/IP_HC(UDP/IP_HC).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 168 Configuring Abis IPHC
517
NOTE
If the BSC works in IP over FE/GE mode:
l Enable IPHC first on the routers, then on the BTSs, but not on the BSC.
l Configure the routers to support only the compression of non-TCP packet headers (that is, UDP
packet headers).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSPPPLNK or MOD BTSMPGRP. In
this step, set IP Header Compression to ENABLE(ENABLE).
CAUTION
When you set IP Header Compression in this step, the BTS reinitiates a negotiation
with the BSC or router on establishing a PPP link or an MP group. The negotiation
may cause no audio or interrupt data transmission for less than 3s.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the specified base station.
1. Run the MML command DSP BTSPPPLNK or DSP BTSMPGRP.
Expected result: The value of IPHC Negotiation Result reported by the BTS is
ENABLE.
2. Observe the traffic during a call.
Expected result: The traffic is heavier when IP Header Compression is set to
DISABLE(DISABLE) than when it is set to ENABLE(ENABLE).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the specified base station.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD PPPLNK or MOD MPGRP. In this step,
set Subrack No. and Slot No. to the subrack number and slot number of the POUc
and set Head compress to No_HC(No_HC).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSPPPLNK or MOD BTSMPGRP. In
this step, set IP Header Compression to DISABLE(DISABLE).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the specified base station.
----End
Example
/*Activating Abis IPHC*/
//Activating Abis IPHC by configuring a PPP link
MOD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=26, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, IPHC=UDP/IP_HC;
MOD BTSPPPLNK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=200, PPPLNKN=0, IPHC=ENABLE;
//Activating Abis IPHC by configuring an MP group
MOD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=26, BRDTYPE=POUc, MPGRPN=0, IPHC=UDP/IP_HC;
MOD BTSMPGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=200, MPGRPN=0, IPHC=ENABLE;
GBSS
518
/*Deactivating Abis IPHC*/
//Deactivating Abis IPHC by configuring the PPP link
MOD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=26, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, IPHC=No_HC;
MOD BTSPPPLNK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=200, PPPLNKN=0, IPHC= DISABLE;
//Deactivating Abis IPHC by configuring the MP link
MOD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=26, BRDTYPE=POUc, MPGRPN=0, IPHC=No_HC;
MOD BTSMPGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=200, MPGRPN=0, IPHC= DISABLE;
GBSS
519
169 Configuring A over IP
A over IP.
Prerequisites
The FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa, GOUc, or GOUd board is in position.
This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control
(ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), GBFD-115603 Automatic
Noise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC),
GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC), GBFD-115701 TFO,
GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch, GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch, and GBFD-115711
EVAD.
l License
The FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa, GOUc, or GOUd board is configured. For details, see
Configuring a Board.
The MSC/MGW suports the A over IP.
When device IP is used in transmission, the peer end is configured with a static route to the
When IP fault detection based on BFD is configured, the device connected to the BSC
supports BFD.
Context
A over IP supports only the IPv4 protocol.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 169 Configuring A over IP
520
When A over IP is enabled, the functions of the TCS are taken over by the MGW, and the BSC
does not perform transcoding. The A interface uses IP over FE/GE transmission.
Procedure
2. In MPS/EPS, perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link
Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUa/GOUc/GOUd Board.
3. Configure the user plane over the A interface (over IP) by referring to Configuring
the Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP).
the Mapping Between Service Types and Transmission Resources for the Adjacent
Node.
the User Plane of the A Interface (over IP).
NOTE
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHPORT with subrack number, slot
number, and port number are those of the peer interface board connected to the
BTS.
The expected result: Port state is Activated, and Link Availability Status is
Available. That is, the links carried on the port are normal.
b. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHTRK to display the
setting of Status of ETHTRK.
The expected result: Status of ETHTRK is UP, which indicates that the link
aggregation group is normal.
c. Optional: Run the MML command DSP ETHTRKLNK to display the setting
of Status of ETHTRKLNK sub-port.
GBSS
521
The expected result: Status of ETHTRKLNK sub-port is UP, which indicates
that the sub-port for the link aggregation group is normal.
2. Verify the control plane on the A interface.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to display the setting of SCCP
DSP state.
The expected result: SCCP DSP state is Accessible, which indicates that the
SCCP DSP is normal.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP M3LKS to display the settings of
Operation status and Activated status.
The expected result: Operation status is Available, and Activated status is
Activated. That is, the link set is normal.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SCTPLNK to check whether
Operation state is Normal.
The expected result: Operation state is Normal, which indicates that the SCTP
link is normal.
3. Verify the user plane on the A interface.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the Operation
state of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available
bandwidth.
The expected result: Operation state is Available, and the related bandwidth is
greater than 0.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to display the setting of
Operation state.
The expected result: Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth
is greater than 0.
state.
----End
Example
For configurations, see the typical script example provided in section Configuring the A Interface
(over IP) in the BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration.
GBSS
522
170 Configuring A IP over E1/T1
A IP over E1/T1.
Prerequisites
The PEUa/POUc board is in position.
This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control
(ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), GBFD-115603 Automatic
Noise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC),
GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC), and GBFD-115701 TFO.
l License
The PEUa/POUc board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.
Context
When this feature is enabled, the traffic and signaling data can be carried by the PPP based IP
transmission over the A interface. The port of the BSC can be E1, T1, or STM-1.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC with A Interface Tag, Um
Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag set to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 170 Configuring A IP over E1/T1
523
2. In the MPS/EPS, configure the physical layer and data link layer for the PEUa board
by referring to Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the PEUa
Board or configure the physical layer and data link layer for the POUc board by
referring to Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUc Board.
3. Configure the control plane of the A interface.
4. Configure the mapping between service types and transmission resources for the
adjacent node.
5. Configure the user plane of the A interface.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP E1T1 to check the setting of Port
State..
The expected result: Port State. is normal.
b. Check the state of the link.
The link is a PPP link.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK to query the settings
of Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address
set to the value of Local IP address obtained in the preceding sub-step,
and Destination IP address set to the value of Peer IP address obtained
in the preceding sub-step.
The expected result: The BSC receives the statistics on PING packets.
The link is an MLPPP link.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPGRP to query the settings
of Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPLNK to query the settings
of Link state and LCP negotiated state.
The expected result: Both Link state and LCP negotiated state are
available.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address
set to the value of Local IP address, and Destination IP address set to
the value of Peer IP address.
The expected result: The BSC receives the statistics on PING packets.
2. Verify the control plane on the A interface.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to display the setting of SCCP
DSP state.
The expected result: SCCP DSP state is Accessible, which indicates that the
SCCP DSP is normal.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP M3LKS to display the settings of
Operation status and Activated status.
The expected result: Operation status is Available, and Activated status is
Activated. That is, the link set is normal.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SCTPLNK to check whether
Operation state is Normal.
GBSS
524
The expected result: Operation state is Normal, which indicates that the SCTP
link is normal.
3. Verify the user plane on the A interface.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the Operation
state of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available
bandwidth.
The expected result: Operation state is Available, and the related bandwidth is
greater than 0.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to display the setting of
Operation state.
The expected result: Operation state is Available, and the available bandwidth
is greater than 0.
----End
Example
For configurations, see the typical script example provided in section Configuring A over IP in
the BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration.
GBSS
525
171 Configuring UDP MUX for A
Transmission
UDP MUX for A Transmission.
Prerequisites
The FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUa/GOUc/GOUd/PEUa/POUc board is configured. The Core
Network (CN) supports UDP multiplexing.
This feature depends on the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP or GBFD-118622 A IP
over E1/T1.
l License
Enable RTCP has been set to ON(Open) by running the MOD GCNNODE command.
Context
When this feature is enabled, multiple Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) packets are
multiplexed onto one UDP packet. In this way, the proportion of the packet header to the total
packet decreases, and therefore the A interface transmission efficiency is improved.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX with IP MUX Type to
UDPMUX and Adjacent node ID, IP path ID, IS QOSPATH, Sender UDP MUX
Mode, and Receive UDP MUX Mode to appropriate values. Repeat this step if this
feature is to be enabled on the A interfaces between the BSC and multiple CN devices.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 171 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission
526
NOTE
Max subframe length[byte], Maximum Frame Length[byte], and Maximum Delay Time
[ms] must be set as required.
The BSC can assign a value to IP MUX Index by default. This parameter can be set to an
appropriate value according to the actual situation.
When IS QOSPATH is set to YES(Yes), you can specify the PHB type of the UDP MUX to
be enabled by setting PHB.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPMUX to display the application of UDP
MUX for A Transmission.
The expected result: IPMUX Status is set to Enable.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET CFGDATAINEFFECTIVE to set the
subracks to ineffective mode.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPMUX to disable IP MUX.
----End
Example
//Activating UDP MUX for A transmission
ADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=UDPMUX, ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO,
UDPMUXMODSEND=NORTPCOMP, UDPMUXMODRECV=RTPCOMP, IPMUXINDEX=0;
//Deactivating UDP MUX for A transmission
SET CFGDATAINEFFECTIVE: SRN=1;
RMV IPMUX: IPMUXINDEX=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 171 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission
527
172 Configuring TDM/IP Dual
Transmission over A Interface
TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface.
Prerequisites
The DPUc or DPUf board is in position.
The FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa, GOUc, GOUd, PEUa, or POUc board is in position.
The MSC or MGW supports this feature. In addition, the configuration of this feature
is complete.
This feature depends on the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP or GBFD-118622 A IP
over E1/T1.
l License
The initial configuration of the BSC is complete. A over TDM transmission is used.
Context
This feature enables TDM transmission and IP transmission to be used simultaneously over the
A interface on the BSC side. This feature is applicable to the scenario where GSM is upgraded
from the TDM network to the IP network.
Whether the user plane on the A interface uses TDM transmission or IP transmission is
determined by the MSC in the assignment procedure or in the incoming BSC handover
procedure.
Procedure
GBSS
172 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A
Interface
528
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a DPUc or DPUf board.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCTYPE. In this step, set Subrack No. and
Slot No. to those of the DPU board which configured in step 1. In addition, set The
type of TC resource to ITC(Packet Conversion).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa,
GOUc, GOUd, PEUa, or POUc board.
4. Configure A over IP transmission.
When IP over FE/GE transmission is used on the A interface, perform operations
by referring to 169 Configuring A over IP.
When IP over E1/T1 transmission is used on the A interface, perform operations
by referring to 170 Configuring A IP over E1/T1.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD N7DPC. In this step, set DSP bear type
to MTP3_M3UA(MTP3 and M3UA). In addition, specify Net PRI as required.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE. In this step, set Bearer for
A Interface User Plane to TDM_IP, and set Report BSS Transmission
Capability to YES(Yes).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to display the settings of MTP3
DSP state and M3UA DSP state.
The expected result: MTP3 DSP state and M3UA DSP state are both Available.
2. Tracing Messages on the A Interface. Make a call in the cell. The call is successfully
established.
3. Observe the speech codec list Information Element (IE) is correctly carried in the Cm
Service Request message on the A interface.
The expected result, "full-ip" and "pcm-over-tdm" in the speech codec list IE are both
1.
NOTE
When "codec-type" is cs-data, "pcm-over-ip" and "pcm-over-tdm" in the speech codec list IE
are both 1.
4. View the assignment request message.
The circuit-identity-code IE is carried when the Core Network (CN) instructs the
user plane to use TDM transmission, as shown in Figure 172-1.
Figure 172-1 Assignment request message in TDM transmission
The aoip-transport-layer-address-mgw and speech codeclist-msc-preferred IEs are
carried when the CN instructs the user plane to use IP transmission, as shown in
Figure 172-2.
GBSS
Interface
529
Figure 172-2 Assignment request message in IP transmission
5. Check whether the assignment complete message carries the related IEs.
When the CN instructs the user plane to use TDM transmission, the assignment
complete message does not carry the aoip-transport-layer-address-bss IE.
When the CN instructs the user plane to use IP transmission, the assignment
complete message carries the aoip-transport-layer-address-bss IE.
1. Change the TDM/IP dual transmission mode over A interface to TDM transmission.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE. In this step, set Bearer for
A Interface User Plane to TDM, and set Report BSS Transmission Capability to
NO(No).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD N7DPC. In this step, set DSP bear type
to MTP3.
----End
Example
/*Activating TDM/IP dual transmission over A Interface*
//Configure the DPUc/DPUf
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=DPU, BRDTYPE=DPUc, SN=10, ISTCBRD=NO, MPUSUBRACK=0,
MPUSLOT=0;
//Configure the TC type of the DPUc/DPUf
SET TCTYPE: SRN=0, SN=10, TCTYPE=ITC;
//Configure the IP interface board when A IP over FE/GE
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=GOUa, SN=26, RED=YES, MPUSUBRACK=0,
MPUSLOT=0;
//Configure the IP interface board when A IP over E1/T1
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=POUc, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=24, RED=YES,
ISTCBRD=NO, MPUSLOT=0;
//Configure the physical layer and data link layer when A IP over FE/GE
ADD ETHREDPORT: SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0;
ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="10.171.35.23",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
//Configure the physical layer and data link layer when A IP over E1/T1
GBSS
Interface
530
SET E1T1: SRN=0, SN=24, BT=POUc, PS=ALL, WORKMODE=E1, PTTXT=E1_CRC4_MULTI_FRAME,
PTRXT=E1_CRC4_MULTI_FRAME;
SET OPT: SRN=0, SN=24, BT=POUc, PS=ALL, OPTM=SDH;
ADD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=24, BRDTYPE=POUc, MPGRPN=10, MPTYPE=MCPPP, BORROWDEVIP=YES,
DEVIP="10.171.35.123", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="10.171.35.100", MHF=LONG,
PPPMUX=Disable, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, ERRDETECTSW=OFF,
ANTIERRFLAG=OFF, OPSEPFLAG=OFF;
ADD MPLNK:SRN=0, SN=24, PPPLNKN=0, MPGRPN=10, DS1=191,
TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-
1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS2
4-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&30-1&TS31-1, BRDTYPE=POUc, RESTARTTMR=3,
FCSTYPE=16bit, KEEPALIVE=2;
//Configure the control plane of the A interface
ADD SCTPLNK:SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=10, APP=M3UA, PEERPN=3055,
LOCIP1="10.171.35.123", PEERIP1="10.171.30.100", LOCPN=3055, SWITCHBACKHBNUM=10,
LOGPORTFLAG=NO, MODE=CLIENT, DSCP=48, RTOMIN=150, RTOMAX=3000, RTOINIT=1000,
RTOALPHA=12, RTOBETA=25, HBINTER=1000, MAXASSOCRETR=4, MAXPATHRETR=2, CHKSUMTX=NO,
CHKSUMRX=NO, CHKSUMTYPE=CRC32, MTU=800, CROSSIPFLAG=UNAVAILABLE,
SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES, BUNDLINGFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=ENABLE, VLANID1=3900,
VLANFLAG2=DISABLE;
ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="TEST";
ADD M3DE: DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="TEST";
ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="TEST";
ADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="TEST";
ADD M3LNK:SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=10, PRIORITY=0,
LNKREDFLAG=M3UA_MASTER_MOD, NAME="TEST";
//Configure the mapping between service types and transmission resources for the adjacent node
ADD ADJNODE:ANI=0, NAME="MSC_2G", NODET=A;
//Configure the user plane of the A interface
ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ITFT=A, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="10.171.35.123",
VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED;
//Change the the beartpye of the N7DPC
MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, ATransMode=TDM_IP, CodecRptFlg=YES;
MOD N7DPC: DPX=0, BEARTYPE=MTP3_M3UA, NETPRI=M3UA_FIRST;
/*Deactivating TDM/IP dual transmission over A Interface*
//Change the the beartpye of the N7DPC
MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, ATransMode=TDM, CodecRptFlg=NO;
MOD N7DPC: DPX=0, BEARTYPE=MTP3;
GBSS
Interface
531
173 Configuring Gb over IP
Gb over IP.
Prerequisites
The FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/GOUd board is in position.
The built-in PCU is used. The DPUd board is configured.
feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114101 GPRS.
l License
The SGSN supports Gb over IP.
The BSC and its peer device must support BFD.
Context
Gb over IP enables operators to deploy an IP network instead of using frame relay (FR) between
the BSC and the SGSN.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/
GOUd board.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 173 Configuring Gb over IP
532
2. Configure the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/
GOUd Board.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE with Operator Name and
SGSN Node ID set to appropriate values to add an SGSN node.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE with NSE Identifier, Subrack No.,
Slot No., Subnet Protocol Type, Operator Name, SGSN Node ID, and Subnetwork
Configure Mode set to appropriate values to add an NSE.
5. Configure the NSVL.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLLOCAL with Local NSVL
ID, NSE Identifier, Local IP Address, Local UDP Port No., Subrack No.,
and Slot No. set to appropriate values to add an NSVL on the BSC side.
NOTE
When port IP addresses are used for the communication, Local IP Address is set to the
port IP address of the interface board in Step 2. When device IP addresses are used for
the communication, Local IP Address is set to the device IP address of the interface
board in Step 2.
b. Optional: When Subnetwork Configure Mode of the NSE is STATIC
(Static), run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLREMOTE with
Remote NSVL ID, NSE Identifier, Remote IP Address, and Remote UDP
Port No. set to appropriate values to add an NSVL on the SGSN side.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC with PTP BVC Identifier set to
an appropriate value, Cell Name set to the name of the GPRS cell that needs to be
bound, and NSE Identifier set to that of the NSE added in Step 4. Execution of this
command aims to add a PTP BSSGP virtual connection (PTP BVC).
NOTE
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Subrack No., Slot No., Source IP
address, and Destination IP address set to appropriate values.
NOTE
l When Subnetwork Configure Mode of the NSE is DYNAMIC(Dynamic), you need to set
Source IP Address to the same value as Local IP Address in ADD NSVLLOCAL and
Destination IP Address to the same value as Server IP in ADD NSE.
l When Subnetwork Configure Mode of the NSE is STATIC(Static), you need to set Source
IP Address to the same value as Local IP Address in ADD NSVLLOCAL and Destination
IP Address to the same value as Remote IP Address in ADD NSVLREMOTE.
GBSS
533
The expected result: The statistics on PING packets can be received, which indicates
that the IP link on the Gb interface is functional.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GBIPROUTE with NSE Identifier, Local
NSVL ID, or Remote NSVL ID set to an appropriate value.
The expected result: IP Path State is Normal, which indicates that the IP path at the
service layer on the Gb interface is functional.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SIGBVC with NSE Identifier set to an
appropriate value to check whether SIG BVC State is Normal.
The expected result: SIG BVC State is Normal, which indicates that the SIG PVC
on the signaling plane of the Gb interface is normal.
state.
1. This feature need not be deactivated.
----End
Example
For configurations, see the typical script example provided in section Configuring Gb over IP
in the BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration.
GBSS
534
174 Configuring IP Performance Monitor
IP Performance Monitor.
Prerequisites
The Abis interface is configured with an FG2a, GOUa, FG2c, GOUc, FG2d, or GOUd
board.
The BTS version supports this feature.
The feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP has been configured before this feature is
activated.
l License
Context
IP performance monitoring (IP PM) is a solution for quick QoS supervision on the IP transport
network.
CAUTION
l This feature cannot be used together with link aggregation and load sharing.
l IP PM complies Huawei proprietary protocol and requires support from both the BSC and
the BTS.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 174 Configuring IP Performance Monitor
535
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path. In this step, set
Interface Type to ABIS(Abis Interface) and specify Adjacent node ID, IP path
ID, IP path type, Forward Bandwidth, and Backward Bandwidth.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT IPPM to activate IP PM for the target IP
path. In this step, specify Adjacent node ID, IP path ID, and IS QOSPATH.
NOTE
l If IP path type is set to QoS(QoS) in Step 1, set IS QOSPATH to YES(YES) in Step 2.
l If IP path type is not set to QoS(QoS) in Step 1, set IS QOSPATH to NO(NO) in Step 2.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST IPPM to query the configured IP PM
sessions.
Expected result: All configured IP PM sessions are displayed.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPM to query the IP PM status of the target
IP path. In this step, specify Adjacent node ID and IP path ID.
Expected result: The value of IPPM State is UP and all measured values are valid
for IP paths that carry services.
3. Start Monitoring the IPPM Traffic on the LMT. Set Subrack No. to the number of
the subrack where the local IP address of the IP path is located. If the IP path is a QoS
path, set Trace Type to QOS. If the IP path is not a QoS path, set Trace Type to
Other.
Expected result: The value of Task Status is Normal and all measured values are
valid for IP paths that carry services.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA IPPM to deactivate the IP PM session for
the target IP path. In this step, specify Adjacent node ID and IP path ID.
----End
Example
//Activating IP PM
//Adding an IP path
ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=1, ITFT=ABIS, PATHT=QoS, TXBW=10000,
RXBW=10000, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED;
//Activating IP PM for a QoS path when PHB is set to BE and EF
ACT IPPM: ANI=3, PATHID=17, ISQOSPATH=YES,
PHB=BE-1&AF11-0&AF12-0&AF13-0&AF21-0&AF22-0&AF23-0&AF31-0&AF32-0&AF33-0&A
F41-0&AF42-0&AF43-0&EF-1, LOSTPKTDETECTSW=OFF;
//Deactivating IP PM
//Deactivating IP PM for the target IP path
DEA IPPM: ANI=0, PATHID=1;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 174 Configuring IP Performance Monitor
536
175 Configuring Ethernet OAM
Ethernet OAM.
Prerequisites
The FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUa/GOUc/GOUd board is configured for the Abis or A
interface, or the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/GOUd board is configured for the Gb
interface.
The interconnected transmission equipment must comply with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE
802.3ah standard protocols.
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118602 A over IP, and GBFD-118603 Gb over IP.
l License
The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support the feature.
The BBU is configured with a GTMUb board.
Context
As a layer-2 protocol, Ethernet OAM reports the network status at the data link layer. Therefore,
the network is monitored and managed more effectively.
The BSS supports two types of Ethernet OAM: point-to-point Ethernet OAM (IEEE 802.3ah)
and end-to-end Ethernet OAM (IEEE 802.1ag).
Procedure
Activating point-to-point Ethernet OAM
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 175 Configuring Ethernet OAM
537
BSC
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT EFMAH to activate the EFM OAM
function.
BTS
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSETHPORT. In this step, set 3ah
Switch to OPEN(Open).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTSETHOAMAH to activate the
BTS EFM OAM function.
Activating end-to-end Ethernet OAM
BSC
NOTE
The values of parameters MD Name, MD Level, MA Name, and VLAN ID must be
consistent on the two ends.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMD to add a maintenance
domain (MD) for the Ethernet OAM. In this step, set the parameters MD
Index, MD Level, and MD Name to appropriate values.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMA to add an Ethernet OAM
maintenance association (MA). In this step, set MD Index to the value specified
in 1, and set VLAN ID, MA Index, and MA Name to appropriate values.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMEP to add a maintenance
entity group end point (MEP) for Ethernet OAM at the local end. In this step,
set MEP ID to an appropriate value, MEP Type to LocalMep(LocalMep),
Port Type to ETHER, and MA Index to the value specified in 2.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMEP to add an MEP for
Ethernet OAM at the remote end. In this step, set MEP ID to an appropriate
value, MEP Type to RemoteMep(RemoteMep), and MA Index to the value
specified in 2.
NOTE
MEP ID must be set to the same value at the two ends.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT CFMCCMTST to activate the
connectivity check for the Ethernet OAM to check the connectivity between
the local MEP and the peer MEP. In this step, set MA Index to the value
specified in 2 and MEP ID to the value specified in 3.
BTS
NOTE
The values of parameters MD Name, MD Level, MA Name, and VLAN ID must be
consistent on the two ends.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSETHMD to add a MD for BTS
Ethernet OAM. In this step, set the parameters MD Level and MD Name to
appropriate values.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSETHMA to add a BTS Ethernet
OAM MA. In this step, set MD Name to the value specified in 1, and set VLAN
ID and MA Name to appropriate values.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSETHLCMEP to add an MEP
for BTS Ethernet OAM at the local end. In this step, set MEP ID to an
appropriate value, MD Name to the value specified in 1, and MA Name to the
value specified in 2.
GBSS
538
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSETHRMMEP to add an MEP
for BTS Ethernet OAM at the remote end. In this step, set MEP ID to an
appropriate value, MD Name to the value specified in 1, and MA Name to the
value specified in 2.
NOTE
MEP ID must be set to the same value at the two ends.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTSETHCC to activate the
connectivity check for the Ethernet OAM to check the connectivity between
the local MEP and the peer MEP. In this step, set MD Name to the value
specified in 1, MA Name to the value specified in 2, and MEP ID to the value
specified in 3.
Verifying point-to-point Ethernet OAM
1. After the EFM OAM function is enabled, the alarm ALM-21371 ETHOAM 3AH
Discovery Failure is reported if the transmission link is faulty or the peer end does
not support the EFM OAM function.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR EFMLOOPTST to start EFM OAM
remote loopback test. After the EFM OAM function is enabled, the alarm
ALM-21374 ETHOAM 3AH Remote Loopback is reported if the loopback is
successful because the loopback operation blocks the ongoing services.
Verifying end-to-end Ethernet OAM
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING MAC. In this step, set MA Index and
MEP ID to the values specified in ADD CFMMEP, and set RMEP ID to the
MEP ID of the peer device.
Expected result: The number of received packets equals the number of sent packets.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command TRC MAC. In this step, set MA Index and
MEP ID to the values specified in ADD CFMMEP, and set RMEP ID to the
MEP ID of the peer device.
Expected result: The returned result contains "Succeed in tracing the destination
address".
Deactivating point-to-point Ethernet OAM
BSC
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA EFMAH to deactivate the EFM OAM
function.
BTS
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSETHPORT. In this step, set 3ah
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTSETHOAMAH to deactivate the
BTS EFM OAM function.
Deactivating end-to-end Ethernet OAM
BSC
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA CFMCCMTST to deactivate the
connectivity test of Ethernet OAM.
GBSS
539
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMEP to remove the MEPs for
Ethernet OAM at the two ends.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMA to remove an Ethernet
OAM MA.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMD to remove an Ethernet
OAM MD.
BTS
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTSETHCC to deactivate the
connectivity test of BTS Ethernet OAM.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSETHRMMEP to remove an
MEP for BTS Ethernet OAM at the remote end.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSETHLCMEP to remove an
MEP for BTS Ethernet OAM at the local end.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSETHMA to remove a BTS
Ethernet OAM MA.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSETHMD to remove a BTS
Ethernet OAM MD.
----End
Example
//Activating Ethernet OAM
Activating point-to-point Ethernet OAM
//BSC
ACT EFMAH: SRN=0, SN=18, PN=0;
//BTS
SET BTSETHPORT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, PN=0, SWITCH3AH=OPEN;
ACT BTSETHOAMAH: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, PN=0;
Activating end-to-end Ethernet OAM
//BSC
ADD CFMMD: SRN=0, SN=18, MDIDX=0, LEVEL=0, MDNAME="md0";
ADD CFMMA: SRN=0, SN=18, MDIDX=0, VLANID=2, MAIDX=0, MANAME="ma0";
ADD CFMMEP: SRN=0, MAIDX=0, MEPTYPE=LocalMep, MEPID=1, PORTTYPE=ETHER,
SN=18, PN=0;
ADD CFMMEP: SRN=0, MAIDX=0, MEPTYPE=RemoteMep, MEPID=2, SN=18;
ACT CFMCCMTST: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, MEPID=1;
//BTS
ADD BTSETHMD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MDLEVEL=0;
ADD BTSETHMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", VLANID=2;
ADD BTSETHLCMEP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0",
MEPID=2, PN=0;
ADD BTSETHRMMEP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0",
MEPID=1;
ACT BTSETHCC: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", MEPID=2;
//Deactivating Ethernet OAM
Deactivating point-to-point Ethernet OAM
//BSC
DEA EFMAH: SRN=0,SN=18,PN=0;
//BTS
SET BTSETHPORT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, PN=0, SWITCH3AH=CLOSE;
DEA BTSETHOAMAH: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, PN=0;
GBSS
540
Deactivating end-to-end Ethernet OAM
//BSC
DEA CFMCCMTST: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, MEPID=1;
RMV CFMMEP: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0,MEPID=2;
RMV CFMMEP: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0,MEPID=1;
RMV CFMMA: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0;
RMV CFMMD: SRN=0, SN=18, MDIDX=0;
//BTS
DEA BTSETHCC: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", MEPID=2;
RMV BTSETHRMMEP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0",
MEPID=1;
RMV BTSETHLCMEP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0",
MEPID=2;
RMV BTSETHMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0";
RMV BTSETHMD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0";
GBSS
541
176 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS
Automatic Configuration and Planning
PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning and GBFD-510701 Compact BTS Automatic
Configuration and Planning.
Prerequisites
This feature is supported by only the BTS3900B and BTS3900E.
None
l License
The initial parameters required for BTS automatic planning algorithm are set in online
mode through the M2000 client.
Context
l The compact BTS refers to the BTS3900E. If the feature is applied to the BTS3900E, a
maximum of two carriers can be configured and the cells of the BTS3900E are configured
in O2 mode.
l The PICO refers to the BTS3900B.
l After being installed and powered on, the BTS3900B and BTS3900E can connect with the
BSC automatically with the network automatic detection feature. Operators do not need to
configure radio parameters for cells. The M2000 obtains radio parameters based on
frequency bands and scanning results of the uplink and downlink level of surrounding
frequencies reported from the BTS, and then performs the automatic configuration and
planning of the BTS39000B and BTS3900E. This feature can be applied in newly deployed
or swapped sites. By using this feature, site deployment duration is decreased and operator
intervention is reduced. As a result, OM costs are reduced.
GBSS
176 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic
Configuration and Planning
542
l Before the automatic planning, the following parameters used for the planning algorithm
must be configured in advance on the M2000 client: operator frequency data, BTS
adjacency information, BSIC data, and CGI resource data. You can view the progress and
result of the BTS GSM automatic planning and perform data analysis and fault location on
the M2000 client. For details, see the M2000 Operator Guide.
l If the version of the BSC is V900R012 or later vesions, the BSC supports the automatic
configuration and automatic planning of 128 BTS3900Es or BTS3900Bs in parallel mode,
and the M2000 supports the automatic configuration and automatic planning of 512
BTS3900Es or BTS3900Bs in parallel mode.
Procedure
1. Run the MML command ADD BTSAUTOPLAN to establish the BTS in automatic
planning mode. The established BTS is enabled with the automatic planning feature
by default. The automatic planning algorithm switch and automatic optimization
algorithm switch are set to ON.
NOTE
l The established BTS that is in automatic planning mode enables the automatic planning feature
automatically when it is powered on for the first time. If the first automatic planning scan
succeeds, the BTS does not enable the automatic planning feature automatically after the BTS
is powered off again or reset. If the site data needs to be planned again, run the BSC6900 MML
command RST AUTOPLAN.
l To enable this feature on a BTS that is configured as a common BTS on the BSC6900, run the
BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration
Mode to AUTO.
l For the BTS3900E, set BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM(BTS3900E GSM), and set Freq.
and BSIC Plan Switch and Freq. and BSIC Optimize Switchand to ON(ON). Then, run
the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN command to plan the site data
automatically.
l For the BTS3900B, set BTS Type to BTS3900B_GSM(BTS3900B GSM), and set Freq.
and BSIC Plan Switch,CGI and RAC Plan Switch,and Neighbor Cell Plan Switch to
ON(ON). Then, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN command to plan
the site data automatically.
2. If setIs Support SingleRAN Mode to SUPPORT(Support),run the BSC6900 MML
commandSET BTSIPCLKPARA,and then set Clock Protocol Type to PTP(PTP
Protocol). Or else, go toStep 3.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then check the
status of the related switches are set to ON(ON).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set Index
type to BYNAME(By Name), set BTS Name to MICRO, set BTS Configuration
Mode to NORMAL(NORMAL).
GBSS
543
CAUTION
1. After BTS Configuration Mode is set to NORMAL(NORMAL), all the automatic
planning and automatic optimization switches are deactivated.
2. The deactivation of the feature during the automatic planning will result in the reset of
the BTS.
----End
Example
ADD BTSAUTOPLAN: BTSNAME="micro", BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, DESTNODE=BSC,
SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, SERVICEMODE=IP,BTSIP="10.161.101.101",
BTSMASK="255.255.255.0", BSCIP="18.18.18.18",
MAINDEVTAB="11112222223333334444",SRANMODE=SUPPORT,
CELLNAME="micro_cell0",
TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="111", LAC=1214, CI=1000,
MASTERIPADDR="18.18.18.254";
SET BTSIPCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CLKPRTTYPE=PTP, DN=1,
CLKTOPOMODE=PTPOVERUDP, SYNMODE=CONSYN, ISCLKREDUCY=UNSUPPORT,
LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="Micro";
SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="Micro", CFGMODE=NORMAL;
GBSS
544
177 Configuring PICO Synchronization
PICO Synchronization.
Prerequisites
Neighboring cells of the BTS3900B are available and the neighboring relations are
configured.
This feature is supported by only the BTS3900B.
l License
The license of this feature is activated.
Context
l In the GSM network, the 13 MHz frequency synchronization is mandatory among multiple
BTSs to maintain the network QoS, such as the MS handover success rate. The clock
synchronization function of the BTS3900B implements the Um frequency synchronization
with the neighboring macro BTSs through software. The output synchronization clock is
13 MHz.
l After the feature is activated, you do not need to configure a clock server for the BTS3900B.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK, and then set Clock Type to
UM_CLK(Um Clock).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSCLK, and then check that Clock
Type is set to UM_CLK(Um Clock).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 177 Configuring PICO Synchronization
545
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK, and then set Clock Type to
INT_CLK(Internal Clock).
----End
Example
SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=UM_CLK;
LST BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LstFormat=VERTICAL;
SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=INT_CLK;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 177 Configuring PICO Synchronization
546
178 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-
planning
PICO Dual-band Auto-planning.
Prerequisites
None
l License
The M2000 supports the PICO Dual-band Auto-planning feature.
Context
l The PICO Dual-band Auto-planning feature is license-controlled.
l The Pico is also called the BTS3900B. Pico auto-planning indicates that the BTS3900B
scans the uplink and downlink frequencies of operators according to the frequency band
capability of the BTS3900B. The M2000 evaluates the interference condition of each
frequency according to the scanning result. In addition, considering the neighboring
relationship of the BTS3900B, the M2000 selects the frequency with the minimum
interference as the frequency of the BTS3900B. PICO Dual-band Auto-planning supports
the 900 MHz/1800 MHz and 850 MHz/1900 MHz dual-band scenarios on the basis of the
original single-band auto-planning function. PICO auto-planning helps operators to
implement fast network deployment and flexible network adjustment and reduce the
workload of manual configuration.
l Before the auto-planning, the following parameters used for the planning algorithm should
be set in advance on the M2000 client: operator frequency data, BTS neighboring relations,
BSIC data, and CGI resource data. You can view the progress and result of the BTS3900B
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 178 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planning
547
GSM auto-planning and perform data analysis and fault location on the M2000 client. For
details, see the M2000 Operator Guide.
l The auto-planning function is mostly used in the site setup scenario. During the execution
of the auto-planning function, the services within the network coverage of the BTS3900B
are disrupted.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSAUTOPLAN to add the auto-planning
BTS3900B, and set Is Support SingleRAN Mode to SUPPORT(Support). The
added BTS3900B is enabled with the auto-planning function by default. In addition,
the auto-planning algorithm switch and auto-optimization algorithm switch are set to
ON, and the Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed switch is set to NO(NO) by
default.
NOTE
l The added BTS3900B that is in auto-planning mode will enable the auto-planning function
automatically when it is powered on for the first time. If the first auto-planning scan
succeeds, the BTS3900B does not enable the auto-planning function automatically during
the subsequent powering-off and resetting operations. If the auto-planning function needs
to be enabled again, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN.
l To enable this feature on a BTS that is configured as a common BTS on the BSC6900, run
the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and set BTS Configuration
Mode to AUTO(AUTOPLAN). Then, set the related auto-planning algorithm switch,
auto-optimization algorithm switch and Frequency BandAdaptation Allowed switch
according to the actual conditions. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command RST
AUTOPLAN to plan the site data automatically. The Frequency BandAdaptation
Allowed switch has impacts on the auto-planning result. Operators can determine whether
to enable the switch according to the actual conditions. For details, see the following note.
l Operators can select appropriate planning modes to perform auto-planning according to
the actual conditions. The BTS3900B supports the following planning modes:
l If the BTS3900B is configured with one or two TRXs in band A, the Frequency Band
Adaptation Allowed switch is invalid. The M2000 plans the BTS3900B as the O1 or
O2 site in band A according to the number of configured TRXs.
l If the BTS3900B is configured with two TRXs and the two TRXs are in band A and
band B respectively, the BTS3900B will scan the frequencies of band A and band B.
The frequency bands and site types of the frequencies planned by the BTS3900B,
however, vary with the status of the Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed switch.
a. Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed is set to YES(YES):
The M2000 selects the frequency with the minimum interference as the working
frequency according to the reported scanning results of the two frequencies. The
frequency band where the frequency exists is the working frequency band of the
BTS3900B. The M2000 plans the BTS3900B as the O1 site in corresponding frequency
bands
b. Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed is set to NO(NO):
The M2000 plans the BTS3900B as the O2 site in dual-band. The M2000 selects the
BCCH frequencies in low frequency bands (such as 900 MHz or 850 MHz) and selects
the TCH frequencies in low frequency bands or high frequency bands.
2. Run BSC6900 MML commandSET BTSIPCLKPARA,and then set Clock Protocol
Type to PTP(PTP Protocol).
GBSS
548
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG aand check that
BTS Configuration Mode is set to AUTO(AUTOPLAN).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS
Configuration Mode to NORMAL(NORMAL).
CAUTION
The deactivation operation during the execution of the auto-planning function will result
in the reset of the BTS3900B.
----End
Example
ADD BTSAUTOPLAN: BTSNAME="pico", BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, DESTNODE=BSC,
SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, SERVICEMODE=IP, BTSIP="18.18.18.150",
BTSMASK="255.255.255.0", BSCIP="18.18.18.18",
MAINDEVTAB="2102311045AB09000005", SRANMODE=SUPPORT, CELLNAME="gsm",
TYPE=GSM900_DCS1800, MAXFQNUM=2, MASTERIPADDR="18.18.18.254";
SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CFGMODE=AUTO,
BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, FREQSELFADAPT=YES;
SET BTSIPCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CLKPRTTYPE=PTP, DN=1,
CLKTOPOMODE=PTPOVERUDP, SYNMODE=CONSYN, ISCLKREDUCY=UNSUPPORT,
LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico";
SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=NORMAL;
GBSS
549
179 Configuring PICO USB Encryption
PICO USB Encryption.
Prerequisites
Only BTS3900B supports this feature.
None
l License
The M2000 version supports the USB security protection tool.
Context
l A PICO BTS is also named BTS3900B.
l When a newly deployed BTS3900B is locally commissioned by using a USB flash drive,
the configuration file is stored in the USB flash drive as plain text. This file contains
important configuration information, such as the IP addresses of network elements. If the
information is saved as plain text, it may be stolen or disclosed.
l When the PICO USB Encryption feature is introduced, the configuration file is encrypted
by using an encryption software on the M2000 side and then is decrypted on the BTS side,
ensuring information security.
Procedure
1. Copy the configuration file DataCfg.xml to the PC where the M2000 client is installed
and save the DataCfg.xml file in the D:\USB\GBTS3900B\Config\DataCfg.xml
directory.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 179 Configuring PICO USB Encryption
550
NOTE
The USB security protection tool does not support file decryption. Therefore, the file must be
backed up before being encrypted.
2. Choose Start > All Programs > iManager M2000 Client > Start USB Protector
Tool. The USB Protector Tool dialog box is displayed.
3. Choose Setting > Set USB Root Directory, select D:\USB, and click OK.
4. Choose Setting > Set Security Policies. The Set Security Policies dialog box is
displayed.
a. Set Save Path to D:\USB\GBTS3900B.
b. Set Encryption Algorithm and Integrity Algorithm based on your individual
needs.
c. Click OK.
5. Choose File > Open, and select the DataCfg.xml file in the D:\USB\GBTS3900B
\Config directory.
6. Select IsEncrypted:Index.
NOTE
In the file list area, if IsEncrypted:Index before a file is selected, the file is encrypted.
Otherwise, only integrity protection is performed on the file.
7. Click Execute Protect.
8. Delete the source file in the USB flash drive and copy the GBTS3900B folder to the
root directory of the USB flash drive.
1. Open the DataCfg.xml file in the D:\USB\GBTS3900B\Config directory.
If garbled characters are displayed, the file is encrypted successfully.
2. Connect the USB flash drive to the BTS3900B.
The BTS3900B sets up links properly.
N/A
----End
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 179 Configuring PICO USB Encryption
551
180 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode
PICO Sleeping Mode.
Prerequisites
Currently, the BTS3900B and BTS3900E support the sleeping mode feature.
l License
Context
l The PICO refers to the BTS3900B. The PICO Sleeping Mode feature helps to save the site
energy by enabling or disabling the cells in a period. When the BTS3900B is used at night
when the traffic is unavailable in the scenarios, such as offices, warehouses, and exhibition
halls, users can specify the period for enabling or disabling the PICO cells, such as, 00:00
to 6:00 am. In this period, the power amplifiers of all the carriers (including BCCH carriers)
in the cells are shut down.
l When the PICO Sleeping Mode feature takes effect, the PICO cells do not provide radio
network services.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then set
Enable Turning Off Cell to SLEEPING(Sleeping) and set Dyn. Turning Off Cell
Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 180 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode
552
NOTE
When Enable Turning Off Cell is set to SLEEPING(Sleeping), the BSC6900 disables the
cell within the disabling period unconditionally and enables the cell within the enabling period
unconditionally. Currently, the Enable Turning Off Cell parameter of only the BTS3900B
and BTS3900E can be set to SLEEPING(Sleeping).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then set Cell
Index to the index of the cell to be verified and Enable Turning Off Cell to
SLEEPING(Sleeping), and set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn.
Turning Off Cell Stop Time to ensure that the current time is within the period
specified by the two parameters.
2. Wait for about five minutes and run the BSC6900 MML command DSP
GCELLSTAT, and then set Cell Attribute to DYNSWITCH(Dynamic Switch) to
check the current status of the cell. If Cell Dynamic Switch of the verified cell is set
to Yes, it indicates that the PICO Sleeping Mode feature is effective.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then set Cell
Index to the index of the cell to be verified and Enable Turning Off Cell to
SLEEPING(Sleeping), and set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn.
Turning Off Cell Stop Time to ensure that the current time is beyond the period
specified by the two parameters.
4. Wait for about one minute and run the BSC6900 MML command DSP
GCELLSTAT, and then set Cell Attribute to DYNSWITCH(Dynamic Switch) to
check the current status of the cell. If Cell Dynamic Switch of the verified cell is set
to No, it indicates that the cell is enabled.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then set
Enable Turning Off Cell to DISABLE(Disable).
----End
Example
SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=SLEEPING,
TURNOFFCELLSTRTIME=10&00, TURNOFFCELLSTPTIME=12&00;
SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=DISABLE;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 180 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode
553
181 Configuring PICO Automatic
Optimization
PICO Automatic Optimization.
Prerequisites
l License
The M2000 supports the PICO Automatic Optimization feature.
Context
l The PICO Automatic Optimization feature is license-controlled.
l The Pico is also called the BTS3900B. During the operation of the BTS3900B, the
automatic optimization task is created on the M2000 and the BTS3900Bs to be optimized
and the counter thresholds are specified. When the working frequencies are severely
interfered, the M2000 triggers the BTS3900B to restart the uplink and downlink frequency
scan. In addition, the M2000 selects the working frequency with the minimum interference
for the BTS3900B through the automatic optimization algorithm. Through automatic
optimization of working frequencies, the BTS3900B can shield itself from the frequencies
that are severely interfered. In this case, the communication quality within the coverage of
the BTS3900B and the KPIs are improved significantly. In addition, the handover success
rate of the MS in the coverage of the BTS3900B is increased and the call drop rate is
reduced.
l The progress and result of the PICO Automatic Optimization feature can be viewed on the
M2000 client for data analysis and fault location. For details, see the M2000 Operator
Guide.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 181 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization
554
Procedure
Configuration Mode to AUTO(AUTOPLAN), BTS Type to BTS3900B_GSM
(BTS3900BGSM), and Freq. and BSIC Optimize Switch to ON(ON). Then, set the
related auto-planning algorithm switch and auto-optimization algorithm switch
according to the actual conditions.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG and check that Freq.
and BSIC Optimize Switch is set to ON.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set Freq.
and BSIC Optimize Switch to OFF(OFF).
----End
Example
BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, FQBSICOPTSWITCH=ON;
LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10;
BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, FQBSICOPTSWITCH=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 181 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization
555
182 Configuring PICO Transceiver
Redundancy
PICO Transceiver Redundancy.
Prerequisites
Two radio frequency (RF) cards for transceiver redundancy must be work on the same
frequency band.
l License
The BTS3900B configured with two TRXs does not support this feature.
TRX switchovers are not allowed within five minutes after a BTS3900B is started
successfully.
When a BTS3900B is interconnected to a Distributed Antenna System (DAS), the
antenna of the DAS must be connected to the transmitting port of another antenna system
for the BTS3900B before a TRX switchover is triggered.
Context
l This feature enables the standby RF card of a BTS3900B configured with a single TRX to
take over the services of the active RF card when the active RF card is faulty, preventing
service disruption.
l PICO Transceiver Redundancy can be applied in the following scenarios:
No traffic is available on a BTS3900B for a long time.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 182 Configuring PICO Transceiver Redundancy
556
MSs fail to access the network.
Voice quality is poor.
The RF Unit TX Channel Gain Out of Range alarm (alarm ID: 26520) and RF Unit
Clock Problem alarm (alarm ID: 26538) are generated on a BTS3900B.
RF cards are faulty.
Users can switch over TRXs to the standby RF card to restore services or improve service
quality.
CAUTION
A TRX switchover will lead to service interruption for less than three minutes.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 SET BTSTRXBACKUP command, and then set TRX Backup
Switch to ON.
NOTE
This feature is disabled by default for a BTS3900B before delivery.
CAUTION
After PICO Transceiver Redundancy is enabled, adding TRXs dynamically is not
allowed.
Verify TRX backup switch status.
1. Click Trace on the LMT interface, and then double-click Abis Interface CS Trace.
In the displayed Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box, set Trace Mode to OML. Then,
click Submit. The TRX backup status is displayed in Set Site Extend Attribute2
Ack.
Verify TRX switchover status.
NOTE
Assume that TRX 0 is switched over from RF card 0 to RF card 1.
1. Click Device Maintenance on the LMT interface. The Device Maintenance dialog
box is displayed.
2. Click BSC under Device Navigation Tree, and then select the corresponding BTS.
Then, observe the TRX status before the switchover on the right of BTS Device
Panel. TRX 0 is configured on RF card 0, as shown in Figure 182-1.
GBSS
557
Figure 182-1 TRX switchover status before switchover
3. Run the BSC6900 SWP GTRX command to switch over TRX.
4. Click Device Maintenance on the LMT interface. The Device Maintenance dialog
box is displayed.
5. Click BSC in Device Navigation Tree, and then select the corresponding BTS. Then,
observe the TRX status after the switchover on the right of BTS Device Panel. TRX
0 is switched over to RF card 1, as shown in Figure 182-2.
Figure 182-2 TRX switchover status after switchover
NOTE
If another switchover is performed, the TRX switchover status is restored to the status shown in
Figure 182-1.
1. Run the BSC6900 SET BTSTRXBACKUP command, and then set TRX Backup
Switch to OFF.
GBSS
558
CAUTION
If a TRX switchover is performed on a BTS3900B, the BTS3900B will reset
automatically when TRX Backup Switch is set to OFF.
----End
Example
SET BTSTRXBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TRXBPSW=ON;
SWP GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;
SET BTSTRXBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TRXBPSW=OFF;
GBSS
559
183 Configuring Compact BTS
Automatic Capacity Planning
Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning.
Prerequisites
This feature is supported by only the Compact BTS.
None
l License
The initial parameters required for BTS auto-planning algorithm are set in online mode
through the M2000 client.
Before this feature is configured, the BTS has performed automatic configuration and
planning.
The automatic optimization task of the GSM BTS is created on the M2000 client before
the feature is activated. For details, see the M2000 Operator Guide.
Context
l The Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning feature is license-controlled.
l The compact BTS refers to BTS3900E.
l According to the traffic volume, the BSC adjusts the output power of the TRX in real time
to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage of the network. A cell is initially
configured with one TRX of 30 W power. With the increase of the traffic volume, another
TRX in the cell is automatically activated, and thus these two TRXs share the 30 W power.
NOTE
After the feature is activated, the M2000 measures the traffic volume of the BTS within 24 hours, and then
compares the measurement result with the threshold of the actual traffic volume. If the traffic volume of the
BTS exceeds the threshold, the BTS adds a TRX automatically for expansion.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 183 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning
560
Procedure
Configuration Mode to AUTO, BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM, and Capacity and
Coverage Optimize Switch to ON.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then check that
Capacity and Coverage Optimize Switch is set to ON.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set
Capacity and Coverage Optimize Switch to OFF.
----End
Example
// Activation procedure
SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=AUTO,
BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, CAPCOVEROPTSWITCH=ON;
// Verification procedure
LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL;
// Deactivation procedure
SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=AUTO,
BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, CAPCOVEROPTSWITCH=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 183 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning
561
184 Configuring Compact BTS
Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and
Optimization
Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization.
Prerequisites
This feature is supported by only the BTS3900E.
l License
The scanning frequency set and neighbor cell list are configured on the M2000 in
advance.
The parameters related to automatic optimization are set on the M2000 in advance.
Context
l The Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization feature is license-
controlled.
l The compact BTS refers to BTS3900E.
l Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning
The automatic neighboring cell planning feature is mostly applied in the site deployment
scenario.
The automatic neighboring cell planning feature indicates that the M2000 triggers the
BTS3900E to perform downlink frequency scan. The BTS3900E reports the
information about the neighboring cells to the M2000. Then, the M2000 configures the
scanned cells as the neighboring cells of the BTS3900E. In addition, the M2000 adds
GBSS
184 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell
Planning and Optimization
562
the cells of the BTS3900E in the scanned cells to the neighboring cell list to set up the
bidirectional neighboring relation. If the scanned cells are beyond the serving area of
the M2000, the M2000 can set up only the unidirectional neighboring relation and
prompt users to manually configure neighboring cells.
l Automatic Neighbor Cell Optimization
The automatic neighbor cell optimization feature is used during the operation of the
BTS.
During the operation of the BTS3900E, the automatic optimization task is created on
the M2000. With this feature, the M2000 determines that redundant neighboring cells
exist in the BTS3900E or certain neighboring cells are missed according to the analysis
of the measurement reports. Then, the M2000 triggers the neighbor cell optimization
process automatically and updates the neighboring relation.
l The Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization feature can improve network
quality, increase handover success rate, and reduce call drop rate automatically, reducing
the workload of manual configuration and improving OM efficiency.
l The progress and result of the automatic planning and optimization can be viewed on the
M2000 client for data analysis and fault location. For details, see the M2000 Operator
Guide.
Procedure
l Procedure for activating Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSAUTOPLAN to add the BTS3900E in
auto-planning mode. The added BTS3900E is enabled with the auto-planning function
by default. In addition, the related auto-planning algorithm switch and auto-
optimization algorithm switch supported by the BTS3900E are set to ON. You can
run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG to modify the status
of the switches.
NOTE
l The added BTS3900E that is in auto-planning mode will enable the auto-planning function
automatically when it is powered on for the first time. If the first auto-planning scan
succeeds, the BTS3900E does not enable the auto-planning function automatically during
the subsequent powering-off and resetting operations. If the auto-planning function needs
to be enabled again, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN.
l To enable this feature on a BTS that is configured as a common BTS on the BSC6900, run
the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and set BTS Configuration
Mode to AUTO. Then, set Neighbor Cell Plan Switch to ON. Then, run the RST
AUTOPLAN command to plan the site data automatically.
2. If set Is Support SingleRAN Mode to SUPPORT(Support), run the BSC6900 MML
commandSET BTSIPCLKPARA, and then set Clock Protocol Type to PTP(PTP
Protocol). Or else, go toStep 3.
l Procedure for activating Automatic Neighbor Cell Optimization
Configuration Mode to AUTO, BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM, and set Neighbor
Cell Optimize Switch to ON.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then check that
Neighbor Cell Plan Switch and Neighbor Cell Optimize Switch are set to ON.
GBSS
563
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set Index
type to BYNAME(By Name), set BTS Name to MICRO, set BTS Configuration
Mode to NORMAL(NORMAL).
----End
Example
ADD BTSAUTOPLAN: BTSNAME="micro", BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, DESTNODE=BSC,
SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, SERVICEMODE=IP, BTSIP="10.161.101.101",
BTSMASK="255.255.255.0", BSCIP="18.18.18.18",
MAINDEVTAB="11112222223333334444", SRANMODE=SUPPORT,
CELLNAME="micro_cell0",
TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="111", LAC=1214, CI=1000,
ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro", CELLNAMELIST="micro_cell0",
SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro", CFGMODE=AUTO,
BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, NBRCELLSWITCH=ON, NBRCELLOPTSWITCH=ON;
LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro";
SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro", CFGMODE=NORMAL;
GBSS
564
185 Configuring Compact BTS Timing
Power Off
Compact BTS Timing Power Off.
Prerequisites
The solar controller is connected to the BTS.
Currently, only the BTS3900E supports the Compact BTS Timing Power Off feature.
l License
The version the solar controller should not be earlier than POWER2000 V1R1C04.
The time of the solar controller is consistent with that of the BTS3900E.
Context
l The compact BTS is the BTS3900E. Within the coverage of the BTS3900E, if the
BTS3900E uses solar boards to supply power, users can set the enabling and disabling time
of the BTS3900E on the BSC when the traffic is unavailable or is light. By using the solar
controller, the BTS3900E can enable or disable automatically in the specified periods,
reducing the power consumption of the site, the number of solar boards, and construction
cost.
l The BTS3900E does not provide services when the Compact BTS Timing Power Off
feature takes effect.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 185 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off
565
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP, and then set Board
Parameter Configuration Enabled toYES and BTS Power-off Enabled to ON, and
set Power-off Start Time and Power-off End Time according to the actual
conditions.
NOTE
Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSPWR to query the power information about the
BTS.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP, and then set BTS Index to
the index of the BTS to be verified, Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to
YES, and BTS Power-off Enabled to ON, and set Power-off Start Time and Power-
off End Time according to the verification time at the site to ensure that the
verification time is within the period specified by Power-off Start Time and Power-
off End Time.
2. On the main interface of the LMT, click Alarm. The Alarm tab page is displayed.
3. Double-click OML Fault on the Fault tab page under Browse Alarm. The Alarm
Detailed Information dialog box is displayed.
4. Check Alarm Cause of Location Info, if Alarm Cause is displayed as Green Base
Station Power-off, it indicates that the BTS3900E is powered off.
NOTE
The OML Fault alarm is generated after the BTS is powered off. Thus, check the alarm after Power-off
Start Time.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP, and then set Board
Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO or set Board Parameter Configuration
Enabled to YES and BTS Power-off Enabled to OFF.
----End
Example
BTSSHUTDNASW=ON, SHUTDNST=16&15&19, SHUTDNET=18&15&34;
BTSSHUTDNASW=OFF;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 185 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off
566
186 Configuring Local User Management
Local User Management.
Prerequisites
The BTS3900E is in IP over FE transmission mode.
l License
The PC installed with the Local User Management software is in normal communication
with the BTS3900E.
Context
l The Local User Management feature is license-controlled.
l Currently, only the BTS3900E supports the Local User Management feature.
l This feature can be used to deploy a special commercial mode. When the BTS3900E is
used in rural areas, operators can contract the BTS3900E to entrepreneurs. The
entrepreneurs manage the local users through a PC and provide the registration and
deregistration services, local services, public network services, and local services in single-
site mode.
The entrepreneurs gain profits by increasing the number of local users. The
entrepreneurs are responsible for registration and communication charging (including
charging strategies) of local users.
The transmission in rural areas is unstable. This feature ensures that the local user
management can be performed even if the transmission is disrupted. In addition, the
communication and charging between local users are supported.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 186 Configuring Local User Management
567
The BTS3900E contracted to the entrepreneurs can also provide services for public
network users of operators. In this case, the communication requirements of public
network users can be ensured when the BSC transmission is disrupted.
l The calls between local users support only full rate.
l When the transmission on the Abis interface is disrupted, the BTS3900E enters the single-
site mode. The handover procedure lasts for six minutes, during which services are
disrupted.
l During the communication between local users, only the reporting of the original
measurement report is supported.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA, and then set local call
support flag to YES(YES).
Local services and public network services
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOTHPARA, and then check that local
call support flag is set to YES(YES).
2. Use MSs to perform the service dialing test.
Expected result: The call services between local services, between public network
users, and between local users and public network users are normal.
NOTE
The local signaling process of call services between local users is different from the common call
process. You can observe the signaling information through message tracing on the Web LMT.
Local services in single-site mode
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOTHPARA, and then check that local
call support flag is set to YES(YES).
2. Disconnect the BTS3900E from the BSC and wait for six minutes. Then, perform the
local service dialing test.
Expected result: The call services between local users are normal.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA, and then set local call
support flag to NO(NO).
----End
Example
SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, SPRTLU=YES;
SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, SPRTLU=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 186 Configuring Local User Management
568
187 Configuring VGCS and VBS
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate Voice Group Call Service (VGCS)
and Voice Broadcast Service (VBS).
Prerequisites
The test cell is configured with the VGCS function and VGCS ID at the MSC.
Non-single channel originating is configured at the MSC.
VGCS and VBS are enabled for the IMSIs used in this test at the HLR.
Two test MSs, MS1 and MS2, that support VGCS and VBS are available.
l License
The test cell has idle TCHs.
Channel status monitoring of the test cell is started. For details, see Monitoring Channel
Status.
Context
Compared with GSM, GSM-R provides new features, such as VGCS, VBS, and enhanced Multi-
Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP) service. GSM-R can provide diversified voice
dispatch services required in the private network.
A cell does not support VGCS or VBS by default, that is, the default value of NCH Occupy
Block Number is 0. Configure VGCS and VBS by setting NCH Occupy Block Number and
NCH Start Block. When NCH Occupy Block Number is not 0, the BSC informs the MS of
the NCH information in system information type 1. The MS initiates a VGCS/VBS call after
receiving the message indicating that the system supports VGCS/VBS.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 187 Configuring VGCS and VBS
569
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGSMR. In this step, set NCH
Occupy Block Number and NCH Start Block to appropriate values.
NOTE
l NCH Occupy Block Number must be set to a value other than 0. The sum of NCH Occupy
Block Number and NCH Start Block must be smaller than or equal to the value of CCCH
Blocks Reserved for AGCH. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST
GCELLIDLEBASIC to query the value of Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the
AGCH.
Verifying VGCS
1. Use MS1 to perform VGCS in the test cell.
2. On the LMT, open the A Interface Trace dialog box and select BSSAP.
Expected result: The messages VGCS/VBS Setup, VGCS/VBS Setup Ack,
VGCS/VBS Assignment Request, VGCS/VBS Assignment Result, and VGCS/
VBS Talker Information are traced on the A interface.
3. Check the status of the TCHs in the test cell. You can see that besides the TCH for
VGCS, another TCH is occupied and this TCH is released 5 seconds later.
NOTE
A calling session lasts for 5 seconds after pressing the push-to-talk (PTT) key. To prolong the
calling session, press and hold down the PTT key for as long as necessary.
4. Use MS2 to perform VGCS with the same VGCS ID as MS1 in the test cell.
Expected result: MS2 is notified that the VGCS already exists. After adding MS2
to the ongoing VGCS, you can view the current VGCS ID from the screen of MS2.
5. Press the PTT key on MS2 to occupy the uplink resources. Then check the traced
messages displayed in the A Interface Trace window and on the MS1.
Expected result: The messages Uplink Request, Uplink Request Ack, Uplink
Request Confirmation, and VGCS/VBS Talker Information are traced on the
A interface. You can use MS1 to view the MS2 phone number and hear the voice
from MS2.
6. Press the PTT key on MS2 and then on MS1 to occupy the uplink resources. The
occupation attempt of MS1 is rejected.
Verifying VBS
1. Use MS1 to perform VBS in the test cell.
2. On the LMT, open the A Interface Trace dialog box and select BSSAP.
Expected result: The messages VGCS/VBS Setup, VGCS/VBS Setup Ack,
VGCS/VBS Assignment Request, and VGCS/VBS Assignment Result are
traced on the A interface.
3. Check the status of the TCHs in the test cell. You can see that besides the TCH for
VBS, another TCH is occupied.
4. Use MS1 to perform VBS with the same VBS ID as MS1 in the test cell.
Expected result: MS2 is notified that the VBS already exists. After adding MS2 to
the ongoing VBS, you can view the current VBS ID from the screen of MS2.
GBSS
570
Occupy Block Number to 0.
----End
Example
/*Activating VGCS and VBS*/
//Enabling VGCS and VBS
SET GCELLGSMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCHOCBLOCKNUM=1, NCHSTARTBLOCK=1;
/*Deactivating VGCS and VBS*/
//Disabling VGCS and VBS
SET GCELLGSMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCHOCBLOCKNUM=0;
GBSS
571
188 Configuring GSM-T Relay
GSM-T Relay.
Prerequisites
The MS, MSC, and HLR need to support this feature.
The BTS has been upgraded to a version that supports trunking services. The earliest
version that supports trunking services on a pulic network is BTS3000V300R009C01.
The recommended version is GBSS13.0.
The MS supports trunking services.
l License
Context
If a BSC supports GSM-T Relay, the BSC is connected to both the public MSC and the trunking
MSC. By routing trunking services to the trunking MSC, the BSC separates the networking of
trunking services and point-to-point call services.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add a signaling point of the
trunking MSC. In this step, set DSP index according to the network planning, and set
DSP type to A(A) and DSP bear type to MTP3(MTP3).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node. In this step,
set CN Node Index, DPC Group Index, and Operator Name according to the
network planning; set MSC ID to a value that identifies a trunking MSC; set DSP
index to the value specified in Step 1; set Default DPC to NO(Not Default DPC),
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 188 Configuring GSM-T Relay
572
Trunking MSC to YES(Yes), and Support Paging Message from Trunking
MSC to YES(Yes).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 to add an E1/T1 on the A interface.
set. In this step, set Signalling link set index according to the network planning.
In this step, set Signalling link set index to the value specified in Step 4 and set TC
mode based on the subrack combination mode.
index to the index of the signaling link set added in Step 4.
Occupy Block Number of the target cell to a value that is not less than 1.
1. On the LMT, start the A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing BSSAP
Messages on the A Interface. In this step, set Trace Type to BSSAP and DPC
(Hex) to the DPC of the trunking MSC.
2. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the target cell
specified in Step 7. Then, click Submit. The A Interface Trace message window is
displayed.
3. Initiate a successful VGCS call. Then, check the messages traced on the A interface.
Expected result: The A interface signaling of the VGCS initiating MS is displayed in
the A interface tracing window.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE. In this step, set Default
DPC to NO(Not Default DPC), and Trunking MSC to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Configuring a DPC
ADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc", DPX=1, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=1111, DPCT=A,
BEARTYPE=MTP3;
//Configuring a CN node of a trunking MSC
ADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, DPX=1, DPCGIDX=0, OPNAME="op1", CNID=0,
DFDPC=NO, SaGsmrMsc=YES, SptPaging=YES, ATransMode=TDM;
//Configuring an E1/T1 over the A Interface
//Configuring an MTP3 signaling link set
//Configuring an MTP3 signaling link
MTP2LNKN=0, LKTATE=64K, NAME="MTP3LNK";
//Configuring an MTP3 route
ADD MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MTP3RT";
//Setting GSM-R parameters of a cell
GBSS
573
SET GCELLGSMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCHOCBLOCKNUM=1;
//Modifying parameters of a CN node
MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, DFDPC=NO, SaGsmrMsc=NO;
GBSS
574
189 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover
HUAWEI II Handover.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
Huawei II handover algorithm will traverse all the handover types in the handover decision-
making phase. In the process of traversing the handover types, Huawei II handover algorithm
does not execute a handover immediately but creates a candidate target cell list when the
triggering conditions of the handover are met, compared with the common handover algorithm.
After all the handover types are traversed, the intersection of the candidate cell lists that meet
the handover triggering conditions is selected as the final target cell list. Compared with the
common handover algorithm, Huawei II handover algorithm considers comprehensively all
handover decision-making results so that the final handover decision-making result is more
accurate.
Huawei II handover algorithm is classified into emergency handover, intra-cell handover, and
inter-cell handover.
l The emergency handover is classified into directed retry, quick handover, bad quality
handover, TA handover, and edge handover.
l The intra-cell handover is classified into interference handover, concentric circles
handover, BCCH dense frequency multiplexing handover, and handover between TCHF
and TCHH.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 189 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover
575
l The inter-cell handover is classified into no downlink measurement report handover,
enhanced dual-band network handover, fast-moving micro cell handover, better cell
handover, and 2G/3G handover.
CAUTION
l After quick handover, bad quality handover, and TA handover are successful, penalty is
applied on the old cell during the penalty time to prevent an immediate handover back to the
old cell.
l In Huawei II handover algorithm, the serving cell must not be selected as the target cell of
bad quality handover.
l During TA handover, if the TA Threshold of a co-site neighboring cell is lower than or equal
to the TA Threshold of the serving cell, a handover to the cell is prohibited.
l Intra-cell handover is allowed for the interference handover. However, when intra-cell
handover is triggered several times continuously, it will be forbidden within a specified
duration. In Huawei II handover algorithm, only the serving cell can be selected as the target
cell of interference handover.
l On the enhanced dual-band network, the MS should not be handed over to a cell in the same
underlaid/overlaid cell group when the load handovers between the overlaid cell and the
underlaid cell (specified by Load HO From UL Subcell to OL Subcell Allowed and Load
HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled) are allowed. This is to prevent a load handover
of a normal cell from colliding with a load handover between the overlaid cell and the
underlaid cell on the network.
l PBGT handover toward a cell of the same group is not allowed once it is triggered between
the enhanced dual-band network cells.
l After the fast-moving micro cell handover is successful, penalty is applied on all the
neighboring micro cells.
l Load handover is not treated as an independent handover type for handover decision-making.
The load handover decision is made in the network adjustment phase. The selection of a
target cell should be processed by the better cell handover. That is, the load handover is
triggered when the triggering conditions of load handover and better cell handover are met
simultaneously.
l Better cell handover is an optimization of inter-layer handover and PBGT handover in
Huawei I handover algorithm. It is specific to Huawei II handover algorithm.
Procedure
Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm
II).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set Current
HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, set
Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm
II).
GBSS
576
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Current
HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set MAX
Consecutive HO Times as required.
YES(Yes).
7. Activatin directed retry.
8. Activating the quick handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index
Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell
Type as actual, and set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes) and set Chain
Neighbour Cell Type as required.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set
Quick Handover Enable to YES(Yes).
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST. In this step, set
Quick Move Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, Quick
Handover Down Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover
Punish Time, Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MR
Number, Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore Measurement
Report Number, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS,
Handover Direction Forecast Enable, Handover Direction Forecast Statistic
Times, Frequency Shift Handover Statistic Time, and Frequency Shift
Handover Duration as required.
NOTE
If external neighboring cells are configured, set Quick Handover Offset, Quick
Handover Punish Time, and Quick Handover Punish Value by running the
BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set
UL Frequency Adjust Switch, DL Frequency Adjust Switch, and UL
Frequency Adjust Value according to the frequency offset information reported
by the base station.
9. Activating the TA handover algorithm
TA HO Allowed to YES(Yes).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set TA
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, set
Penalty Time after TA HO and Penalty Level after TA HO as required.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index
Type as actual, set TA HO Watch Time and TA HO Valid Time according to
the actual situation.
10. Activating the bad quality handover algorithm
GBSS
577
BQ HO Allowed to YES(Yes).
b. Optional. For non-AMR calls, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set UL Qual. Threshold and DL Qual.
c. Optional. For AMR FR calls or AMR HR calls, run the BSC6900 MML
command SET GCELLAMRQUL. In this step, set UL Qual. Limit for AMR
FR, DL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR, and DL
Qual. Limit for AMR HR as required.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, set
Penalty Time after BQ HO and Penalty Level after BQ HO as required.
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index
Type as actual, set TA HO Watch Time and BQ HO Watch Time according
to the actual situation.
11. Activating interference handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set
Interference HO Allowed to YES(Yes), set Intracell HO Allowed to YES
(Yes). and set Interfere HO Valid Time, Inter-layer HO Threshold and
Interfere HO Static Timeto appropriate values.
Inter-layer HO Threshold, Interfere HO Static Time, and Interfere HO
Valid Time according to the actual situation.
NOTE
If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, you need to run the BSC6900 MML
command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Inter-layer HO Threshold as required.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index
Type as actual, set Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLAMRQUL. In this step, set
11 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 12 for Non-AMR FR, and
Interfere HO Qual. Thresh Offset for AMR FR as required.
12. Activating the concentric cell algorithm, refer to 48 Configuring Concentric Cell.
13. Activating the BCCH dense frequency multiplexing algorithm, refer to 60
Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing.
14. Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set No
Dl Mr.HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set UL Qual. Limit for AMR FR,
UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR, Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit, No Dl Mr.
HO Statistic Time, and No Dl Mr. HO Last Time as required.
GBSS
578
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, set
Filter Length for TCH Qual. and Filter Length for SDCCH Qual. as required.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index
Type as actual, set UL BQ HO Static Time and UL BQ HO Last Time as
required.
15. Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell IUO
Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double Frequency Cell), set Cell Inner/Extra
Property and Same Group Cell Index Type to appropriate values, and set Same
Group Cell Name or Same Group Cell Index based on the value of Same
Group Cell Index Type.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA. In this step,
set Load HO Allowed, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold, Inner Cell
Serious OverLoad Thred, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level,
Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH, UL Subcell Serious Overload
Threshold, UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Periods, MOD Step LEN of
UL Load HO Period, Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO, UL Subcell
Lower Load Threshold, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, Outgoing
OL Subcell HO Level TH, OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period, Step
Length of OL Subcell Load HO, Distance Between Boundaries of Subcells,
and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries as required.
16. Activating the edge handover algorithm
Load Handover Support to YES(Yes) and then set Inter-layer HO
Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Handover Algorithm II Edge
HO Watch Time, and Handover Algorithm II Edge HO Valid Time.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index
Type as actual, set Inter-cell HO Hysteresis, Edge HO AdjCell Watch
Time, and Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time as required.
c. Optional: Run the following commands when the edge handover thresholds need
to be different for neighboring cells.
Enhanced Outgoing Cell Handover Allowed set to YES(Yes).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL after setting
Enhanced Outgoing Cell Handover Offset as required.
17. Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set
Layer of The Cell as required.
NOTE
BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Layer of The Cell as required.
MS Fast Moving HO Allowed to YES(Yes).
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set MS
Fast-moving Time Threshold, MS Fast-moving Watch Cells, MS Fast-
GBSS
579
moving Valid Cells, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on MS
Fast Moving HO as required.
NOTE
BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Penalty Time on Fast Moving
HO and Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set
Inter-layer HO Threshold as required.
NOTE
If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, you need to run the BSC6900 MML
command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Inter-layer HO Threshold as required.
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index
Type as actual, set Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis, HCS HO Watch
Time, and HCS HO Valid Time as required.
18. Activating the better cell handover algorithm
Better Cell Handover Enable to YES(Yes) and then set Pathloss Ho. Enable
as required.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index
Type as actual, set Better Cell HO Watch Time and Better Cell HO Valid
Time as required.
c. Optional: Run the following commands when the better cell handover thresholds
need to be different for neighboring cells.
Enhanced Outgoing Cell Handover Allowed set to YES(Yes).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set
Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, and
Neighboring Cell Type as actual, set Neighboring Cell Penalty Switch
to YES(Yes), and set Enhanced Outgoing Cell Handover Offset, Penalty
Stop Level Threshold, Penalty Timer Length, and Level Penalty Value
on Neighboring Cell as required.
19. Activating the algorithm for the handover between TCHF and TCHH
a. Run BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set AMR
F-H Ho Allowed to YES(Yes), Allow AMR H-F Quality-based HO to YES
(Yes), Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES(Yes), and Allow Non-AMR H-F
Quality-based HO to YES(Yes). Then, set AMR F-H Traffic Threshold, F-
H Ho Duration, F-H Ho Period, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step, AMR
F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold, F-H Pathloss
Offset Overlay, AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold, F-H ATCB Offset
Overlay, AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, F-H Ho Stat. Time, F-H Ho Last
Time, AMR H-F Traffic Threshold, H-F Ho Duration, AMR H-F Ho ATCB
Threshold, H-F ATCB Offset Overlay, AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold,
H-F Pathloss Offset Overlay, AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold, H-F Ho Stat.
Time, H-F Ho Last Time, Non-AMR F-H Traffic Threshold, Non-AMR F-
H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step, Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step, Non-
AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold,
Non-AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, Non-AMR H-F Traffic Threshold,
GBSS
580
Non-AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold, Non-AMR H-F Ho Pathloss
Threshold, and Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold as required.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set TCH Rate
Adjust Allow to YES(Yes).
c. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set
Speech Version to at least FULL_RATE_VER1, FULL_RATE_VER3 and
HALF_RATE_VER3.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Um
Interface Tag, Abis Interface Tag and A Interface Tag to
GSM_PHASE_2Plus.
20. Activating the 2G/3G handover algorithm, refer to 201 Configuring GSM/WCDMA
Service Based Handover and 202 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based
Handover.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to query the setting of
Current HO Control Algorithm.
Expected result: The value of the Current HO Control Algorithm is
HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).
2. On the LMT, start the message tracing over the A interface by referring to Tracing
Messages on the A Interface. Select BSSAP in the Trace Type area.
Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover performed message to the MSC.
In the case of the quick handover, the handover cause value is better-cell.
In the case of the TA handover, the handover cause value is distance.
In the case of the BQ handover, the handover cause value is uplink-quality or
downlink-quality.
In the case of the interference handover, the handover cause value is uplink-
quality or downlink-quality.
In the case of the no downlink measurement report handover, the handover cause
value is uplink-quality.
In the case of the enhanced dual-band network handover, the handover cause value
is better-cell or traffic.
In the case of the load handover, the handover cause value is traffic.
In the case of the edge handover, the handover cause value is uplink-strength or
downlink-strength.
In the case of the fast-moving micro cell handover, the handover cause value is
better-cell.
In the case of the better cell handover, the handover cause value is better-cell.
In the case of the handover between TCHF and TCHH, the handover cause value
is downlink-quality.
In the case of the SDCCH handover, the handover cause value is better-cell,
distance, uplink-quality, downlink-quality, traffic, uplink-strength, or
downlink-strength.
Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).
----End
GBSS
581
Example
//Activating HUAWEI II handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2;
SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2;
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2;
//Activating the quick handover algorithm
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=YES,
CHAINNCELLTYPE=QUICK_HO_NCELL_TYPE_A;
QUICKHOEN=YES;
MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, SCELLFILTER=4, NCELLFILTER=4, IGNOREMRNUM=1,
TIMEPUNISH=10, HOPUNISHVALUE=63, HOOFFSET=68, MSLEVSTRQPBGT=NO,
HODIRFORECASTEN=YES, HODIRSTATIME=3, HODIRLASTTIME=2, AFCHOSTATTIME=4,
AFCHOLASTTIME=3;
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES,
FREQADJVALUE=36671;
//Activating the TA handover algorithm
TAHOEN=YES;
TALIMIT=125;
SSTAPUNISH=40, TIMETAPUNISH=10;
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, TASTATTIME=1, TALASTTIME=1;
//Activating the bad quality handover algorithm
BQHOEN=YES;
DLQUALIMIT=55, ULQUALIMIT=60;
SSBQPUNISH=63, TIMEBQPUNISH=10;
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, BQSTATTIME=1, BQLASTTIME=1;
//Activating the interference handover algorithm
INTRACELLHOEN=YES, INTERFHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25, INTERFERESTATTIME=3,
INTERFERELASTTIME=2;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BANTIME=20;
SET GCELLAMRQUL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, RXQUAL1=70, RXQUAL2=60,
RXQUAL3=59, RXQUAL4=58, RXQUAL5=57, RXQUAL6=56, RXQUAL7=55, RXQUAL8=54,
RXQUAL9=53, RXQUAL10=52, RXQUAL11=51, RXQUAL12=50;
//Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm
NODLMRHOEN=YES, NODLMRHOQUALLIMIT=50, NODLMRHOALLOWLIMIT=8,
NODLMRHOSTATTIME=1, NODLMRHOLASTTIME=1;
DATAQUAFLTLEN=4, SIGQUAFLTLEN=2;
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ULBQSTATTIME=1, ULBQLASTTIME=1;
//Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=EDB_cell, CELLINEXTP=Inner,
SET GCELLHOEDBPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OUTASSOPTEN=YES;
GBSS
582
///Activating the edge handover algorithm
FRINGEHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10, DLEDGETHRES=20, EDGESTAT1=6, EDGELAST1=4;
//Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3;
QCKMVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QCKSTATCNT=3, QCKTRUECNT=2,
QCKTIMETH=15, SPEEDPUNISH=30, SPEEDPUNISHT=4;
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, INTELEVHOHYST=67,
HCSSTATTIME=3, HCSLASTTIME=2;
//Activating the better cell handover algorithm
BETTERCELLHOEN=YES, PATHLOSSHOEN=YES;
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2,
BETTERCELLSTATTIME=6, BETTERCELLLASTTIME=4;
//Activating the algorithm for the handover between TCHF and TCHH
AMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES, AMRFULLTOHALFHOTHRESH=75,
FULLTOHALFHODURATION=5, FULLTOHALFHOPERIOD=1,
AMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHADJSTEP=1, AMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBADJSTEP=2,
AMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHTHRESH=100, FULLTOHALFHOPATHOFFSET=10,
AMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBTHRESH=20, FULLTOHALFHOATCBOFFSET=20,
AMRFULLTOHALFHOQUALTHRESH=0, FULLTOHALFHOSTATTIME=6,
FULLTOHALFHOLASTTIME=4, AMRHALFTOFULLHOTHRESH=45,
AMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALALLOW=YES, HALFTOFULLHODURATION=5,
AMRHALFTOFULLHOATCBTHRESH=4, HALFTOFULLATCBOFFSET=20,
AMRHALFTOFULLHOPATHTHRESH=108, HALFTOFULLHOPATHOFFSET=10,
AMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALTHRESH=3, HALFTOFULLHOSTATTIME=6,
HALFTOFULLHOLASTTIME=4, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES,
NOAMRFULLTOHALFTHRESH=85, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHADJSTEP=1,
NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBADJSTEP=2, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHTHRESH=95,
NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBTHRESH=30, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOQUALTHRESH=0,
NOAMRHALFTOFULLTHRESH=25, NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALALLOW=YES,
NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOATCBTHRESH=14, NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOPATHTHRESH=103,
NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALTHRESH=2;
//Activating the SDCCH handover algorithm
INHOH2FTH=12;
SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INRBSCSDHOEN=YES;
GBSS
583
190 Configuring Handover Re-
establishment
Handover Re-establishment.
Prerequisites
l License
An available neighboring cell is configured for the test cell. The TRX of the test cell
supports handover re-establishment.
Context
If receiving an Error Indication message from the BTS during a handover, the BSC attempts to
re-establish the call on the original channel instead of treating it as a call drop.
Handover re-establishment provides the following benefits:
l Reducing the call drop rate and improving user satisfaction
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Activate L2
Re-establishment to YES(Yes).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 190 Configuring Handover Re-establishment
584
1. Configure two cells: cell0 and cell1. Configure these two cells as neighboring cells
on the same frequency band. Ensure that they operate properly.
2. Initiate RSL message tracing on the Abis interface for cell0 on the BSC6900 LMT by
referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Better Cell
HO Watch Time and Better Cell HO Valid Time to 1, and PBGT HO Threshold
to 64.
Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR. In this step, set Use
LAPDm N200 to ON(On), T200 FACCH/F and T200 FACCH/H to 5, N200 of
FACCH/Half Rate to 30, and N200 of FACCH/Full Rate to 34.
6. Use a test MS to make a call in cell0.
7. Rapidly decrease the BTS transmit power in cell0 to initiate a handover for better cell
to cell1.
8. After issuing the handover command, the BSC receives an Error Indication message
from cell0. The MS cannot receive the handover command. Then, increase the transmit
power in cell0.
9. Check the result of RSL message tracing on the Abis interface for cell0.
Expected result: The test MS continues with the call in cell0. The following messages
can be traced on the Abis interface for cell0: Handover Command, Error Indication,
Establish Request, and Establish Confirm.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Activate L2
Re-establishment to NO(No).
----End
Example
/*Activating Handover Re-establishment*/
//Enabling handover re-establishment
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACTL2REEST=YES;
/*Deactivating Handover Re-establishment*/
//Disabling handover re-establishment
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACTL2REEST=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 190 Configuring Handover Re-establishment
585
191 Configuring BSS Sharing
BSS Sharing.
Prerequisites
l License
The MSC is configured with two PLMNs (PLMN A and PLMN B). PLMN A belongs
to operator A, and PLMN B belongs to operator B.
BTS A is configured with two cells (cell1 and cell2), which belong to the primary
operator A. The two cells are functional and have idle channels.
Context
The BSS sharing function allows multiple operators with independent core networks to share
GBSS network resources, such as BSC, BTS, antenna, and transmission devices. A single cell
under a site provides services for only one operator, and different cells under a site provide
services for multiple operators.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Support RAN
Sharing set to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set
Operator Type to SEC(Secondary Operator) (assume that PLMN B belongs to the
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 191 Configuring BSS Sharing
586
secondary operator). Set Operator Index, Operator Name, MCC, and MNC based
on PLMN B information, and set other parameters to appropriate values.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE. In this step, set Operator
Name to the name of the operator B and set other parameters to appropriate values.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING for a specific target BTS.
In this step, set Sharing Allow to YES(YES).
5. Optional: For 3900 series base stations, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
BTSRXUBP. In this step, set RanSharing Support to YES(YES) for the
corresponding RXU.
6. Optional: If a PTP BVC has been configured, run the BSC6900 MML command
RMV PTPBVC to remove the PTP BVC of cell2.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Operator
Name of cell2 to the name of the operator B.
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLOSPMAP. In this step, set OSP
Code of cell2 to the DSP allocated to BSC6900 by the operator B.
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE. In this step, set Service
Provider Name to the name of operator B and other parameters to appropriate values.
10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE. In this step, set NSE Identifier,
Subrack No., Slot No., and Protocol Type to appropriate values, Service Provider
Name to the name of operator B, and SGSN Node ID to the value set in Step 9.
11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC to add a PTP BVC for cell2.
1. Get two test MSs ready: MS1 and MS2. MS1 belongs to operator A, and MS2 belongs
to operator B.
2. Initiate Abis-interface CS message tracing on the LMT with Trace Type set to
RSL. For details, see Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface.
3. Initiate A-interface CS message tracing on the LMT with Trace Type set to
BSSAP. For details, see Tracing Messages on the A Interface.
4. Enable MS1 to camp on cell1 and make a successful call to a fixed-line phone. Check
the tracing results of cell1.
Expected result: The complete MOC signaling procedure of MS1 is displayed.
5. Enable MS2 to camp on cell2 and make a successful call to a fixed-line phone. Check
the tracing results of cell2.
Expected result: The complete MOC signaling procedure of MS2 is displayed.
6. Initiate Um-interface PS message tracing on the LMT for cell1 and cell2. For details,
see Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.
7. Enable MS1 to perform PS services in cell1, and check Um-interface PS message trace
results in cell1.
Expected result: The signaling procedure for PS services of MS1 is displayed.
8. Enable MS2 to perform PS services in cell2, and check Um-interface PS message trace
results in cell2.
Expected result: The signaling procedure for PS services of MS2 is displayed.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV PTPBVC to remove the PTP BVC for cell2.
GBSS
587
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV NSE to remove the network service entity
of operator B.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SGSNNODE. In this step, set Service
Provider Name to the name of operator B and remove the SGSN node for operator
B.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Service Provider
Name for cell2 to the name of operator A.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLOSPMAP. In this step, set OSP
Code for cell2 to the DSP that operator A has assigned to BSC6900.
6. Optional: For 3900 series base stations, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
BTSRXUBP. In this step, set RanSharing Support to NO(NO) for the corresponding
RXU.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING for a specific target BTS.
In this step, set Sharing Allow to NO(NO).
8. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCNNODE to remove the CN node for
operator B.
9. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCNOPERATOR to remove operator B.
10. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Support RAN
Sharing to NO(No).
----End
Example
/*Activating BSS Sharing*/
//Enabling RAN sharing
SET BSCBASIC: SptRanSharing=YES;
//Configuring operator B
ADD GCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=SEC, OPINDEX=1, OPNAME="B", MCC="460",
MNC="138", MSCPOOLALLOW=NO, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;
//Configuring a CN node
ADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1, DPX=1, DPCGIDX=1, OPNAME="B", CNID=2,
DFDPC=YES, ATransMode=TDM;
//Setting BTS sharing parameters
SET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=YES;
//(Optional) Enabling RAN Sharing for a 3900 series base station
RXUTYPE=BTS3900E, SPTSHARING=YES;
//(Optional) Removing the PTP BVC for cell2
RMV PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=10;
//Modifying cell parameters of an operator
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, OPNAME="B";
//Modifying the mapping between a cell and an OSP
MOD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, OPC=H'000A12;
//Adding an SGSN node for operator B
ADD SGSNNODE: OPNAME="B", CNID=1;
//Adding the network service entity for operator B
ADD NSE: NSEI=1, SRN=0, SN=8, PT=GB_OVER_IP, ISNCMODE=STATIC, OPNAME="B",
CNID=1;
//Adding a PTP BVC for cell2
/*Deactivating BSS Sharing*/
//(Optional) Removing the PTP BVC for cell2
RMV PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=10;
//Removing the network service entity for operator B
GBSS
588
RMV NSE: NSEI=1;
//Removing the SGSN node for operator B
RMV SGSNNODE: OPNAME="B", CNID=1;
//Modifying cell parameters of an operator
MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, OPNAME="A";
//Modifying the mapping between a cell and an OSP
MOD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, OPC=H'000B00;
//(Optional) Disabling RAN Sharing for a 3900 series base station
RXUTYPE=BTS3900E, SPTSHARING=NO;
//Disabling BTS sharing
SET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=NO;
//Removing the CN node
RMV GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1;
//Removing operator B
RMV GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=1;
//Disabling RAN sharing
SET BSCBASIC: SptRanSharing=NO;
GBSS
589
192 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell
MOCN Shared Cell.
Prerequisites
The features GBFD-117401 MSC Pool and GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool have been
l License
If MS routing is determined by the CN, the list of VLRs in which an MS is allowed to
roam needs to be configured on the HLR, or the list of LAIs in which an MS is allowed
to roam needs to be configured on the MSC server.
Operators A and B are configured. Both operator A and operator B have enabled the
features MSC Pool and SGSN Pool in their networks.
MSCs or SGSNs that belong to different operators are configured with different
Network Resource Indication (NRI) values with the same length.
Context
The BSS sharing function enables multiple operators to share BSS equipment on a per BTS basis
while using their respective core network (CN) equipment. With this feature, different operators
cannot share the same cell.
The MOCN shared cell function, however, enables multiple operators to share BSS equipment
on a per cell basis while using their respective CN equipment.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 192 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell
590
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA to turn on the MOCN
control switch. In this step, set MOCN Switch to CNSEL(CN Select) or BSCSEL
(BSC Select) and set Re-Routing Occasion, Filter CS Based on Operator
Neighboring Cell List, and Filter PS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List to
appropriate values.
NOTE
It is recommended that MOCN Switch be set to CNSEL(CN Select).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SRA to add a shared routing area. In this
step, set Routing Sharing Area Code and Routing Sharing Area Description to
appropriate values.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD LAOPMAP to add the mapping between a
location area and operators. In this step, set Location Area Record Index, MCC,
MNC, Cell LAC, Operator Name 1, Operator Name 2, and Operator Name 3 to
appropriate values. Assume that cell 1 is the selected location area, Operator Name
1 is the name of operator A, and Operator Name 2 is the name of operator B.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SRALAMAP to add the mapping between
a shared routing area and a location area. Based on the settings specified in Step 2,
set Routing Sharing Area Record Index, Routing Sharing Area Code, MCC,
MNC, and LAC of cell 1 to appropriate values.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a cell named cell 1. In this
step, set MOCN Sharing Cell to YES(Yes).
6. (Optional) If MOCN Switch is set to BSCSEL(BSC Select):
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMSIGRP to add an IMSI number
range. In this step, set IMSI Segment Index, Description of the IMSI
segment, Start IMSI value, and End IMSI value to appropriate values. Assume
that the IMSI of MS1 is between Start IMSI value and End IMSI value.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USRCAT to add an MS routing
category. In this step, set Subscriber Category Index, Operator Name 1, Rate
of Operator 1, Operator Name 2, Rate of Operator 2, Operator Name 3, and
Rate of Operator 3 to appropriate values.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMSISRAMAP to add a routing
category of an IMSI number range. In this step, set IMSI Category Index to an
appropriate value; based on the settings specified in Step 2, 6.1, 6.2, set Routing
Sharing Area Code, IMSI Segment Index, and Subscriber Category Index
to appropriate values.
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set BSC
Reserved Parameter 5 to an appropriate value based on site conditions.
NOTE
BSC Reserved Parameter 5 in the MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA indicates the
sequence number N(U) contained in the ATTACH REQUEST message when the message is
rerouted to another SGSN. The N(U) value depends on the interconnected SGSN. When the
SGSN does not request to change the N(U) value, this parameter is set to 512, indicating that
the N(U) value does not need to be changed.
l Verification Procedure (CS Services)
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set MOCN
Switch to CNSEL(CN Select), Re-Routing Occasion to NOTREDIR(Not
Redirect), Filter CS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List to NO(No), and
Filter PS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List to NO(No).
GBSS
591
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USRCAT. In this step, set Operator Name
1 to the name of operator A, Rate of Operator 1 to 30, Operator Name 2 to the name
of operator B, and Rate of Operator 2 to 70.
3. On the LMT, initiate A-interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages
on the A Interface, and select BSSAP in the Trace Type area. On the BSSAP tab
page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of cell1, and click Submit. The A
Interface Trace window is displayed.
Start A-interface message tracing twice by setting DPC(HEX) to the destination
signaling points (DSPs) of operator A and operator B respectively.
4. Initiate a location update procedure for MS1 to view messages traced on the A
interface.
Expected result:
If the number indicated by the last two digits of the MS1 IMSI is smaller than 30,
the signaling related to location update is found in the tracing messages of operator
A on the A interface.
If the number indicated by the last two digits of the MS1 IMSI is greater than or
equal to 30, the signaling related to location update is found in the tracing messages
of operator B on the A interface.
l Verification Procedure (PS Services)
Switch to CNSEL(CN Select), Re-Routing Occasion to NOTREDIR(Not
Redirect), Filter CS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List to NO(No), and
Filter PS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List to NO(No).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USRCAT. In this step, set Operator Name
1 to the name of operator A, Rate of Operator 1 to 30, Operator Name 2 to the name
of operator B, and Rate of Operator 2 to 70.
3. Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 in the activation procedure to add the mapping between
the route sharing area and the location area of cell 1 or cell 2.
NOTE
The route sharing area of cell2 must be different from that of cell1.
4. Enable MS1 to camp on cell2 and to process PS services.
5. On the LMT, initiate the PS message tracing for a single user by referring to Tracing
PS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Set IMSI to the IMSI of MS1.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLADMSTAT. In this step, set cell2
to the Lock state so that MS1 camps on cell1.
7. Check the PS tracing messages of MS1.
Expected result:
If the number indicated by the last two digits of the MS1 IMSI is smaller than 30,
the signaling related to MS1 access to the network of operator A is found in the
PS tracing messages of MS1.
If the number indicated by the last two digits of the MS1 IMSI is greater than or
equal to 30, the signaling related to MS1 access to the network of operator B is
found in the PS tracing messages of MS1.
GBSS
592
----End
Example
/*Activating MOCN Shared Cell*/
//Turning on the MOCN control switch
SET OTHSOFTPARA: MocnCtrl=CNSEL, ReDirectOpt=ALL, CSScnIdHoFilter=YES,
PSScnIdHoFilter=YES;
//Adding a shared routing area
ADD SRA: Srac=1, SracDscrpt="***";
//Configuring the mapping between a location area and operators
ADD LAOPMAP: LaOpIndex=1, MCC="460", MNC="133", LAC=H'1234,
OPNAME1="op1", OPNAME2="op2";
//Configuring the mapping between a shared routing area and a location
area
ADD SRALAMAP: SraLaMapIndex=1, Srac=1, MCC="460", MNC="133", LAC=H'1234;
//Adding a cell named cell 1 and enabling MOCN Shared Cell
ADD GCELL: CELLID=1, CELLNAME="cell1", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="460",
MNC="133",
LAC=H'1234, CI=H'111, EXTTP=Normal_cell, IUOTP=Normal_cell, FLEXMAIO=OFF,
MocnCmCell=YES;
//Adding an MS IMSI range
ADD IMSIGRP: ImsiGrpIndex=0, ImsiGrpDscrpt="IMSI",
ImsiMin="460000000000000", ImsiMax="460100000000000";
//Adding an MS routing category
ADD USRCAT: UsrCatIndex=0, OPNAME1="op1", OpShare1=30, OPNAME2="op2",
OpShare2=70;
//Adding a routing category of an IMSI range
ADD IMSISRAMAP: ImsiMapIndex=0, Srac=1, ImsiGrpIndex=0, UsrCatIndex=0;
//Setting PS software parameters on the BSC
SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: BSCPSReservePara5=512;
/*Deactivating MOCN Shared Cell*/
//Turning off the MOCN control switch
SET OTHSOFTPARA: MocnCtrl=CLOSE;
GBSS
593
193 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover
IMSI-Based Handover.
Prerequisites
A test MS (MS1) is available and its IMSI is recorded.
None
l License
l Others
The Common Id and Handover Request messages sent by the MSC need to carry IMSI.
A BTS is configured with two test cells (CELL1 and CELL2) of the same operator.
These cells are in the normal state and support the GPRS function.
Idle channels are available in CELL1. CELL1 and CELL2 are neighboring cells of each
other. The two cells are in different location areas.
Context
According to the network planning and service requirements, an operator can divide the network
into multiple areas (called handover shared areas) and restrict the service area of an MS by
configuring the mapping between the IMSI range and the handover shared area.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set IMSI
Handover Switch to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMSIGRP to add an IMSI segment. In this
step, set IMSI Segment Index, Description of the IMSI segment, Start IMSI
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 193 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover
594
value, and End IMSI value according to the actual situation (assume that IMSI of
MS1 is within the configured IMSI segment).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SHA to add a handover shared area. In this
step, set Handover Sharing Area, Operator Name, and Handover Sharing Area
Description according to the actual situation (assume that Operator Name is the
name of the operator of CELL1).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SHALAMAP to configure the mapping
between a handover shared area and a location area. In this step, set Handover
Sharing Area Record Index, Handover Sharing Area, MCC, MNC, and Cell
LAC according to the actual situation (assume that MCC, MNC, and Cell LAC are
those of CELL2).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMSISHAMAP to add an IMSI-supported
handover area. In this step, set IMSI Index of Handover Sharing Area Record,
Handover Sharing Area, and IMSI Segment Index according to the settings
specified in Step 2 and Step 3.
l Verification Procedure (CS Services)
1. MS1 camps on CELL1 to call a fixed-line phone. The call is set up successfully.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index
Type to BYID(By index), Source Cell Index to the index of CELL1, and Neighbor
2G Cell Index to the index of CELL2.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO. In this step, set Object Type to CELL
(Cell), Handover Scope to OUTCELL(Outgoing cell), and Cell Index or Cell
Name to the index or name of CELL1.
4. On the LMT, start the message tracing over the Abis interface by referring to Tracing
CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. Select RSL in the Trace Type area.
5. On the RSL tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to those of CELL1 and CELL2.
Then, click Submit. The Abis Interface CS Trace message interface is displayed.
If idle channels are unavailable in CELL2, the CS tracing messages on the Abis
interface of CELL1 indicate that handover cannot be performed and measurement
reports are reported continuously.
If an idle channel is available in CELL2, the CS tracing messages on the Abis
interface of CELL2 indicate that the incoming internal inter-cell handover
procedure for MS1 is performed properly and measurement reports are reported
normally.
l Verification Procedure (PS Services)
1. MS1 camps on CELL1 and processes PS services.
2. On the LMT, start the PS message tracing for a single user by referring to Tracing PS
Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Set IMSI to the IMSI of MS1.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set Cell
Index or Cell Name to the index or name of CELL1; set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu
(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to YES(Yes).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set Cell
Index or Cell Name to the index or name of CELL1; set Network Control Mode to
NC2(NC2).
GBSS
595
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index
Type to BYID(By index), Source Cell Index to the index of CELL1, and Neighbor
2G Cell Index to the index of CELL2.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set Cell
Index or Cell Name to the index or name of CELL1; set Cell Urgent Reselection
Allowed to PERMIT(Permit) and MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold to 2.
7. Check the PS tracing messages of MS1.
The expected result: The signaling for the handover of MS1 from CELL1 to CELL2
is found in the PS tracing messages of MS1 when the transmission quality in CELL1
deteriorates.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set IMSI
Handover Switch to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Turning on the IMSI-based handover switch
SET OTHSOFTPARA: ImsiHoCtrl=YES;
//Adding a subscriber IMSI segment
ADD IMSIGRP: ImsiGrpIndex=0, ImsiGrpDscrpt="IMSI",
ImsiMin="460000000000000", ImsiMax="460100000000000";
//Adding a handover sharing area
ADD SHA: SHAC=1, OPNAME="OP1", SHACDscrpt="Share1";
//Configuring mapping between a handover sharing area and a location area
ADD SHALAMAP: ShaIndex=0, SHAC=1, MCC="460", MNC="133", LAC=H'1234;
//Adding an IMSI-supported handover area
ADD IMSISHAMAP: ImsiShaMapIndex=0, SHAC=1, ImsiGrpIndex=0;
//Turning off the IMSI-based handover switch
SET OTHSOFTPARA: ImsiHoCtrl=NO;
GBSS
596
194 Configuring Abis Independent
Transmission
Abis Independent Transmission.
Prerequisites
The feature GBFD-118701 BSS Sharing has been configured before this feature is
activated.
l License
Context
In a BSS sharing network, multiple telecom operators share a base station and associated
auxiliary devices. Cells of different telecom operators can reside under one base station, but each
cell can only belong to one telecom operator.
The transmission resources under the base station can be shared among telecom operators or
exclusively used by their respective telecom operators. In Abis over TDM mode, transmission
resources can be configured independently based on only the level of an E1 port. In Abis over
IP mode, transmission resources can be configured independently based on only the level of
logical resources.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure (TDM Transmission)
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING to enable independent
transmission over the Abis interface for the BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow to
YES(YES) and Transmission Sharing Support to NO(NO).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 194 Configuring Abis Independent Transmission
597
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection
between the BTS and the BSC. In this step, set Dest Node Type to BSC, set Operator
Name to the name of the operator that the BTS belongs, and set other parameters to
appropriate values.
NOTE
If multiple operators share one BTS or if there are multiple BTSs, run Step 3 repeatedly to add the
connection between each BTS and the BSC for each operator.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIDLETS. In this step, set Index Type
to BYID(By Index), set BTS Index and Cabinet Group No. to appropriate values,
set Operator Name to the name of the operator that the BTS belongs, and set Idle
TS Count to the number of idle timeslots for the operator.
NOTE
If multiple operators share the idle timeslots on an E1 cable, run Step 4 repeatedly to set the number
of idle timeslots for each operator.
l Activation Procedure (IP Transmission)
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING to enable independent
transmission over the Abis interface for the BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow to
YES(YES) and Transmission Sharing Support to NO(NO).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPSEPINFO. In this step, set Index of
Separate Information for Operators and the Count of the Operators Selected, set
Transport Type to IP(IP), and set The type of operator to GSM(GSM). Then, based
on the field configuration and number of operators, set Index of 1st Operator,
Bandwidth Ratio of 1st Operator, Load Threshold of 1st Operator, Index of 2nd
Operator, Bandwidth Ratio of 2nd Operator, Load Threshold of 2nd Operator,
Index of 3rd Operator, Bandwidth Ratio of 3rd Operator, Load Threshold of 3rd
Operator, Index of 4th Operator, Bandwidth Ratio of 4th Operator, and Load
Threshold of 4th Operator.
NOTE
The sum of bandwidth ratio of all the operators must be 100%.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPLOGICPORT. In this step, set Resource
management mode to SHARE, Operator Separated Flag to ON(ON), and
Operator Separated Index to the value set in Step 3. In addition, set the parameter
related to an IP logical port in this step.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST IPLOGICPORT to query Operator
Separated Index.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OPSEPINFO to query the number of
operators and operator index. In this step, set Index of Separate Information for
Operators to the value displayed in Step 1.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPLOGICPORT to query the realtime
bandwidth of an IP logical port. In this step, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Logic
Port No. to appropriate values.
Expected result: The realtime bandwidth of the IP logical port is displayed. Assume
that the realtime bandwidth is A.
GBSS
598
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPLOGICPORT to query the realtime
bandwidth of an IP logical port of a specified operator. In this step, set Subrack
No., Slot No., Logic Port No., The type of operator, and CN Operator index to
appropriate values.
Expected result: Assume that two operators share an IP logical port for independent
transmission over the Abis interface. The realtime bandwidth of operators 1 and 2 is
X1 and X2 respectively. Then, X1 + X2 A.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING to enable transmission over
the Abis interface for a BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow to YES(YES) and
Transmission Sharing Support to YES(Yes).
8. Repeat Step 4.
Expected result: A message is displayed, indicating that the information fails to be
queried.
l Deactivation Procedure (TDM Transmission)
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING to disable transmission
sharing for the BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow to YES(YES) and Transmission
Sharing Support to YES(Yes).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSCONNECT. In this step, set Operator
Name to the name of the primary operator and set other parameters to appropriate
values.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIDLETS to set the number of idle
timeslots for the secondary operator to 0. In this step, set Idle TS Count to 0 and
Operator Name to the name of the secondary operator.
NOTE
If there are multiple secondary operators, run Step 4 repeatedly to release the idle timeslots for all
secondary operators.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIDLETS to return all idle timeslots to
the primary operator. In this step, set Idle TS Count to the number of idle timeslots
that the primary operator have and Operator Name to the name of the primary
operator.
l Deactivation Procedure (IP Transmission)
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING to disable transmission
sharing for the BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow to YES(YES) and Transmission
Sharing Support to YES(Yes).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPLOGICPORT. In this step, set
Operator Separated Flag to OFF(OFF).
----End
GBSS
599
Example
/*Activation procedure (TDM transmission)*/
//DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
//Enabling independent transmission over the Abis interface
//SET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=YES, SptTRMShare=NO;
//Adding a connection between BTS and BSC
//ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=1, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=1,
SN=14, PN=0, OPNAME="op1";
//Setting idle timeslots of the BTS
//SET BTSIDLETS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CGN=1, TSCOUNT=20, OPNAME="op1";
//ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;
/*Activation procedure (IP transmission)*/
//Enabling independent transmission over the Abis interface
//SET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=YES, SptTRMShare=NO;
//Configuring operator separation parameters
//ADD OPSEPINFO: OPSEPINDEX=0, OPCOUNT=TWO, TYPE=IP, OPTYPE=GSM,
OPINDEX1=1, BWRATIO1=30, OPINDEX2=2, BWRATIO2=70;
//Configuring an IP logical port
//ADD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=10, BT=GOUa, LPN=0, CARRYT=ETHER, PN=0,
RSCMNGMODE=SHARE, BWADJ=OFF, CIR=1, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, OPSEPFLAG=ON,
OPSEPINDEX=0;
/*Deactivation procedure (TDM transmission)*/
//Disabling independent transmission over the Abis interface
//SET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=YES,
SptTRMShare=YES;
//Modifying the connection of the BTS to the primary operator
MOD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=1, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=1, SN=14,
PN=0, OPNAME="OP1";
//Setting the number of idle timeslots for the secondary operator to 0
//Returning all idle timeslots to the primary operator
/*Deactivation procedure (IP transmission)*/
//Disabling independent transmission over the Abis interface
//SET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=YES,
SptTRMShare=YES;
//Turing off the operator separation switch
//MOD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=10, BT=GOUa, LPN=0, OPSEPFLAG=OFF;
GBSS
600
195 Configuring MSRD
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD 510801
Mobile Station Receive Diversity (MSRD).
Prerequisites
required.
feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114101 GPRS.
This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature: GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in
Downlink.
l License
Context
The MSRD improves the signal receiving capability of the MS. Two antennas are used to
eliminate interference, therefore achieving enhanced channel diversity capability.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set MSRD
PDCH Multiplex Threshold to 10 and MSRD MCS Threshold to MCS9(MCS9).
1. Assume that the interference is the same and dual carrier in the downlink is not
supported. Use the MS that supports MSRD to perform packet services. Check that
the rate of this MS is more stable than the MS that does not support MSRD.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 195 Configuring MSRD
601
----End
Example
//Activating MSRD
SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MSRDPDCHLEV=10, MSRDMCSLEV=MCS9;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 195 Configuring MSRD
602
196 Configuring Dual Carriers in
Downlink
Dual Carriers in Downlink (DLDC).
Prerequisites
required.
This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature: GBFD-510801 MSRD.
l License
The cell has sufficient resources and the cell is configured with more than two carriers.
Context
The network supports the feature of allocating downlink channel resources on the two carriers
at the same time. This improves the rate of the downlink packet data.
The dual carriers in downlink function can improve the rate of the downlink packet data of a
single MS (100% at the most). A single MS may take up more resources, and therefore the
number of MSs supported by the network is reduced.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 196 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink
603
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), EDGE to YES(Yes), and Support
Downlink Dual-Carrier to SUPPORT(Support).
1. Use the MS to perform streaming services.
2. Refer to Monitoring Channel Status to check the usage of occupied channels.
Expected result:
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Downlink Dual-
Carrier to UNSUPPORT(Not Support), EDGE to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating DLDC
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES,
DLDCSPT=SUPPORT;
//Deactivating DLDC
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=NO,
DLDCSPT=UNSUPPORT;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 196 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink
604
197 Configuring the EGPRS2-A
Uplink EGPRS2-A and GBFD-510804 Downlink EGPRS2-A.
Prerequisites
required.
This feature only applies to IP networking scenarios, the PEUa /POUc boards are needed
as Abis interface board, the DPUc boards are needed in GMPS /GEPS subrack.
feature depends on the following features: GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or
GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1 or GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization
or GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS.
l License
The Abis interface of the cell works in HDLC or IP mode.
Only DBS3900(RRU3008) supports this feature.
The TRXs configured for the BTS should support this feature.
MS should support this feature.
Context
l After a cell is configured to support the EGPRS2-A, the network can allocate the Temporary
Block Flow (TBF) in EGPRS2-A mode to the MSs in the cell.
l Impact on the performance: The UL/DL packet rate of a single MS is improved. The uplink
data rate over the air interface can be increased to 76.8 kbit/TS and the downlink to 98.4
kbit/TS.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 197 Configuring the EGPRS2-A
605
Procedure
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EGPRS2-A to YES(Yes).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step, Uplink
EGPRS2-A Fixed MCS Type and Downlink EGPRS2-A Fixed MCS Type to the
coding types required by the test.
2. Use the MS to perform the PING service, and Tracing PS Domain Messages on the
Um Interface on the BSC6900 LMT. In this step, The uplink/downlink EGRPS2-A
coding schemes set in Step 1 can be viewed.
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EGPRS2-A to NO(No).
4. Use the MS to perform the PING service, and Tracing PS Domain Messages on the
Um Interface on the BSC6900 LMT. The output result shows that only the coding
schemes from MCS1 to MCS9 are used.
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EGPRS2-A to NO(No).
----End
Example
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EGPRS2A=YES;
SET GCELLEGPRSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPE2AFIXMCS=MCS2,
DNE2AFIXMCS=MCS2;
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EGPRS2A=NO;
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EGPRS2A=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 197 Configuring the EGPRS2-A
606
198 Configuring Latency Reduction
Latency Reduction.
Prerequisites
BSC6900 built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Process board and Gb interface board
is required.
This feature only applies to IP networking scenarios.
feature depends on the features GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IP
over E1/T1 or GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization or GBFD-114201
EGPRS.
This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature: GBFD-114151 DTM.
l License
The BTS and MS support the latency reduction.
Context
Latency reduction is introduced in the HDLC/IP transmission mode over the Abis interface to
reduce the transmission latency, enhance user experience on the conversational service, and
improve user satisfaction.
NOTE
BTS3006C/BTS3002E/BTS3012/BTS3012AE/BTS3900B/E do not support this feature.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 198 Configuring Latency Reduction
607
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), EDGE to YES(Yes), and Support
Reduced Latency Capability to SUPPORT(Support).
1. Use the MS to perform conversational services in the PS domain.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to query the status of the PDCH.
Expected Result: In the displayed result, the number of RTTI TBFs on the PDCH is
not zero.
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Reduced Latency
Capability to UNSUPPORT(Unsupport).
----End
Example
//Activating Latency Reduction
SPTREDUCELATENCY=SUPPORT;
//Deactivating Latency Reduction
SPTREDUCELATENCY=UNSUPPORT;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 198 Configuring Latency Reduction
608
199 Configuring Access Control Class
Access Control Class (ACC).
Prerequisites
l License
The MS and its SIM card meet the ACC-related requirements specified by the protocols.
Context
This feature enables special users and some common users to access the network preferentially
when the network traffic is excessively high.
When the ACC feature is enabled, the MS checks the access control class set in the SIM card
based on the access control class included in the cell broadcast message. If the access control
class is an allowed one, the MS can preempt the RACH to access the network. If the access
control class is a forbidden one, the MS cannot access the network.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BSCACCCTRLP with Access Control
Policy Index, ACC Control Window Size, Starting Point of the Access Control
Window, and Sliding Speed of the Access Control Window set as required.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 199 Configuring Access Control Class
609
NOTE
A maximum of 32 access control policies can be set. You can run the command in Step 1 for
multiple times to set multiple access control policies.
When the Access Control Policy is enabled and the system message is sent by the BSC, the
access of the MSs of classes 10 to 15 is not affected regardless of the Access Control Policy
configuration.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC with Access Control
Allowed set to YES(Yes) and ACC Control Policy to the value of Access Control
Policy Index specified in Step 1.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC.
Expected result: Access Control Allowed is set to YES(Yes), and Access Control
Policy is specified.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCACCCTRLP.
Expected result: The values of Access Control Window Size, Starting Point of the
Access Control Window, and Sliding Speed of the Access Control Window are
those specified during configuration.
NOTE
The access-control-class in the RACH Control Parameters IE is called the ACC field. The ACC
field contains two octets and is 16 bits in length. Each bit indicates a level of the SIM users
and its value is 0 or 1. When a bit is 0, the SIM users of a certain level are allowed to access
the network. When a bit is 1, the SIM users of a certain level are forbidden to access the network.
Expected result: The Information Element (IE) RACH Control Parameters is included
in the system message, and within the sliding window range the value of the bits in
the ACC field of the RACH Control Parameters is 1 from the starting point onwards.
4. When an MS is used to make a call in the period specified in Step 1, the MS cannot
access the network if the level of the SIM card of the MS belongs to the forbidden
levels. If the level of the SIM card does not belong to the forbidden levels, the MS
can access the network normally.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC with Access Control
Allowed to NO(No) so that the ACC feature in a cell is deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activating ACC
ADD BSCACCCTRLP: ACCINDEX=0;
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACCCTRLEN=YES, ACCCTRLPY=0;
//Deactivating ACC
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACCCTRLEN=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 199 Configuring Access Control Class
610
200 Configuring GSM/WCDMA
Interoperability
GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.
Prerequisites
The MS supports both the GSM and WCDMA networks. It also supports bidirectional
cell reselection and handovers between GSM and WCDMA.
The BSS and NSS support the GSM/WCDMA inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection,
and location update. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision,
and handover signaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers.
l License
The basic data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.
Context
The GSM/WCDMA Interoperability feature enables an MS to be handed over to or reselect a
GSM cell if the serving cell of the MS is not covered by the WCDMA network or in an area
with weak WCDMA coverage. When a dual-mode MS enters the coverage of the WCDMA
network again, or the MS detects that the signal quality in the WCDMA cell is higher than that
in the serving GSM cell, the MS can be handed over to or reselect a WCDMA cell if the handover
or cell reselection conditions are met. Then, the MS can enjoy the various services provided by
the WCDMA network.
The feature GSM/WCDMA Interoperability is applied to scenarios such as cell reselection and
handovers between GSM and WCDMA. This feature has no impact on services. The network
elements involved are the BTS, BSC, MSC, PCU, SGSN, GGSN, and HLR.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 200 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability
611
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL to add a 3G external cell.
In this step, set Utran Cell Type to FDD(FDD).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to add a neighboring 3G cell.
Tag and Um Interface Tagto GSM_PHASE_2Plus.
Sent 2QUATER to YES(Yes), Send 3G Class Flag to YES(Yes), and Classmark
Enquiry With 3G Request to YES(Yes).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Query
Classmark after In-BSC HO Enabled to YES(Yes).
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to set basic call control
parameters of a cell. In this step, set ECSC to YES(Yes).
7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS to set the UTRAN
system information parameters for call control in the cell. In this step, set Qsearch I
to 7, Qsearch C to 7, Qsearch P to 7, and Qsearch C Initial to Always(Always).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXT3GCELL to query the value of Utran
cell type.
Expected result: The value of Utran cell type is FDD.
2. Use an MS to access the 2G cell and then initiate a call. After the call is initiated
normally, move the MS to the coverage area with strong 3G signals. Run the BSC6900
MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this step, set Allow Inter-
RAT Load HO in Access State to CnService-based. On the CN side, set Service
Handover to Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be performed.
3. On the LMT, trace the BSSAP messages over the A interface.
Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Required message to the MSC with the
handover cause value of "better-cell" or "directed-retry".
4. Move the MS within the GSM cell or UMTS cell, and ensure that the Ec/No and
Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) are
normal during the neighboring cell measurement of the UMTS cell (FDD). If the
following conditions are met within five seconds, then the MS will initiate a cell
reselection from GSM to UMTS: CPICH RSCP > RLA_C + FDD Q Offset or CPICH
Ec/No > FDD Qmin.
5. When the MS is in the GSM cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates that
the MS is in the GSM cell. When the MS is in the UMTS cell, the frequency
information of the MS indicates that the MS is in the UMTS cell.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G3GNCELL to remove the neighboring
3G cell.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GEXT3GCELL to remove the 3G external
cell.
----End
GBSS
612
Example
//Activating GSM/WCDMA Interoperability
ADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5048, EXT3GCELLNAME="5048", MCC="11",
MNC="11", LAC=11, CI=1, RNCID=11, RNCINDEX=255, DF=1, SCRAMBLE=1,
DIVERSITY=NO, UTRANCELLTYPE=FDD, RA=1;
SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;
SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES, SendUtranECSCFlag=YES,
CLASSMARKQUERY=YES;
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QUERYCMAFTERINBSCHO=YES;
SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QI=7, QCI=Always, QP=7,
QSEARCHC=7;
//Deactivating GSM/WCDMA Interoperability
RMV G3GNCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5048, EXT3GCELLNAME="5048";
RMV GEXT3GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048;
GBSS
613
201 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service
Based Handover
Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover.
Prerequisites
The BSS and NSS support the inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, and location
update. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision, and handover
signaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers.
This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.
l License
On the MSC, the BSC is set to support service handovers, and the service handover
attribute of the IMSI for the MS is set to support handovers for 2G CS services.
Procedure
parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable to
YES(Yes) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this step,
set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to CnService-based.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD to set the UTRAN
FDD handover parameters of a cell. In this step, set Better 3G Cell HO Allowed to
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 201 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover
614
YES(Yes), Inter-rat HO Preference to Pre_3G_Cell(Preference for 3G cell),
RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO to 0, and Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G
Cell HO to 0.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G3GNCELL. In this step, set FDD 3G
Better Cell HO Watch Time, FDD 3G Better Cell HO Valid Time, RSCP
Offset, and Ec/No Offset according to the actual requirements.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Service
Based Handover Switch to OPEN(Open) and Service Handover Reassign to YES
(Yes).
normally, move the MS to the coverage area with strong 3G signals. On the CN side,
set Service Handover to Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be
performed.
handover cause value of "better-cell" or "directed-retry".
NO(No) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to NO(No).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD. In this step, set
Better 3G Cell HO Allowed to NO(No) and Inter-rat HO Preference to
Pre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G cell).
----End
Example
//Activating GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover
SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=CnService-based;
SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BET3GHOEN=YES,
HOOPTSEL=Pre_3G_Cell;
SET OTHSOFTPARA: OUTSYSSERVICEHOEN=OPEN, OUTSYSSERVHOREASSIGNEN=YES;
//Deactivating GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=NO,
INTERRATINBSCHOEN=NO;
SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BET3GHOEN=NO,
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 201 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover
615
202 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load
Based Handover
GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover.
Prerequisites
signaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers.
This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.
l License
Context
The MSC transparently transmits the load information of the WCDMA network to the BSC.
Then, the BSC makes a decision on the inter-RAT handover based on its own load and the load
in the WCDMA network. In addition, the BSC sends a handover request carrying its own load
information to the WCDMA network for reference in the decision on the inter-RAT handover.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 202 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover
616
parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable and
Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set CS 2G
3G Load Balance Delta Threshold according to the actual requirements.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB to set inter-
RAT handover parameters.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set Handover
Load Accept Threshold according to the actual requirements.
1. On the CN side, set Service Handover to Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should
be performed.
normally, move the MS to the coverage area with strong 3G signals.
3. Enhancedthe load of the GSM cell to start the handover.
handover cause value of "reduce load in serving cell".
NO(No) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to NO(No).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD. In this step, set
Better 3G Cell HO Allowed to NO(No) and Inter-rat HO Preference to
Pre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G cell).
----End
Example
//Activating GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover
SET OTHSOFTPARA: G2G3GLdBlcDeltaThrd=110;
SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=YES,
InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Load-based;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SYSFLOWLEV=0, TRIGTHRES=50,
LoadAccThres=40;
//Deactivating GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=NO,
INTERRATINBSCHOEN=NO;
SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BET3GHOEN=NO,
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 202 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover
617
203 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection
Based on MS State
2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State.
Prerequisites
signaling procedures during inter-RAT handovers.
This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-116201 Network-
Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2).
l License
The basic data has been configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.
Procedure
parameters for a cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to YES
(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS to set the UTRAN
system information parameters for call control in the cell. In this step, set Qsearch I
to 7, Qsearch C to 7, Qsearch P to 7, and Qsearch C Initial to Always(Always).
3. Optional: If Utran Cell Type is set to TDD(TDD), run the BSC6900 MML command
SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS to modify the UTRAN system information parameters
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 203 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State
618
for call control in the cell. In this step, set TDD System Information Optimized
1. Move the MS within the GSM cell or UMTS cell, and ensure that the Ec/No and
Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) are
normal during the neighboring cell measurement of the UMTS cell (FDD). If the
following conditions are met within five seconds, then the MS will initiate a cell
reselection from GSM to UMTS: CPICH RSCP > RLA_C + FDD Q Offset and
CPICH Ec/No > FDD Qmin.
2. When the MS is in the GSM cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates that
the MS is in the GSM cell. When the MS is in the UMTS cell, the frequency
information of the MS indicates that the MS is in the UMTS cell.
parameters for a cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to NO
(No).
----End
Example
//Activating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES;
QSEARCHC=7;
//Deactivating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 203 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State
619
204 Configuring the Fast WCDMA
Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
Fast WCDMA Cell Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.
Prerequisites
l License
The network involves the GSM network and the WCDMA network
The UE supports the GSM and WCDMA frequency bands at the same time.
Context
When an UE terminates a call in the GSM network, it camps on the WCDMA network according
to the cell selection indicator after release information in the Channel Release message.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL to add a WCDMA FDD
or TDD cell 1.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to configure the WCDMA
cell 1 as the neighboring cell of the GSM cell 0.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT2GCELLto add a GSM cell 0 on the
WCDMA side.
GBSS
204 Configuring the Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call
Release
620
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL to configure the GSM cell 0
as the neighboring cell of the WCDMA cell 1.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC with A Interface Tag, Um
Interface Tag , and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.
6. configure the fast WCDMA reselection at 2G CS call release.
When the Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable set to YES(Yes)
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Inter-
RAT Cell Reselection Enable of Cell 0, set to YES(Yes).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD with Select 3G Cell
After Call Release of Cell 0, a GSM cell, set to YES(Yes).
When the Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable set to NO(No)
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC with Inter-
RAT Cell Reselection Enable of Cell 0, set to YES(Yes).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA with
BSCRESERVEDPARA20 of Cell 0, set to 512.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD with Select 3G Cell
After Call Release of Cell 0, a GSM cell, set to YES(Yes).
1. On the Um Interface Trace window, it shows that the UE camps on Cell 0 and initiates
a call successfully. In addition, the call is still being maintained.
2. After the call is released, on the screen of the UE, it shows that the UE has camped
on a GSM cell.
NOTE
If the GSM and WCDMA networks use the same indicator, the UE must be equipped with a
function through which a user can query that the currently camped cell is a GSM or WCDMA
cell.
3. On the Um Tracing window, the signaling procedure of the cell shows that the
downlink Channel Release message carries an information element (IE) "cell-
selection-indicator-after-release".
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD with Select 3G Cell After
Call Release of Cell 0, the GSM cell, set to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating the feature Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
ADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=7572, EXT3GCELLNAME="Cell1", MCC="460",
MNC="10", LAC=10, CI=60, RNCID=0, DF=50, SCRAMBLE=200,
DIVERSITY=NO,OPNAME="main";;
ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYNAME, SRC3GNCELLNAME="Cell0",
NBR3GNCELLNAME="Cell1";
ADD U2GNCELL: RNCId=0, CellId=1, GSMCellIndex=0, BlindHoFlag=FALSE,
NPrioFlag=FALSE;
SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="Cell0",
CELLSELECTAFTERCALLREL=YES;
//Deactivating the feature Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1234, CELLSELECTAFTERCALLREL=NO;
GBSS
204 Configuring the Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call
Release
621
205 Configuring Load Based Handover
Enhancement on Iur-g
Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g.
Prerequisites
The BSC model is the BSC6900.
A GSM+UMTS dual-mode MS is required.
The IP interface board should be configured to support Iur-g.
Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete.
This feature depends on features WRFD-070004 Load Based GSM and UMTS
Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g and GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load
Based Handover.
l License
l Both the 2G network and the 3G network are deployed.
l IP transmission mode is used on the Iur-g interface.
l A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured and the GSM cell is configured as the
neighboring cell of the UMTS cell.
l Data is negotiated and planned for the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface. For details you can
refer to Configuring the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface.
NOTE
l The licenses on the BSC and the RNC sides are activated separately.
Context
This feature is implemented through the exchange of Huawei proprietary IE containing load
information over the Iur-g interface. The Iur-g protocol stack complies with the 3GPP
GBSS
205 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-
g
622
specifications. With this feature, the decision on handover that is not caused by insufficient
coverage can be more accurate, thus reducing the possibility of ping-pong handovers between
the GSM network and WCDMA network.
Procedure
1. Configuration on the RNC side
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to enable the non-
coverage-based handover. In this step, set Non-coverage handover based on
2G load Indication to ON, Adjustment Coefficient of 2G Load Value to 1and
Load-base handover based on 3G2G load difference Indication to ON.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enable
the inter-RAT handover. In this step, select
HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH and
HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH in the HandOver switch drop-down
list box.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to enable
UL and DL load reshuffling (LDR) on the Uu interface. In this step, select
UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm) and DL_UU_LDR(Downlink
UU LDR Algorithm) in the Cell LDC algorithm switch drop-down list box.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR to configure LDR
actions. In this step, set DL LDR first action and UL LDR first action to
CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO(CS domain inter-rat should be load
handover); set DL LDR second action and UL LDR second action to
PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO(PS domain inter-rat should be load
handover); set DL LDR third action and UL LDR third action to
CSInterRatShouldNotLDHO(CS domain inter-rat should not be load
handover); set DL LDR fourth action and UL LDR fourth action to
PSInterRatShouldNotLDHO(PS domain inter-rat should not be load
handover).
NOTE
You need to configure UL and DL LDR actions according to the actual situation.
2. Configuration on the BSC side
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to enable inter-
RAT handovers. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable and
Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes) .
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB to set
2G Load Adjustment Coefficient. Setting 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient to
10 is recommended.
NOTE
l If the verification achieves the following results as expected, the configuration succeeds. Otherwise,
the configuration fails.
1. 3G-to-2G Load Based Handover Enhancement
GBSS
g
623
CAUTION
The verification can be done when only the UMTS cell is in the basic congestion state.
a. Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in the UMTS cell. Trace signaling
on the Iu interface on the LMT. RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED
message is reported. The RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message
contains reduce-load-in-serving-cell. Trace signaling on the A interface on the
LMT. Handover Request message is reported. The Handover Request
message contains reduce-load-in-serving-cell.
NOTE
After the verification, set the value of system to the value before the verification.
2. 2G-to-3G Load Based Handover Enhancement
a. Use the MS to initiate a call in the GSM cell, and the call is successfully
established.
b. When the GSM cell is in the basic congestion state, the MS hand over to 3G
neighbor cell. Trace signaling on the A interface. Check that Assignment
Request, Handover Required, and Handover Command messages are
reported and cause in the Handover Required message is directed-retry(13).
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to deactivate MBSC
Handover based on Load Enhancement on the UMTS side. In this step, set Non-
coverage handover based on 2G load Indication to OFF(OFF) and Load-base
handover based on 3G2G load difference Indication to OFF(OFF).
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB to
deactivate MBSC Handover based on Load Enhancement on the GSM side. In this
step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Connect State to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Handover based on Load Enhancement
//Configuration on the RNC side
/*Enabling the non-coverage-based handover*/
SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscNcovHoOn2GldInd=ON, LoadHoOn3G2GldInd=ON;
/*Enabling the inter-RAT handover*/
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH:
HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;
/*Enabling UL and DL load reshuffling (LDR) on the Uu interface*/
MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=0, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_LDR-1;
/*Configuring LDR actions*/
MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=0, DlLdrFirstAction=CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO,
DlLdrSecondAction=PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO,
DlLdrThirdAction=CSInterRatShouldNotLDHO,
DlLdrFourthAction=PSInterRatShouldNotLDHO,
UlLdrFirstAction=CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO,
UlLdrSecondAction=PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO,
UlLdrThirdAction=CSInterRatShouldNotLDHO,
GBSS
g
624
UlLdrFourthAction=PSInterRatShouldNotLDHO;
//Configuration on the BSC side
/*Setting 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient*/
SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10;
//Deactivating Handover based on Load Enhancement
SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscNcovHoOn2GldInd=OFF, LoadHoOn3G2GldInd=OFF;
SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=NO;
GBSS
g
625
206 Configuring NACC(Network
Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization
Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA
NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA.
Prerequisites
The BSC model is the BSC6900.
A GSM+UMTS dual-mode MS is required.
This feature depends on feature WRFD-070005 NACC Procedure Optimization Based
on Iur-g.
l License
l IP transmission mode is used on the Iur-g interface.
l The MS supports NACC.
l Both the 2G network and the 3G network are deployed.
l A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured and the GSM cell is configured as the
NOTE
l The licenses on the BSC and the RNC sides are activated separately.
GBSS
206 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)
Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and
WCDMA
626
Context
This feature enables the exchange of messages containing the RAN Information Management
(RIM) information over the Iur-g interface between the RNC and BSC. The Iur-g protocol stack
complies with the 3GPP specifications. In this way, the NACC procedure for PS services from
a GSM cell to a WCDMA cell does not require the information transfer via the CN.
Procedure
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enable
the NACC function. In this step, select
HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH in the
HandOver switch drop-down list box.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to enable direct
GERAN system information exchange. In this step, set GERAN System
Information Exchange Switch to ON.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enable
the inter-RAT handover. In this step, select
HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH in the HandOver switch drop-down
list box.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT2GCELL to enable the inter-
RAT cell to support indication of the RIM procedure. In this step, set Inter-RAT
cell support RIM indicator to TRUE. If multiple neighboring cells are planned,
repeat this step to enable the inter-RAT cell to support indication of the RIM for
all the neighboring cells.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GNRNC to allow NACC-related
information exchange on the Iur-g interface. In this step, set Allow Info
Exchange at Iur-g to YES(Support) and Info Exchange Content to
NACCRELATED(NACC Info).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set basic GPRS
attributes of the GSM cell. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support
as built-in PCU) and Support NACC to YES(Yes).
1. Trace Iur-g and Um interfaces on the LMT.
2. Use a dual-mode MS to download data in the UMTS cell and then switch the MS to
the GSM cell.
3. Check that INFO_EXCHG_INIT_REQ and INFO_EXCHG_INIT_RSP
messages are reported on the Iur-g interface. The value of informationTypeItem in
the INFO_EXCHG_INIT_REQ message is nACC-Related-Data(8) and the
INFO_EXCHG_INIT_RSP message contains nACC-Related-Data.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH on the
RNC to deactivate NACC Procedure Optimization. In this step, deselect
GBSS
WCDMA
627
HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH in the
HandOver switch drop-down list box.
----End
Example
//Activating NACC Procedure Optimization
/*Enabling the NACC function*/
HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH-1;
/*Enabling direct GERAN system information exchange*/
SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscReqGeranInfoSwitch=ON;
/*Enabling the inter-RAT cell to support indication of the RIM
procedure*/
MOD UEXT2GCELL: GSMCellIndex=0, SuppRIMFlag=TRUE;
/*Allowing NACC-related information exchange on the Iur-g interface*/
MOD GNRNC: RNCINDEX=0, SPTINFOEXCHG=YES, INFOEXCHGLIST=NACCRELATED-1;
/*Setting basic GPRS attributes of the GSM cell*/
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=YES;
//Deactivating NACC Procedure Optimization
HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH-0;
GBSS
WCDMA
628
207 Configuring GSM and WCDMA
Load Balancing Based on Iur-g
GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.
Prerequisites
The BSC model is BSC6900.
The MS is in GSM+UMTS dual mode.
This feature depends on features GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover
or WRFD-070006 GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.
l License
l 2G and 3G networks cover the same area.
l IP transmission mode is used over the Iur-g interface.
l The value of the information element (IE) Service Handover in the RAB ASSIGNMENT
REQUEST message sent from the CN to the RNC is Handover to GSM should be
performed.
l The value of the IE Service Handover in the ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message sent
from the CN to the BSC is Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be performed.
l A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured, and the GSM cell is configured as a
NOTE
l The licenses on the BSC and RNC sides are activated separately.
GBSS
207 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based
on Iur-g
629
Context
This feature implements the load-based GSM/WCDMA handover through the exchange of
Huawei proprietary IE over the Iur-g interface. With this feature, the traffic is distributed on the
basis of the service handover indicator and load of the GSM network and WCDMA network
when an MS accesses the network. In this way, a load balance is achieved between the GSM
network and WCDMA network.
Procedure
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to enable load
balancing and set load difference thresholds. In this step, set Service
Distribution and Load Balancing Switch to LOAD-BASED(LOAD-
BASED), Load Difference Threshold Between 3G And 2G of CS Service to
10, PS Load Difference Threshold Between 3G And 2G of Ps Service to 30,
and Adjustment Coefficient of 2G Load Value to 1.
inter-RAT handover. In this step, select the
HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH check boxes under the parameter
HandOver switch.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this
step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to Load-based(Load-
based), 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient to 10.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to enable inter-
RAT incoming BSC handover. In this step, set Inter-RAT In BSC Handover
Enable and Intra-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes). If multiple
neighboring cells are planned, repeat this step to enable inter-RAT incoming BSC
handover for all neighboring cells.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set CS
2G 3G Load Balance Delta Threshold to 110.
NOTE
If the verification achieves the following results as expected, the configuration succeeds. Otherwise, the
configuration fails.
1. 3G-to-2G Load Balancing
CAUTION
a. The verification procedure consists of the RRC setup phase and the RAB
connection phase. The verification in the latter phase involves CS speech services
and PS data services.
GBSS
on Iur-g
630
a. Verifying that CS speech services in UMTS cell1 are handed over to GSM
cell2 at the RRC setup phase
1) Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in cell1. The call is
successfully established. Initiate Uu-interface signaling tracing on the
LMT. The RRC_RRC_CONNECT_REQ and
RRC_RRC_CONN_REJECT messages are reported, and the
RRC_RRC_CONN_REJECT message contains GSM-
TargetCellInfo. That is, information about cell2 is contained,
indicating that the MS accesses cell2.
b. Verifying that PS data services in UMTS cell1 are handed over to GPRS
cell3 at the RAB connection phase
1) Use the MS to browse the Internet.
2) Initiate Uu-interface message tracing on the LMT. You can find that
the messages RRC_RB_SETUP, RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP,
RRC_MEAS_CTRL, and
RRC_CELL_CHANGE_ORDER_FROM_UTRAN are reported, and
that the value of InterRATEvent in the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message
is event3c.
3) Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find that
the RANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_REQ message is sent from the CN
to the RNC and then the RANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_RESP message
is sent from the RNC to the CN.
the RANAP_SRNS_DATA_FORWARD_COMMAND and
RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND messages are sent from the
CN to the RNC and then the RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE
message is sent from the RNC to the CN.
5) When the MS attempts to reselect cell3, Internet browsing is slightly
affected. After the MS reselects cell3, Internet browsing returns to
normal.
c. Verifying that CS speech services in UMTS cell1 are handed over to GSM
cell2 at the RAB connection phase
1) Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in cell1. The call is
successfully established.
2) Initiate Uu-interface tracing on the LMT. You can find that the
messages RRC_RB_SETUP, RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP,
RRC_MEAS_CTRL, and RRC_HO_FROM_UTRAN_CMD_GSM
are reported, and that the value of InterRATEvent in the
RRC_MEAS_CTRL message is event3c.
the RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message is sent from the
RNC to the CN and then the RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND
and RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND messages are sent from
the CN to the RNC.
the RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE message is sent from the
RNC to the CN.
2. 2G-to-3G Load Balancing
GBSS
on Iur-g
631
CAUTION
The verification can be done when only the GSM cell is in the basic congestion state.
a. Use the MS to initiate a call in the GSM cell. The directed retry procedure is
triggered so that the MS accesses the neighboring UMTS cell. The call is
successfully established. Initiate A-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You
can find that the Assignment Request, Handover Required, and Handover
Command messages are reported and that the value of cause in the Handover
Required message is directed-retry(13).
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to deactivate MBSC
load balancing. In this step, set Service Distribution and Load Balancing
Switch to OFF(OFF).
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB to
deactivate 2G-to-3G load balancing. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load
HO in Access State to OFF(OFF).
----End
Example
//Activating Load Balancing Based on Iur-g
/*Enabling load balancing and setting load difference thresholds*/
SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=LOAD-BASED,
Mbsc3G2GLdBlcCsDeltaThrd=10, Mbsc3G2GLdBlcPsDeltaThrd=30;
/*Enabling inter-RAT handover*/
/*Enabling load balancing*/
SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=YES,
InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Load-based, G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10;
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="0", INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES,
/*Setting load difference thresholds*/
SET OTHSOFTPARA: G2G3GLdBlcDeltaThrd=110;
//Deactivating Load Balancing Based on Iur-g
SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=OFF;
InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=OFF;
GBSS
on Iur-g
632
208 Configuring GSM and WCDMA
Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g
GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.
Prerequisites
The BSC model is BSC6900.
The MS is in GSM+UMTS dual mode.
This feature depends on features GBFD-114321 GSM/WCDMA Service Based
Handover and WRFD-070007 GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.
l License
l 2G and 3G networks cover the same area.
l IP transmission mode is used over the Iur-g interface.
l The value of the information element (IE) Service Handover in the RAB ASSIGNMENT
REQUEST message sent from the CN to the RNC is Handover to GSM should be
performed.
l The value of the IE Service Handover in the ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message sent
from the CN to the BSC is Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be performed or
Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should not be performed.
l A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured, and the GSM cell is configured as a
GBSS
208 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based
on Iur-g
633
NOTE
l The licenses on the BSC and RNC sides are activated separately.
Context
This feature supports GSM/WCDMA handover based on service. With this feature, services are
steered on the basis of the service handover indicator, hierarchical network planning, and the
load of the GSM network and WCDMA network when an MS accesses the network.
Procedure
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to enable traffic
steering. In this step, set Service Distribution and Load Balancing Switch to
SERVICE-BASED(SERVICE-BASED) and Adjustment Coefficient of 2G
Load Value to 1.
inter-RAT handover. In this step, select the
HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH check boxes under the parameter
HandOver switch.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHOCOMM to enable inter-
RAT CS and PS handover. In this step, set both Inter-RAT CS Handover
Switch and Inter-RAT PS Handover Switch to ON. Run the ADD
UCELLHOCOMM command to enable inter-RAT CS and PS handover for
each cell.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB to
enable traffic steering. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access
State to Service-based(Service-based).
1. The verification procedure of 3G-to-2G Traffic Steering
CAUTION
a. Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in the UMTS cell. Initiate Iu-
interface tracing on the LMT. You can find that the
RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message is reported and the handover
cause value in the message is resource-optimisation-relocation. Initiate A
interface tracing. You can find that the Handover Request message is reported
and the handover cause value in the message is traffic.
GBSS
on Iur-g
634
CAUTION
Ensure that the GSM cell is not in the congestion state.
2. The verification procedure of 2G-to-3G Traffic Steering
CAUTION
The verification can be done when only the GSM cell is in the basic congestion state.
a. Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in the GSM cell. Initiate CS
Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber tracing on the LMT. You can find that
the call is in GSM cell, and don't hand over to UMTS cell.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to deactivate traffic
steering. In this step, set Service Distribution and Load Balancing Switch to
OFF(OFF).
----End
Example
//Activating 3G-to-2G traffic steering
/*Enabling traffic steering*/
SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=SERVICE-BASED;
/*Enabling inter-RAT CS and PS handover*/
ADD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1, CSServiceHOSwitch=ON, PSServiceHOSwitch=ON;
/*Enabling inter-RAT incoming BSC handover*/
InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Service-based;
//Deactivating 3G-to-2G traffic steering
SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=OFF;
GBSS
on Iur-g
635
209 Configuring Cell Reselection
Between GSM and LTE
Prerequisites
This feature requires support from the MS, BTS, BSC, MSC, PCU, SGSN, GGSN, and
HLR.
l License
The MS supports both GSM and LTE and supports bidirectional cell reselection between
GSM and LTE.
The BSS and the NSS support bidirectional cell reselection between GSM and LTE.
Context
Cell reselection between GSM and LTE enables an MS in an LTE network to reselect the GSM
network when the MS is in a blind area of the LTE network or in an area with weak LTE coverage.
When the MS reenters the LTE network coverage or when the MS detects that an LTE cell
provides strong coverage, the MS can reselect the LTE network when the cell reselection
conditions are met.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTLTECELL to add an external LTE
cell. In this step, set EUTRAN Cell Type according to the actual situation.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 209 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE
636
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set MS
Fast Moving HO Allowed to YES(Yes).
3. Set the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS. In this step, set
GERAN Priority smaller than EUTRAN Priority.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GLTENCELL to add a neighboring LTE
cell. In this step, set Source Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, Neighbor
Cell Index to the index of the added LTE cell, and Support Cell Reselection to
SUPPORT(SUPPORT).
Sent 2QUATER to YES(Yes).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to check the value of
LTE Cell Reselection Allowed.
Expected result: The value of LTE Cell Reselection Allowed is Yes.
2. Enable the MS to camp on a GSM cell. Initiate RSL message tracing on the Abis
interface on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the
Abis Interface. On the RSL tab page, set Filter Flag to Cell and Cell ID
(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the index of the cell to be verified. Then click Submit and an
Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box is displayed.
Expected result: The MS reselects the LTE cell successfully. The result of RSL
message tracing on the Abis interface shows that BCCH Information is traced and its
message type is System Information 2Quater.
1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to disable
cell reselection from a GSM cell to all neighboring LTE cells. In this step, set LTE
Cell Reselection Allowed to NO(No).
2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GLTENCELL to disable cell
reselection from a GSM cell to a specific LTE cell. In this step, set Support Cell
Reselection to UNSUPPORT(UNSUPPORT).
----End
Example
/*Activating Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE*/
//Adding an external LTE cell
ADD GEXTLTECELL: EXTLTECELLID=8048, EXTLTECELLNAME="cell", MCC="460",
MNC="188", ENODEBTYPE=HOME, CI=0, TAC=1, FREQ=2, PCID=3, EUTRANTYPE=FDD;
//Enabling LTE cell reselection
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LTECELLRESELEN=YES;
//Setting the cell priority and the parameters about EUTRAN system
information
SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GERANPRI=1, EUTRANPRI=7,
THREUTRANHIGH=2, EUTRANQRXLEVMIN=10;
//Enabling cell reselection from a GSM cell to a specific neighboring LTE
cell
ADD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRCLTENCELLID=0, NBRLTENCELLID=8048,
SPTRESEL=SUPPORT;
//Enabling System Information 2Quater sending
SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES;
/*Deactivating Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE*/
GBSS
637
//Disabling cell reselection from a GSM cell to all neighboring LTE cells
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LTECELLRESELEN=NO;
//Disabling cell reselection from a GSM cell to a specific neighboring LTE
cell
MOD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRCLTENCELLID=0, NBRLTENCELLID=8048,
SPTRESEL=UNSUPPORT;
GBSS
638
210 Configuring PS Handover Between
GSM and LTE Based on Coverage
PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage.
Prerequisites
This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-119502 PS Handover.
l License
l The dual-mode MS supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE.
l The SGSN supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE.
l The SGSN support the PFC procedure.
l The GSM cell is configured with neighboring LTE cells, and the neighboring LTE cells
support the cell reselection.
NOTE
You can run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTLTECELL to add a neighboring LTE cell,
in this step, set EUTRAN Cell Type according to the actual situation, and run the BSC6900 MML
command SET GCELLHOBASIC to configure the neighboring LTE cells to support the cell
reselection, in this step, set LTE Cell Reselection Allowed to YES(Yes).
l The LTE cell is configured with neighboring GSM cells. In addition, the LTE cell supports
the feature of PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage.
Context
l When an NSE is configured to support the PS handover, all the cells under the NSE support
the PS handover.
GBSS
210 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based
on Coverage
639
l The BSC supports the PS handover between E-UTRAN and GERAN. In this way, the
access time of the MS to the target cell is reduced.
Procedure
Activating the PS Handover from GSM to LTE
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS.
Set Support Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).
Network Control Mode to NC2(NC2).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA.
Set Cell Normal Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit).
Set Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period as required, for example, 10.
Set Cell Reselection Hysteresis as required, for example, 6.
Set Cell Penalty Duration as required, for example, 10.
Set Normal Cell Reselection Worsen Level Threshold as required, for
example, 1.
Set Cell Reselection Level Threshold as required, for example, 15.
Set Cell Penalty Level as required, for example, 30.
Set Allowed Measure Report Missed Number as required, for example, 4.
Set Filter Window Size as required, for example, 6.
Set Cell Reselect Interval as required, for example, 2.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS. In this step,
set EUTRAN Priority to 7.
Activating the PS Handover from LTE to GSM
to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In LTE Inter-cell
PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).
Verifying the PS Handover from GSM to LTE
Urgent Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid), Cell Load Reselection
Allowed to FORBID(Forbid), and Cell Service Reselection Allowed to
FORBID(Forbid).
2. Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data. Trace PS
messages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interface on the
LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface and
3. Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power in the target cell so that the
level of the target cell is higher than that of the serving cell.
GBSS
on Coverage
640
4. Check the messages traced over the Um and Gb interfaces. If the following
messages are traced, the PS handover from GSM to LTE based on coverage is
enabled.
Gb interface: the PS Handover Required message from BSC to SGSN
Gb interface: the PS Handover Required Acknowledge message from SGSN
to BSC.
Um interface: the PS Handover Command message from BSC to MS.
Verifying the PS Handover from LTE to GSM
1. Use an MS that camps on the LTE serving cell to download or upload data. Trace
the PS messages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interface
on the LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface and
2. Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power in the target GSM cell so that
the level of the target GSM cell is higher than that of the serving cell.
3. Check the PS services on the Um interface and the messages traced over the Gb
interface on the target GSM cell. If PS services are processed normally on the Um
interface and the following messages are traced over the Gb interface, the PS
handover from LTE to GSM based on coverage is enabled.
Gb interface: the Handover Request message from SGSN to BSC
Gb interface: the PS Handover Request Acknowledge message from BSC to
SGSN
Gb interface: the PS Handover Complete message from BSC to SGSN
NOTE
Before the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT
(Not Support) for all cells except the target GSM cell. After the verification, set Support
In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover back to SUPPORT(Support) for these cells.
Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support) and set Support
In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
Example
//Activating the PS Handover from GSM to LTE
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES,
SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;
SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINACCRXLEV=15, RESELHYST=6,
PENALTYRXLEV=30, PENALTYLASTTM=10, ALLOWEDMEASRPTMISSEDNUM=4,
FILTERWNDSIZE=6, NORMALRESELALLOW=PERMIT, RESELWATCHPERIOD=10,
RESELWORSENLEVTHRSH=1, RESELINTERVAL=2;
SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EUTRANPRI=7;
//Activating the PS Handover from LTE to GSM
SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;
SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, URGENTRESELALLOW=FORBID,
LOADRESELALLOW=FORBID, TrafficReselAllow=FORBID;
GBSS
on Coverage
641
SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;
GBSS
on Coverage
642
GSM and LTE Based on Quality
PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality.
Prerequisites
l License
NOTE
the feature of PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality.
Context
the PS handover.
GBSS
on Quality
643
Procedure
Set Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit).
Set MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold as required, for example, 200.
Set Cell Rx Quality Worsen Ratio Threshold as required, for example, 30.
Set EDGE GMSK Quality Threshold as required, for example, 7.
Set EDGE 8PSK Quality Threshold as required, for example, 16.
Set GPRS Quality Threshold as required, for example, 5.
Normal Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid) and Cell Load Reselection
Allowed to FORBID(Forbid).
GBSS
on Quality
644
3. Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power in the target cell so that the
level of the target cell is higher than that of the serving cell.
messages are traced, the PS handover from GSM to LTE based on quality is
enabled.
to BSC.
2. Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power in the target GSM cell so that
the level of the target GSM cell is higher than that of the serving cell.
handover from LTE to GSM based on quality is enabled.
Gb interface: the PS Handover Request message from SGSN to BSC
SGSN
NOTE
Before the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to
UNSUPPORT(Not Support) for all cells except the target GSM cell. After the
verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover back to SUPPORT
(Support) for these cells.
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), Support Out LTE Inter-cell PS
Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support) and Support In LTE Inter-cell PS
Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
Example
FILTERWNDSIZE=6, MSRXQUALSTATTHRSH=200, CELLRXQUALWORSENRATIOTHRSH=30,
URGENTRESELALLOW=PERMIT, RESELINTERVAL=2, EGPRSBEPLIMITGMSK=7,
EGPRSBEPLIMIT8PSK=16, GPRSRXQUALLIMIT=5;
GBSS
on Quality
645
NORMALRESELALLOW=FORBID, TrafficReselAllow=FORBID;
GBSS
on Quality
646
GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load
PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load.
Prerequisites
l License
NOTE
the feature of PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load.
Context
the PS handover.
GBSS
on Cell Load
647
Procedure
Set Cell Load Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit).
Set Load Reselection Start Threshold as required, for example, 85.
Set Load Reselection Receive Threshold as required, for example, 6.
Set Load Reselect Level Threshold as required, for example, 40.
Normal Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid) and Cell Urgent Reselection
Allowed to FORBID(Forbid).
2. Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data. Trace the
PS messages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interface on
the LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface and
3. Use more MSs to perform GPRS services in the serving cell.
messages are traced, the PS handover from GSM to LTE based on cell load is
enabled.
GBSS
on Cell Load
648
to BSC.
2. Use more MSs to perform GPRS services in the serving cell.
handover from LTE to GSM based on cell load is enabled.
Gb interface: the PS Handover Request message from SGSN to BSC
SGSN
NOTE
Before the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to
UNSUPPORT(Not Support) for all cells except the target GSM cell. After the
verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover back to SUPPORT
(Support) for these cells.
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), Support Out LTE Inter-cell PS
Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support), and Support In LTE Inter-cell PS
Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
Example
FILTERWNDSIZE=6, LOADRESELSTARTTHRSH=85, LOADRESELRXTHRSH=6,
LOADRESELALLOW=PERMIT, RESELINTERVAL=2, LOADRESELMAXRXLEV=40;
NORMALRESELALLOW=FORBID, TrafficReselAllow=FORBID;
GBSS
on Cell Load
649
213 Configuring GSM/LTE Service Based
PS Handover
GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover.
Prerequisites
l License
The dual-mode MS supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE.
The SGSN supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE.
The SGSN carries the Service E-UTRAN CCO IE.
The SGSN support the PFC procedure.
The GSM cell is configured with neighboring LTE cells, and the neighboring LTE cells
NOTE
You can run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTLTECELL to add a neighboring LTE
cell, in this step, set EUTRAN Cell Type according to the actual situation, and run the
BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to configure the neighboring LTE cells to
support the cell reselection, in this step, set LTE Cell Reselection Allowed to YES(Yes).
The LTE cell is configured with neighboring GSM cells. In addition, the LTE cell
supports the feature of PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 213 Configuring GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover
650
Context
the PS handover.
Procedure
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA, set Cell Service
Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit).
Normal Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid), set Cell Urgent Reselection
Allowed to FORBID(Forbid) and Cell Load Reselection Allowed to FORBID
(Forbid).
3. Inform an engineer at the NSE to configure the subscription information of this
MS to ensure that the LTE network is preferentially selected.
NOTE
The following message from the SGSN to the BSC can be traced over the Gb interface: the DL-
UNITDATA message with the Service E-UTRAN CCO IE setting to Network initiated cell
change order to E-UTRAN or PS handover to E-UTRAN procedure should be
performed.
messages are traced, the PS handover from GSM to LTE based on coverage is
enabled.
to BSC.
GBSS
651
2. Inform an engineer at the LTE to trigger the handover of this service from LTE to
GSM.
handover from LTE to GSM based on coverage is enabled.
Gb interface: the Handover Request message from SGSN to BSC
SGSN
NOTE
Before the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT
(Not Support) for all cells except the target GSM cell. After the verification, set Support
In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover back to SUPPORT(Support) for these cells.
Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support) and set Support
In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
Example
SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TrafficReselAllow=PERMIT;
LOADRESELALLOW=FORBID, NORMALRESELALLOW=FORBID;
GBSS
652
214 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM
and LTE
eNC2 Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNC2 is short for Network Control Mode 2.
Prerequisites
feature depends on the optional features GBFD-114101 GPRS and GBFD-511301 Cell
Reselection Between GSM and LTE.
l License
l The Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) and
Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP).
NOTE
Context
l This feature can be configured to implement the network-controlled cell reselection from
GSM to LTE for an MS.
l With this feature, an MS in a cell with poor signal quality, heavy load, or low signal level
can reselect a neighboring cell with good signal quality, light load, or high signal level.
Compared with the MS-controlled cell reselection, the network-controlled cell reselection
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 214 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE
653
considers factors such as the service type of the MS, and receive level, traffic load, and
signal level of neighboring cells so that the MS can reselect a better cell.
Procedure
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to YES(Yes).
Control Mode to NC2(NC2).
Normal Reselection Allowed, Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed, Cell Load
Reselection Allowed, and Cell Service Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit).
Set the related parameters as required according to network plan.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS. In this step, set
EUTRAN Priority to 7.
1. Make the MS camp on the serving GSM cell. Then, use the MS to perform GPRS
services, and trace the signaling on the Um interface by referring to Tracing PS
Domain Messages on the Um Interface.
2. Move the MS, increase the power of the target cell so that the level of the target cell
is higher than that of the serving cell, or increase the number of MSs in the serving
cell.
3. Check the messages traced over the Um interface. If the following messages are traced,
the eNC2 between GSM and LTE is enabled.
The Packet Measurement Report message from MS to BSC.
The Packet Cell Change Order message from BSC to MS.
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating eNC2 Between GSM and LTE
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES;
SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, URGENTRESELALLOW=PERMIT,
LOADRESELALLOW=PERMIT, NORMALRESELALLOW=PERMIT, TRAFFICRESELALLOW=PERMIT;
//Deactivating eNC2 Between GSM and LTE
SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 214 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE
654
215 Configuring eNACC Between GSM
and LTE
eNACC Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNACC is short for External Network Assisted Cell
Change.
Prerequisites
This feature depends on the optional features GBFD-114101 GPRS and GBFD-511301
l License
l The Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) and
Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP).
NOTE
Context
l The eNACC between E-UTRAN and GERAN supports only the relocation of MSs from
E-UTRAN to GERAN.
l The eNACC can be configured to accelerate the cell reselection of an MS and shorten the
period of service disruption caused by cell reselection.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 215 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE
655
NOTE
The verification procedure must be performed immediately after the activation procedure; otherwise, some
messages may not be traced.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set RIM Support to
YES(Support).
NOTE
This operation affects the services of all the cells under the NSE. Perform the operation when
the traffic volume is low.
1. Trace SIG messages over the Gb interface on the LMT by referring to Tracing SIG
Messages on the Gb Interface.
2. Check the messages traced over the Gb interface. If the following messages are traced,
the eNACC between GSM and LTE is enabled.
The RAN INFORMATION REQ message from SGSN to BSC.
The RAN INFORMATION message from BSC to SGSN.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set RIM Support to NO
(No Support).
NOTE
This operation affects the services of all the cells under the NSE. Perform the operation when
the traffic volume is low.
----End
Example
//Activating eNACC Between GSM and LTE
MOD NSE: NSEI=0, RIMSUP=YES;
RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;
//Deactivating eNACC Between GSM and LTE
MOD NSE: NSEI=0, RIMSUP=NO;
RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 215 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE
656
216 Configuring SRVCC
Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC).
Prerequisites
l License
Context
l The SRVCC feature enables the speech services that are carried on the IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS) to be handed over to the GSM EDGE Radio Access Network (GERAN).
An MS accesses the IMS to maintain the speech service through the CS domain in the
GERAN or the PS domain in the Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-
UTRAN).
l The SRVCC feature supports only handover of speech services from E-UTRAN to
GERAN. It is available only when the E-UTRAN and the GERAN cover the same area.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set SRVCC
Handover Allowed to YES(Yes), and according to SAI settings on the GSM side, set
the following parameter value:
LTE SAI MCC
LTE SAI MNC
LTE SAI LAC
LTE SAI SAC
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 216 Configuring SRVCC
657
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to query SRVCC
Handover Allowed.
Expected result: The value of SRVCC Handover Allowed is Yes.
2. Tracing the A interface signaling on the LMT by referring to Tracing Messages on
the A Interface. On the Basic tab page, specify the DPC of the test cell for the DPC
(Hex) in the DPC Configuration. Click BSSAP tab in the Trace Type. On the
BSSAP tab page, specify the ID of the test cell for the Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16)
in the Cell. Then click Submit.
3. After the A interface signaling tracing window is displayed, use a GSM/LTE dual-
mode MS to camp on the LTE cell and then make a call.
Expected result: The Handover Request and Handover Complete messages are
traced over the A interface.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set SRVCC
Handover Allowed to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating SRVCC
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SRVCCHOEN=YES, LTESAIMCC=538,
LTESAIMNC=735, LTESAILAC=2497, LTESAISAC=3685;
//Deactivating SRVCC
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SRVCCHOEN=NO;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 216 Configuring SRVCC
658
217 Configuring Multi Technology
Neighbour Cell Based Handover
Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover.
Prerequisites
None
feature depends on the feature GBFD-119502 PS Handover.
l License
The MS and SGSN support the PS handover.
GSM neighboring cells, UMTS neighboring cells, and LTE neighboring cells are
configured.
Context
This feature allows the users to configure priorities to GSM, UMTS, and LTE neighboring cells
of a GSM cell on the BSC. If handover conditions (for example, level) are met, the MS is handed
over to a neighboring cell with a higher priority.
NOTE
Assume that the serving GSM cell and two LTE external cells are configured as neighboring cells.
Procedure
GBSS
217 Configuring Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based
Handover
659
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GLTENCELL to set Index Type to BYID
(By Index), Source Cell Index to the index of the serving GSM cell, Neighbor Cell
Index to the index of LTE neighboring cell 1, and Neighboring Cell Priority to 4.
(By Index), Source Cell Index to the index of the GSM serving cell, Neighbor Cell
1. Use an MS to perform the download service in the GSM cell.
2. On the LMT, On the MT, trace PTP messages on the Gb interface and PS domain
messages on the UM interface by referring to Tracing PTP Messages On the Gb
Interface and Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.
3. Relocate the MS to trigger the PS handover.
4. Check the messages traced over the Gb and Um interfaces. If the following messages
exist, it indicates that the MS is handed over to LTE neighboring cell 2 to perform the
PS service.
Gb interface: the PS Handover Required message from BSC to SGSN. In this
message, Target eNB identifier is LTE neighboring cell 2.
Gb interface: the PS Handover Required Acknowledge from SGSN to BSC.
Um interface: the PS Handover Command from BSC to MS.
6. Use an MS to perform the download service in the GSM cell. Relocate the MS to
trigger the PS handover.
7. Check the message process over the Gb interface and Um interface. If the following
messages exist, it indicates that the MS is handed over to LTE neighboring cell 1 to
perform the PS service.
Gb interface: the PS Handover Required message from BSC to SGSN. In this
message, Target eNB identifier is LTE neighboring cell 1.
Gb interface: the PS Handover Required Acknowledge from SGSN to BSC.
Um interface: the PS Handover Command from BSC to MS.
----End
Example
NCELLPRI=4; MOD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRCLTENCELLID=0,
NBRLTENCELLID=9002, NCELLPRI=5;
GBSS
Handover
660
NCELLPRI=255; MOD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRCLTENCELLID=0,
NBRLTENCELLID=9002, NCELLPRI=255;
GBSS
Handover
661
218 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at
2G CS Call Release
Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.
Prerequisites
l License
The network is covered by both a 2G network and an LTE network.
The UE supports both 2G and LTE frequency bands.
Context
When the 2G network and the LTE network cover the same area and this feature is activated, a
UE can process services in the LTE network immediately after the UE releases a 2G call. This
accelerates cell reselection.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTLTECELL to add an LTE external
cell.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GLTENCELL to configure the LTE cell 1
as a neighboring cell of the 2G cell 0, and in this step, set Support Rapid
Reselection to SUPPORT(SUPPORT).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 218 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
662
NOTE
The cell 0 must be configured as a neighboring cell of the LTE cell 1 on the LTE side.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC to set basic attributes of the
BSC. In this step, set A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag
to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS. In this step, set
EUTRAN Priority to a value greater than UTRAN Priority.
1. Initiate Um interface message tracing. Enable the UE to camp on cell 0, initiate a call
in cell 0 successfully, and maintain the call.
2. Hang up the call and check the network indicator displayed on the UE. The network
indicator indicates that the UE is camping on the LTE cell.
NOTE
If the 2G network and LTE network use the same network indicator, the UE must be capable
of identifying which cell the UE is camping on, a 2G cell or an LTE cell.
3. Trace the Um interface message by referring to Tracing CS Domain messages on the
Um interface. An information element (IE) "cell-selection-indicator-after-release" is
contained in the downlink Channel Release message transmitted over the Um
interface.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GLTENCELL. In this step, set Support
Rapid Reselection to UNSUPPORT(UNSUPPORT).
----End
Example
//Activating Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
ADD GEXTLTECELL: EXTLTECELLID=8048, EXTLTECELLNAME="Cell1", MCC="460",
MNC="10", ENODEBTYPE=MACRO, CI=0, TAC=1, FREQ=100, PCID=0,
EUTRANTYPE=FDD;
ADD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYNAME, SRCLTENCELLNAME="Ce110",
NBRLTENCELLNAME="Cell1", SPTRAPIDSEL=SUPPORT;
SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus,
UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;
GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME=Ce110, UTRANPRI=0, EUTRANPRI=1;
//Deactivating Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
MOD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYNAME, SRCLTENCELLNAME="Ce110",
NBRLTENCELLNAME="Cell1", SPTRAPIDSEL=UNSUPPORT;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 218 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
663
219 Configuring CSFB
CSFB.
Prerequisites
l License
l Others
A SGs interface is configured between the MSC server and the Mobile Management
Entity (MME).
The MS is a GL dual-mode MS and supports CSFB.
It is recommended that the CSFB be used together with the GBFD-511301 Cell
Reselection Between GSM and LTE and the GBFD-511312 Fast LTE Reselection at
2G CS Call Release.
Context
Circuit Switch FallBack (CSFB) is a function based on which the MS camping on the E-UTRAN
network moves to the GERNAN or UTRAN network by using PS handover or PS cell reselection
and processes CS services on the GERNAN or UTRAN network.
This feature can be enabled only when the E-UTRAN network covers the same area as the
GERAN or UTRAN network.
Procedure
when the MSC Pool function is disabled
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 219 Configuring CSFB
664
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, specify a target
cell and set CSFB Support to SUPPORT(Support).
when the MSC Pool function is enabled
cell and set CSFB Support to SUPPORT(Support), set Unknown Paging Response
Support to YES(Yes).
1. Start CS single user tracing on the LMT. In this step, enter the IMSI or TMSI of the
test MS and click OK. For instructions on how to start CS single user tracing on the
LMT, see Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber.
2. Enable CSFB for LTE NEs on the E-UTRAN side and for the MSC on the GERAN
side.
NOTE
For instructions on how to enable CSFB for LTE NEs and for the MSC, see the related feature
configuration guide.
3. Trigger a CS paging to the MS after the MS operates services normally on the E-
UTRAN network.
4. Query the result of CS single user tracing.
Expected result: The MS sets up a call successfully at the BSC. Both signaling and
speech services are normal.
when the MSC Pool function is disabled
cell and set CSFB Support to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).
when the MSC Pool function is enabled
cell and set CSFB Support to UNSUPPORT(Not Support), set Unknown Paging
Response Support to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Enabling CSFB when the MSC Pool function is enabled
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPORTCSFB=SUPPORT,
CSFBPAGRSPBCSWITCH=YES;
//Enabling CSFB when the MSC Pool function is disabled
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPORTCSFB=SUPPORT;
//Disabling CSFB when the MSC Pool function is enabled
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPORTCSFB=UNSUPPORT,
CSFBPAGRSPBCSWITCH=NO;
//Disabling CSFB when the MSC Pool function is disabled
SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPORTCSFB=UNSUPPORT;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 219 Configuring CSFB
665
220 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA
Interoperability
GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability.
Prerequisites
The MS supports both the GSM and TD-SCDMA networks. It also supports
bidirectional cell reselection and handovers between GSM and TD-SCDMA.
The BSS and NSS support the GSM/TD-SCDMA inter-RAT cell selection, cell
reselection, and location update. In addition, they support measurement control,
handover decision, and handover signaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers.
l License
Context
The GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability feature enables an MS to be handed over to or reselect
a GSM cell if the serving cell of the MS is not covered by the TD-SCDMA network or in the
area with weak TD-SCDMA coverage. When a dual-mode MS enters the coverage of the TD-
SCDMA network again, or the MS detects that the signal quality in the TD-SCDMA cell is
higher than that in the serving GSM cell, the MS can be handed over to or reselect a TD-SCDMA
cell if the handover or cell reselection conditions are met. Then, the MS can enjoy the various
services provided by the TD-SCDMA network.
Procedure
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 220 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability
666
Activating GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL to add a 3G external
cell. In this step, set Utran Cell Type to TDD(TDD).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to add a neighboring 3G
cell.
Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.
Support Sent 2QUATER to YES(Yes), Send 3G Class Flag to YES(Yes), and
Classmark Enquiry With 3G Request to YES(Yes).
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to set basic call
control parameters of the cell. In this step, set ECSC to YES(Yes).
Activating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic
handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection
Enable to YES(Yes).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS to set the
UTRAN system information parameters for call control in the cell. In this step, set
Qsearch I to 7, Qsearch C to 7, Qsearch P to 7, Qsearch C Initial to Always
(Always), .and set TDD System Information Optimized Allowed, TDD Cell
Reselect Diversity, Best TDD Cell Number, TDD Reporting Offset, TDD
Reporting Threshold, TDD MI System INFO Broadcasting Prohibit, and TDD
MI System Information Optimized according to the actual requirements.
3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step,
set Select 3G Cell If No TD Cell Is Contained In MR according to the actual
requirements.
4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA.
In this step, set GSM-to-TD Cell Reselection Allowed and Neighboring 3G Cells
Filtering Mode according to the actual requirements.
set Network Operation Mode according to the actual requirements.
6. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET
GCELLNWCTRLMSRPARA. In this step, set Cell Reselection MR Period in
Packet Transfer Mode according to the actual requirements.
Verifying GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXT3GCELL to query the value of
Utran cell type.
Expected result: The value of Utran cell type is TDD.
Verifying 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State
1. Move the MS within the GSM cell or TD-SCDMA cell, and ensure that the
Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) is
normal during the neighboring cell measurement of the TD-SCDMA cell (TDD).
If the measurement result meets the following conditions within five seconds, the
MS initiates the cell reselection from GSM to TD-SCDMA: CPICH RSCP>
RLA_C + TDD Cell Reselect Diversity.
GBSS
667
2. When the MS is in the GSM cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates
that the MS is in the GSM cell; when the MS is in the TD-SCDMA cell, the
frequency information of the MS indicates that the MS is in the TD-SCDMA cell.
Deactivating GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G3GNCELL to remove the neighboring
3G cell.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GEXT3GCELL to remove the 3G
external cell.
Deactivating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic
handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection
Enable to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability
MNC="11", LAC=11, CI=1, RNCID=11, RNCINDEX=255, DF=1, SCRAMBLE=1,
DIVERSITY=NO, UTRANCELLTYPE=TDD;
SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;
SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES, SendUtranECSCFlag=YES,
CLASSMARKQUERY=YES;
//Activating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES;
QSEARCHC=7;
//Deactivating GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability
RMV G3GNCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5048, EXT3GCELLNAME="5048";
RMV GEXT3GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048;
//Deactivating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=NO;
GBSS
668
221 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between
GSM and TD-SCDMA
Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA.
Prerequisites
The FG2a/GOUa/FG2c/GOUc/PEUa/POUc board is installed.
l License
The UE supports both the GSM and TD-SCDMA modes.
The UE supports full-rate AMR.
The related parameters for the transmission between GSM and TD-SCDMA are
negotiated.
Context
The Iur-g interface is used for information exchange between the BSC and the TD-RNC.
Through the information exchange and common measurement procedures, the BSC and TD-
RNC can obtain the capacity and load information of each other.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC. In this step, set DSP type to
IUR_G(IUR_G) and DSP bear type to M3UA(M3UA).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE command to add an M3UA local
entity.
GBSS
221 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-
SCDMA
669
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE command to add an M3UA
destination entity.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an IP interface board.
5. Configure the physical layer and the data link layer.
The FG2a, GOUa, FG2c, GOUc, FG2d and GOUd boards adopt IP over FE/GE
transmission.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ETHPORT to set the attributes of
the Ethernet port.
b. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHREDPORT to add
active and standby Ethernet ports if required.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHIP to add an IP address for the
Ethernet port. In this step, set Local IP address based on the network plan.
When multiple VLAN gateways are planned, run this command for each IP
address you want to add.
d. (Optional) When device IP is used in communication, run the BSC6900 MML
command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address for the interface board. In
this step, set Device IP Address Type and IP address to appropriate values.
The PEUa/POUc board adopts IP over E1/T1 transmission.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP to add the device IP address
of the interface board. In this step, set Device IP Address Type and IP
address to appropriate values.
b. Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MP link
group) and perform the corresponding step.
If the E1/T1 link carries a/an... Then...
PPP link Go to step c.
MP link group Go to step d.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK to add a PPP link. In this
step, set Board Type to PEUa or POUc. To add more PPP links, run this
command for each PPP link you want to add.
d. Add MP link group data.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP to add an MP link
group. In this step, set Board Type to PEUa or POUc.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK to add an MP link.
In this step, set Board Type to PEUa or POUc. To add more MP links,
run this command for each MP link you want to add.
6. Configure the control plane data (over IP).
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link. In
this step, set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD) and
Application type to M3UA(M3UA). To add multiple SCTP links, run this
command for each SCTP link you want to add.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS to add an M3UA link set.
GBSS
SCDMA
670
NOTE
l If Local entity type is set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP), set Work mode of the
M3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP).
l If Local entity type is set to M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP) and Destination entity
type is set to M3UA_SP(M3UA_SP), set Work mode of the M3UA link set to
M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP). In other cases, set Work mode of the M3UA link set
to M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP).
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK to add an M3UA link. To add
multiple M3UA links, run this command for each M3UA link you want to add.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to query the SCCP DSP state. In
this step, set DSP index to the index of the adjacent TD RNC. The result shows that
the SCCP DSP is in the accessible state.
----End
GBSS
SCDMA
671
222 Configuring Radio Resource
Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA
Based on Iur-g
Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g.
Prerequisites
The feature GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA has been
l License
The UE supports both the GSM and TD-SCDMA modes.
The UE supports full-rate AMR.
The related parameters for the transmission between GSM and TD-SCDMA are
negotiated.
The neighboring cell relationship is properly configured on the TD-RNC. Iur-g
Interface Existence Symbol is set to YES(Yes) and Iur-g Interface Supporting
Inter-RAT CS Handover is set to YES(Yes).
Context
In this feature, radio resource reservation is added to the standard GSM/TD-SCDMA handover
procedure through the information exchange on the Iur-g interface between the BSC and the
TD-RNC. In this way, the resource reservation procedure is completed without CN forwarding.
GBSS
222 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover
Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g
672
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Index
Type to BYID(By Index), specify the cell ID, and set Inter-RAT In BSC Handover
Enable to YES(Yes) and Allow Incoming BSC Handover at Iur-g to YES(Yes).
NOTE
Carry Speech Data at Iur-g can be set to YES(Yes) to enable the Iur-g interface to carry the
user plane data.
2. Set the local BSC as the neighboring BSC of the TD RNC and set Handover Type
Supported by the Iur-g Interface to Carrying Signaling Plane Handover on the
TD-RNC side.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC. The returned result
shows that Allow Incoming BSC Handover at Iur-g is set to Yes.
2. Use a UE to initiate a call in the TD-SCDMA network. The call is established.
Attenuate the signal of the TD-SCDMA cell or add path loss between the UE and the
TD-SCDMA cell until the UE is handed over from the 3G cell to a 2G cell.
3. Trace the messages transmitted on the interface between BSCs by referring to Tracing
Messages on the Inter-BSC Interface. You can view additional handover signaling in
the tracing window. Figure 222-1 shows the messages traced on the interface between
BSCs.
Figure 222-1 Messages traced on the interface between BSCs
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Index
Type to BYID(By Index) and specify the cell index. In addition, set Allow Incoming
BSC Handover at Iur-g to NO(No). If the user plane transmission over the Iur-g
interface also needs to be deactivated, set Carry Speech Data at Iur-g to NO(No).
----End
Example
//Activating Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based
on Iur-g
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES,
InterRatIurgInBscHoEn=YES;
//Deactivating Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA
Based on Iur-g
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=NO,
InterRatIurgInBscHoEn=NO;
GBSS
222 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover
Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g
673
223 Configuring Extended BCCH
Extended BCCH.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
SI2Quater and SI13 messages are sent on the same normal BCCH as other system information
messages. Only one message is sent in a scheduling period, leading to a long delay. If SI2Quater
and SI13 messages are specified to be broadcast on an extended BCCH, only these two types of
messages are broadcast on the extended BCCH. In addition, one SIQuater or SI13 message is
broadcast in each scheduling period. This speeds up the scheduling and broadcasting of
SI2Quater and SI13 messages. As a result, MSs quickly obtain system information messages
for inter-RAT cell reselection, and the delay in cell reselection decreases.
Procedure
CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH to a value greater than 0.
2Quater Message Transmission Channel to BCCH_Ext(BCCHExt).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Channel
of Sending SI13 Message to BCCH_Ext(BCCH Ext).
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 223 Configuring Extended BCCH
674
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to send system
information messages. Initiate Abis interface message tracing by referring to Tracing
CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Trace Type area, click RSL to
trace RSL messages on the Abis interface. If the value of si2-quater-position in SI
Type 3 is 1, SI2quater is sent on the extended BCCH, as shown in Figure 223-1.
Figure 223-1 BCCH message
2. If the value of si13-position in SI Type 3 is 1, SI13 is sent on the extended BCCH,
and this feature has been activated.
CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH to 0.
2Quater Message Transmission Channel to BCCHNorm(BCCH).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Channel
of Sending SI13 Message to BCCH_Norm(BCCH Norm).
----End
Example
//Activating Extended BCCH
SET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BSAGBLKSRES=1;
SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: POS2QUATER=BCCHExt;
SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, POSSI13=BCCH_Ext;
//Verifying Extended BCCH
//Deactivating Extended BCCH
SET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BSAGBLKSRES=0;
SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: POS2QUATER=BCCHNorm;
SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, POSSI13=BCCH_Norm;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 223 Configuring Extended BCCH
675
224 Configuring Multiple CCCHs
Multiple CCCHs.
Prerequisites
l License
Context
Based on configuration of BCCH TRX timeslot 0 as the BCCH physical channel, the feature of
Multiple CCCHs allows one to configure timeslots 2, 4, and 6 as BCCH physical channels. This
increases the number of CCCHs in a cell and therefore improves the paging and random access
capabilities of the cell.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN with TRX ID and Channel
No. set to appropriate values and Channel Type set to BCH(BCH).
NOTE
The main BCCH can be configured in only channel 0, and the extension BCCH can be
configured in channel 2, 4, or 6.
If an extension BCCH is configured, the CCCH parameter in the system message needs to be
configured accordingly. For example, if an extension BCCH is configured in timeslot 2, the
CCCH parameter in the system message needs to be configured as two uncombined CCCHs.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 224 Configuring Multiple CCCHs
676
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN with TRX ID set to an
appropriate value, Channel No. set to 2, and Channel Type set to TCHFR(TCH
Full Rate) or TCHHR(TCH Half Rate).
2. Make a call.
Expected result: The value of channel-no. in all paging messages is 0.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN with TRX ID set to an
appropriate value, Channel No. set to 2, and Channel Type set to BCH(BCH).
5. Make a call.
Expected result: In some paging messages, the value of channel-no. is 2.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN with TRX ID and Channel
No. set to appropriate values, and Channel Type set to TCHFR(TCH Full Rate) or
TCHHR(TCH Half Rate).
----End
Example
//Activating Multiple CCCHs
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=BCH;
//Deactivating Multiple CCCHs
SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=TCHFR;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 224 Configuring Multiple CCCHs
677
225 Configuring Layered Paging
Layered Paging.
Prerequisites
None
l License
GSM, UMTS, or LTE neighboring cells are configured.
The value of the Ready timer configured on the SGSN side is obtained.
Context
The CCCHs will be overloaded when the number of PS paging messages exceeds that of CS
paging messages and increases continuously, which affects the access CS users. Layered paging
enables the first paging to be sent only to the last cell on which the MS camps and to its configured
neighboring cells, reducing the CCCHs for PS paging.
Procedure
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), and then set PS Paging Control to
FIRSTPRECISEPAGING(First precise paging) or
ALWAYSNORMALPAGING(Always normal paging) according to the network
planning.
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 225 Configuring Layered Paging
678
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA, set Ready Timer.
Note that the value of the Ready timer must be the same as that of the Ready timer
configured on the SGSN side.
1. Connect an MS to a laptop and initiate PS services. Then, record the IP address of the
MS and stop PS services.
2. On the LMT, trace SIG messages on the Gb interface by referring to Tracing SIG
Messages on the Gb Interface and trace CS messages on the Um interface by referring
to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.
3. Wait for a period longer than the value of the Ready timer, and then ping the IP address
of the MS on the FTP server to trigger the paging procedure.
Expected result:
The PS PAGING message can be viewed in the SIG messages traced on the Gb
interface.
In the CS messages traced on the Um interface, the Packet Ccch Command or
Paging Request message can be viewed only in the cell where the MS camps when
processing PS services and the configured neighboring cells.
SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), and then set PS Paging Control to
ALWAYSNORMALPAGING(Always normal paging).
----End
Example
PSPagingCtrl=FIRSTPRECISEPAGING;
SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: ReadyTimer=44;
PSPagingCtrl=ALWAYSNORMALPAGING;
GBSS
Feature Activation Guide 225 Configuring Layered Paging
679
226 Configuring 2G/3G Co-Transmission
by TDM Switching
2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching.
Prerequisites
The timeslot cross connection device closest to the BSC/RNC is used to multiplex and
demultiplex 2G and 3G timeslots, and this device connects to the BSC and RNC
separately over two E1 cables.
Multi-mode base stations are correctly installed and connected to other devices.
A POUc board is configured.
In GSM mode, if IP over E1/T1 transmission is used over the Abis interface, the feature
GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1 has been configured before this feature is activated.
In UMTS mode, the features WRFD-05030101 ATM over E1T1 on Iub Interface and
WRFD-050411 Fractional IP Function on Iub Interface have been configured before
l License
The initial configurations on the BSC, BTS, and NodeB are complete.
The BTS3600, BTS3002E, BTS3012(DTRU/QTRU), and BTS3012AE(DTRU/
QTRU) do not support this feature.
Context
With this feature, the Iub and Abis interfaces share the transport network and the BSC6900
provides E1/T1-based or timeslot-based 2G/3G co-transmission. In this way, the number of ports
on the transport network device is reduced and the transmission cost is saved.
GBSS
226 Configuring 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM
Switching
680
Currently, the BTSs that support the feature 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching are
the BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, and DBS3900 GSM.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TSCROSS to add a timeslot cross
connection on the POUc board.
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP TSCROSS to query the status of the timeslot
cross connection.
----End
Example
//Activating 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching
ADD TSCROSS: SRN=0, SN=14, SRCPORTNO=0,
SRCTSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS
11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-
1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1&,
DSTPORTNO=63,
DSTTSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS
11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-
1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1&;
GBSS
226 Configuring 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM
Switching
681
227 Configuring Radio Measurement
Data Interface for Navigation
Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation.
Prerequisites
The BSC6900 is configured with an OMU board running the Linux operating system.
l License
The port 6200 and the port 8200 used to communicate with the VNP have been enabled
on the OMU.
The ciphering function has been enabled on the CN side.
The Vendor Network Probe (VNP) has subscribed to events Cipher Mode Complete,
Clear Command, Handover Command, Handover Complete, Measurement Report
Small, and MS Identity Established.
Context
Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation enables the BSC to send measured MS-related
radio data to the VNP, which then sends the data to a thirty-party Collection Unit (CU). The CU
processes the data and then sends it to GPS users to instruct the users to avoid congestion.
Assume that the active workspace of the OMU is version_a.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure (Newly-configured, and using the external virtual IP address of the
OMU for communicating with the VNP)
GBSS
227 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for
Navigation
682
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GVNPADDR. In this step, set VNP IP
Address and Category Version to appropriate values based on the network plan. Note
that Category Version must be the same as that on the peer VNP.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Event Report
Switch to ON(On), BSC Protocol Version No., BSC Application Version No., and
Access Cause to appropriate values based on the network plan. Note that BSC
Protocol Version No. and BSC Application Version No. must be the same as those
on the peer VNP.
NOTE
If a Huawei VNP is used, set BSC Application Version No. to 13.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set IDTYPE,
CELLID, and CELLNAME to appropriate values, and Event Report Switch to ON
(On).
l Activation Procedure (Newly-configured, and using the local IP address of the BSC for
communicating with the VNP)
on the peer VNP.
NOTE
(On).
4. Use the debugging IP address to log in to the target OMU at the local end. For details,
see Logging In to the OMU.
5. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command and press Enter to stop the omud process.
6. Run the cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam command and press Enter to enter the
directory under which the omutool is located.
7. Run the ./omutool vlan_for_om VLAN ID command to add a VLAN for
interconnecting the OMU and the M2000 based on the network plan.
8. Run the ./omutool vlan_for_vnp VLAN ID command to add a VLAN for
interconnecting the OMU and the VNP based on the network plan.
NOTE
The VLAN ID ranges from 2 to 4094. The VLAN ID in Step 7 and Step 8 cannot be set to the same
value.
9. Run the ./omutool vnpvip IP Address Mask command (for example, ./omutool
vnpvip 10.144.188.101 255.255.255.255) to set the local IP address and mask of the
BSC.
10. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud start command and press Enter to start the omud process.
11. (Optional) If an active and a standby OMUs are configured, perform the steps from
Step 4 to Step 10 repeatedly on the standby OMU. Set the VLAN ID to the same
value.
GBSS
Navigation
683
12. Store related configuration information in Records of OMU Software Installation
Information.
communicating with the VNP. The VLAN remains unchanged.)
on the peer VNP.
NOTE
(On).
vnpvip 10.144.188.101 255.255.255.255) to set the local IP address and mask of the
BSC.
Step 4 to Step 8 repeatedly on the standby OMU. Set the VLAN ID to the same value.
Information.
communicating with the VNP. The VLAN has changed.)
on the peer VNP.
NOTE
(On).
GBSS
Navigation
684
7. Run the ./omutool vlan_for_om VLAN ID command to modify the VLAN for
interconnecting the OMU and the M2000 based on the network plan.
8. Run the ./omutool vlan_for_vnp VLAN ID command to modify the VLAN for
interconnecting the OMU and the VNP based on the network plan.
NOTE
The VLAN ID ranges from 2 to 4094. The VLAN ID in Step 7 and Step 8 cannot be set to the same
value.
vnpvip 10.144.188.101 255.255.255.255) to modify the local IP address and mask of
the BSC.
Step 4 to Step 10 repeatedly on the standby OMU. Set the VLAN ID to the same
value.
Information.
1. Use an MS to process call services and trace IP packets at the BSS.
2. Check the IP packet information.
Expected result: The IP packets contain complete information collected at the BSS
and the reported events comply with protocols.
NOTE
The IP packet information consists of the events reported by the MS, including Cipher Mode
Complete, Clear Command, Handover Command, Handover Complete, Measurement Result
Small, and MS Identity Established. Where, events Cipher Mode Complete, Clear Command,
and Measurement Result Small are always reported for an ordinary call. When inter-BSC call
handover occurs, events Handover Command, Handover Complete, and MS Identity
Established will also be reported besides the preceding events.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GVNPLOCALIP to query on the OMU the
IP addresses used for connecting to the VNP.
l Deactivation Procedure (Using the external virtual IP address of the OMU for
communicating with the VNP)
Switch to OFF(Off).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GVNPADDR and specify VNP IP
Address to remove the IP address of the VNP.
l Deactivation Procedure (Using the local IP address of the BSC for communicating with
the VNP)
Switch to OFF(Off).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GVNPADDR and specify VNP IP
Address to remove the IP address of the VNP.
GBSS
Navigation
685
6. Run the ./omutool delvnpvip command to remove the local IP address of the BSC.
7. Run the ./omutool delvlan VLAN ID command to remove the VLAN that is used for
interconnecting the OMU and the M2000.
8. Run the ./omutool delvlan VLAN ID command to remove the VLAN that is used for
interconnecting the OMU and the VNP.
Information.
----End
GBSS
Navigation
686
228 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic
Power Sharing (GSM)
Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM).
Prerequisites
Only MRRU and MRFU support it, because this feature is only used for the scenario
of GU sharing PA, this is to say, GSM and UMTS are transmitted in the same one RF
channel simultaneously, so this feature is only for test before MSR standard is released.
This feature can't be activated with WRFD-010684 2x2 MIMO or WRFD-010693 DL
64QAM+MIMO simultaneously.
l License
This feature has to be activated with MRFD-211801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power
Sharing(GSM) simultaneously.
Context
In the case of a 3900 series multi-mode base station, the GSM and UMTS TRXs can share one
power amplifier. When there is unbalanced traffic in the GSM and the UMTS, the power can be
used more efficiently in an effective way, namely, sharing the power amplifier. The overall
network quality of the GSM and the UMTS is therefore improved.
GBSS
228 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing
(GSM)
687
NOTE
l The feature may fail to retake the shared power in one second when the GSM services increase suddenly.
As a result, internal GSM peak clipping occurs, which affects service quality.
l Enabling the feature may cause the UMTS coverage to shrink and therefore increase the drop rate. The
problem can be addressed by handing over services in marginal coverage to a GSM/UMTS cell under
the same coverage as the original UMTS.
l The switch and other parameter configurations are performed only on the GSM side. The UMTS side
requires no configuration.
Procedure
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP. In this step, set
Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES) and set the period for
enabling GU power sharing.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set RXU Board
Type to MRRU(MRRU) or MRFU(MRFU), set GU Dynamic Power Sharing
Switch to YES(YES), and set parameters Minimum Number of Non-BCCH TRXs
in GSM for GU Power Sharing, GSM Power Load Threshold for GU Power
Sharing, Number of Checked Timeslots for Retrieving Shared Power, Num of
Timeslots Meet Requirements for Retrieving Shared Pwr, GSM Power Reserve
Coefficient for Retrieving Shared Power, GSM Idle Channel Threshold for GU
Power Sharing, GSM Idle Channel Hysteresis for GU Power Sharing, GSM
Power Reserve in Low Load for GU Power Sharing, GSM Power Reserve in High
Load for GU Power Sharing, Maximum Accumulated Shared Power That UMTS
Can Accept, Maximum Shared Power That UMTS Can Accept In Each Period
to actual conditions.
3. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL, set GU Power Share Flag to
TRUE(TRUE).
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSGUPWRSHRFP and LST
BTSRXUBP and check the returned message.
Exception result: Board Parameter Configuration Enabled and GU Dynamic
Power Sharing Switch are YES.
2. Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL, and check the returned message.
Exception result: GU Power Share Flag is YES.
1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL, set GU Power Share Flag to
FALSE(FALSE).
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP. In this step, set
Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO).
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set GU Dynamic
Power Sharing Switch to NO(NO).
NOTE
GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing can be deactivated by performing either of the two
steps discussed above.
----End
GBSS
(GSM)
688
Example
SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CFGFLAG=YES,
GUPWRSHARESTM1=07&00, GUPWRSHAREETM1=09&00, GUPWRSHARESTM2=10&00,
GUPWRSHAREETM2=12&00, GUPWRSHARESTM3=14&00, GUPWRSHAREETM3=16&00,
GUPWRSHARESTM4=20&00, GUPWRSHAREETM4=22&00;
RXUTYPE=MRFU, GUPWRSHARESWITCH=YES,
GUPWRSHARETRXNUM=1, GUPWRSHAREPWRLOAD=80, GUPWRSHAREN=8, GUPWRSHAREP=6,
GUPWRSHARERSVFACTOR=50, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLETH=12,
GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLEHS=2, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLERSVPWR=5,
GUPWRSHAREGSMBUSYRSVPWR=10, GUPWRSHAREURCVPWR=15, GUPWRSHAREURCVPWRPD=5;
MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=0, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, GUPOWERSHARE=TRUE;
LST BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL;
LST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0,
LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL;
LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=0;
SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CFGFLAG=NO;
RXUTYPE=MRFU, GUPWRSHARESWITCH=NO;
MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=0, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, GUPOWERSHARE=FALSE;
GBSS
(GSM)
689
229 Configuring GSM and UMTS
Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)
GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM). This feature enables the spectrum
resources to be dynamically shared between the GSM and UMTS networks based on their traffic
load, improving frequency utilization.
Prerequisites
The 900 MHz MRFU and RRU3908 must support this feature.
feature depends on the feature MRFD-221802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum
Sharing.
This feature cannot be used together with GBFD-117002 IBCA, GBFD-117001 Flex
MAIO, GBFD-115830 VAMOS, or GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.
l License
l Start Dynamic Spectrum Sharing on the M2000 by referring to GU DSS Management of
the M2000 Online Help.
Context
The dynamic spectrum sharing (DSS) between GSM and UMTS increases network throughput
and reduces the total cost of data services because UMTS has higher spectral efficiency than
GSM. In theory, the maximum throughput gain is about 50%. After this feature is used, the total
cost of ownership (TCO) of mobile broadband (MBB) can be reduced, and dynamic GSM/
UMTS refarming can be implemented. Thus, the maintenance cost of manual refarming is
reduced.
GBSS
229 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum
Sharing(GSM)
690
Procedure
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB with DSS NodeB Flag set
to TRUE.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP to set up a
DSS cell, set DSS Cell Flag to TRUE, and set Maximum TX Power in Small
DSS Coverage and PCPICH TX Power in Small DSS Coverage based on
network conditions.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLACCESSSTRICT with both
Cell barred indicator for SIB3 and Cell barred indicator for SIB4 of DSS
cells set to BARRED.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL to add the
neighbor 3G cells of DSS cells as inter-frequency neighboring cells, and set
Blind Handover Flag to TRUE and DrdOrLdrFlag to TRUE.
e. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL to add the neighboring
GSM cells for DSS cells, and set Blind Handover Flag to TRUE.
f. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL to add the neighboring
DSS cells as intra-frequency neighboring cells.
g. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH with both
DRD switch for single RAB and
HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH set to ON.
h. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD with Load balance DRD switch
for HSDPA set to ON and Load Balancing DRD Choice set to
UserNumber.
i. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLDRD with Load balance
DRD switch for HSDPA set to ON and Load Balancing DRD Choice set to
UserNumber.
j. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL to activate the cell.
2. Configuration on the NodeB side
Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL to add local DSS cells, and set
GUPOWERSHARE to FALSE.
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL to add 3G external
cells.
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to add 3G neighboring
cells.
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GDSSPARA with Spectrum Sharing
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV with Spectrum Sharing
Shutdown Allowed set to YES(Yes).
GBSS
Sharing(GSM)
691
CAUTION
The parameter Spectrum Sharing Shutdown Allowed for all TRXs to be shared
under a base station should be set to YES(Yes) except for the BCCH TRX.
1. Start spectrum sharing on the M2000 manually by referring to GU DSS
Management of the M2000 Online Help.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UNODEB to query the DSS status of a
NodeB.
Expected result: The value of NodeB DSS state is Actived in Normal DSS
coverage.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to query the DSS status of a cell.
Expected result: The value of DSS state is Actived in Normal DSS coverage.
4. Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to check the value of GU Power
Share Flag.
Expected result: The value of GU Power Share Flag is TRUE.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT to query the value of Dynamic
Spectrum Sharing. Expected result: The value of Dynamic Spectrum Sharing is
Yes.
1. Stop Dynamic Spectrum Sharing on the M2000 by referring to GU DSS
Management of the M2000 Online Help.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB with DSS NodeB Flag set to
FALSE.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GDSSPARA with Spectrum Sharing
Allowed set to NO(No).
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV with Spectrum Sharing
Shutdown Allowed set to FALSE.
5. Remove the neighboring cell by referring to Reconfiguration Guide.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL to deactivate a cell.
----End
Example
MOD UNODEB: NodeBId=1, DSSFlag=TRUE;
ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=102, CellName="dss102", PeerIsValid=INVALID,
CnOpGrpIndex=0, BandInd=Band2, UARFCNDownlink=412, PScrambCode=0,
TCell=CHIP256, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, SpgId=1, URANUM=D1,
URA1=0, NodeBName="102", LoCell=102, SupBmc=FALSE, DSSFlag=TRUE,
DSSSmallCovMaxTxPower=431, DSSSmallCovPCPICHPower=331;
MOD UCELLACCESSSTRICT: CellId=102, IdleCellBarred=BARRED,
IdleIntraFreqReselection=ALLOWED, IdleTbarred=D320,
ConnCellBarred=BARRED, ConnIntraFreqReselection=ALLOWED,
ConnTbarred=D320;
ADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=0, CellId=102, NCellRncId=1, NCellId=105,
SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHoFlag=TRUE,
GBSS
Sharing(GSM)
692
NPrioFlag=FALSE, DrdOrLdrFlag=TRUE, InterNCellQualReqFlag=FALSE;
ADD U2GNCELL: RNCId=2, CellId=102, GSMCellIndex=120, BlindHoFlag=TRUE,
NPrioFlag=FALSE;
ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=0, CellId=102, NCellRncId=3, NCellId=121,
SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE;
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH-1,
HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1;
SET UDRD: LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, LdbDRDchoice=UserNumber;
ADD UCELLDRD: CellId=120, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON,
ReDirBandInd=DependOnNCell;
ACT UCELL: CellId=102;
ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=102, STN=1, SECN=0, GUPOWERSHARE=FALSE;
MNC="10", LAC=10, CI=60, RNCID=0, DF=412, SCRAMBLE=0, DIVERSITY=NO,
UTRANCELLTYPE=TDD, SYNCCASE=SyncCase1;
SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=102, DSSENABLE=YES;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1002, DSSTRXOFFLINE=YES;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1003, DSSTRXOFFLINE=YES;
MOD UNODEB: NodeBId=1, DSSFlag=FALSE;
SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=102, DSSENABLE=NO;
HO UCELL: CellId=102, CellChoice=ALLCELL;
DEA UCELL: CellId=102;
RMV UNRELATION: RNCId=0, CellId=102,
NCellType=IntraFreqNCell&InterFreqNCell&InterRatNCell;
GBSS
Sharing(GSM)
693
230 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode
Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS)
About This Chapter
IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS).
230.1 Configuring IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature IP-Based GSM
and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.
230.2 Configuring IP-Based GSM and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side
and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.
GBSS
230 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on
BS side (GBTS)
694
230.1 Configuring IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-
Transmission on Base Station Side
and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.
Prerequisites
A GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station supports this feature.
A UTRP board needs to be added when co-transmission is implemented on a GE port.
A UTRP9 board needs to be added when co-transmission is implemented on a GE
electrical port.
A UTRP2 board needs to be added when co-transmission is implemented on a GE
optical port.
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP
GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1
WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface
l License
Context
The feature requires a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station to connect the FE port on the
GTMU and one FE port on the WMPT together and to share transmission ports on the UMTS
side and the transmission network, therefore sharing transmission resources.
NOTE
In the scenario of GSM and UMTS co-transmission, it is recommended transmission resource sharing is
achieved by connecting FE ports.
Co-transmission modes can be IP over FE/GE and IP over E1/T1, as shown in Figure 230-1,
Figure 230-2, and Figure 230-3.
Figure 230-1 IP-over-FE GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side
GBSS
BS side (GBTS)
695

Figure 230-2 IP-over-E1/T1 GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side

Figure 230-3 IP-over-GE GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side

IP PLAN
Table 230-1 IP Planning of connecting between BTS and BSC
Parameter Example
BSC IP 17.0.0.17
IP of FE interface on BTS 199.2.2.1
IP of BTS route 199.2.2.3
IP of BSC route 17.0.0.13

Table 230-2 IP Planning of connecting between NodeB and RNC (IP over FE/GE)
Parameter Example
IP of FE interface on NodeB 199.2.2.2
IP of BSC 17.0.0.17
GBSS
BS side (GBTS)
696
Parameter Example
IP of NodeB route 70.20.3.51
communication IP of IUB interface 70.20.3.50
IP of BTS route 199.2.2.3
IP of RNC route 17.0.0.13
DHCP Server IP 17.0.0.17

Table 230-3 IP planning of connection between NodeB and RNC (IP over E1/T1)
Parameter Example
IP of FE interface on NodeB 199.2.2.2
IP of NodeB MP GROUP 70.83.26.1
IP of RNC route 17.0.0.13
IP of NodeB route 70.83.26.10
DHCP Server IP 17.0.0.17

Procedure
l Procedure for Activating the BTS Data
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSESN to add the ESN of the GBTS.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP to set the IP address of the GBTS.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSDEVIP to add an IP address to the FE
interconnection port on the BTS side. In this step, set Physical IP to the IP address of
the FE interconnection port on the BTS side.
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPRT to add an IP route from the BTS
to the BSC6900.
Set Destination IP Address to the gateway IP address of the BSC6900.
Set Route Type to NEXTHOP(IP Address of The Next Hop).
Set Forward Route Address to the IP address of the port connected to the network
on the GBTS side.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the
BSC6900 to the GBTS.
Set Destination IP Address to the gateway IP address of FE interconnection port
on the GBTS side.
Set Next Hop IP Address to the IP of BSC6900 gateway.
l Activating the NodeB data (IP over FE/GE)
1. Optional: If the planned data is inconsistent with the default data in the database, run
the NodeB MML command SET ETHPORT to set parameters for an Ethernet port.
GBSS
BS side (GBTS)
697
2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address. In this step,
set IP Address to the IP address of FE interconnection port on the NodeB side.
set IP Address to an IP address in the network segment of BTS.
4. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the
NodeB to BSC6900 in case of layer 3 networking.
Set Next Hop IP Address to the gateway IP address of the NodeB.
5. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link.
Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the numbers of the cabinet,
subrack, and slot that house the Iub interface board.
Set Local IP Address to the device IP address in step 3.
Set Peer IP Address to the IP address of the port on the BSC6900 side.
Run the BSC6900 MML command LST SCTPSRVPORT to query the value of
Peer SCTP Port.
6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, set
NCP/CCP Port Type to CCP.
7. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, set
NCP/CCP Port Type to NCP.
NOTE
CCP Port No. must be set to the same value as that on the BSC6900 side. Run the BSC6900 MML
command LST UIUBCP to query the information about the CCP link.
8. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path to the adjacent
node.
Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the number of the cabinet, subrack,
and slot that house the Iub interface board.
Set Rx Bandwidth and Tx Bandwidth to the same values as Rx Bandwidth and
Tx Bandwidth of the corresponding IP path on the BSC6900 side.
9. Run the NodeB MML command SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH to enable the DHCP
relay function of the base station. In this step, set Enable Switch to ENABLE.
10. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DHCPSVRIP to add an IP address for a DHCP
server. In this step, set DHCP Server IP Address to the IP address of the BSC6900
DHCP Server. This DHCP server is shared between the NodeB and the BSC6900.
l Activating the NodeB data (IP over E1/T1)
1. Optional: If the planned data is inconsistent with the default data in the database, run
the NodeB MML command SET ETHPORT to set parameters for an Ethernet port.
set IP Address to the IP address of FE interconnection port on the NodeB side.
3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD MPGRP to add an MP group (This operation
is performed when E1/T1 transmission is used on the base station side).
4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD MPLNK to add an MP link to the MP group
when E1/T1 transmission is used on the base station side.
GBSS
BS side (GBTS)
698
NOTE
l When the base station uses the E1/T1 transmission mode, the upper-layer link can be configured
as a PPPLNK or in an MP group. The MP group is recommended because it provides greater
bandwidth than the PPPLNK group.
l A maximum of eight MP links can be configured for the UTRP board, and a maximum of four
MP links are configured for the WMPT board. If the transmission requirement is not met, another
WMPT or UTRP board can be added.
5. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the
NodeB to BSC6900 in case of layer 3 networking.
Set Next Hop IP Address to the gateway IP address of the NodeB.
6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link.
Set Local IP Address to the device IP address in step 3.
Set Peer IP Address to the IP address of the port on the BSC6900 side.
Run the BSC6900 MML command LST SCTPSRVPORT to query the value of
Peer SCTP Port.
NCP/CCP Port Type to CCP.
NCP/CCP Port Type to NCP.
NOTE
CCP Port No. must be set to the same value as that on the BSC6900 side. Run the BSC6900 MML
command LST UIUBCP to query the information about the CCP link.
9. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path to the adjacent
node.
Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the number of the cabinet, subrack,
and slot that house the Iub interface board.
Set Rx Bandwidth and Tx Bandwidth to the same values as Rx Bandwidth and
Tx Bandwidth of the corresponding IP path on the BSC6900 side.
10. Run the NodeB MML command SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH to enable the DHCP
relay function of the base station. In this step, set Enable Switch to ENABLE.
11. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DHCPSVRIP to add an IP address for a DHCP
server. In this step, set DHCP Server IP Address to the IP address of the BSC6900
DHCP Server. This DHCP server is shared between the NodeB and the BSC6900.
----End
Example
//Activating the GBTS data
//Add the ESN of the BTS
ADD BTSESN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2000, MAINDEVTAB="020GKV1083000212";
//Setting the BTS IP address
SET BTSIP:BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="17.0.0.17", BTSIP="199.2.2.1",
BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=SINGLEHOST, CFGFLAG=NULL;
//Setting the IP address of the FE interconnection port on the BTS side
ADD BTSDEVIP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2000, PN=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6,
IP="199.2.2.1", MASK="255.255.255.0";
GBSS
BS side (GBTS)
699
//Adding an IP route from the BTS to the BSC6900
ADD BTSIPRT:RTIDX=0, BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, PRI=60, DSTIP="17.0.0.10",
DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="199.2.2.3";
//Adding an IP route from the BSC6900 to the BTS(If the IP route has been
added, skip this step):
ADD IPRT:DSTIP="199.2.2.3", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255",
NEXTHOP="17.0.0.10", SRN=0, SN=17, REMARK="0", PRIORITY=HIGH;
//NodeB IP over FE/GE
//Adding an IP address for the FE interconnection port on the NodeB side
ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=1, IP="199.2.2.2",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="70.20.3.50",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
//Adding an IP route from the NodeB to the RNC
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="17.0.0.17",
DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="70.20.3.51", PREF=80;
//Adding an SCTP signaling link
ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.20.3.50",
LOCPORT=1024, PEERIP="17.0.0.17", PEERPORT=58080;
//Adding an NCP link
ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=0;
//Adding a UCP link
ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=1;
//Adding an IP path to the adjacent node
ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH,
JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.20.3.50", PEERIP="17.0.0.17", DSCP=46,
RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000,
FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;
//Enabling the DHCP relay function of the base station
SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH: ES=ENABLE;
ADD DHCPSVRIP: DHCPSVRIP="17.0.0.17";
//Activating the NodeB data (IP over E1/T1)
//Adding an IP address for the FE interconnection port on the NodeB side
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=MPGRP, PN=1,
IP="199.2.2.2", MASK="255.255.255.0";
//Adding an MP group
ADD MPGRP: SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, MPGRPN=0, AUTH=NONAUTH,
LOCALIP="70.83.26.1", IPMASK="255.0.0.0", PEERIP="70.83.26.10",
MCPPP=DISABLE;
//Adding an MP link and then adding it to the MP group
ADD MPLNK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PPPLNKN=0, E1T1SN=0,
E1T1SBT=E1_COVERBOARD, E1T1PN=0,
TSN=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&T
S12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22
-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;
//Adding an IP route from the NodeB to the RNC
DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", RTTYPE=IF, IFT=MPGRP;
GBSS
BS side (GBTS)
700
//Adding an SCTP signaling link
//Adding an NCP link
ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=0;
//Adding a UCP link
ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=1;
//Adding an IP path to the adjacent node
//Enabling the DHCP relay function of the base station
SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH: ES=ENABLE;
ADD DHCPSVRIP: DHCPSVRIP="17.0.0.17";
230.2 Configuring IP-Based GSM and LTE Co-Transmission
on Base Station Side
and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.
Prerequisites
A GSM and LTE dual-mode base station whose GSM and LTE modes share the BBU
supports this feature.
A UTRP needs to be added at the eNodeB to support IP over E1/T1.
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1
MRFD-211601 2G/3G Common Reference Clock (GBTS)
MRFD-211501 IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side
(GBTS)
l License
GBSS
BS side (GBTS)
701
Context
The feature IP-Based GSM and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side requires a GSM
and LTE dual-mode base station to connect the FE port on the GTMU and one FE port on the
LMPT together and to share transmission ports on the LTE side and the transmission network,
therefore sharing transmission resources.
NOTE
In the scenario of GSM and LTE co-transmission, transmission resource sharing is recommended be
achieved by connecting FE ports together.
Co-transmission modes can be IP over FE/GE and IP over E1/T1, as shown in Figure 230-4 and
Figure 230-5 respectively.
Figure 230-4 IP-over-FE/GE GSM and LTE co-transmission on base station side

Figure 230-5 IP-over-E1/T1 GSM and LTE co-transmission on base station side

Procedure
l Activating the GBTS data
1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSESN to add the ESN of the GBTS. In
this step, set BTS Index Type and BTS Interface Board Bar Code 1.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP to set the IP address of the GBTS.
3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSDEVIP to set the IP address of FE
interconnection port on the GBTS side. In this step, set Physical IP to the IP address
of FE interconnection port on the GBTS side.
GBSS
BS side (GBTS)
702
4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSETHPORT to set Rate and Duplex
Mode of the FE interconnection port on the GBTS side.
5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPRT to add an IP route from the BTS
to the BSC6900.
Set Forward Route Address to the IP address of the GBTS port connected to the
IP network, that is, the IP address of the LMPT port connected to the GTMU.
6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from BSC6900 to
the GBTS.
Set Destination IP Address to the IP address of FE interconnection port on the
GBTS side.
Set Forward Route Address to the gateway IP address of the BSC.
l Activating the eNodeB data (IP over FE/GE)
1. Run the eNodeB MML command SET ETHPORT to set parameters for the LMPT
port connected to the GTMU.
NOTE
When the GTMU is connected to the LMPT, the LMPT must be configured to work in 100M/
FULL mode.
2. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP. set the IP
Address to the IP of FE interface on eNodeB.
3. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to set the IP address of the main
control board on the eNodeB side.
Set IP Address to the IP address of the S1 interface on the eNodeB side.
Set Port Type to ETH(Ethernet Port).
Set Port No. based on the actual situation.
4. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the eNodeB to
the MME.
Set Destination IP to the destination IP address of the route.
Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD(Base Board).
Set Route Type to NEXTHOP(IP Address of The Next Hop).
Next Hop IP Address must be on the same network segment as the IP address of
the eNodeB.
the SGW.
6. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD RSCGRP to set transmission resource group.
7. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path between the
eNodeB and the SGW.
Set Join Logical Port to YES.
Set PATH Type to ANY.
8. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add a signaling link between
the eNodeB and the MME.
9. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD S1INTERFACE to add an S1 interface.
l Activating the eNodeB data (IP over E1/T1)
GBSS
BS side (GBTS)
703
1. Run the eNodeB MML command SET ETHPORT to set parameters for the LMPT
port connected to the GTMU.
NOTE
When the GTMU is connected to the LMPT, the LMPT must be configured to work in 100M/
FULL mode.
2. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD MPGRP to add an MP group.
3. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD MPLNK to add an MP link and then add it
to the MP group.
4. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP. set the IP
Address to the IP of FE interface on eNodeB.
the MME.
Set Destination IP Address to the destination IP address of the route.
Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD(Base Board).
Set Route Type to IF(Exit Interface).
the SGW.
7. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD RSCGRP to set transmission resource group.
8. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path between the
eNodeB and the SGW.
Set Join Logical Port to YES.
Set PATH Type to ANY.
9. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add a signaling link between
the eNodeB and the MME.
10. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD S1INTERFACE to add an S1 interface.
----End
Example
//Activating the GBTS data
//Adding the ESN of the GBTS
ADD BTSESN:BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, MAINDEVTAB="020GKV1083000212";
//Setting the IP address of the GBTS
SET BTSIP:BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="17.0.0.17", BTSIP="199.2.2.11",
BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=SINGLEHOST, CFGFLAG=NULL;
//Setting the IP address of the FE interconnection port on the GBTS side
ADD BTSDEVIP:SRN=0, SN=6, IP="199.2.2.1", MASK="255.255.255.0";
//Setting the rate and duplex mode of the FE interconnection port on the
GBTS side
SET BTSETHPORT:PN=0, BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6,
RATE=100M, DUPLEX=FULL, MTU=1500, FC=CLOSE;
//Adding an IP route from the GBTS to the BSC6900
ADD BTSIPRT:RTIDX=0, BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, PRI=60, DSTIP="17.0.0.0",
DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="199.2.2.3";
//Adding an IP route from the BSC6900 to the GBTS (If the route has been
added, ignore this step.)
ADD IPRT:DSTIP="199.2.2.11", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0",
NEXTHOP="17.0.0.13", SRN=0, SN=17, REMARK="0", PRIORITY=HIGH;
//Activating the eNodeB data (IP over GE/FE)
//Setting parameters for the LMPT port connected to the GTMU
SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, MTU=1500, SPEED=100M,
GBSS
BS side (GBTS)
704
DUPLEX=FULL, FC=OPEN;
//Setting the IP address of the FE interconnection port on the eBodeB
side
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="199.2.2.10",
MASK="255.0.0.0";
//Adding an IP address for the eNodeB
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="70.83.26.1",
MASK="255.0.0.0";
//Adding an IP route from the eNodeB to the MME
//Adding an IP route from the eNodeB to the SGW
//Set transmission resource group
ADD RSCGRP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, BEAR=IP, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=0,
RSCGRPID=0, RU=KBPS, TXBW=150000, RXBW=200000, TXCBS=200000,
TXEBS=200000;
//Adding an IP path between the eNodeB and the SGW
ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, SN=7, JNLGCPORT=YES, LPN=0, LOCALIP="70.83.26.1",
PEERIP="138.30.20.20", QT=HQ, PATHTYPE=ANY;
//Add a signaling link between the eNodeB and the MME
ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.83.26.1", LOCPORT=2907,
PEERIP="138.20.5.60", PEERPORT=2910, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;
//Adding an S1 interface
ADD S1INTERFACE: S1INTERFACEID=0, S1SCTPLINKID=0, CnOperatorId=0;
//Activating the eNodeB data (IP over E1/T1)
//Setting parameters for the LMPT port connected to the GTMU
SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, MTU=1500, SPEED=100M,
DUPLEX=FULL, FC=OPEN;
//Adding an MP group
ADD MPGRP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, MPGRPN=0, MCPPP=DISABLE, AUTHTYPE=NOAUTH,
LOCALIP="70.83.26.1", MASK="255.0.0.0", PPPMUX=DISABLE;
//Adding an MP link and then adding it to the MP group
ADD MPLNK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PPPLNKN=0, E1T1SN=0, E1T1PN=0,
&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;
//Setting the IP address of the FE interconnection port on the eBodeB
side
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=MP, PN=0, IP="199.2.2.10",
MASK="255.0.0.0";
//Adding an IP route from the eNodeB to the MME
//Adding an IP route from the eNodeB to the SGW
//Set transmission resource group
ADD RSCGRP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, BEAR=IP, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=MPGRP, PN=0,
RSCGRPID=0, RU=KBPS, TXBW=150000, RXBW=200000, TXCBS=200000,
TXEBS=200000;
//Adding an IP path between the eNodeB and the SGW
ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, SN=7, JNLGCPORT=YES, LPN=0, LOCALIP="70.83.26.1",
PEERIP="138.30.20.20", QT=HQ, PATHTYPE=ANY;
//Adding a signaling link between the eNodeB and the MME
ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.83.26.1", LOCPORT=2907,
PEERIP="138.20.5.60", PEERPORT=2910, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;
//Adding an S1 interface
ADD S1INTERFACE: S1INTERFACEID=0, S1SCTPLINKID=0, CnOperatorId=0;
GBSS
BS side (GBTS)
705
231 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-
mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side
(GBTS)
TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side(GBTS).
Prerequisites
A GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station supports this feature.
When the TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission feature is supported by a
GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station, a UTRP should be configured for the BTS.
The UTRP type must be UTRP3, UTRP4, or UTRPb4.
WRFD-050302 Fractional ATM Function on Iub Interface or WRFD-050411 Fractional
IP Function on Iub Interface
l License
Context
This feature enables the BTS and NodeB to share E1/T1 transmission resources through a
backplane clock channel with the effective TDM timeslot cross connection function.
Backplane-based co-transmission is classified into the following scenarios:
l In the scenario of GTMU-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission, E1/T1
timeslots on the UMTS side are transmitted to the GTMU through the backplane TOP
channel on the WMPT. E1/T1 ports on the GTMU are connected to the transmission
network. The TDM timeslot cross connection function enables GSM data and UMTS data
to be multiplexed on the transmission network. Therefore, E1/T1 transmission resources
are shared by the GSM and UMTS modes by timeslot, as shown in Figure 231-1.
GBSS
231 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission
via Backplane on BS side (GBTS)
706
Figure 231-1 GTMU-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission

l In the scenario of GSM-UTRP-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission, a
UTRP is configured on the GSM side. Therefore, extra E1/T1 resources can be shared by
the UMTS mode through the backplane TOP channel to extend E1/T1 transmission
resources for the UMTS mode, as shown in Figure 231-2.
NOTE
l The number of E1/T1 on the BTS backplane is within the range of 16 through 19. E1/T1 numbers 16 through
19 on the BTS backplane correspond to E1/T1 numbers 0 through 3 on the NodeB backplane. Cross
connection is not supported. For example, E1/T1 No. 16 on the BTS backplane only corresponds to E1/T1
No. 0 on the NodeB backplane.
l E1 timeslot numbers configured on the BTS side must be consistent with those configured on the NodeB
side.
Figure 231-2 GSM-UTRP-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission

Procedure
l Activating the BTS data (GTMU-based)
between a GTMU port and the NodeB. Set Dest Node Type to OTHER.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTOPCONFIG to configure the TOP
switching parameters.
GBSS
707
Set Port Subrack No. and Port Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot where
the BTS port connected to the NodeB interface board is located. Set TOP Board
Subrack No. and TOP Board Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot where
the NodeB interface board is located.
Set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT.
Set TS Mask to the timeslot of the NodeB backplane.
NOTE
When E1 transmission resources on the BTS side are shared by the NodeB, set Port Type to
TOPEXTOUTPORT.
l Activating the NodeB data (GTMU-based)
1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD BACKE1T1 to add a backplane E1/T1 link.
Set Subrack No. and Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot that house the
Iub interface board.
Set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD.
Set Destination Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the GTMU.
NOTE
Similar to a common E1, the backplane E1 can be configured with the upper-layer bearer. It,
however, does not support the configuration of the operating work mode and loopback mode, and
online and offline tests. The upper-layer link bearer of the backplane E1 can be UNILNK/IMALNK/
FRAATMLNK/PPLNK/MPLNK. You need to configure the link bearer according to actual
networking mode.
2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMAGRP to add an IMA group. In this step,
set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.
3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMALNK to add an IMA link and then add it
to the MP group. In this step, set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD or
BASE_BOARD.
4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SAALLNK to add an SAAL link.
Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.
Set Rate Unit to KBPS or CELL/S. Only one rate unit can be used. Therefore,
rate units in other configuration must be consistent.
5. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2NODE to add an AAL2 node.
Set Node Type to LOCAL(LOCAL).
Set ATM Address to a valid ATM address. The recommended value is
H'3900000000000000000000000000000000000000.
6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add an AAL2 path.
Set Node Type to LOCAL(End Node).
Port Type to NCP(NCP Port).
Port Type to CCP(CCP Port).
GBSS
708
NOTE
Before a CCP link is added, the number of the CCP port must be the same as that of the CCP port
on the BSC6900 side. To query information about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side, run the
BSC6900 MML command LST UIUBCP.
l Activating the BTS data (GSM-UTRP-based)
between a UTRP port and the NodeB. Set Dest Node Type to OTHER.
2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTOPCONFIG to configure the TOP
switching parameters.
Set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT.
Set TS Mask to the timeslot of the NodeB backplane.
NOTE
When E1 transmission resources on the BTS side are shared by the NodeB, set Port Type to
TOPEXTOUTPORT.
l Activating the NodeB data (GSM-UTRP-based)
1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD BACKE1T1 to add a backplane E1/T1 link.
Set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD.
Set Destination Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the UTRP.
NOTE
Similar to a common E1, the backplane E1 can be configured with the upper-layer bearer. It,
however, does not support the configuration of the operating work mode and loopback mode, and
online and offline tests. The upper-layer link bearer of the backplane E1 can be UNILNK/IMALNK/
FRAATMLNK/PPLNK/MPLNK. You need to configure the link bearer according to actual
networking mode.
2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMAGRP to add an IMA group. In this step,
set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.
3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMALNK to add an IMA link and then add it
to the MP group. In this step, set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD or
BASE_BOARD.
4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SAALLNK to add an SAAL link.
5. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2NODE to add an AAL2 node.
Set Node Type to LOCAL(LOCAL).
Set ATM Address to a valid ATM address. The recommended value is
H'3900000000000000000000000000000000000000.
6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add an AAL2 path.
Set Node Type to LOCAL(End Node).
GBSS
709
Port Type to NCP.
Port Type to CCP.
NOTE
Before a CCP link is added, the number of the CCP port must be the same as that of the CCP port
on the BSC6900 side. To query information about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side, run the
BSC6900 MML command LST UIUBCP.
----End
Example
//Activating the BTS data (GTMU-based)
//Configuring a connection between a GTMU port and the NodeB
DESTNODE=OTHER;
//Configuring the TOP switching relation between the GTMU and the WMPT:
E1 port 16 on the backplane corresponds to port 0 on the WMPT, the GTMU
provides the WMPT with a transmission path, the port type is TOPEXTINPO,
and the output port is E1 port 1 on the GTMU
ADD BTSTOPCONFIG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6,
E1T1PORTNO=16, TOPBOARDCN=0, TOPBOARDSRN=0, TOPBOARDSLOTNO=7,
PORTTYPE=TOPEXTOUTPORT, ORIPORT=1,
//Activating the NodeB data (GTMU-based)
//Adding a backplane E1/T1 link
ADD BACKE1T1: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, DSTSN=6;
//Adding an IMA group
ADD IMAGRP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD;
//Adding an IMA link
ADD IMALNK: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, IMAGRPSBT=BASE_BOARD;
//Adding three SAAL links
ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=4, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA,
JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=0, VCI=32, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=1024;
//Adding an AAL2 node
ADD AAL2NODE: NT=LOCAL, LN=4,
ADDR="H'3900000000000000000000000000000000001980";
//Adding an AAL2 path
ADD AAL2PATH: NT=LOCAL, PATHID=23, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD,
PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=4, VCI=36, RU=KBPS, ST=RTVBR, PCR=1024,
SCR=512, RCR=512;
//Adding an NCP or CCP link
ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=5;
ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=6;
//Activating the BTS data (GSM-UTRP-based)
//Configuring a connection between a UTRP port and the NodeB
DESTNODE=OTHER;
//Configuring the TOP switching relation between the UTRP and the WMPT:
E1 port 16 on the backplane corresponds to port 0 on the WMPT, the UTRP
provides the WMPT with a transmission path, the port type is TOPEXTINPO,
and the output port is E1 port 1 on the UTRP
GBSS
710
ADD BTSTOPCONFIG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0,
E1T1PORTNO=16, TOPBOARDCN=0, TOPBOARDSRN=0, TOPBOARDSLOTNO=7,
PORTTYPE=TOPEXTOUTPORT, ORIPORT=1,
Activating the NodeB data (GSM-UTRP-based)
//Adding a backplane E1/T1 link
ADD BACKE1T1: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, DSTSN=0;
//Adding an IMA group
ADD IMAGRP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD;
//Adding an IMA link
ADD IMALNK: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, IMAGRPSBT=BASE_BOARD;
//Adding three SAAL links
//Adding an AAL2 node
ADD AAL2NODE: NT=LOCAL, LN=4,
ADDR="H'3900000000000000000000000000000000001980";
//Adding an AAL2 path
ADD AAL2PATH: NT=LOCAL, PATHID=23, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD,
PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=4, VCI=36, RU=KBPS, ST=RTVBR, PCR=1024,
SCR=512, RCR=512;
//Adding an NCP or CCP link
ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=5;
ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=6;
GBSS
711
232 Configuring Multi-Mode BS
Common Reference Clock (GBTS)
About This Chapter
Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS).
232.1 Configuring GSM and UMTS Common Reference Clock
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GSM and
UMTS Common Reference Clock.
232.2 Configuring GSM and LTE Common Reference Clock
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GSM and LTE
Common Reference Clock.
GBSS
232 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock
(GBTS)
712
232.1 Configuring GSM and UMTS Common Reference
Clock
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GSM and
UMTS Common Reference Clock.
Prerequisites
The GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station whose GSM and UMTS modes share the
BBU supports this feature.
If GPS or BITS clock signals are shared, the USCU board must be configured on the
BBU.
MRFD-210501 BTS/NodeB Clock
WRFD-050502 Synchronous Ethernet
WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface
WRFD-050501 Clock Sync on Ethernet in NodeB
l License
This feature has to be activated with MRFD-221601 Multi-mode BS Common
Reference Clock (NodeB) simultaneously.
Context
The feature GSM and UMTS common reference clock enables the GSM and UMTS modes to
share the same clock source. Therefore, an external clock source must be configured for one
mode while the other mode is configured to share the opposite mode's clock source.
Scenarios of this feature are as follows:
l Common GPS reference clock
Common GPS reference clock on the GSM side (GSM USCU)
Common GPS reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS USCU)
l Common BITS reference clock
Common BITS reference clock on the GSM side (GSM USCU)
Common BITS reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS USCU)
l Common E1/T1 reference clock
Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)
Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)
GBSS
(GBTS)
713
Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS UTRP) (non-typical
scenario)
l Common Ethernet reference clock
Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)
Common Ethernet reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) (non-typical scenario)
Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS UTRP) (non-typical
scenario)
l Common IP reference clock
Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)
Common IP reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) (non-typical scenario)
Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS UTRP) (non-typical scenario)
NOTE
For non-typical scenarios, further descriptions are not provided.
Common GPS reference clock
When a USCU and an external GPS clock are configured for a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base
station, GPS clock signals are transmitted through a GPS clock interface. The GSM and UMTS
modes obtain the GPS clock signals through a backplane clock channel, as shown in Figure
232-1.
Figure 232-1 Common GPS reference clock

Common BITS reference clock
When a USCU and an external BITS clock are configured for a GSM and UMTS dual-mode
base station, BITS clock signals are transmitted through a BITS clock interface. The GSM and
UMTS modes obtain the BITS clock signals through a backplane clock channel, as shown in
Figure 232-2.
GBSS
(GBTS)
714
Figure 232-2 Common BITS reference clock

Common E1/T1 reference clock
When a common E1/T1 reference clock is used on a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station,
clock signals can be obtained from the E1/T1 port on the side of one mode while the other mode
is configured to share the opposite mode's clock source. Followings are examples of common
E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) and common E1/T1 reference clock on the
UMTS side (WMPT), as shown in Figure 232-3 and Figure 232-4.
Figure 232-3 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)

Figure 232-4 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)

Common Ethernet reference clock
GBSS
(GBTS)
715
When a common Ethernet reference clock is used on a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station,
one mode obtains Ethernet clock signals from the transmission network through a FE
transmission link while the other mode is configured to share the opposite mode's clock source.
Following is an example of common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT), as
shown in Figure 232-5.
Figure 232-5 Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)

Common IP reference clock
When the IEEE1588 clock is used on a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station, the common
IP reference clock is shared by two modes. Only one mode needs to be configured with an
IEEE1588 client, and then clock signals can be obtained from the IEEE1588 server by connecting
a FE transmission link to the transmission network. The other mode should be configured to
share the opposite mode's clock source. Following is an example of common IP reference clock
on the UMTS side (WMPT), as shown in Figure 232-6.
Figure 232-6 Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)

Procedure
1. Configuration on the GBTS side
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSUSCUBP to set the parameters of
a USCU board.
GBSS
(GBTS)
716
Set GPS Work Mode to GPS(GPS).
Set Antenna Power Supply Switch to NOPOWER(No Power).
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set Clock Type to
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA to set BTS clock
parameters based on the actual situation.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SAV BTSCLKPARA to save BTS clock
parameters.
a. Run the NodeB MML command ADD GPS to add a GPS clock link.
b. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of
the reference clock source.
Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).
Set Selected Clock Source to GPS(GPS Clock).
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set an external clock
source. In this step, set Clock Type to EXTSYN_CLK(External Sync clock).
a. Run the NodeB MML command ADD BITS to add a BITS clock link.
Set Selected Clock Source to BITS(BITS Clock).
l Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the BTS to track the clock
signals received from the BSC6900. In this step, set Clock Type to TRCBSC_CLK
(Trace BSC Clock).
NOTE
Before configuring on the NodeB side, ensure that the clock source on the GBTS side is E1/
T1 clock link.
a. Run the NodeB MML command ADD PEERCLK to add a peer reference clock
link.
Set Selected Clock Source to PEERCLK(Peer Clock).
l Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)
GBSS
(GBTS)
717
NOTE
Before configuring the LINE clock source, ensure that an E1/T1 clock link is available.
a. Run the NodeB MML command ADD LINECLK to configure the E1/T1 clock
source. In this step, set Port Type to E1T1(E1T1).
Set Selected Clock Source to LINECLK(Line Clock).
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to configure the PEER clock
source. In this step, set Clock Type to PEER(PEER Clock).
l Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side
a. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SYNCETH to add a synchronous-
Ethernet clock link.
Set Selected Clock Source to SYNCETH(SyncEth Clock).
source. In this step, set Clock Type to PEER_CLK(Peer Clock).
l Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side
a. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPCLKLINK to add an IP clock link.
Set Selected Clock Source to IPCLK(IP Clock).
1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT and the BSC6900 MML command
LST BTSCLK. Check the results.
If... Then...
The clock source information matches
the configuration.
The configuration succeeds.
The clock source information
mismatches the configuration.
The configuration fails.

GBSS
(GBTS)
718
2. Check whether any alarm is generated.
If... Then...
The clock conflict alarm is generated. The configurations on the GSM and
UMTS sides conflict with each other.
Therefore, the configuration fails.

----End
Example
//Common GPS reference clock
//Configuration on the GBTS side
SET BTSUSCUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, SRN=0, SN=1, CFGFLAG=YES,
GPSORGLONASS=GPS, ANTENNAPOWERSWITCH=NOPOWER;
SET BTSCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, SRN=0, SN=6, CLKMOD=GPSCLK,
TRCRNGLMT=ENABLE, CALVAL=2222;
SAV BTSCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120;
//Configuration on the NodeB side
ADD GPS: GN=0,SN=4;
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;
//Common BITS reference clock
ADD BITS: SN=4;
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS;
//Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GBTS side (GTMU)
ADD PEERCLK:;
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PEERCLK;
//Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)
ADD LINECLK: SN=6, PT=E1T1, PN=0;
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=LINE;
SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=PEER_CLK;
//Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side
ADD SYNCETH: SN=7, PN=0;
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=SYNCETH;
//Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side
ADD IPCLKLINK: ICPT=PTP, SN=7, CNM=UNICAST, CIP="82.0.1.107",
SIP="82.0.1.128";
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK;
GBSS
(GBTS)
719
232.2 Configuring GSM and LTE Common Reference Clock
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GSM and LTE
Common Reference Clock.
Prerequisites
The GSM and LTE dual-mode base station whose GSM and LTE modes share the BBU
supports this feature.
If GPS or BITS clock signals are shared, the USCU board must be configured on the
BBU.
The 1588V2 reference clock must be configured IP Clock Server.
GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization
LOFD-00301301 Synchronization with Ethernet (ITU-T G.8261)
LOFD-00301302 IEEE1588 V2 Clock Synchronization
l License
This feature has to be activated with MRFD-231601 Multi-mode BS Common
Reference Clock (eNodeB) simultaneously.
Context
The feature GSM and LTE common reference clock enables the GSM and LTE modes to share
the same clock source. Therefore, an external clock source must be configured for one mode
while the other mode is configured to share the opposite mode's clock source.
Scenarios of this feature are as follows:
Common GPS reference clock on the GSM side (GSM USCU)
Common GPS reference clock on the LTE side (LTE USCU)
Common BITS reference clock on the GSM side (GSM USCU)
Common BITS reference clock on the LTE side (LTE USCU)
l Common E1/T1 reference clock
Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)
Common E1/T1 reference clock on the LTE side (LTE UTRP) (non-typical scenario)
l Common Ethernet reference clock
Common Ethernet reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT)
GBSS
(GBTS)
720
Common Ethernet reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) (non-typical scenario)
l Common IP reference clock
Common IP reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT)
Common IP reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) (non-typical scenario)
NOTE
For non-typical scenarios, further descriptions are not provided.
Common GPS reference clock
When a USCU and an external GPS clock are configured for a GSM and LTE dual-mode base
station, GPS clock signals are transmitted through a GPS clock interface. The GSM and LTE
modes obtain the GPS clock signals through a backplane clock channel, as shown in Figure
232-7.
Figure 232-7 Common GPS reference clock

Common BITS reference clock
When a USCU and an external BITS clock are configured for a GSM and LTE dual-mode base
station, BITS clock signals are transmitted through a BITS clock interface. The GSM and LTE
modes obtain the BITS clock signals through a backplane clock channel, as shown in Figure
232-8.
GBSS
(GBTS)
721
Figure 232-8 Common BITS reference clock

Common E1/T1 reference clock
When a common E1/T1 reference clock is used on a GSM and LTE dual-mode base station,
clock signals can be obtained from the E1/T1 port on the side of one mode while the other mode
is configured to share the opposite mode's clock source. Followings are examples of common
E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) and common E1/T1 reference clock on the
LTE side (LMPT), as shown in Figure 232-9.
Figure 232-9 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)

Common Ethernet reference clock
When a common Ethernet reference clock is used on a GSM and LTE dual-mode base station,
one mode obtains Ethernet clock signals from the transmission network through a FE
transmission link while the other mode is configured to share the opposite mode's clock source.
Following is an example of common Ethernet reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT), as shown
in Figure 232-10.
GBSS
(GBTS)
722
Figure 232-10 Common Ethernet reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT)

Common IP reference clock
When the IEEE1588 clock is used on a GSM and LTE dual-mode base station, the common IP
reference clock is shared by two modes. Only one mode needs to be configured with an
IEEE1588 client, and then clock signals can be obtained from the IEEE1588 server by connecting
a FE transmission link to the transmission network. The other mode should be configured to
share the opposite mode's clock source. Following is an example of common IP reference clock
on the LTE side (LMPT), as shown in Figure 232-11.
Figure 232-11 Common IP reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT)

Procedure
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSUSCUBP to set the parameters of
a USCU board.
Set GPS Work Mode to GPS(GPS).
Set Antenna Power Supply Switch to NOPOWER(No Power).
GBSS
(GBTS)
723
b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set Clock Type to
c. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA to set BTS clock
parameters based on the actual situation.
d. Run the BSC6900 MML command SAV BTSCLKPARA to save BTS clock
parameters.
2. Configuration on the eNodeB side
a. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD GPS to add a GPS clock link.
b. Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of
Set Selected Clock Source to GPS(GPS Clock).
a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set an external clock
source. In this step, set Clock Type to EXTSYN_CLK(External Sync clock).
a. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD BITS to add a BITS clock link.
Set Selected Clock Source to BITS(BITS Clock).
l Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the BTS to track the clock
signals received from the BSC6900. In this step, set Clock Type to TRCBSC_CLK
(Trace BSC Clock).
NOTE
Before configuring on the eNodeB side, ensure that the clock source on the GBTS side is E1/
T1 clock link.
a. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD PEERCLK to add a peer reference clock
link.
Set Selected Clock Source to PEERCLK(Peer Clock).
l Common Ethernet reference clock on the LTE side
a. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD SYNCETH to add a synchronous-
Ethernet clock link.
GBSS
(GBTS)
724
Set Selected Clock Source to SYNCETH(SyncEth Clock).
l Common IP reference clock on the LTE side
a. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPCLKLINK to add an IP clock link.
Set Selected Clock Source to IPCLK(IP Clock).
1. Run the eNodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT and the BSC6900 MML command
LST BTSCLK. Check the results.
If... Then...
The clock source information matches
the configuration.
The configuration succeeds.
The clock source information
mismatches the configuration.
The configuration fails.

2. Check whether any alarm is generated.
If... Then...
The Inter-System BBU Board
Parameter Settings Conflict alarm is
reported.
The clock settings conflict between the
GBTS and eNodeB sides, and therefore
the clock setting different from the
configuration fails.

----End
Example
//Common GPS reference clock
SET BTSUSCUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, SRN=0, SN=1, CFGFLAG=YES,
GPSORGLONASS=GPS, ANTENNAPOWERSWITCH=NOPOWER;
SET BTSCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, SRN=0, SN=6, CLKMOD=GPSCLK,
TRCRNGLMT=ENABLE, CALVAL=2222;
SAV BTSCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120;
//Configuration on the eNodeB side
GBSS
(GBTS)
725
ADD GPS: GN=0,SN=4;
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;
//Common BITS reference clock
ADD BITS: SN=4;
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS;
//Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GBTS side
ADD PEERCLK:;
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PEERCLK;
//Common Ethernet reference clock on the GBTS side
ADD SYNCETH: SN=7, PN=0;
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=SYNCETH;
//Common IP reference clock on the eNodeB side
ADD IPCLKLINK: ICPT=PTP, SN=7, CNM=UNICAST, CIP="82.0.1.107",
SIP="82.0.1.128";
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK;
GBSS
(GBTS)
726

GBSS Feature Activation Guide ( (V900R013C00 - 13) (PDF) - en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GBSS Feature Activation Guide ( (V900R013C00 - 13) (PDF) - en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GBSS

You might also like